3 * vim:ts=8:sw=3:sts=3:expandtab:cino=>5n-3f0^-2{2(0W1st0
8 @brief Elementary Widget Library
13 @image html elementary.png
14 @version @PACKAGE_VERSION@
15 @author Carsten Haitzler <raster@@rasterman.com>
16 @author Gustavo Sverzut Barbieri <barbieri@@profusion.mobi>
17 @author Cedric Bail <cedric.bail@@free.fr>
18 @author Vincent Torri <vtorri@@univ-evry.fr>
19 @author Daniel Kolesa <quaker66@@gmail.com>
20 @author Jaime Thomas <avi.thomas@@gmail.com>
21 @author Swisscom - http://www.swisscom.ch/
22 @author Christopher Michael <devilhorns@@comcast.net>
23 @author Marco Trevisan (Treviño) <mail@@3v1n0.net>
24 @author Michael Bouchaud <michael.bouchaud@@gmail.com>
25 @author Jonathan Atton (Watchwolf) <jonathan.atton@@gmail.com>
26 @author Brian Wang <brian.wang.0721@@gmail.com>
27 @author Mike Blumenkrantz (zmike) <mike@@zentific.com>
28 @author Samsung Electronics <tbd>
29 @author Samsung SAIT <tbd>
30 @author Brett Nash <nash@@nash.id.au>
31 @author Bruno Dilly <bdilly@@profusion.mobi>
32 @author Rafael Fonseca <rfonseca@@profusion.mobi>
33 @author Chuneon Park <hermet@@hermet.pe.kr>
34 @author Woohyun Jung <wh0705.jung@@samsung.com>
35 @author Jaehwan Kim <jae.hwan.kim@@samsung.com>
36 @author Wonguk Jeong <wonguk.jeong@@samsung.com>
37 @author Leandro A. F. Pereira <leandro@@profusion.mobi>
38 @author Helen Fornazier <helen.fornazier@@profusion.mobi>
39 @author Gustavo Lima Chaves <glima@@profusion.mobi>
40 @author Fabiano Fidêncio <fidencio@@profusion.mobi>
41 @author Tiago Falcão <tiago@@profusion.mobi>
42 @author Otavio Pontes <otavio@@profusion.mobi>
43 @author Viktor Kojouharov <vkojouharov@@gmail.com>
44 @author Daniel Juyung Seo (SeoZ) <juyung.seo@@samsung.com> <seojuyung2@@gmail.com>
45 @author Sangho Park <sangho.g.park@@samsung.com> <gouache95@@gmail.com>
46 @author Rajeev Ranjan (Rajeev) <rajeev.r@@samsung.com> <rajeev.jnnce@@gmail.com>
47 @author Seunggyun Kim <sgyun.kim@@samsung.com> <tmdrbs@@gmail.com>
48 @author Sohyun Kim <anna1014.kim@@samsung.com> <sohyun.anna@@gmail.com>
49 @author Jihoon Kim <jihoon48.kim@@samsung.com>
50 @author Jeonghyun Yun (arosis) <jh0506.yun@@samsung.com>
51 @author Tom Hacohen <tom@@stosb.com>
52 @author Aharon Hillel <a.hillel@@partner.samsung.com>
53 @author Jonathan Atton (Watchwolf) <jonathan.atton@@gmail.com>
54 @author Shinwoo Kim <kimcinoo@@gmail.com>
55 @author Govindaraju SM <govi.sm@@samsung.com> <govism@@gmail.com>
56 @author Prince Kumar Dubey <prince.dubey@@samsung.com> <prince.dubey@@gmail.com>
59 @section intro What is Elementary?
61 This is a VERY SIMPLE toolkit. It is not meant for writing extensive desktop
62 applications (yet). Small simple ones with simple needs.
64 It is meant to make the programmers work almost brainless but give them lots
67 License: LGPL v2 (see COPYING in the base of Elementary's source). This
68 applies to all files in the source here.
70 Acknowledgements: There is a lot that goes into making a widget set, and
71 they don't happen out of nothing. It's like trying to make everyone
72 everywhere happy, regardless of age, gender, race or nationality - and
73 that is really tough. So thanks to people and organisations behind this,
74 aslisted in the Authors section above.
86 * @brief Elementary's API
91 @ELM_UNIX_DEF@ ELM_UNIX
92 @ELM_WIN32_DEF@ ELM_WIN32
93 @ELM_WINCE_DEF@ ELM_WINCE
94 @ELM_EDBUS_DEF@ ELM_EDBUS
95 @ELM_EFREET_DEF@ ELM_EFREET
96 @ELM_ETHUMB_DEF@ ELM_ETHUMB
97 @ELM_EMAP_DEF@ ELM_EMAP
98 @ELM_DEBUG_DEF@ ELM_DEBUG
99 @ELM_ALLOCA_H_DEF@ ELM_ALLOCA_H
100 @ELM_LIBINTL_H_DEF@ ELM_LIBINTL_H
102 /* Standard headers for standard system calls etc. */
107 #include <sys/types.h>
108 #include <sys/stat.h>
109 #include <sys/time.h>
110 #include <sys/param.h>
123 # ifdef ELM_LIBINTL_H
124 # include <libintl.h>
135 #if defined (ELM_WIN32) || defined (ELM_WINCE)
138 # define alloca _alloca
149 #include <Ecore_Evas.h>
150 #include <Ecore_File.h>
151 #include <Ecore_IMF.h>
152 #include <Ecore_Con.h>
161 # include <Efreet_Mime.h>
162 # include <Efreet_Trash.h>
166 # include <Ethumb_Client.h>
178 # ifdef ELEMENTARY_BUILD
180 # define EAPI __declspec(dllexport)
183 # endif /* ! DLL_EXPORT */
185 # define EAPI __declspec(dllimport)
186 # endif /* ! EFL_EVAS_BUILD */
190 # define EAPI __attribute__ ((visibility("default")))
197 #endif /* ! _WIN32 */
200 /* allow usage from c++ */
205 #define ELM_VERSION_MAJOR @VMAJ@
206 #define ELM_VERSION_MINOR @VMIN@
208 typedef struct _Elm_Version
216 EAPI extern Elm_Version *elm_version;
219 #define ELM_RECTS_INTERSECT(x, y, w, h, xx, yy, ww, hh) (((x) < ((xx) + (ww))) && ((y) < ((yy) + (hh))) && (((x) + (w)) > (xx)) && (((y) + (h)) > (yy)))
220 #define ELM_PI 3.14159265358979323846
223 * @defgroup General General
225 * @brief General Elementary API. Functions that don't relate to
226 * Elementary objects specifically.
228 * Here are documented functions which init/shutdown the library,
229 * that apply to generic Elementary objects, that deal with
230 * configuration, et cetera.
232 * @ref general_functions_example_page "This" example contemplates
233 * some of these functions.
237 * @addtogroup General
242 * Defines couple of standard Evas_Object layers to be used
243 * with evas_object_layer_set().
245 * @note whenever extending with new values, try to keep some padding
246 * to siblings so there is room for further extensions.
248 typedef enum _Elm_Object_Layer
250 ELM_OBJECT_LAYER_BACKGROUND = EVAS_LAYER_MIN + 64, /**< where to place backgrounds */
251 ELM_OBJECT_LAYER_DEFAULT = 0, /**< Evas_Object default layer (and thus for Elementary) */
252 ELM_OBJECT_LAYER_FOCUS = EVAS_LAYER_MAX - 128, /**< where focus object visualization is */
253 ELM_OBJECT_LAYER_TOOLTIP = EVAS_LAYER_MAX - 64, /**< where to show tooltips */
254 ELM_OBJECT_LAYER_CURSOR = EVAS_LAYER_MAX - 32, /**< where to show cursors */
255 ELM_OBJECT_LAYER_LAST /**< last layer known by Elementary */
258 /**************************************************************************/
259 EAPI extern int ELM_ECORE_EVENT_ETHUMB_CONNECT;
262 * Emitted when any Elementary's policy value is changed.
264 EAPI extern int ELM_EVENT_POLICY_CHANGED;
267 * @typedef Elm_Event_Policy_Changed
269 * Data on the event when an Elementary policy has changed
271 typedef struct _Elm_Event_Policy_Changed Elm_Event_Policy_Changed;
274 * @struct _Elm_Event_Policy_Changed
276 * Data on the event when an Elementary policy has changed
278 struct _Elm_Event_Policy_Changed
280 unsigned int policy; /**< the policy identifier */
281 int new_value; /**< value the policy had before the change */
282 int old_value; /**< new value the policy got */
286 * Policy identifiers.
288 typedef enum _Elm_Policy
290 ELM_POLICY_QUIT, /**< under which circunstances the application
291 * should quit automatically. @see
295 } Elm_Policy; /**< Elementary policy identifiers/groups enumeration. @see elm_policy_set()
298 typedef enum _Elm_Policy_Quit
300 ELM_POLICY_QUIT_NONE = 0, /**< never quit the application
302 ELM_POLICY_QUIT_LAST_WINDOW_CLOSED /**< quit when the
304 * window is closed */
305 } Elm_Policy_Quit; /**< Possible values for the #ELM_POLICY_QUIT policy */
307 typedef enum _Elm_Focus_Direction
311 } Elm_Focus_Direction;
313 typedef enum _Elm_Text_Format
315 ELM_TEXT_FORMAT_PLAIN_UTF8,
316 ELM_TEXT_FORMAT_MARKUP_UTF8
320 * Line wrapping types.
322 typedef enum _Elm_Wrap_Type
324 ELM_WRAP_NONE = 0, /**< No wrap - value is zero */
325 ELM_WRAP_CHAR, /**< Char wrap - wrap between characters */
326 ELM_WRAP_WORD, /**< Word wrap - wrap in allowed wrapping points (as defined in the unicode standard) */
327 ELM_WRAP_MIXED, /**< Mixed wrap - Word wrap, and if that fails, char wrap. */
333 * Called back when a widget's tooltip is activated and needs content.
334 * @param data user-data given to elm_object_tooltip_content_cb_set()
335 * @param obj owner widget.
336 * @param tooltip The tooltip object (affix content to this!)
338 typedef Evas_Object *(*Elm_Tooltip_Content_Cb) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *tooltip);
341 * Called back when a widget's item tooltip is activated and needs content.
342 * @param data user-data given to elm_object_tooltip_content_cb_set()
343 * @param obj owner widget.
344 * @param tooltip The tooltip object (affix content to this!)
345 * @param item context dependent item. As an example, if tooltip was
346 * set on Elm_List_Item, then it is of this type.
348 typedef Evas_Object *(*Elm_Tooltip_Item_Content_Cb) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *tooltip, void *item);
350 typedef Eina_Bool (*Elm_Event_Cb) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *src, Evas_Callback_Type type, void *event_info);
352 #ifndef ELM_LIB_QUICKLAUNCH
353 #define ELM_MAIN() int main(int argc, char **argv) {elm_init(argc, argv); return elm_main(argc, argv);} /**< macro to be used after the elm_main() function */
355 #define ELM_MAIN() int main(int argc, char **argv) {return elm_quicklaunch_fallback(argc, argv);} /**< macro to be used after the elm_main() function */
358 /**************************************************************************/
362 * Initialize Elementary
364 * @param[in] argc System's argument count value
365 * @param[in] argv System's pointer to array of argument strings
366 * @return The init counter value.
368 * This function initializes Elementary and increments a counter of
369 * the number of calls to it. It returs the new counter's value.
371 * @warning This call is exported only for use by the @c ELM_MAIN()
372 * macro. There is no need to use this if you use this macro (which
373 * is highly advisable). An elm_main() should contain the entry
374 * point code for your application, having the same prototype as
375 * elm_init(), and @b not being static (putting the @c EAPI symbol
376 * in front of its type declaration is advisable). The @c
377 * ELM_MAIN() call should be placed just after it.
380 * @dontinclude bg_example_01.c
384 * See the full @ref bg_example_01_c "example".
386 * @see elm_shutdown().
389 EAPI int elm_init(int argc, char **argv);
392 * Shut down Elementary
394 * @return The init counter value.
396 * This should be called at the end of your application, just
397 * before it ceases to do any more processing. This will clean up
398 * any permanent resources your application may have allocated via
399 * Elementary that would otherwise persist.
401 * @see elm_init() for an example
405 EAPI int elm_shutdown(void);
408 * Run Elementary's main loop
410 * This call should be issued just after all initialization is
411 * completed. This function will not return until elm_exit() is
412 * called. It will keep looping, running the main
413 * (event/processing) loop for Elementary.
415 * @see elm_init() for an example
419 EAPI void elm_run(void);
422 * Exit Elementary's main loop
424 * If this call is issued, it will flag the main loop to cease
425 * processing and return back to its parent function (usually your
426 * elm_main() function).
428 * @see elm_init() for an example. There, just after a request to
429 * close the window comes, the main loop will be left.
431 * @note By using the #ELM_POLICY_QUIT on your Elementary
432 * applications, you'll this function called automatically for you.
436 EAPI void elm_exit(void);
439 * Provide information in order to make Elementary determine the @b
440 * run time location of the software in question, so other data files
441 * such as images, sound files, executable utilities, libraries,
442 * modules and locale files can be found.
444 * @param mainfunc This is your application's main function name,
445 * whose binary's location is to be found. Providing @c NULL
446 * will make Elementary not to use it
447 * @param dom This will be used as the application's "domain", in the
448 * form of a prefix to any environment variables that may
449 * override prefix detection and the directory name, inside the
450 * standard share or data directories, where the software's
451 * data files will be looked for.
452 * @param checkfile This is an (optional) magic file's path to check
453 * for existence (and it must be located in the data directory,
454 * under the share directory provided above). Its presence will
455 * help determine the prefix found was correct. Pass @c NULL if
456 * the check is not to be done.
458 * This function allows one to re-locate the application somewhere
459 * else after compilation, if the developer wishes for easier
460 * distribution of pre-compiled binaries.
462 * The prefix system is designed to locate where the given software is
463 * installed (under a common path prefix) at run time and then report
464 * specific locations of this prefix and common directories inside
465 * this prefix like the binary, library, data and locale directories,
466 * through the @c elm_app_*_get() family of functions.
468 * Call elm_app_info_set() early on before you change working
469 * directory or anything about @c argv[0], so it gets accurate
472 * It will then try and trace back which file @p mainfunc comes from,
473 * if provided, to determine the application's prefix directory.
475 * The @p dom parameter provides a string prefix to prepend before
476 * environment variables, allowing a fallback to @b specific
477 * environment variables to locate the software. You would most
478 * probably provide a lowercase string there, because it will also
479 * serve as directory domain, explained next. For environment
480 * variables purposes, this string is made uppercase. For example if
481 * @c "myapp" is provided as the prefix, then the program would expect
482 * @c "MYAPP_PREFIX" as a master environment variable to specify the
483 * exact install prefix for the software, or more specific environment
484 * variables like @c "MYAPP_BIN_DIR", @c "MYAPP_LIB_DIR", @c
485 * "MYAPP_DATA_DIR" and @c "MYAPP_LOCALE_DIR", which could be set by
486 * the user or scripts before launching. If not provided (@c NULL),
487 * environment variables will not be used to override compiled-in
488 * defaults or auto detections.
490 * The @p dom string also provides a subdirectory inside the system
491 * shared data directory for data files. For example, if the system
492 * directory is @c /usr/local/share, then this directory name is
493 * appended, creating @c /usr/local/share/myapp, if it @p was @c
494 * "myapp". It is expected the application installs data files in
497 * The @p checkfile is a file name or path of something inside the
498 * share or data directory to be used to test that the prefix
499 * detection worked. For example, your app will install a wallpaper
500 * image as @c /usr/local/share/myapp/images/wallpaper.jpg and so to
501 * check that this worked, provide @c "images/wallpaper.jpg" as the @p
504 * @see elm_app_compile_bin_dir_set()
505 * @see elm_app_compile_lib_dir_set()
506 * @see elm_app_compile_data_dir_set()
507 * @see elm_app_compile_locale_set()
508 * @see elm_app_prefix_dir_get()
509 * @see elm_app_bin_dir_get()
510 * @see elm_app_lib_dir_get()
511 * @see elm_app_data_dir_get()
512 * @see elm_app_locale_dir_get()
514 EAPI void elm_app_info_set(void *mainfunc, const char *dom, const char *checkfile);
517 * Provide information on the @b fallback application's binaries
518 * directory, on scenarios where they get overriden by
519 * elm_app_info_set().
521 * @param dir The path to the default binaries directory (compile time
524 * @note Elementary will as well use this path to determine actual
525 * names of binaries' directory paths, maybe changing it to be @c
526 * something/local/bin instead of @c something/bin, only, for
529 * @warning You should call this function @b before
530 * elm_app_info_set().
532 EAPI void elm_app_compile_bin_dir_set(const char *dir);
535 * Provide information on the @b fallback application's libraries
536 * directory, on scenarios where they get overriden by
537 * elm_app_info_set().
539 * @param dir The path to the default libraries directory (compile
542 * @note Elementary will as well use this path to determine actual
543 * names of libraries' directory paths, maybe changing it to be @c
544 * something/lib32 or @c something/lib64 instead of @c something/lib,
547 * @warning You should call this function @b before
548 * elm_app_info_set().
550 EAPI void elm_app_compile_lib_dir_set(const char *dir);
553 * Provide information on the @b fallback application's data
554 * directory, on scenarios where they get overriden by
555 * elm_app_info_set().
557 * @param dir The path to the default data directory (compile time
560 * @note Elementary will as well use this path to determine actual
561 * names of data directory paths, maybe changing it to be @c
562 * something/local/share instead of @c something/share, only, for
565 * @warning You should call this function @b before
566 * elm_app_info_set().
568 EAPI void elm_app_compile_data_dir_set(const char *dir);
571 * Provide information on the @b fallback application's locale
572 * directory, on scenarios where they get overriden by
573 * elm_app_info_set().
575 * @param dir The path to the default locale directory (compile time
578 * @warning You should call this function @b before
579 * elm_app_info_set().
581 EAPI void elm_app_compile_locale_set(const char *dir);
584 * Retrieve the application's run time prefix directory, as set by
585 * elm_app_info_set() and the way (environment) the application was
588 * @return The directory prefix the application is actually using
590 EAPI const char *elm_app_prefix_dir_get(void);
593 * Retrieve the application's run time binaries prefix directory, as
594 * set by elm_app_info_set() and the way (environment) the application
597 * @return The binaries directory prefix the application is actually
600 EAPI const char *elm_app_bin_dir_get(void);
603 * Retrieve the application's run time libraries prefix directory, as
604 * set by elm_app_info_set() and the way (environment) the application
607 * @return The libraries directory prefix the application is actually
610 EAPI const char *elm_app_lib_dir_get(void);
613 * Retrieve the application's run time data prefix directory, as
614 * set by elm_app_info_set() and the way (environment) the application
617 * @return The data directory prefix the application is actually
620 EAPI const char *elm_app_data_dir_get(void);
623 * Retrieve the application's run time locale prefix directory, as
624 * set by elm_app_info_set() and the way (environment) the application
627 * @return The locale directory prefix the application is actually
630 EAPI const char *elm_app_locale_dir_get(void);
632 EAPI void elm_quicklaunch_mode_set(Eina_Bool ql_on);
633 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_quicklaunch_mode_get(void);
634 EAPI int elm_quicklaunch_init(int argc, char **argv);
635 EAPI int elm_quicklaunch_sub_init(int argc, char **argv);
636 EAPI int elm_quicklaunch_sub_shutdown(void);
637 EAPI int elm_quicklaunch_shutdown(void);
638 EAPI void elm_quicklaunch_seed(void);
639 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_quicklaunch_prepare(int argc, char **argv);
640 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_quicklaunch_fork(int argc, char **argv, char *cwd, void (postfork_func) (void *data), void *postfork_data);
641 EAPI void elm_quicklaunch_cleanup(void);
642 EAPI int elm_quicklaunch_fallback(int argc, char **argv);
643 EAPI char *elm_quicklaunch_exe_path_get(const char *exe);
645 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_need_efreet(void);
646 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_need_e_dbus(void);
647 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_need_ethumb(void);
650 * Set a new policy's value (for a given policy group/identifier).
652 * @param policy policy identifier, as in @ref Elm_Policy.
653 * @param value policy value, which depends on the identifier
655 * @return @c EINA_TRUE on success or @c EINA_FALSE, on error.
657 * Elementary policies define applications' behavior,
658 * somehow. These behaviors are divided in policy groups (see
659 * #Elm_Policy enumeration). This call will emit the Ecore event
660 * #ELM_EVENT_POLICY_CHANGED, which can be hooked at with
661 * handlers. An #Elm_Event_Policy_Changed struct will be passed,
664 * @note Currently, we have only one policy identifier/group
665 * (#ELM_POLICY_QUIT), which has two possible values.
669 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_policy_set(unsigned int policy, int value);
672 * Gets the policy value set for given policy identifier.
674 * @param policy policy identifier, as in #Elm_Policy.
675 * @return The currently set policy value, for that
676 * identifier. Will be @c 0 if @p policy passed is invalid.
680 EAPI int elm_policy_get(unsigned int policy);
683 * Set a label of an object
685 * @param obj The Elementary object
686 * @param item The label id to set (NULL for the default label)
687 * @param label The new text of the label
689 * @note Elementary objects may have many labels (e.g. Action Slider)
693 EAPI void elm_object_text_part_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *item, const char *label);
695 #define elm_object_text_set(obj, label) elm_object_text_part_set((obj), NULL, (label))
698 * Get a label of an object
700 * @param obj The Elementary object
701 * @param item The label id to get (NULL for the default label)
702 * @return text of the label or
705 * @note Elementary objects may have many labels (e.g. Action Slider)
709 EAPI const char *elm_object_text_part_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *item);
711 #define elm_object_text_get(obj) elm_object_text_part_get((obj), NULL)
714 * Set a content of an object
716 * @param obj The Elementary object
717 * @param item The content id to set (NULL for the default content)
718 * @param content The new content of the object
720 * @note Elementary objects may have many contents
724 EAPI void elm_object_content_part_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *item, Evas_Object *content);
726 #define elm_object_content_set(obj, content) elm_object_content_part_set((obj), NULL, (content))
729 * Get a content of an object
731 * @param obj The Elementary object
732 * @param item The content id to get (NULL for the default content)
733 * @return content of the object or
736 * @note Elementary objects may have many contents
740 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_object_content_part_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *item);
742 #define elm_object_content_get(obj) elm_object_content_part_get((obj), NULL)
745 * Unset a content of an object
747 * @param obj The Elementary object
748 * @param item The content id to unset (NULL for the default content)
750 * @note Elementary objects may have many contents
754 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_object_content_part_unset(Evas_Object *obj, const char *item);
756 #define elm_object_content_unset(obj) elm_object_content_part_unset((obj), NULL)
762 EAPI void elm_all_flush(void);
763 EAPI int elm_cache_flush_interval_get(void);
764 EAPI void elm_cache_flush_interval_set(int size);
765 EAPI void elm_cache_flush_interval_all_set(int size);
766 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_cache_flush_enabled_get(void);
767 EAPI void elm_cache_flush_enabled_set(Eina_Bool enabled);
768 EAPI void elm_cache_flush_enabled_all_set(Eina_Bool enabled);
769 EAPI int elm_font_cache_get(void);
770 EAPI void elm_font_cache_set(int size);
771 EAPI void elm_font_cache_all_set(int size);
772 EAPI int elm_image_cache_get(void);
773 EAPI void elm_image_cache_set(int size);
774 EAPI void elm_image_cache_all_set(int size);
775 EAPI int elm_edje_file_cache_get(void);
776 EAPI void elm_edje_file_cache_set(int size);
777 EAPI void elm_edje_file_cache_all_set(int size);
778 EAPI int elm_edje_collection_cache_get(void);
779 EAPI void elm_edje_collection_cache_set(int size);
780 EAPI void elm_edje_collection_cache_all_set(int size);
783 * @defgroup Scaling Selective Widget Scaling
785 * Different widgets can be scaled independently. These functions
786 * allow you to manipulate this scaling on a per-widget basis. The
787 * object and all its children get their scaling factors multiplied
788 * by the scale factor set. This is multiplicative, in that if a
789 * child also has a scale size set it is in turn multiplied by its
790 * parent's scale size. @c 1.0 means “don't scale”, @c 2.0 is
791 * double size, @c 0.5 is half, etc.
793 * @ref general_functions_example_page "This" example contemplates
794 * some of these functions.
798 * Set the scaling factor for a given Elementary object
800 * @param obj The Elementary to operate on
801 * @param scale Scale factor (from @c 0.0 up, with @c 1.0 meaning
806 EAPI void elm_object_scale_set(Evas_Object *obj, double scale) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
809 * Get the scaling factor for a given Elementary object
811 * @param obj The object
812 * @return The scaling factor set by elm_object_scale_set()
816 EAPI double elm_object_scale_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
817 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_mirrored_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
818 EAPI void elm_object_mirrored_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool mirrored) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
819 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_mirrored_automatic_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
820 EAPI void elm_object_mirrored_automatic_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool automatic) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
822 * Set the style to use by a widget
824 * Sets the style name that will define the appearance of a widget. Styles
825 * vary from widget to widget and may also be defined by other themes
826 * by means of extensions and overlays.
828 * @param obj The Elementary widget to style
829 * @param style The style name to use
831 * @see elm_theme_extension_add()
832 * @see elm_theme_overlay_add()
836 EAPI void elm_object_style_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
838 * Get the style used by the widget
840 * This gets the style being used for that widget. Note that the string
841 * pointer is only valid as longas the object is valid and the style doesn't
844 * @param obj The Elementary widget to query for its style
845 * @return The style name used
847 * @see elm_object_style_set()
851 EAPI const char *elm_object_style_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
854 * @defgroup Styles Styles
856 * Widgets can have different styles of look. These generic API's
857 * set styles of widgets, if they support them (and if the theme(s)
860 * @ref general_functions_example_page "This" example contemplates
861 * some of these functions.
865 * Set the disabled state of an Elementary object.
867 * @param obj The Elementary object to operate on
868 * @param disabled The state to put in in: @c EINA_TRUE for
869 * disabled, @c EINA_FALSE for enabled
871 * Elementary objects can be @b disabled, in which state they won't
872 * receive input and, in general, will be themed differently from
873 * their normal state, usually greyed out. Useful for contexts
874 * where you don't want your users to interact with some of the
875 * parts of you interface.
877 * This sets the state for the widget, either disabling it or
882 EAPI void elm_object_disabled_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
885 * Get the disabled state of an Elementary object.
887 * @param obj The Elementary object to operate on
888 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if the widget is disabled, @c EINA_FALSE
889 * if it's enabled (or on errors)
891 * This gets the state of the widget, which might be enabled or disabled.
895 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_disabled_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
898 * @defgroup WidgetNavigation Widget Tree Navigation.
900 * How to check if an Evas Object is an Elementary widget? How to
901 * get the first elementary widget that is parent of the given
902 * object? These are all covered in widget tree navigation.
904 * @ref general_functions_example_page "This" example contemplates
905 * some of these functions.
908 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_widget_check(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
911 * Get the first parent of the given object that is an Elementary
914 * @param obj the Elementary object to query parent from.
915 * @return the parent object that is an Elementary widget, or @c
916 * NULL, if it was not found.
918 * Use this to query for an object's parent widget.
920 * @note Most of Elementary users wouldn't be mixing non-Elementary
921 * smart objects in the objects tree of an application, as this is
922 * an advanced usage of Elementary with Evas. So, except for the
923 * application's window, which is the root of that tree, all other
924 * objects would have valid Elementary widget parents.
926 * @ingroup WidgetNavigation
928 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_object_parent_widget_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
929 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_object_top_widget_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
930 EAPI const char *elm_object_widget_type_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
932 EAPI double elm_scale_get(void);
933 EAPI void elm_scale_set(double scale);
934 EAPI void elm_scale_all_set(double scale);
936 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_mirrored_get(void);
937 EAPI void elm_mirrored_set(Eina_Bool mirrored);
939 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_config_save(void);
940 EAPI void elm_config_reload(void);
942 EAPI const char *elm_profile_current_get(void);
943 EAPI const char *elm_profile_dir_get(const char *profile, Eina_Bool is_user);
944 EAPI void elm_profile_dir_free(const char *p_dir);
945 EAPI Eina_List *elm_profile_list_get(void);
946 EAPI void elm_profile_list_free(Eina_List *l);
947 EAPI void elm_profile_set(const char *profile);
948 EAPI void elm_profile_all_set(const char *profile);
950 EAPI const char *elm_engine_current_get(void);
951 EAPI void elm_engine_set(const char *engine);
953 typedef struct _Elm_Text_Class
959 typedef struct _Elm_Font_Overlay
961 const char *text_class;
966 typedef struct _Elm_Font_Properties
970 } Elm_Font_Properties;
972 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_text_classes_list_get(void);
973 EAPI void elm_text_classes_list_free(const Eina_List *list);
975 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_font_overlay_list_get(void);
976 EAPI void elm_font_overlay_set(const char *text_class, const char *font, Evas_Font_Size size);
977 EAPI void elm_font_overlay_unset(const char *text_class);
978 EAPI void elm_font_overlay_apply(void);
979 EAPI void elm_font_overlay_all_apply(void);
981 EAPI Elm_Font_Properties *elm_font_properties_get(const char *font) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
982 EAPI void elm_font_properties_free(Elm_Font_Properties *efp) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
983 EAPI const char *elm_font_fontconfig_name_get(const char *name, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
984 EAPI void elm_font_fontconfig_name_free(const char *name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
985 EAPI Eina_Hash *elm_font_available_hash_add(Eina_List *list);
986 EAPI void elm_font_available_hash_del(Eina_Hash *hash);
989 * @defgroup Fingers Fingers
991 * Elementary is designed to be finger-friendly for touchscreens,
992 * and so in addition to scaling for display resolution, it can
993 * also scale based on finger "resolution" (or size). You can then
994 * customize the granularity of the areas meant to receive clicks
997 * Different profiles may have pre-set values for finger sizes.
999 * @ref general_functions_example_page "This" example contemplates
1000 * some of these functions.
1004 * Get the configured "finger size"
1006 * @return The finger size
1008 * This gets the globally configured finger size, <b>in pixels</b>
1012 EAPI Evas_Coord elm_finger_size_get(void);
1013 EAPI void elm_finger_size_set(Evas_Coord size);
1014 EAPI void elm_finger_size_all_set(Evas_Coord size);
1017 * @defgroup Focus Focus
1019 * An Elementary application has, at all times, one (and only one)
1020 * @b focused object. This is what determines where the input
1021 * events go to within the application's window. Also, focused
1022 * objects can be decorated differently, in order to signal to the
1023 * user where the input is, at a given moment.
1025 * Elementary applications also have the concept of <b>focus
1026 * chain</b>: one can cycle through all the windows' focusable
1027 * objects by input (tab key) or programmatically. The default
1028 * focus chain for an application is the one define by the order in
1029 * which the widgets where added in code. One will cycle through
1030 * top level widgets, and, for each one containg sub-objects, cycle
1031 * through them all, before returning to the level
1032 * above. Elementary also allows one to set @b custom focus chains
1033 * for their applications.
1035 * Besides the focused decoration a widget may exhibit, when it
1036 * gets focus, Elementary has a @b global focus highlight object
1037 * that can be enabled for a window. If one chooses to do so, this
1038 * extra highlight effect will surround the current focused object,
1041 * @note Some Elementary widgets are @b unfocusable, after
1042 * creation, by their very nature: they are not meant to be
1043 * interacted with input events, but are there just for visual
1046 * @ref general_functions_example_page "This" example contemplates
1047 * some of these functions.
1050 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_focus_highlight_enabled_get(void);
1051 EAPI void elm_focus_highlight_enabled_set(Eina_Bool enable);
1052 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_focus_highlight_animate_get(void);
1053 EAPI void elm_focus_highlight_animate_set(Eina_Bool animate);
1056 * Get the whether an Elementary object has the focus or not.
1058 * @param obj The Elementary object to get the information from
1059 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if the object is focused, @c EINA_FALSE if
1060 * not (and on errors).
1062 * @see elm_object_focus()
1066 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_focus_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1069 * Make a given Elementary object the focused one.
1071 * @param obj The Elementary object to make focused.
1073 * @note This object, if it can handle focus, will take the focus
1074 * away from the one who had it previously and will, for now on, be
1075 * the one receiving input events.
1077 * @see elm_object_focus_get()
1081 EAPI void elm_object_focus(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1084 * Remove the focus from an Elementary object
1086 * @param obj The Elementary to take focus from
1088 * This removes the focus from @p obj, passing it back to the
1089 * previous element in the focus chain list.
1091 * @see elm_object_focus() and elm_object_focus_custom_chain_get()
1095 EAPI void elm_object_unfocus(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1098 * Set the ability for an Element object to be focused
1100 * @param obj The Elementary object to operate on
1101 * @param enable @c EINA_TRUE if the object can be focused, @c
1102 * EINA_FALSE if not (and on errors)
1104 * This sets whether the object @p obj is able to take focus or
1105 * not. Unfocusable objects do nothing when programmatically
1106 * focused, being the nearest focusable parent object the one
1107 * really getting focus. Also, when they receive mouse input, they
1108 * will get the event, but not take away the focus from where it
1113 EAPI void elm_object_focus_allow_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool enable) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1116 * Get whether an Elementary object is focusable or not
1118 * @param obj The Elementary object to operate on
1119 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if the object is allowed to be focused, @c
1120 * EINA_FALSE if not (and on errors)
1122 * @note Objects which are meant to be interacted with by input
1123 * events are created able to be focused, by default. All the
1128 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_focus_allow_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1130 EAPI void elm_object_focus_custom_chain_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_List *objs) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1131 EAPI void elm_object_focus_custom_chain_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1132 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_object_focus_custom_chain_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1133 EAPI void elm_object_focus_custom_chain_append(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *child, Evas_Object *relative_child) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
1134 EAPI void elm_object_focus_custom_chain_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *child, Evas_Object *relative_child) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
1135 EAPI void elm_object_focus_cycle(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Focus_Direction dir) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1136 EAPI void elm_object_focus_direction_go(Evas_Object *obj, int x, int y) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1139 * Make the elementary object and its children to be unfocusable (or focusable).
1141 * @param obj The Elementary object to operate on
1142 * @param tree_unfocusable @c EINA_TRUE for unfocusable,
1143 * @c EINA_FALSE for focusable.
1145 * This sets whether the object @p obj and its children objects
1146 * are able to take focus or not. If the tree is set as unfocusable,
1147 * newest focused object which is not in this tree will get focus.
1148 * This API can be helpful for an object to be deleted.
1149 * When an object will be deleted soon, it and its children may not
1150 * want to get focus (by focus reverting or by other focus controls).
1151 * Then, just use this API before deleting.
1153 * @see elm_object_tree_unfocusable_get()
1157 EAPI void elm_object_tree_unfocusable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool tree_unfocusable); EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1160 * Get whether an Elementary object and its children are unfocusable or not.
1162 * @param obj The Elementary object to get the information from
1163 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if the tree is unfocussable,
1164 * @c EINA_FALSE if not (and on errors).
1166 * @see elm_object_tree_unfocusable_set()
1170 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_tree_unfocusable_get(const Evas_Object *obj); EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1172 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scroll_bounce_enabled_get(void);
1173 EAPI void elm_scroll_bounce_enabled_set(Eina_Bool enabled);
1174 EAPI void elm_scroll_bounce_enabled_all_set(Eina_Bool enabled);
1175 EAPI double elm_scroll_bounce_friction_get(void);
1176 EAPI void elm_scroll_bounce_friction_set(double friction);
1177 EAPI void elm_scroll_bounce_friction_all_set(double friction);
1178 EAPI double elm_scroll_page_scroll_friction_get(void);
1179 EAPI void elm_scroll_page_scroll_friction_set(double friction);
1180 EAPI void elm_scroll_page_scroll_friction_all_set(double friction);
1181 EAPI double elm_scroll_bring_in_scroll_friction_get(void);
1182 EAPI void elm_scroll_bring_in_scroll_friction_set(double friction);
1183 EAPI void elm_scroll_bring_in_scroll_friction_all_set(double friction);
1184 EAPI double elm_scroll_zoom_friction_get(void);
1185 EAPI void elm_scroll_zoom_friction_set(double friction);
1186 EAPI void elm_scroll_zoom_friction_all_set(double friction);
1187 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scroll_thumbscroll_enabled_get(void);
1188 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_enabled_set(Eina_Bool enabled);
1189 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_enabled_all_set(Eina_Bool enabled);
1190 EAPI unsigned int elm_scroll_thumbscroll_threshold_get(void);
1191 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_threshold_set(unsigned int threshold);
1192 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_threshold_all_set(unsigned int threshold);
1193 EAPI double elm_scroll_thumbscroll_momentum_threshold_get(void);
1194 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_momentum_threshold_set(double threshold);
1195 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_momentum_threshold_all_set(double threshold);
1196 EAPI double elm_scroll_thumbscroll_friction_get(void);
1197 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_friction_set(double friction);
1198 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_friction_all_set(double friction);
1199 EAPI double elm_scroll_thumbscroll_border_friction_get(void);
1200 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_border_friction_set(double friction);
1201 EAPI void elm_scroll_thumbscroll_border_friction_all_set(double friction);
1203 EAPI void elm_object_scroll_hold_push(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1204 EAPI void elm_object_scroll_hold_pop(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1205 EAPI void elm_object_scroll_freeze_push(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1206 EAPI void elm_object_scroll_freeze_pop(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1207 EAPI void elm_object_scroll_lock_x_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool lock) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1208 EAPI void elm_object_scroll_lock_y_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool lock) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1209 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_scroll_lock_x_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1210 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_scroll_lock_y_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1212 EAPI void elm_object_signal_emit(Evas_Object *obj, const char *emission, const char *source) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1213 EAPI void elm_object_signal_callback_add(Evas_Object *obj, const char *emission, const char *source, Edje_Signal_Cb func, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 4);
1214 EAPI void *elm_object_signal_callback_del(Evas_Object *obj, const char *emission, const char *source, Edje_Signal_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 4);
1216 EAPI void elm_object_event_callback_add(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Event_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
1217 EAPI void *elm_object_event_callback_del(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Event_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
1220 * Adjust size of an element for finger usage.
1222 * @param times_w How many fingers should fit horizontally
1223 * @param w Pointer to the width size to adjust
1224 * @param times_h How many fingers should fit vertically
1225 * @param h Pointer to the height size to adjust
1227 * This takes width and height sizes (in pixels) as input and a
1228 * size multiple (which is how many fingers you want to place
1229 * within the area, being "finger" the size set by
1230 * elm_finger_size_set()), and adjusts the size to be large enough
1231 * to accommodate the resulting size -- if it doesn't already
1232 * accommodate it. On return the @p w and @p h sizes pointed to by
1233 * these parameters will be modified, on those conditions.
1235 * @note This is kind of a low level Elementary call, most useful
1236 * on size evaluation times for widgets. An external user wouldn't
1237 * be calling, most of the time.
1241 EAPI void elm_coords_finger_size_adjust(int times_w, Evas_Coord *w, int times_h, Evas_Coord *h);
1243 EAPI double elm_longpress_timeout_get(void);
1244 EAPI void elm_longpress_timeout_set(double longpress_timeout);
1247 * don't use it unless you are sure
1249 EAPI void elm_object_tree_dump(const Evas_Object *top);
1250 EAPI void elm_object_tree_dot_dump(const Evas_Object *top, const char *file);
1255 * @defgroup Theme Theme
1257 * Elementary uses Edje to theme its widgets, naturally. But for the most
1258 * part this is hidden behind a simpler interface that lets the user set
1259 * extensions and choose the style of widgets in a much easier way.
1261 * Instead of thinking in terms of paths to Edje files and their groups
1262 * each time you want to change the appearance of a widget, Elementary
1263 * works so you can add any theme file with extensions or replace the
1264 * main theme at one point in the application, and then just set the style
1265 * of widgets with elm_object_style_set() and related functions. Elementary
1266 * will then look in its list of themes for a matching group and apply it,
1267 * and when the theme changes midway through the application, all widgets
1268 * will be updated accordingly.
1270 * There are three concepts you need to know to understand how Elementary
1271 * theming works: default theme, extensions and overlays.
1273 * Default theme, obviously enough, is the one that provides the default
1274 * look of all widgets. End users can change the theme used by Elementary
1275 * by setting the @c ELM_THEME environment variable before running an
1276 * application, or globally for all programs using the @c elementary_config
1277 * utility. Applications can change the default theme using elm_theme_set(),
1278 * but this can go against the user wishes, so it's not an adviced practice.
1280 * Ideally, applications should find everything they need in the already
1281 * provided theme, but there may be occasions when that's not enough and
1282 * custom styles are required to correctly express the idea. For this
1283 * cases, Elementary has extensions.
1285 * Extensions allow the application developer to write styles of its own
1286 * to apply to some widgets. This requires knowledge of how each widget
1287 * is themed, as extensions will always replace the entire group used by
1288 * the widget, so important signals and parts need to be there for the
1289 * object to behave properly (see documentation of Edje for details).
1290 * Once the theme for the extension is done, the application needs to add
1291 * it to the list of themes Elementary will look into, using
1292 * elm_theme_extension_add(), and set the style of the desired widgets as
1293 * he would normally with elm_object_style_set().
1295 * Overlays, on the other hand, can replace the look of all widgets by
1296 * overriding the default style. Like extensions, it's up to the application
1297 * developer to write the theme for the widgets it wants, the difference
1298 * being that when looking for the theme, Elementary will check first the
1299 * list of overlays, then the set theme and lastly the list of extensions,
1300 * so with overlays it's possible to replace the default view and every
1301 * widget will be affected. This is very much alike to setting the whole
1302 * theme for the application and will probably clash with the end user
1303 * options, not to mention the risk of ending up with not matching styles
1304 * across the program. Unless there's a very special reason to use them,
1305 * overlays should be avoided for the resons exposed before.
1307 * All these theme lists are handled by ::Elm_Theme instances. Elementary
1308 * keeps one default internally and every function that receives one of
1309 * these can be called with NULL to refer to this default (except for
1310 * elm_theme_free()). It's possible to create a new instance of a
1311 * ::Elm_Theme to set other theme for a specific widget (and all of its
1312 * children), but this is as discouraged, if not even more so, than using
1313 * overlays. Don't use this unless you really know what you are doing.
1315 * But to be less negative about things, you can look at the following
1317 * @li @ref theme_example_01 "Using extensions"
1318 * @li @ref theme_example_02 "Using overlays"
1323 * @typedef Elm_Theme
1325 * Opaque handler for the list of themes Elementary looks for when
1326 * rendering widgets.
1328 * Stay out of this unless you really know what you are doing. For most
1329 * cases, sticking to the default is all a developer needs.
1331 typedef struct _Elm_Theme Elm_Theme;
1334 * Create a new specific theme
1336 * This creates an empty specific theme that only uses the default theme. A
1337 * specific theme has its own private set of extensions and overlays too
1338 * (which are empty by default). Specific themes do not fall back to themes
1339 * of parent objects. They are not intended for this use. Use styles, overlays
1340 * and extensions when needed, but avoid specific themes unless there is no
1341 * other way (example: you want to have a preview of a new theme you are
1342 * selecting in a "theme selector" window. The preview is inside a scroller
1343 * and should display what the theme you selected will look like, but not
1344 * actually apply it yet. The child of the scroller will have a specific
1345 * theme set to show this preview before the user decides to apply it to all
1348 EAPI Elm_Theme *elm_theme_new(void);
1350 * Free a specific theme
1352 * @param th The theme to free
1354 * This frees a theme created with elm_theme_new().
1356 EAPI void elm_theme_free(Elm_Theme *th);
1358 * Copy the theme fom the source to the destination theme
1360 * @param th The source theme to copy from
1361 * @param thdst The destination theme to copy data to
1363 * This makes a one-time static copy of all the theme config, extensions
1364 * and overlays from @p th to @p thdst. If @p th references a theme, then
1365 * @p thdst is also set to reference it, with all the theme settings,
1366 * overlays and extensions that @p th had.
1368 EAPI void elm_theme_copy(Elm_Theme *th, Elm_Theme *thdst);
1370 * Tell the source theme to reference the ref theme
1372 * @param th The theme that will do the referencing
1373 * @param thref The theme that is the reference source
1375 * This clears @p th to be empty and then sets it to refer to @p thref
1376 * so @p th acts as an override to @p thref, but where its overrides
1377 * don't apply, it will fall through to @pthref for configuration.
1379 EAPI void elm_theme_ref_set(Elm_Theme *th, Elm_Theme *thref);
1381 * Return the theme referred to
1383 * @param th The theme to get the reference from
1384 * @return The referenced theme handle
1386 * This gets the theme set as the reference theme by elm_theme_ref_set().
1387 * If no theme is set as a reference, NULL is returned.
1389 EAPI Elm_Theme *elm_theme_ref_get(Elm_Theme *th);
1391 * Return the default theme
1393 * @return The default theme handle
1395 * This returns the internal default theme setup handle that all widgets
1396 * use implicitly unless a specific theme is set. This is also often use
1397 * as a shorthand of NULL.
1399 EAPI Elm_Theme *elm_theme_default_get(void);
1401 * Prepends a theme overlay to the list of overlays
1403 * @param th The theme to add to, or if NULL, the default theme
1404 * @param item The Edje file path to be used
1406 * Use this if your application needs to provide some custom overlay theme
1407 * (An Edje file that replaces some default styles of widgets) where adding
1408 * new styles, or changing system theme configuration is not possible. Do
1409 * NOT use this instead of a proper system theme configuration. Use proper
1410 * configuration files, profiles, environment variables etc. to set a theme
1411 * so that the theme can be altered by simple confiugration by a user. Using
1412 * this call to achieve that effect is abusing the API and will create lots
1415 * @see elm_theme_extension_add()
1417 EAPI void elm_theme_overlay_add(Elm_Theme *th, const char *item);
1419 * Delete a theme overlay from the list of overlays
1421 * @param th The theme to delete from, or if NULL, the default theme
1422 * @param item The name of the theme overlay
1424 * @see elm_theme_overlay_add()
1426 EAPI void elm_theme_overlay_del(Elm_Theme *th, const char *item);
1428 * Appends a theme extension to the list of extensions.
1430 * @param th The theme to add to, or if NULL, the default theme
1431 * @param item The Edje file path to be used
1433 * This is intended when an application needs more styles of widgets or new
1434 * widget themes that the default does not provide (or may not provide). The
1435 * application has "extended" usage by coming up with new custom style names
1436 * for widgets for specific uses, but as these are not "standard", they are
1437 * not guaranteed to be provided by a default theme. This means the
1438 * application is required to provide these extra elements itself in specific
1439 * Edje files. This call adds one of those Edje files to the theme search
1440 * path to be search after the default theme. The use of this call is
1441 * encouraged when default styles do not meet the needs of the application.
1442 * Use this call instead of elm_theme_overlay_add() for almost all cases.
1444 * @see elm_object_style_set()
1446 EAPI void elm_theme_extension_add(Elm_Theme *th, const char *item);
1448 * Deletes a theme extension from the list of extensions.
1450 * @param th The theme to delete from, or if NULL, the default theme
1451 * @param item The name of the theme extension
1453 * @see elm_theme_extension_add()
1455 EAPI void elm_theme_extension_del(Elm_Theme *th, const char *item);
1457 * Set the theme search order for the given theme
1459 * @param th The theme to set the search order, or if NULL, the default theme
1460 * @param theme Theme search string
1462 * This sets the search string for the theme in path-notation from first
1463 * theme to search, to last, delimited by the : character. Example:
1465 * "shiny:/path/to/file.edj:default"
1467 * See the ELM_THEME environment variable for more information.
1469 * @see elm_theme_get()
1470 * @see elm_theme_list_get()
1472 EAPI void elm_theme_set(Elm_Theme *th, const char *theme);
1474 * Return the theme search order
1476 * @param th The theme to get the search order, or if NULL, the default theme
1477 * @return The internal search order path
1479 * This function returns a colon separated string of theme elements as
1480 * returned by elm_theme_list_get().
1482 * @see elm_theme_set()
1483 * @see elm_theme_list_get()
1485 EAPI const char *elm_theme_get(Elm_Theme *th);
1487 * Return a list of theme elements to be used in a theme.
1489 * @param th Theme to get the list of theme elements from.
1490 * @return The internal list of theme elements
1492 * This returns the internal list of theme elements (will only be valid as
1493 * long as the theme is not modified by elm_theme_set() or theme is not
1494 * freed by elm_theme_free(). This is a list of strings which must not be
1495 * altered as they are also internal. If @p th is NULL, then the default
1496 * theme element list is returned.
1498 * A theme element can consist of a full or relative path to a .edj file,
1499 * or a name, without extension, for a theme to be searched in the known
1500 * theme paths for Elemementary.
1502 * @see elm_theme_set()
1503 * @see elm_theme_get()
1505 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_theme_list_get(const Elm_Theme *th);
1507 * Return the full patrh for a theme element
1509 * @param f The theme element name
1510 * @param in_search_path Pointer to a boolean to indicate if item is in the search path or not
1511 * @return The full path to the file found.
1513 * This returns a string you should free with free() on success, NULL on
1514 * failure. This will search for the given theme element, and if it is a
1515 * full or relative path element or a simple searchable name. The returned
1516 * path is the full path to the file, if searched, and the file exists, or it
1517 * is simply the full path given in the element or a resolved path if
1518 * relative to home. The @p in_search_path boolean pointed to is set to
1519 * EINA_TRUE if the file was a searchable file andis in the search path,
1520 * and EINA_FALSE otherwise.
1522 EAPI char *elm_theme_list_item_path_get(const char *f, Eina_Bool *in_search_path);
1524 * Flush the current theme.
1526 * @param th Theme to flush
1528 * This flushes caches that let elementary know where to find theme elements
1529 * in the given theme. If @p th is NULL, then the default theme is flushed.
1530 * Call this function if source theme data has changed in such a way as to
1531 * make any caches Elementary kept invalid.
1533 EAPI void elm_theme_flush(Elm_Theme *th);
1535 * This flushes all themes (default and specific ones).
1537 * This will flush all themes in the current application context, by calling
1538 * elm_theme_flush() on each of them.
1540 EAPI void elm_theme_full_flush(void);
1542 * Set the theme for all elementary using applications on the current display
1544 * @param theme The name of the theme to use. Format same as the ELM_THEME
1545 * environment variable.
1547 EAPI void elm_theme_all_set(const char *theme);
1549 * Return a list of theme elements in the theme search path
1551 * @return A list of strings that are the theme element names.
1553 * This lists all available theme files in the standard Elementary search path
1554 * for theme elements, and returns them in alphabetical order as theme
1555 * element names in a list of strings. Free this with
1556 * elm_theme_name_available_list_free() when you are done with the list.
1558 EAPI Eina_List *elm_theme_name_available_list_new(void);
1560 * Free the list returned by elm_theme_name_available_list_new()
1562 * This frees the list of themes returned by
1563 * elm_theme_name_available_list_new(). Once freed the list should no longer
1564 * be used. a new list mys be created.
1566 EAPI void elm_theme_name_available_list_free(Eina_List *list);
1568 * Set a specific theme to be used for this object and its children
1570 * @param obj The object to set the theme on
1571 * @param th The theme to set
1573 * This sets a specific theme that will be used for the given object and any
1574 * child objects it has. If @p th is NULL then the theme to be used is
1575 * cleared and the object will inherit its theme from its parent (which
1576 * ultimately will use the default theme if no specific themes are set).
1578 * Use special themes with great care as this will annoy users and make
1579 * configuration difficult. Avoid any custom themes at all if it can be
1582 EAPI void elm_object_theme_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Theme *th) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1584 * Get the specific theme to be used
1586 * @param obj The object to get the specific theme from
1587 * @return The specifc theme set.
1589 * This will return a specific theme set, or NULL if no specific theme is
1590 * set on that object. It will not return inherited themes from parents, only
1591 * the specific theme set for that specific object. See elm_object_theme_set()
1592 * for more information.
1594 EAPI Elm_Theme *elm_object_theme_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1600 typedef enum _Elm_Win_Type
1603 ELM_WIN_DIALOG_BASIC,
1610 ELM_WIN_DROPDOWN_MENU,
1613 ELM_WIN_NOTIFICATION,
1616 ELM_WIN_INLINED_IMAGE,
1619 typedef enum _Elm_Win_Keyboard_Mode
1621 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_UNKNOWN,
1622 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_OFF,
1623 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_ON,
1624 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_ALPHA,
1625 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_NUMERIC,
1626 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_PIN,
1627 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_PHONE_NUMBER,
1628 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_HEX,
1629 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_TERMINAL,
1630 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_PASSWORD,
1631 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_IP,
1632 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_HOST,
1633 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_FILE,
1634 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_URL,
1635 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_KEYPAD,
1636 ELM_WIN_KEYBOARD_J2ME
1637 } Elm_Win_Keyboard_Mode;
1639 typedef enum _Elm_Illume_Command
1641 ELM_ILLUME_COMMAND_FOCUS_BACK,
1642 ELM_ILLUME_COMMAND_FOCUS_FORWARD,
1643 ELM_ILLUME_COMMAND_FOCUS_HOME,
1644 ELM_ILLUME_COMMAND_CLOSE
1645 } Elm_Illume_Command;
1647 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_win_add(Evas_Object *parent, const char *name, Elm_Win_Type type);
1648 EAPI void elm_win_resize_object_add(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1649 EAPI void elm_win_resize_object_del(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1650 EAPI void elm_win_title_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *title) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1651 EAPI const char *elm_win_title_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1652 EAPI void elm_win_autodel_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool autodel) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1653 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_autodel_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1654 EAPI void elm_win_activate(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1655 EAPI void elm_win_lower(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1656 EAPI void elm_win_raise(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1657 EAPI void elm_win_borderless_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool borderless) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1658 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_borderless_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1659 EAPI void elm_win_shaped_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool shaped) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1660 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_shaped_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1661 EAPI void elm_win_alpha_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool alpha) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1662 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_transparent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1663 EAPI void elm_win_transparent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool transparent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1664 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_alpha_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1665 EAPI void elm_win_override_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool override) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1666 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_override_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1667 EAPI void elm_win_fullscreen_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool fullscreen) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1668 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_fullscreen_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1669 EAPI void elm_win_maximized_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool maximized) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1670 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_maximized_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1671 EAPI void elm_win_iconified_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool iconified) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1672 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_iconified_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1673 EAPI void elm_win_layer_set(Evas_Object *obj, int layer) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1674 EAPI int elm_win_layer_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1675 EAPI void elm_win_rotation_set(Evas_Object *obj, int rotation) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1676 EAPI void elm_win_rotation_with_resize_set(Evas_Object *obj, int rotation) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1677 EAPI int elm_win_rotation_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1678 EAPI void elm_win_sticky_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool sticky) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1679 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_sticky_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1680 EAPI void elm_win_conformant_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool conformant) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1681 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_conformant_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1682 EAPI void elm_win_quickpanel_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool quickpanel) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1683 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_quickpanel_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1684 EAPI void elm_win_quickpanel_priority_major_set(Evas_Object *obj, int priority) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1685 EAPI int elm_win_quickpanel_priority_major_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1686 EAPI void elm_win_quickpanel_priority_minor_set(Evas_Object *obj, int priority) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1687 EAPI int elm_win_quickpanel_priority_minor_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1688 EAPI void elm_win_quickpanel_zone_set(Evas_Object *obj, int zone) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1689 EAPI int elm_win_quickpanel_zone_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1690 EAPI void elm_win_prop_focus_skip_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool skip) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1691 EAPI void elm_win_illume_command_send(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Illume_Command command, void *params) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1692 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_win_inlined_image_object_get(Evas_Object *obj);
1693 EAPI void elm_win_focus_highlight_enabled_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool enabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1694 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_focus_highlight_enabled_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1695 EAPI void elm_win_focus_highlight_style_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1696 EAPI const char *elm_win_focus_highlight_style_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1698 * ecore_x_icccm_hints_set -> accepts_focus (add to ecore_evas)
1699 * ecore_x_icccm_hints_set -> window_group (add to ecore_evas)
1700 * ecore_x_icccm_size_pos_hints_set -> request_pos (add to ecore_evas)
1701 * ecore_x_icccm_client_leader_set -> l (add to ecore_evas)
1702 * ecore_x_icccm_window_role_set -> role (add to ecore_evas)
1703 * ecore_x_icccm_transient_for_set -> forwin (add to ecore_evas)
1704 * ecore_x_netwm_window_type_set -> type (add to ecore_evas)
1706 * (add to ecore_x) set netwm argb icon! (add to ecore_evas)
1707 * (blank mouse, private mouse obj, defaultmouse)
1710 EAPI void elm_win_keyboard_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Win_Keyboard_Mode mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1711 EAPI Elm_Win_Keyboard_Mode elm_win_keyboard_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1712 EAPI void elm_win_keyboard_win_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool is_keyboard) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1713 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_win_keyboard_win_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1715 EAPI void elm_win_screen_position_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *x, int *y) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1718 * @defgroup Inwin Inwin
1720 * @image html img/widget/inwin/preview-00.png
1721 * @image latex img/widget/inwin/preview-00.eps
1722 * @image html img/widget/inwin/preview-01.png
1723 * @image latex img/widget/inwin/preview-01.eps
1724 * @image html img/widget/inwin/preview-02.png
1725 * @image latex img/widget/inwin/preview-02.eps
1727 * An inwin is a window inside a window that is useful for a quick popup.
1728 * It does not hover.
1730 * It works by creating an object that will occupy the entire window, so it
1731 * must be created using an @ref Win "elm_win" as parent only. The inwin
1732 * object can be hidden or restacked below every other object if it's
1733 * needed to show what's behind it without destroying it. If this is done,
1734 * the elm_win_inwin_activate() function can be used to bring it back to
1735 * full visibility again.
1737 * There are three styles available in the default theme. These are:
1738 * @li default: The inwin is sized to take over most of the window it's
1740 * @li minimal: The size of the inwin will be the minimum necessary to show
1742 * @li minimal_vertical: Horizontally, the inwin takes as much space as
1743 * possible, but it's sized vertically the most it needs to fit its\
1746 * Some examples of Inwin can be found in the following:
1747 * @li @ref inwin_example_01
1752 * Adds an inwin to the current window
1754 * The @p obj used as parent @b MUST be an @ref Win "Elementary Window".
1755 * Never call this function with anything other than the top-most window
1756 * as its parameter, unless you are fond of undefined behavior.
1758 * After creating the object, the widget will set itself as resize object
1759 * for the window with elm_win_resize_object_add(), so when shown it will
1760 * appear to cover almost the entire window (how much of it depends on its
1761 * content and the style used). It must not be added into other container
1762 * objects and it needs not be moved or resized manually.
1764 * @param parent The parent object
1765 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
1767 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_win_inwin_add(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1769 * Activates an inwin object, ensuring its visibility
1771 * This function will make sure that the inwin @p obj is completely visible
1772 * by calling evas_object_show() and evas_object_raise() on it, to bring it
1773 * to the front. It also sets the keyboard focus to it, which will be passed
1776 * The object's theme will also receive the signal "elm,action,show" with
1779 * @param obj The inwin to activate
1781 EAPI void elm_win_inwin_activate(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1783 * Set the content of an inwin object.
1785 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
1786 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
1787 * elm_win_inwin_content_unset() function.
1789 * @param obj The inwin object
1790 * @param content The object to set as content
1792 EAPI void elm_win_inwin_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1794 * Get the content of an inwin object.
1796 * Return the content object which is set for this widget.
1798 * The returned object is valid as long as the inwin is still alive and no
1799 * other content is set on it. Deleting the object will notify the inwin
1800 * about it and this one will be left empty.
1802 * If you need to remove an inwin's content to be reused somewhere else,
1803 * see elm_win_inwin_content_unset().
1805 * @param obj The inwin object
1806 * @return The content that is being used
1808 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_win_inwin_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1810 * Unset the content of an inwin object.
1812 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this widget.
1814 * @param obj The inwin object
1815 * @return The content that was being used
1817 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_win_inwin_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1821 /* X specific calls - won't work on non-x engines (return 0) */
1822 EAPI Ecore_X_Window elm_win_xwindow_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1823 /* smart callbacks called:
1824 * "delete,request" - the user requested to delete the window
1825 * "focus,in" - window got focus
1826 * "focus,out" - window lost focus
1827 * "moved" - window that holds the canvas was moved
1833 * @image html img/icon/bg/preview-00.png
1834 * @image latex img/icon/bg/preview-00.png
1836 * @brief Background object, used for setting a solid color, image or Edje
1837 * group as background to a window or any container object.
1839 * The bg object is used for setting a solid background to a window or
1840 * packing into any container object. It works just like an image, but has
1841 * some properties useful to a background, like setting it to tiled,
1842 * centered, scaled or stretched.
1844 * Here is some sample code using it:
1845 * @li @ref bg_01_example_page
1846 * @li @ref bg_02_example_page
1847 * @li @ref bg_03_example_page
1851 typedef enum _Elm_Bg_Option
1853 ELM_BG_OPTION_CENTER, /**< center the background */
1854 ELM_BG_OPTION_SCALE, /**< scale the background retaining aspect ratio */
1855 ELM_BG_OPTION_STRETCH, /**< stretch the background to fill */
1856 ELM_BG_OPTION_TILE /**< tile background at its original size */
1860 * Add a new background to the parent
1862 * @param parent The parent object
1863 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
1867 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_bg_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1870 * Set the file (image or edje) used for the background
1872 * @param obj The bg object
1873 * @param file The file path
1874 * @param group Optional key (group in Edje) within the file
1876 * This sets the image file used in the background object. The image (or edje)
1877 * will be stretched (retaining aspect if its an image file) to completely fill
1878 * the bg object. This may mean some parts are not visible.
1880 * @note Once the image of @p obj is set, a previously set one will be deleted,
1881 * even if @p file is NULL.
1885 EAPI void elm_bg_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file, const char *group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1888 * Get the file (image or edje) used for the background
1890 * @param obj The bg object
1891 * @param file The file path
1892 * @param group Optional key (group in Edje) within the file
1896 EAPI void elm_bg_file_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **file, const char **group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1899 * Set the option used for the background image
1901 * @param obj The bg object
1902 * @param option The desired background option (TILE, SCALE)
1904 * This sets the option used for manipulating the display of the background
1905 * image. The image can be tiled or scaled.
1909 EAPI void elm_bg_option_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Bg_Option option) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1912 * Get the option used for the background image
1914 * @param obj The bg object
1915 * @return The desired background option (CENTER, SCALE, STRETCH or TILE)
1919 EAPI Elm_Bg_Option elm_bg_option_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1921 * Set the option used for the background color
1923 * @param obj The bg object
1928 * This sets the color used for the background rectangle. Its range goes
1933 EAPI void elm_bg_color_set(Evas_Object *obj, int r, int g, int b) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1935 * Get the option used for the background color
1937 * @param obj The bg object
1944 EAPI void elm_bg_color_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *r, int *g, int *b) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1947 * Set the overlay object used for the background object.
1949 * @param obj The bg object
1950 * @param overlay The overlay object
1952 * This provides a way for elm_bg to have an 'overlay' that will be on top
1953 * of the bg. Once the over object is set, a previously set one will be
1954 * deleted, even if you set the new one to NULL. If you want to keep that
1955 * old content object, use the elm_bg_overlay_unset() function.
1960 EAPI void elm_bg_overlay_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *overlay) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1963 * Get the overlay object used for the background object.
1965 * @param obj The bg object
1966 * @return The content that is being used
1968 * Return the content object which is set for this widget
1972 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_bg_overlay_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1975 * Get the overlay object used for the background object.
1977 * @param obj The bg object
1978 * @return The content that was being used
1980 * Unparent and return the overlay object which was set for this widget
1984 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_bg_overlay_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
1987 * Set the size of the pixmap representation of the image.
1989 * This option just makes sense if an image is going to be set in the bg.
1991 * @param obj The bg object
1992 * @param w The new width of the image pixmap representation.
1993 * @param h The new height of the image pixmap representation.
1995 * This function sets a new size for pixmap representation of the given bg
1996 * image. It allows the image to be loaded already in the specified size,
1997 * reducing the memory usage and load time when loading a big image with load
1998 * size set to a smaller size.
2000 * NOTE: this is just a hint, the real size of the pixmap may differ
2001 * depending on the type of image being loaded, being bigger than requested.
2005 EAPI void elm_bg_load_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord w, Evas_Coord h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2006 /* smart callbacks called:
2010 * @defgroup Icon Icon
2012 * @image html img/icon/button/preview-00.png
2013 * @image latex img/icon/button/preview-00.png
2015 * An object that provides standard icon images (delete, edit, arrows, etc.)
2016 * or a custom file (PNG, JPG, EDJE, etc.) used for an icon.
2018 * The icon image requested can be in the elementary theme, or in the
2019 * freedesktop.org paths. It's possible to set the order of preference from
2020 * where the image will be used.
2022 * This API is very similar to @ref Image, but with ready to use images.
2024 * Default images provided by the theme are described below.
2026 * The first list contains icons that were first intended to be used in
2027 * toolbars, but can be used in many other places too:
2043 * Now some icons that were designed to be used in menus (but again, you can
2044 * use them anywhere else):
2049 * @li menu/arrow_down
2050 * @li menu/arrow_left
2051 * @li menu/arrow_right
2060 * And here we have some media player specific icons:
2061 * @li media_player/forward
2062 * @li media_player/info
2063 * @li media_player/next
2064 * @li media_player/pause
2065 * @li media_player/play
2066 * @li media_player/prev
2067 * @li media_player/rewind
2068 * @li media_player/stop
2070 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
2072 * "clicked" - This is called when a user has clicked the icon
2074 * An example of usage for this API follows:
2075 * @li @ref tutorial_icon
2083 typedef enum _Elm_Icon_Type
2090 * @enum _Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order
2091 * @typedef Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order
2093 * Lookup order used by elm_icon_standard_set(). Should look for icons in the
2094 * theme, FDO paths, or both?
2098 typedef enum _Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order
2100 ELM_ICON_LOOKUP_FDO_THEME, /**< icon look up order: freedesktop, theme */
2101 ELM_ICON_LOOKUP_THEME_FDO, /**< icon look up order: theme, freedesktop */
2102 ELM_ICON_LOOKUP_FDO, /**< icon look up order: freedesktop */
2103 ELM_ICON_LOOKUP_THEME /**< icon look up order: theme */
2104 } Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order;
2107 * Add a new icon object to the parent.
2109 * @param parent The parent object
2110 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
2112 * @see elm_icon_file_set()
2116 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_icon_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2118 * Set the file that will be used as icon.
2120 * @param obj The icon object
2121 * @param file The path to file that will be used as icon image
2122 * @param group The group that the icon belongs to in edje file
2124 * @return (@c EINA_TRUE = success, @c EINA_FALSE = error)
2126 * @note The icon image set by this function can be changed by
2127 * elm_icon_standard_set().
2129 * @see elm_icon_file_get()
2133 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_icon_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file, const char *group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
2135 * Set a location in memory to be used as an icon
2137 * @param obj The icon object
2138 * @param img The binary data that will be used as an image
2139 * @param size The size of binary data @p img
2140 * @param format Optional format of @p img to pass to the image loader
2141 * @param key Optional key of @p img to pass to the image loader (eg. if @p img is an edje file)
2143 * @return (@c EINA_TRUE = success, @c EINA_FALSE = error)
2145 * @note The icon image set by this function can be changed by
2146 * elm_icon_standard_set().
2150 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_icon_memfile_set(Evas_Object *obj, const void *img, size_t size, const char *format, const char *key); EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
2152 * Get the file that will be used as icon.
2154 * @param obj The icon object
2155 * @param file The path to file that will be used as icon icon image
2156 * @param group The group that the icon belongs to in edje file
2158 * @see elm_icon_file_set()
2162 EAPI void elm_icon_file_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **file, const char **group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2163 EAPI void elm_icon_thumb_set(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *file, const char *group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
2165 * Set the icon by icon standards names.
2167 * @param obj The icon object
2168 * @param name The icon name
2170 * @return (@c EINA_TRUE = success, @c EINA_FALSE = error)
2172 * For example, freedesktop.org defines standard icon names such as "home",
2173 * "network", etc. There can be different icon sets to match those icon
2174 * keys. The @p name given as parameter is one of these "keys", and will be
2175 * used to look in the freedesktop.org paths and elementary theme. One can
2176 * change the lookup order with elm_icon_order_lookup_set().
2178 * If name is not found in any of the expected locations and it is the
2179 * absolute path of an image file, this image will be used.
2181 * @note The icon image set by this function can be changed by
2182 * elm_icon_file_set().
2184 * @see elm_icon_standard_get()
2185 * @see elm_icon_file_set()
2189 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_icon_standard_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2191 * Get the icon name set by icon standard names.
2193 * @param obj The icon object
2194 * @return The icon name
2196 * If the icon image was set using elm_icon_file_set() instead of
2197 * elm_icon_standard_set(), then this function will return @c NULL.
2199 * @see elm_icon_standard_set()
2203 EAPI const char *elm_icon_standard_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2205 * Set the smooth effect for an icon object.
2207 * @param obj The icon object
2208 * @param smooth @c EINA_TRUE if smooth scaling should be used, @c EINA_FALSE
2209 * otherwise. Default is @c EINA_TRUE.
2211 * Set the scaling algorithm to be used when scaling the icon image. Smooth
2212 * scaling provides a better resulting image, but is slower.
2214 * The smooth scaling should be disabled when making animations that change
2215 * the icon size, since they will be faster. Animations that don't require
2216 * resizing of the icon can keep the smooth scaling enabled (even if the icon
2217 * is already scaled, since the scaled icon image will be cached).
2219 * @see elm_icon_smooth_get()
2223 EAPI void elm_icon_smooth_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool smooth) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2225 * Get the smooth effect for an icon object.
2227 * @param obj The icon object
2228 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if smooth scaling is enabled, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise.
2230 * @see elm_icon_smooth_set()
2234 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_icon_smooth_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2236 * Disable scaling of this object.
2238 * @param obj The icon object.
2239 * @param no_scale @c EINA_TRUE if the object is not scalable, @c EINA_FALSE
2240 * otherwise. Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
2242 * This function disables scaling of the icon object through the function
2243 * elm_object_scale_set(). However, this does not affect the object
2244 * size/resize in any way. For that effect, take a look at
2245 * elm_icon_scale_set().
2247 * @see elm_icon_no_scale_get()
2248 * @see elm_icon_scale_set()
2249 * @see elm_object_scale_set()
2253 EAPI void elm_icon_no_scale_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool no_scale) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2255 * Get whether scaling is disabled on the object.
2257 * @param obj The icon object
2258 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if scaling is disabled, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
2260 * @see elm_icon_no_scale_set()
2264 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_icon_no_scale_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2266 * Set if the object is (up/down) resizeable.
2268 * @param obj The icon object
2269 * @param scale_up A bool to set if the object is resizeable up. Default is
2271 * @param scale_down A bool to set if the object is resizeable down. Default
2274 * This function limits the icon object resize ability. If @p scale_up is set to
2275 * @c EINA_FALSE, the object can't have its height or width resized to a value
2276 * higher than the original icon size. Same is valid for @p scale_down.
2278 * @see elm_icon_scale_get()
2282 EAPI void elm_icon_scale_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool scale_up, Eina_Bool scale_down) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2284 * Get if the object is (up/down) resizeable.
2286 * @param obj The icon object
2287 * @param scale_up A bool to set if the object is resizeable up
2288 * @param scale_down A bool to set if the object is resizeable down
2290 * @see elm_icon_scale_set()
2294 EAPI void elm_icon_scale_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *scale_up, Eina_Bool *scale_down) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2296 * Get the object's image size
2298 * @param obj The icon object
2299 * @param w A pointer to store the width in
2300 * @param h A pointer to store the height in
2304 EAPI void elm_icon_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *w, int *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2306 * Set if the icon fill the entire object area.
2308 * @param obj The icon object
2309 * @param fill_outside @c EINA_TRUE if the object is filled outside,
2310 * @c EINA_FALSE otherwise. Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
2312 * When the icon object is resized to a different aspect ratio from the
2313 * original icon image, the icon image will still keep its aspect. This flag
2314 * tells how the image should fill the object's area. They are: keep the
2315 * entire icon inside the limits of height and width of the object (@p
2316 * fill_outside is @c EINA_FALSE) or let the extra width or height go outside
2317 * of the object, and the icon will fill the entire object (@p fill_outside
2320 * @note Unlike @ref Image, there's no option in icon to set the aspect ratio
2321 * retain property to false. Thus, the icon image will always keep its
2322 * original aspect ratio.
2324 * @see elm_icon_fill_outside_get()
2325 * @see elm_image_fill_outside_set()
2329 EAPI void elm_icon_fill_outside_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool fill_outside) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2331 * Get if the object is filled outside.
2333 * @param obj The icon object
2334 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if the object is filled outside, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise.
2336 * @see elm_icon_fill_outside_set()
2340 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_icon_fill_outside_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2342 * Set the prescale size for the icon.
2344 * @param obj The icon object
2345 * @param size The prescale size. This value is used for both width and
2348 * This function sets a new size for pixmap representation of the given
2349 * icon. It allows the icon to be loaded already in the specified size,
2350 * reducing the memory usage and load time when loading a big icon with load
2351 * size set to a smaller size.
2353 * It's equivalent to the elm_bg_load_size_set() function for bg.
2355 * @note this is just a hint, the real size of the pixmap may differ
2356 * depending on the type of icon being loaded, being bigger than requested.
2358 * @see elm_icon_prescale_get()
2359 * @see elm_bg_load_size_set()
2363 EAPI void elm_icon_prescale_set(Evas_Object *obj, int size) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2365 * Get the prescale size for the icon.
2367 * @param obj The icon object
2368 * @return The prescale size
2370 * @see elm_icon_prescale_set()
2374 EAPI int elm_icon_prescale_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2376 * Sets the icon lookup order used by elm_icon_standard_set().
2378 * @param obj The icon object
2379 * @param order The icon lookup order (can be one of
2380 * ELM_ICON_LOOKUP_FDO_THEME, ELM_ICON_LOOKUP_THEME_FDO, ELM_ICON_LOOKUP_FDO
2381 * or ELM_ICON_LOOKUP_THEME)
2383 * @see elm_icon_order_lookup_get()
2384 * @see Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order
2388 EAPI void elm_icon_order_lookup_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order order) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2390 * Gets the icon lookup order.
2392 * @param obj The icon object
2393 * @return The icon lookup order
2395 * @see elm_icon_order_lookup_set()
2396 * @see Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order
2400 EAPI Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order elm_icon_order_lookup_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2407 * @defgroup Image Image
2409 * @image html img/image/button/preview-00.png
2410 * @image latex img/image/button/preview-00.png
2412 * An object that allows one to load an image file to it. It can be used
2413 * anywhere like any other elementary widget.
2415 * This widget provides most of the functionality provided from @ref Bg or @ref
2416 * Icon, but with a slightly different API (use the one that fits better your
2419 * The features not provided by those two other image widgets are:
2420 * @li allowing to get the basic @c Evas_Object with elm_image_object_get();
2421 * @li change the object orientation with elm_image_orient_set();
2422 * @li and turning the image editable with elm_image_editable_set().
2424 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
2426 * @li @c "clicked" - This is called when a user has clicked the image
2428 * An example of usage for this API follows:
2429 * @li @ref tutorial_image
2438 * @enum _Elm_Image_Orient
2439 * @typedef Elm_Image_Orient
2441 * Possible orientation options for elm_image_orient_set().
2443 * @image html elm_image_orient_set.png
2444 * @image latex elm_image_orient_set.eps width=\textwidth
2448 typedef enum _Elm_Image_Orient
2450 ELM_IMAGE_ORIENT_NONE, /**< no orientation change */
2451 ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_90_CW, /**< rotate 90 degrees clockwise */
2452 ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_180_CW, /**< rotate 180 degrees clockwise */
2453 ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_90_CCW, /**< rotate 90 degrees counter-clockwise (i.e. 270 degrees clockwise) */
2454 ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_HORIZONTAL, /**< flip image horizontally */
2455 ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_VERTICAL, /**< flip image vertically */
2456 ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_TRANSPOSE, /**< flip the image along the y = (side - x) line*/
2457 ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_TRANSVERSE /**< flip the image along the y = x line */
2461 * Add a new image to the parent.
2463 * @param parent The parent object
2464 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
2466 * @see elm_image_file_set()
2470 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_image_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2472 * Set the file that will be used as image.
2474 * @param obj The image object
2475 * @param file The path to file that will be used as image
2476 * @param group The group that the image belongs in edje file (if it's an
2479 * @return (@c EINA_TRUE = success, @c EINA_FALSE = error)
2481 * @see elm_image_file_get()
2485 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_image_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file, const char *group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
2487 * Get the file that will be used as image.
2489 * @param obj The image object
2490 * @param file The path to file
2491 * @param group The group that the image belongs in edje file
2493 * @see elm_image_file_set()
2497 EAPI void elm_image_file_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **file, const char **group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2499 * Set the smooth effect for an image.
2501 * @param obj The image object
2502 * @param smooth @c EINA_TRUE if smooth scaling should be used, @c EINA_FALSE
2503 * otherwise. Default is @c EINA_TRUE.
2505 * Set the scaling algorithm to be used when scaling the image. Smooth
2506 * scaling provides a better resulting image, but is slower.
2508 * The smooth scaling should be disabled when making animations that change
2509 * the image size, since it will be faster. Animations that don't require
2510 * resizing of the image can keep the smooth scaling enabled (even if the
2511 * image is already scaled, since the scaled image will be cached).
2513 * @see elm_image_smooth_get()
2517 EAPI void elm_image_smooth_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool smooth) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2519 * Get the smooth effect for an image.
2521 * @param obj The image object
2522 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if smooth scaling is enabled, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise.
2524 * @see elm_image_smooth_get()
2528 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_image_smooth_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2530 * Gets the current size of the image.
2532 * @param obj The image object.
2533 * @param w Pointer to store width, or NULL.
2534 * @param h Pointer to store height, or NULL.
2536 * This is the real size of the image, not the size of the object.
2538 * On error, neither w or h will be written.
2542 EAPI void elm_image_object_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *w, int *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2544 * Disable scaling of this object.
2546 * @param obj The image object.
2547 * @param no_scale @c EINA_TRUE if the object is not scalable, @c EINA_FALSE
2548 * otherwise. Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
2550 * This function disables scaling of the elm_image widget through the
2551 * function elm_object_scale_set(). However, this does not affect the widget
2552 * size/resize in any way. For that effect, take a look at
2553 * elm_image_scale_set().
2555 * @see elm_image_no_scale_get()
2556 * @see elm_image_scale_set()
2557 * @see elm_object_scale_set()
2561 EAPI void elm_image_no_scale_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool no_scale) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2563 * Get whether scaling is disabled on the object.
2565 * @param obj The image object
2566 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if scaling is disabled, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
2568 * @see elm_image_no_scale_set()
2572 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_image_no_scale_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2574 * Set if the object is (up/down) resizeable.
2576 * @param obj The image object
2577 * @param scale_up A bool to set if the object is resizeable up. Default is
2579 * @param scale_down A bool to set if the object is resizeable down. Default
2582 * This function limits the image resize ability. If @p scale_up is set to
2583 * @c EINA_FALSE, the object can't have its height or width resized to a value
2584 * higher than the original image size. Same is valid for @p scale_down.
2586 * @see elm_image_scale_get()
2590 EAPI void elm_image_scale_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool scale_up, Eina_Bool scale_down) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2592 * Get if the object is (up/down) resizeable.
2594 * @param obj The image object
2595 * @param scale_up A bool to set if the object is resizeable up
2596 * @param scale_down A bool to set if the object is resizeable down
2598 * @see elm_image_scale_set()
2602 EAPI void elm_image_scale_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *scale_up, Eina_Bool *scale_down) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2604 * Set if the image fill the entire object area when keeping the aspect ratio.
2606 * @param obj The image object
2607 * @param fill_outside @c EINA_TRUE if the object is filled outside,
2608 * @c EINA_FALSE otherwise. Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
2610 * When the image should keep its aspect ratio even if resized to another
2611 * aspect ratio, there are two possibilities to resize it: keep the entire
2612 * image inside the limits of height and width of the object (@p fill_outside
2613 * is @c EINA_FALSE) or let the extra width or height go outside of the object,
2614 * and the image will fill the entire object (@p fill_outside is @c EINA_TRUE).
2616 * @note This option will have no effect if
2617 * elm_image_aspect_ratio_retained_set() is set to @c EINA_FALSE.
2619 * @see elm_image_fill_outside_get()
2620 * @see elm_image_aspect_ratio_retained_set()
2624 EAPI void elm_image_fill_outside_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool fill_outside) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2626 * Get if the object is filled outside
2628 * @param obj The image object
2629 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if the object is filled outside, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise.
2631 * @see elm_image_fill_outside_set()
2635 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_image_fill_outside_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2637 * Set the prescale size for the image
2639 * @param obj The image object
2640 * @param size The prescale size. This value is used for both width and
2643 * This function sets a new size for pixmap representation of the given
2644 * image. It allows the image to be loaded already in the specified size,
2645 * reducing the memory usage and load time when loading a big image with load
2646 * size set to a smaller size.
2648 * It's equivalent to the elm_bg_load_size_set() function for bg.
2650 * @note this is just a hint, the real size of the pixmap may differ
2651 * depending on the type of image being loaded, being bigger than requested.
2653 * @see elm_image_prescale_get()
2654 * @see elm_bg_load_size_set()
2658 EAPI void elm_image_prescale_set(Evas_Object *obj, int size) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2660 * Get the prescale size for the image
2662 * @param obj The image object
2663 * @return The prescale size
2665 * @see elm_image_prescale_set()
2669 EAPI int elm_image_prescale_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2671 * Set the image orientation.
2673 * @param obj The image object
2674 * @param orient The image orientation
2675 * (one of #ELM_IMAGE_ORIENT_NONE, #ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_90_CW,
2676 * #ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_180_CW, #ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_90_CCW,
2677 * #ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_HORIZONTAL, #ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_VERTICAL,
2678 * #ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_TRANSPOSE, #ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_TRANSVERSE).
2679 * Default is #ELM_IMAGE_ORIENT_NONE.
2681 * This function allows to rotate or flip the given image.
2683 * @see elm_image_orient_get()
2684 * @see @ref Elm_Image_Orient
2688 EAPI void elm_image_orient_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Image_Orient orient) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2690 * Get the image orientation.
2692 * @param obj The image object
2693 * @return The image orientation
2694 * (one of #ELM_IMAGE_ORIENT_NONE, #ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_90_CW,
2695 * #ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_180_CW, #ELM_IMAGE_ROTATE_90_CCW,
2696 * #ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_HORIZONTAL, #ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_VERTICAL,
2697 * #ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_TRANSPOSE, #ELM_IMAGE_FLIP_TRANSVERSE)
2699 * @see elm_image_orient_set()
2700 * @see @ref Elm_Image_Orient
2704 EAPI Elm_Image_Orient elm_image_orient_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2706 * Make the image 'editable'.
2708 * @param obj Image object.
2709 * @param set Turn on or off editability. Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
2711 * This means the image is a valid drag target for drag and drop, and can be
2712 * cut or pasted too.
2716 EAPI void elm_image_editable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool set) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2718 * Make the image 'editable'.
2720 * @param obj Image object.
2721 * @return Editability.
2723 * This means the image is a valid drag target for drag and drop, and can be
2724 * cut or pasted too.
2728 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_image_editable_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2730 * Get the basic Evas_Image object from this object (widget).
2732 * @param obj The image object to get the inlined image from
2733 * @return The inlined image object, or NULL if none exists
2735 * This function allows one to get the underlying @c Evas_Object of type
2736 * Image from this elementary widget. It can be useful to do things like get
2737 * the pixel data, save the image to a file, etc.
2739 * @note Be careful to not manipulate it, as it is under control of
2744 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_image_object_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2746 * Set whether the original aspect ratio of the image should be kept on resize.
2748 * @param obj The image object.
2749 * @param retained @c EINA_TRUE if the image should retain the aspect,
2750 * @c EINA_FALSE otherwise.
2752 * The original aspect ratio (width / height) of the image is usually
2753 * distorted to match the object's size. Enabling this option will retain
2754 * this original aspect, and the way that the image is fit into the object's
2755 * area depends on the option set by elm_image_fill_outside_set().
2757 * @see elm_image_aspect_ratio_retained_get()
2758 * @see elm_image_fill_outside_set()
2762 EAPI void elm_image_aspect_ratio_retained_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool retained) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2764 * Get if the object retains the original aspect ratio.
2766 * @param obj The image object.
2767 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if the object keeps the original aspect, @c EINA_FALSE
2772 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_image_aspect_ratio_retained_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2774 /* smart callbacks called:
2775 * "clicked" - the user clicked the image
2783 typedef void (*Elm_GLView_Func_Cb)(Evas_Object *obj);
2785 typedef enum _Elm_GLView_Mode
2787 ELM_GLVIEW_ALPHA = 1,
2788 ELM_GLVIEW_DEPTH = 2,
2789 ELM_GLVIEW_STENCIL = 4
2793 * Defines a policy for the glview resizing.
2795 * @note Default is ELM_GLVIEW_RESIZE_POLICY_RECREATE
2797 typedef enum _Elm_GLView_Resize_Policy
2799 ELM_GLVIEW_RESIZE_POLICY_RECREATE = 1, /**< Resize the internal surface along with the image */
2800 ELM_GLVIEW_RESIZE_POLICY_SCALE = 2 /**< Only reize the internal image and not the surface */
2801 } Elm_GLView_Resize_Policy;
2803 typedef enum _Elm_GLView_Render_Policy
2805 ELM_GLVIEW_RENDER_POLICY_ON_DEMAND = 1, /**< Render only when there is a need for redrawing */
2806 ELM_GLVIEW_RENDER_POLICY_ALWAYS = 2 /**< Render always even when it is not visible */
2807 } Elm_GLView_Render_Policy;
2810 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_glview_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2811 EAPI void elm_glview_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord width, Evas_Coord height) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2812 EAPI void elm_glview_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *width, Evas_Coord *height) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2813 EAPI Evas_GL_API *elm_glview_gl_api_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2814 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_glview_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_GLView_Mode mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2815 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_glview_resize_policy_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_GLView_Resize_Policy policy) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2816 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_glview_render_policy_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_GLView_Render_Policy policy) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2817 EAPI void elm_glview_init_func_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_GLView_Func_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2818 EAPI void elm_glview_del_func_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_GLView_Func_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2819 EAPI void elm_glview_resize_func_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_GLView_Func_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2820 EAPI void elm_glview_render_func_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_GLView_Func_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2821 EAPI void elm_glview_changed_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2827 * @image html img/widget/box/preview-00.png
2828 * @image latex img/widget/box/preview-00.eps width=\textwidth
2830 * @image html img/box.png
2831 * @image latex img/box.eps width=\textwidth
2833 * A box arranges objects in a linear fashion, governed by a layout function
2834 * that defines the details of this arrangement.
2836 * By default, the box will use an internal function to set the layout to
2837 * a single row, either vertical or horizontal. This layout is affected
2838 * by a number of parameters, such as the homogeneous flag set by
2839 * elm_box_homogeneous_set(), the values given by elm_box_padding_set() and
2840 * elm_box_align_set() and the hints set to each object in the box.
2842 * For this default layout, it's possible to change the orientation with
2843 * elm_box_horizontal_set(). The box will start in the vertical orientation,
2844 * placing its elements ordered from top to bottom. When horizontal is set,
2845 * the order will go from left to right. If the box is set to be
2846 * homogeneous, every object in it will be assigned the same space, that
2847 * of the largest object. Padding can be used to set some spacing between
2848 * the cell given to each object. The alignment of the box, set with
2849 * elm_box_align_set(), determines how the bounding box of all the elements
2850 * will be placed within the space given to the box widget itself.
2852 * The size hints of each object also affect how they are placed and sized
2853 * within the box. evas_object_size_hint_min_set() will give the minimum
2854 * size the object can have, and the box will use it as the basis for all
2855 * latter calculations. Elementary widgets set their own minimum size as
2856 * needed, so there's rarely any need to use it manually.
2858 * evas_object_size_hint_weight_set(), when not in homogeneous mode, is
2859 * used to tell whether the object will be allocated the minimum size it
2860 * needs or if the space given to it should be expanded. It's important
2861 * to realize that expanding the size given to the object is not the same
2862 * thing as resizing the object. It could very well end being a small
2863 * widget floating in a much larger empty space. If not set, the weight
2864 * for objects will normally be 0.0 for both axis, meaning the widget will
2865 * not be expanded. To take as much space possible, set the weight to
2866 * EVAS_HINT_EXPAND (defined to 1.0) for the desired axis to expand.
2868 * Besides how much space each object is allocated, it's possible to control
2869 * how the widget will be placed within that space using
2870 * evas_object_size_hint_align_set(). By default, this value will be 0.5
2871 * for both axis, meaning the object will be centered, but any value from
2872 * 0.0 (left or top, for the @c x and @c y axis, respectively) to 1.0
2873 * (right or bottom) can be used. The special value EVAS_HINT_FILL, which
2874 * is -1.0, means the object will be resized to fill the entire space it
2877 * In addition, customized functions to define the layout can be set, which
2878 * allow the application developer to organize the objects within the box
2879 * in any number of ways.
2881 * The special elm_box_layout_transition() function can be used
2882 * to switch from one layout to another, animating the motion of the
2883 * children of the box.
2885 * @note Objects should not be added to box objects using _add() calls.
2887 * Some examples on how to use boxes follow:
2888 * @li @ref box_example_01
2889 * @li @ref box_example_02
2894 * @typedef Elm_Box_Transition
2896 * Opaque handler containing the parameters to perform an animated
2897 * transition of the layout the box uses.
2899 * @see elm_box_transition_new()
2900 * @see elm_box_layout_set()
2901 * @see elm_box_layout_transition()
2903 typedef struct _Elm_Box_Transition Elm_Box_Transition;
2906 * Add a new box to the parent
2908 * By default, the box will be in vertical mode and non-homogeneous.
2910 * @param parent The parent object
2911 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
2913 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_box_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2915 * Set the horizontal orientation
2917 * By default, box object arranges their contents vertically from top to
2919 * By calling this function with @p horizontal as EINA_TRUE, the box will
2920 * become horizontal, arranging contents from left to right.
2922 * @note This flag is ignored if a custom layout function is set.
2924 * @param obj The box object
2925 * @param horizontal The horizontal flag (EINA_TRUE = horizontal,
2926 * EINA_FALSE = vertical)
2928 EAPI void elm_box_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool horizontal) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2930 * Get the horizontal orientation
2932 * @param obj The box object
2933 * @return EINA_TRUE if the box is set to horizontal mode, EINA_FALSE otherwise
2935 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_box_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2937 * Set the box to arrange its children homogeneously
2939 * If enabled, homogeneous layout makes all items the same size, according
2940 * to the size of the largest of its children.
2942 * @note This flag is ignored if a custom layout function is set.
2944 * @param obj The box object
2945 * @param homogeneous The homogeneous flag
2947 EAPI void elm_box_homogeneous_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool homogeneous) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2949 * Get whether the box is using homogeneous mode or not
2951 * @param obj The box object
2952 * @return EINA_TRUE if it's homogeneous, EINA_FALSE otherwise
2954 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_box_homogeneous_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2955 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_box_homogenous_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool homogenous) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2956 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_box_homogenous_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2958 * Add an object to the beginning of the pack list
2960 * Pack @p subobj into the box @p obj, placing it first in the list of
2961 * children objects. The actual position the object will get on screen
2962 * depends on the layout used. If no custom layout is set, it will be at
2963 * the top or left, depending if the box is vertical or horizontal,
2966 * @param obj The box object
2967 * @param subobj The object to add to the box
2969 * @see elm_box_pack_end()
2970 * @see elm_box_pack_before()
2971 * @see elm_box_pack_after()
2972 * @see elm_box_unpack()
2973 * @see elm_box_unpack_all()
2974 * @see elm_box_clear()
2976 EAPI void elm_box_pack_start(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2978 * Add an object at the end of the pack list
2980 * Pack @p subobj into the box @p obj, placing it last in the list of
2981 * children objects. The actual position the object will get on screen
2982 * depends on the layout used. If no custom layout is set, it will be at
2983 * the bottom or right, depending if the box is vertical or horizontal,
2986 * @param obj The box object
2987 * @param subobj The object to add to the box
2989 * @see elm_box_pack_start()
2990 * @see elm_box_pack_before()
2991 * @see elm_box_pack_after()
2992 * @see elm_box_unpack()
2993 * @see elm_box_unpack_all()
2994 * @see elm_box_clear()
2996 EAPI void elm_box_pack_end(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
2998 * Adds an object to the box before the indicated object
3000 * This will add the @p subobj to the box indicated before the object
3001 * indicated with @p before. If @p before is not already in the box, results
3002 * are undefined. Before means either to the left of the indicated object or
3003 * above it depending on orientation.
3005 * @param obj The box object
3006 * @param subobj The object to add to the box
3007 * @param before The object before which to add it
3009 * @see elm_box_pack_start()
3010 * @see elm_box_pack_end()
3011 * @see elm_box_pack_after()
3012 * @see elm_box_unpack()
3013 * @see elm_box_unpack_all()
3014 * @see elm_box_clear()
3016 EAPI void elm_box_pack_before(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj, Evas_Object *before) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3018 * Adds an object to the box after the indicated object
3020 * This will add the @p subobj to the box indicated after the object
3021 * indicated with @p after. If @p after is not already in the box, results
3022 * are undefined. After means either to the right of the indicated object or
3023 * below it depending on orientation.
3025 * @param obj The box object
3026 * @param subobj The object to add to the box
3027 * @param after The object after which to add it
3029 * @see elm_box_pack_start()
3030 * @see elm_box_pack_end()
3031 * @see elm_box_pack_before()
3032 * @see elm_box_unpack()
3033 * @see elm_box_unpack_all()
3034 * @see elm_box_clear()
3036 EAPI void elm_box_pack_after(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj, Evas_Object *after) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3038 * Clear the box of all children
3040 * Remove all the elements contained by the box, deleting the respective
3043 * @param obj The box object
3045 * @see elm_box_unpack()
3046 * @see elm_box_unpack_all()
3048 EAPI void elm_box_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3052 * Remove the object given by @p subobj from the box @p obj without
3055 * @param obj The box object
3057 * @see elm_box_unpack_all()
3058 * @see elm_box_clear()
3060 EAPI void elm_box_unpack(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3062 * Remove all items from the box, without deleting them
3064 * Clear the box from all children, but don't delete the respective objects.
3065 * If no other references of the box children exist, the objects will never
3066 * be deleted, and thus the application will leak the memory. Make sure
3067 * when using this function that you hold a reference to all the objects
3068 * in the box @p obj.
3070 * @param obj The box object
3072 * @see elm_box_clear()
3073 * @see elm_box_unpack()
3075 EAPI void elm_box_unpack_all(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3077 * Retrieve a list of the objects packed into the box
3079 * Returns a new @c Eina_List with a pointer to @c Evas_Object in its nodes.
3080 * The order of the list corresponds to the packing order the box uses.
3082 * You must free this list with eina_list_free() once you are done with it.
3084 * @param obj The box object
3086 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_box_children_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3088 * Set the space (padding) between the box's elements.
3090 * Extra space in pixels that will be added between a box child and its
3091 * neighbors after its containing cell has been calculated. This padding
3092 * is set for all elements in the box, besides any possible padding that
3093 * individual elements may have through their size hints.
3095 * @param obj The box object
3096 * @param horizontal The horizontal space between elements
3097 * @param vertical The vertical space between elements
3099 EAPI void elm_box_padding_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord horizontal, Evas_Coord vertical) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3101 * Get the space (padding) between the box's elements.
3103 * @param obj The box object
3104 * @param horizontal The horizontal space between elements
3105 * @param vertical The vertical space between elements
3107 * @see elm_box_padding_set()
3109 EAPI void elm_box_padding_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *horizontal, Evas_Coord *vertical) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3111 * Set the alignment of the whole bouding box of contents.
3113 * Sets how the bounding box containing all the elements of the box, after
3114 * their sizes and position has been calculated, will be aligned within
3115 * the space given for the whole box widget.
3117 * @param obj The box object
3118 * @param horizontal The horizontal alignment of elements
3119 * @param vertical The vertical alignment of elements
3121 EAPI void elm_box_align_set(Evas_Object *obj, double horizontal, double vertical) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3123 * Get the alignment of the whole bouding box of contents.
3125 * @param obj The box object
3126 * @param horizontal The horizontal alignment of elements
3127 * @param vertical The vertical alignment of elements
3129 * @see elm_box_align_set()
3131 EAPI void elm_box_align_get(const Evas_Object *obj, double *horizontal, double *vertical) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3134 * Set the layout defining function to be used by the box
3136 * Whenever anything changes that requires the box in @p obj to recalculate
3137 * the size and position of its elements, the function @p cb will be called
3138 * to determine what the layout of the children will be.
3140 * Once a custom function is set, everything about the children layout
3141 * is defined by it. The flags set by elm_box_horizontal_set() and
3142 * elm_box_homogeneous_set() no longer have any meaning, and the values
3143 * given by elm_box_padding_set() and elm_box_align_set() are up to this
3144 * layout function to decide if they are used and how. These last two
3145 * will be found in the @c priv parameter, of type @c Evas_Object_Box_Data,
3146 * passed to @p cb. The @c Evas_Object the function receives is not the
3147 * Elementary widget, but the internal Evas Box it uses, so none of the
3148 * functions described here can be used on it.
3150 * Any of the layout functions in @c Evas can be used here, as well as the
3151 * special elm_box_layout_transition().
3153 * The final @p data argument received by @p cb is the same @p data passed
3154 * here, and the @p free_data function will be called to free it
3155 * whenever the box is destroyed or another layout function is set.
3157 * Setting @p cb to NULL will revert back to the default layout function.
3159 * @param obj The box object
3160 * @param cb The callback function used for layout
3161 * @param data Data that will be passed to layout function
3162 * @param free_data Function called to free @p data
3164 * @see elm_box_layout_transition()
3166 EAPI void elm_box_layout_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object_Box_Layout cb, const void *data, void (*free_data)(void *data)) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3168 * Special layout function that animates the transition from one layout to another
3170 * Normally, when switching the layout function for a box, this will be
3171 * reflected immediately on screen on the next render, but it's also
3172 * possible to do this through an animated transition.
3174 * This is done by creating an ::Elm_Box_Transition and setting the box
3175 * layout to this function.
3179 * Elm_Box_Transition *t = elm_box_transition_new(1.0,
3180 * evas_object_box_layout_vertical, // start
3181 * NULL, // data for initial layout
3182 * NULL, // free function for initial data
3183 * evas_object_box_layout_horizontal, // end
3184 * NULL, // data for final layout
3185 * NULL, // free function for final data
3186 * anim_end, // will be called when animation ends
3187 * NULL); // data for anim_end function\
3188 * elm_box_layout_set(box, elm_box_layout_transition, t,
3189 * elm_box_transition_free);
3192 * @note This function can only be used with elm_box_layout_set(). Calling
3193 * it directly will not have the expected results.
3195 * @see elm_box_transition_new
3196 * @see elm_box_transition_free
3197 * @see elm_box_layout_set
3199 EAPI void elm_box_layout_transition(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object_Box_Data *priv, void *data);
3201 * Create a new ::Elm_Box_Transition to animate the switch of layouts
3203 * If you want to animate the change from one layout to another, you need
3204 * to set the layout function of the box to elm_box_layout_transition(),
3205 * passing as user data to it an instance of ::Elm_Box_Transition with the
3206 * necessary information to perform this animation. The free function to
3207 * set for the layout is elm_box_transition_free().
3209 * The parameters to create an ::Elm_Box_Transition sum up to how long
3210 * will it be, in seconds, a layout function to describe the initial point,
3211 * another for the final position of the children and one function to be
3212 * called when the whole animation ends. This last function is useful to
3213 * set the definitive layout for the box, usually the same as the end
3214 * layout for the animation, but could be used to start another transition.
3216 * @param start_layout The layout function that will be used to start the animation
3217 * @param start_layout_data The data to be passed the @p start_layout function
3218 * @param start_layout_free_data Function to free @p start_layout_data
3219 * @param end_layout The layout function that will be used to end the animation
3220 * @param end_layout_free_data The data to be passed the @p end_layout function
3221 * @param end_layout_free_data Function to free @p end_layout_data
3222 * @param transition_end_cb Callback function called when animation ends
3223 * @param transition_end_data Data to be passed to @p transition_end_cb
3224 * @return An instance of ::Elm_Box_Transition
3226 * @see elm_box_transition_new
3227 * @see elm_box_layout_transition
3229 EAPI Elm_Box_Transition *elm_box_transition_new(const double duration, Evas_Object_Box_Layout start_layout, void *start_layout_data, void(*start_layout_free_data)(void *data), Evas_Object_Box_Layout end_layout, void *end_layout_data, void(*end_layout_free_data)(void *data), void(*transition_end_cb)(void *data), void *transition_end_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(2, 5);
3231 * Free a Elm_Box_Transition instance created with elm_box_transition_new().
3233 * This function is mostly useful as the @c free_data parameter in
3234 * elm_box_layout_set() when elm_box_layout_transition().
3236 * @param data The Elm_Box_Transition instance to be freed.
3238 * @see elm_box_transition_new
3239 * @see elm_box_layout_transition
3241 EAPI void elm_box_transition_free(void *data);
3248 * @defgroup Button Button
3250 * @image html img/widget/button/preview-00.png
3251 * @image html img/widget/button/preview-01.png
3252 * @image html img/widget/button/preview-02.png
3254 * This is a push-button. Press it and run some function. It can contain
3255 * a simple label and icon object and it also has an autorepeat feature.
3257 * This widgets emits the following signals:
3258 * @li "clicked": the user clicked the button (press/release).
3259 * @li "repeated": the user pressed the button without releasing it.
3260 * @li "pressed": button was pressed.
3261 * @li "unpressed": button was released after being pressed.
3262 * In all three cases, the @c event parameter of the callback will be
3265 * Also, defined in the default theme, the button has the following styles
3267 * @li default: a normal button.
3268 * @li anchor: Like default, but the button fades away when the mouse is not
3269 * over it, leaving only the text or icon.
3270 * @li hoversel_vertical: Internally used by @ref Hoversel to give a
3271 * continuous look across its options.
3272 * @li hoversel_vertical_entry: Another internal for @ref Hoversel.
3274 * Follow through a complete example @ref button_example_01 "here".
3278 * Add a new button to the parent's canvas
3280 * @param parent The parent object
3281 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
3283 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_button_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3285 * Set the label used in the button
3287 * The passed @p label can be NULL to clean any existing text in it and
3288 * leave the button as an icon only object.
3290 * @param obj The button object
3291 * @param label The text will be written on the button
3292 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
3294 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_button_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3296 * Get the label set for the button
3298 * The string returned is an internal pointer and should not be freed or
3299 * altered. It will also become invalid when the button is destroyed.
3300 * The string returned, if not NULL, is a stringshare, so if you need to
3301 * keep it around even after the button is destroyed, you can use
3302 * eina_stringshare_ref().
3304 * @param obj The button object
3305 * @return The text set to the label, or NULL if nothing is set
3306 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
3308 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_button_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3310 * Set the icon used for the button
3312 * Setting a new icon will delete any other that was previously set, making
3313 * any reference to them invalid. If you need to maintain the previous
3314 * object alive, unset it first with elm_button_icon_unset().
3316 * @param obj The button object
3317 * @param icon The icon object for the button
3319 EAPI void elm_button_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3321 * Get the icon used for the button
3323 * Return the icon object which is set for this widget. If the button is
3324 * destroyed or another icon is set, the returned object will be deleted
3325 * and any reference to it will be invalid.
3327 * @param obj The button object
3328 * @return The icon object that is being used
3330 * @see elm_button_icon_unset()
3332 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_button_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3334 * Remove the icon set without deleting it and return the object
3336 * This function drops the reference the button holds of the icon object
3337 * and returns this last object. It is used in case you want to remove any
3338 * icon, or set another one, without deleting the actual object. The button
3339 * will be left without an icon set.
3341 * @param obj The button object
3342 * @return The icon object that was being used
3344 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_button_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3346 * Turn on/off the autorepeat event generated when the button is kept pressed
3348 * When off, no autorepeat is performed and buttons emit a normal @c clicked
3349 * signal when they are clicked.
3351 * When on, keeping a button pressed will continuously emit a @c repeated
3352 * signal until the button is released. The time it takes until it starts
3353 * emitting the signal is given by
3354 * elm_button_autorepeat_initial_timeout_set(), and the time between each
3355 * new emission by elm_button_autorepeat_gap_timeout_set().
3357 * @param obj The button object
3358 * @param on A bool to turn on/off the event
3360 EAPI void elm_button_autorepeat_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool on) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3362 * Get whether the autorepeat feature is enabled
3364 * @param obj The button object
3365 * @return EINA_TRUE if autorepeat is on, EINA_FALSE otherwise
3367 * @see elm_button_autorepeat_set()
3369 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_button_autorepeat_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3371 * Set the initial timeout before the autorepeat event is generated
3373 * Sets the timeout, in seconds, since the button is pressed until the
3374 * first @c repeated signal is emitted. If @p t is 0.0 or less, there
3375 * won't be any delay and the even will be fired the moment the button is
3378 * @param obj The button object
3379 * @param t Timeout in seconds
3381 * @see elm_button_autorepeat_set()
3382 * @see elm_button_autorepeat_gap_timeout_set()
3384 EAPI void elm_button_autorepeat_initial_timeout_set(Evas_Object *obj, double t) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3386 * Get the initial timeout before the autorepeat event is generated
3388 * @param obj The button object
3389 * @return Timeout in seconds
3391 * @see elm_button_autorepeat_initial_timeout_set()
3393 EAPI double elm_button_autorepeat_initial_timeout_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3395 * Set the interval between each generated autorepeat event
3397 * After the first @c repeated event is fired, all subsequent ones will
3398 * follow after a delay of @p t seconds for each.
3400 * @param obj The button object
3401 * @param t Interval in seconds
3403 * @see elm_button_autorepeat_initial_timeout_set()
3405 EAPI void elm_button_autorepeat_gap_timeout_set(Evas_Object *obj, double t) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3407 * Get the interval between each generated autorepeat event
3409 * @param obj The button object
3410 * @return Interval in seconds
3412 EAPI double elm_button_autorepeat_gap_timeout_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3418 * @defgroup File_Selector_Button File Selector Button
3420 * @image html img/widget/fileselector_button/preview-00.png
3421 * @image html img/widget/fileselector_button/preview-01.png
3422 * @image html img/widget/fileselector_button/preview-02.png
3424 * This is a button that, when clicked, creates an Elementary
3425 * window (or inner window) <b> with a @ref Fileselector "file
3426 * selector widget" within</b>. When a file is chosen, the (inner)
3427 * window is closed and the button emits a signal having the
3428 * selected file as it's @c event_info.
3430 * This widget encapsulates operations on its internal file
3431 * selector on its own API. There is less control over its file
3432 * selector than that one would have instatiating one directly.
3434 * The following styles are available for this button:
3437 * @li @c "hoversel_vertical"
3438 * @li @c "hoversel_vertical_entry"
3440 * Smart callbacks one can register to:
3441 * - @c "file,chosen" - the user has selected a path, whose string
3442 * pointer comes as the @c event_info data (a stringshared
3445 * Here is an example on its usage:
3446 * @li @ref fileselector_button_example
3448 * @see @ref File_Selector_Entry for a similar widget.
3453 * Add a new file selector button widget to the given parent
3454 * Elementary (container) object
3456 * @param parent The parent object
3457 * @return a new file selector button widget handle or @c NULL, on
3460 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_fileselector_button_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3463 * Set the label for a given file selector button widget
3465 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3466 * @param label The text label to be displayed on @p obj
3468 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
3470 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3473 * Get the label set for a given file selector button widget
3475 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3476 * @return The button label
3478 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
3480 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_button_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3483 * Set the icon on a given file selector button widget
3485 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3486 * @param icon The icon object for the button
3488 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be
3489 * deleted. If you want to keep the latter, use the
3490 * elm_fileselector_button_icon_unset() function.
3492 * @see elm_fileselector_button_icon_get()
3494 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3497 * Get the icon set for a given file selector button widget
3499 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3500 * @return The icon object currently set on @p obj or @c NULL, if
3503 * @see elm_fileselector_button_icon_set()
3505 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_fileselector_button_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3508 * Unset the icon used in a given file selector button widget
3510 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3511 * @return The icon object that was being used on @p obj or @c
3514 * Unparent and return the icon object which was set for this
3517 * @see elm_fileselector_button_icon_set()
3519 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_fileselector_button_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3522 * Set the title for a given file selector button widget's window
3524 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3525 * @param title The title string
3527 * This will change the window's title, when the file selector pops
3528 * out after a click on the button. Those windows have the default
3529 * (unlocalized) value of @c "Select a file" as titles.
3531 * @note It will only take any effect if the file selector
3532 * button widget is @b not under "inwin mode".
3534 * @see elm_fileselector_button_window_title_get()
3536 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_window_title_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *title) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3539 * Get the title set for a given file selector button widget's
3542 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3543 * @return Title of the file selector button's window
3545 * @see elm_fileselector_button_window_title_get() for more details
3547 EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_button_window_title_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3550 * Set the size of a given file selector button widget's window,
3551 * holding the file selector itself.
3553 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3554 * @param width The window's width
3555 * @param height The window's height
3557 * @note it will only take any effect if the file selector button
3558 * widget is @b not under "inwin mode". The default size for the
3559 * window (when applicable) is 400x400 pixels.
3561 * @see elm_fileselector_button_window_size_get()
3563 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_window_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord width, Evas_Coord height) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3566 * Get the size of a given file selector button widget's window,
3567 * holding the file selector itself.
3569 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3570 * @param width Pointer into which to store the width value
3571 * @param height Pointer into which to store the height value
3573 * @note Use @c NULL pointers on the size values you're not
3574 * interested in: they'll be ignored by the function.
3576 * @see elm_fileselector_button_window_size_set(), for more details
3578 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_window_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *width, Evas_Coord *height) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3581 * Set the initial file system path for a given file selector
3584 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3585 * @param path The path string
3587 * It must be a <b>directory</b> path, which will have the contents
3588 * displayed initially in the file selector's view, when invoked
3589 * from @p obj. The default initial path is the @c "HOME"
3590 * environment variable's value.
3592 * @see elm_fileselector_button_path_get()
3594 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_path_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *path) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3597 * Get the initial file system path set for a given file selector
3600 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3601 * @return path The path string
3603 * @see elm_fileselector_button_path_set() for more details
3605 EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_button_path_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3608 * Enable/disable a tree view in the given file selector button
3609 * widget's internal file selector
3611 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3612 * @param expand @c EINA_TRUE to enable tree view, @c EINA_FALSE to
3615 * This has the same effect as elm_fileselector_expandable_set(),
3616 * but now applied to a file selector button's internal file
3619 * @note There's no way to put a file selector button's internal
3620 * file selector in "grid mode", as one may do with "pure" file
3623 * @see elm_fileselector_expandable_get()
3625 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_expandable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3628 * Get whether tree view is enabled for the given file selector
3629 * button widget's internal file selector
3631 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3632 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if @p obj widget's internal file selector
3633 * is in tree view, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise (and or errors)
3635 * @see elm_fileselector_expandable_set() for more details
3637 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_button_expandable_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3640 * Set whether a given file selector button widget's internal file
3641 * selector is to display folders only or the directory contents,
3644 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3645 * @param only @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj widget's internal file
3646 * selector only display directories, @c EINA_FALSE to make files
3647 * to be displayed in it too
3649 * This has the same effect as elm_fileselector_folder_only_set(),
3650 * but now applied to a file selector button's internal file
3653 * @see elm_fileselector_folder_only_get()
3655 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_folder_only_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3658 * Get whether a given file selector button widget's internal file
3659 * selector is displaying folders only or the directory contents,
3662 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3663 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if @p obj widget's internal file
3664 * selector is only displaying directories, @c EINA_FALSE if files
3665 * are being displayed in it too (and on errors)
3667 * @see elm_fileselector_button_folder_only_set() for more details
3669 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_button_folder_only_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3672 * Enable/disable the file name entry box where the user can type
3673 * in a name for a file, in a given file selector button widget's
3674 * internal file selector.
3676 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3677 * @param is_save @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj widget's internal
3678 * file selector a "saving dialog", @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
3680 * This has the same effect as elm_fileselector_is_save_set(),
3681 * but now applied to a file selector button's internal file
3684 * @see elm_fileselector_is_save_get()
3686 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_is_save_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3689 * Get whether the given file selector button widget's internal
3690 * file selector is in "saving dialog" mode
3692 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3693 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj widget's internal file selector
3694 * is in "saving dialog" mode, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise (and on
3697 * @see elm_fileselector_button_is_save_set() for more details
3699 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_button_is_save_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3702 * Set whether a given file selector button widget's internal file
3703 * selector will raise an Elementary "inner window", instead of a
3704 * dedicated Elementary window. By default, it won't.
3706 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3707 * @param value @c EINA_TRUE to make it use an inner window, @c
3708 * EINA_TRUE to make it use a dedicated window
3710 * @see elm_win_inwin_add() for more information on inner windows
3711 * @see elm_fileselector_button_inwin_mode_get()
3713 EAPI void elm_fileselector_button_inwin_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3716 * Get whether a given file selector button widget's internal file
3717 * selector will raise an Elementary "inner window", instead of a
3718 * dedicated Elementary window.
3720 * @param obj The file selector button widget
3721 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if will use an inner window, @c EINA_TRUE
3722 * if it will use a dedicated window
3724 * @see elm_fileselector_button_inwin_mode_set() for more details
3726 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_button_inwin_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3733 * @defgroup File_Selector_Entry File Selector Entry
3735 * @image html img/widget/fileselector_entry/preview-00.png
3736 * @image latex img/widget/fileselector_entry/preview-00.eps
3738 * This is an entry made to be filled with or display a <b>file
3739 * system path string</b>. Besides the entry itself, the widget has
3740 * a @ref File_Selector_Button "file selector button" on its side,
3741 * which will raise an internal @ref Fileselector "file selector widget",
3742 * when clicked, for path selection aided by file system
3745 * This file selector may appear in an Elementary window or in an
3746 * inner window. When a file is chosen from it, the (inner) window
3747 * is closed and the selected file's path string is exposed both as
3748 * an smart event and as the new text on the entry.
3750 * This widget encapsulates operations on its internal file
3751 * selector on its own API. There is less control over its file
3752 * selector than that one would have instatiating one directly.
3754 * Smart callbacks one can register to:
3755 * - @c "changed" - The text within the entry was changed
3756 * - @c "activated" - The entry has had editing finished and
3757 * changes are to be "committed"
3758 * - @c "press" - The entry has been clicked
3759 * - @c "longpressed" - The entry has been clicked (and held) for a
3761 * - @c "clicked" - The entry has been clicked
3762 * - @c "clicked,double" - The entry has been double clicked
3763 * - @c "focused" - The entry has received focus
3764 * - @c "unfocused" - The entry has lost focus
3765 * - @c "selection,paste" - A paste action has occurred on the
3767 * - @c "selection,copy" - A copy action has occurred on the entry
3768 * - @c "selection,cut" - A cut action has occurred on the entry
3769 * - @c "unpressed" - The file selector entry's button was released
3770 * after being pressed.
3771 * - @c "file,chosen" - The user has selected a path via the file
3772 * selector entry's internal file selector, whose string pointer
3773 * comes as the @c event_info data (a stringshared string)
3775 * Here is an example on its usage:
3776 * @li @ref fileselector_entry_example
3778 * @see @ref File_Selector_Button for a similar widget.
3783 * Add a new file selector entry widget to the given parent
3784 * Elementary (container) object
3786 * @param parent The parent object
3787 * @return a new file selector entry widget handle or @c NULL, on
3790 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_fileselector_entry_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3793 * Set the label for a given file selector entry widget's button
3795 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3796 * @param label The text label to be displayed on @p obj widget's
3799 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
3801 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_button_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3804 * Get the label set for a given file selector entry widget's button
3806 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3807 * @return The widget button's label
3809 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
3811 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_entry_button_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3814 * Set the icon on a given file selector entry widget's button
3816 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3817 * @param icon The icon object for the entry's button
3819 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be
3820 * deleted. If you want to keep the latter, use the
3821 * elm_fileselector_entry_button_icon_unset() function.
3823 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_button_icon_get()
3825 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_button_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3828 * Get the icon set for a given file selector entry widget's button
3830 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3831 * @return The icon object currently set on @p obj widget's button
3832 * or @c NULL, if none is
3834 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_button_icon_set()
3836 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_fileselector_entry_button_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3839 * Unset the icon used in a given file selector entry widget's
3842 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3843 * @return The icon object that was being used on @p obj widget's
3844 * button or @c NULL, on errors
3846 * Unparent and return the icon object which was set for this
3849 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_button_icon_set()
3851 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_fileselector_entry_button_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3854 * Set the title for a given file selector entry widget's window
3856 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3857 * @param title The title string
3859 * This will change the window's title, when the file selector pops
3860 * out after a click on the entry's button. Those windows have the
3861 * default (unlocalized) value of @c "Select a file" as titles.
3863 * @note It will only take any effect if the file selector
3864 * entry widget is @b not under "inwin mode".
3866 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_window_title_get()
3868 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_window_title_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *title) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3871 * Get the title set for a given file selector entry widget's
3874 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3875 * @return Title of the file selector entry's window
3877 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_window_title_get() for more details
3879 EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_entry_window_title_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3882 * Set the size of a given file selector entry widget's window,
3883 * holding the file selector itself.
3885 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3886 * @param width The window's width
3887 * @param height The window's height
3889 * @note it will only take any effect if the file selector entry
3890 * widget is @b not under "inwin mode". The default size for the
3891 * window (when applicable) is 400x400 pixels.
3893 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_window_size_get()
3895 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_window_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord width, Evas_Coord height) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3898 * Get the size of a given file selector entry widget's window,
3899 * holding the file selector itself.
3901 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3902 * @param width Pointer into which to store the width value
3903 * @param height Pointer into which to store the height value
3905 * @note Use @c NULL pointers on the size values you're not
3906 * interested in: they'll be ignored by the function.
3908 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_window_size_set(), for more details
3910 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_window_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *width, Evas_Coord *height) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3913 * Set the initial file system path and the entry's path string for
3914 * a given file selector entry widget
3916 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3917 * @param path The path string
3919 * It must be a <b>directory</b> path, which will have the contents
3920 * displayed initially in the file selector's view, when invoked
3921 * from @p obj. The default initial path is the @c "HOME"
3922 * environment variable's value.
3924 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_path_get()
3926 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_path_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *path) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3929 * Get the entry's path string for a given file selector entry
3932 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3933 * @return path The path string
3935 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_path_set() for more details
3937 EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_entry_path_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3940 * Enable/disable a tree view in the given file selector entry
3941 * widget's internal file selector
3943 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3944 * @param expand @c EINA_TRUE to enable tree view, @c EINA_FALSE to
3947 * This has the same effect as elm_fileselector_expandable_set(),
3948 * but now applied to a file selector entry's internal file
3951 * @note There's no way to put a file selector entry's internal
3952 * file selector in "grid mode", as one may do with "pure" file
3955 * @see elm_fileselector_expandable_get()
3957 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_expandable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3960 * Get whether tree view is enabled for the given file selector
3961 * entry widget's internal file selector
3963 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3964 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if @p obj widget's internal file selector
3965 * is in tree view, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise (and or errors)
3967 * @see elm_fileselector_expandable_set() for more details
3969 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_entry_expandable_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3972 * Set whether a given file selector entry widget's internal file
3973 * selector is to display folders only or the directory contents,
3976 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3977 * @param only @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj widget's internal file
3978 * selector only display directories, @c EINA_FALSE to make files
3979 * to be displayed in it too
3981 * This has the same effect as elm_fileselector_folder_only_set(),
3982 * but now applied to a file selector entry's internal file
3985 * @see elm_fileselector_folder_only_get()
3987 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_folder_only_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
3990 * Get whether a given file selector entry widget's internal file
3991 * selector is displaying folders only or the directory contents,
3994 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
3995 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if @p obj widget's internal file
3996 * selector is only displaying directories, @c EINA_FALSE if files
3997 * are being displayed in it too (and on errors)
3999 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_folder_only_set() for more details
4001 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_entry_folder_only_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4004 * Enable/disable the file name entry box where the user can type
4005 * in a name for a file, in a given file selector entry widget's
4006 * internal file selector.
4008 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
4009 * @param is_save @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj widget's internal
4010 * file selector a "saving dialog", @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
4012 * This has the same effect as elm_fileselector_is_save_set(),
4013 * but now applied to a file selector entry's internal file
4016 * @see elm_fileselector_is_save_get()
4018 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_is_save_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4021 * Get whether the given file selector entry widget's internal
4022 * file selector is in "saving dialog" mode
4024 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
4025 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj widget's internal file selector
4026 * is in "saving dialog" mode, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise (and on
4029 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_is_save_set() for more details
4031 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_entry_is_save_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4034 * Set whether a given file selector entry widget's internal file
4035 * selector will raise an Elementary "inner window", instead of a
4036 * dedicated Elementary window. By default, it won't.
4038 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
4039 * @param value @c EINA_TRUE to make it use an inner window, @c
4040 * EINA_TRUE to make it use a dedicated window
4042 * @see elm_win_inwin_add() for more information on inner windows
4043 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_inwin_mode_get()
4045 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_inwin_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4048 * Get whether a given file selector entry widget's internal file
4049 * selector will raise an Elementary "inner window", instead of a
4050 * dedicated Elementary window.
4052 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
4053 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if will use an inner window, @c EINA_TRUE
4054 * if it will use a dedicated window
4056 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_inwin_mode_set() for more details
4058 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_entry_inwin_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4061 * Set the initial file system path for a given file selector entry
4064 * @param obj The file selector entry widget
4065 * @param path The path string
4067 * It must be a <b>directory</b> path, which will have the contents
4068 * displayed initially in the file selector's view, when invoked
4069 * from @p obj. The default initial path is the @c "HOME"
4070 * environment variable's value.
4072 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_path_get()
4074 EAPI void elm_fileselector_entry_selected_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *path) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4077 * Get the parent directory's path to the latest file selection on
4078 * a given filer selector entry widget
4080 * @param obj The file selector object
4081 * @return The (full) path of the directory of the last selection
4082 * on @p obj widget, a @b stringshared string
4084 * @see elm_fileselector_entry_path_set()
4086 EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_entry_selected_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4093 * @defgroup Scroller Scroller
4095 * A scroller holds a single object and "scrolls it around". This means that
4096 * it allows the user to use a scrollbar (or a finger) to drag the viewable
4097 * region around, allowing to move through a much larger object that is
4098 * contained in the scroller. The scroiller will always have a small minimum
4099 * size by default as it won't be limited by the contents of the scroller.
4101 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
4102 * @li "edge,left" - the left edge of the content has been reached
4103 * @li "edge,right" - the right edge of the content has been reached
4104 * @li "edge,top" - the top edge of the content has been reached
4105 * @li "edge,bottom" - the bottom edge of the content has been reached
4106 * @li "scroll" - the content has been scrolled (moved)
4107 * @li "scroll,anim,start" - scrolling animation has started
4108 * @li "scroll,anim,stop" - scrolling animation has stopped
4109 * @li "scroll,drag,start" - dragging the contents around has started
4110 * @li "scroll,drag,stop" - dragging the contents around has stopped
4111 * @note The "scroll,anim,*" and "scroll,drag,*" signals are only emitted by
4114 * @note When Elemementary is in embedded mode the scrollbars will not be
4115 * dragable, they appear merely as indicators of how much has been scrolled.
4116 * @note When Elementary is in desktop mode the thumbscroll(a.k.a.
4117 * fingerscroll) won't work.
4119 * In @ref tutorial_scroller you'll find an example of how to use most of
4124 * @brief Type that controls when scrollbars should appear.
4126 * @see elm_scroller_policy_set()
4128 typedef enum _Elm_Scroller_Policy
4130 ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_AUTO = 0, /**< Show scrollbars as needed */
4131 ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_ON, /**< Always show scrollbars */
4132 ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_OFF, /**< Never show scrollbars */
4133 ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_LAST
4134 } Elm_Scroller_Policy;
4136 * @brief Add a new scroller to the parent
4138 * @param parent The parent object
4139 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
4141 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_scroller_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4143 * @brief Set the content of the scroller widget (the object to be scrolled around).
4145 * @param obj The scroller object
4146 * @param content The new content object
4148 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
4149 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
4150 * elm_scroller_content_unset() function.
4152 EAPI void elm_scroller_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *child) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4154 * @brief Get the content of the scroller widget
4156 * @param obj The slider object
4157 * @return The content that is being used
4159 * Return the content object which is set for this widget
4161 * @see elm_scroller_content_set()
4163 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_scroller_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4165 * @brief Unset the content of the scroller widget
4167 * @param obj The slider object
4168 * @return The content that was being used
4170 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this widget
4172 * @see elm_scroller_content_set()
4174 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_scroller_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4176 * @brief Set custom theme elements for the scroller
4178 * @param obj The scroller object
4179 * @param widget The widget name to use (default is "scroller")
4180 * @param base The base name to use (default is "base")
4182 EAPI void elm_scroller_custom_widget_base_theme_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *widget, const char *base) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2, 3);
4184 * @brief Make the scroller minimum size limited to the minimum size of the content
4186 * @param obj The scroller object
4187 * @param w Enable limiting minimum size horizontally
4188 * @param h Enable limiting minimum size vertically
4190 * By default the scroller will be as small as its design allows,
4191 * irrespective of its content. This will make the scroller minimum size the
4192 * right size horizontally and/or vertically to perfectly fit its content in
4195 EAPI void elm_scroller_content_min_limit(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool w, Eina_Bool h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4197 * @brief Show a specific virtual region within the scroller content object
4199 * @param obj The scroller object
4200 * @param x X coordinate of the region
4201 * @param y Y coordinate of the region
4202 * @param w Width of the region
4203 * @param h Height of the region
4205 * This will ensure all (or part if it does not fit) of the designated
4206 * region in the virtual content object (0, 0 starting at the top-left of the
4207 * virtual content object) is shown within the scroller.
4209 EAPI void elm_scroller_region_show(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord x, Evas_Coord y, Evas_Coord w, Evas_Coord h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4211 * @brief Set the scrollbar visibility policy
4213 * @param obj The scroller object
4214 * @param policy_h Horizontal scrollbar policy
4215 * @param policy_v Vertical scrollbar policy
4217 * This sets the scrollbar visibility policy for the given scroller.
4218 * ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_AUTO means the scrollber is made visible if it is
4219 * needed, and otherwise kept hidden. ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_ON turns it on all
4220 * the time, and ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_OFF always keeps it off. This applies
4221 * respectively for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
4223 EAPI void elm_scroller_policy_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy policy_h, Elm_Scroller_Policy policy_v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4225 * @brief Gets scrollbar visibility policy
4227 * @param obj The scroller object
4228 * @param policy_h Horizontal scrollbar policy
4229 * @param policy_v Vertical scrollbar policy
4231 * @see elm_scroller_policy_set()
4233 EAPI void elm_scroller_policy_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy *policy_h, Elm_Scroller_Policy *policy_v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4235 * @brief Get the currently visible content region
4237 * @param obj The scroller object
4238 * @param x X coordinate of the region
4239 * @param y Y coordinate of the region
4240 * @param w Width of the region
4241 * @param h Height of the region
4243 * This gets the current region in the content object that is visible through
4244 * the scroller. The region co-ordinates are returned in the @p x, @p y, @p
4245 * w, @p h values pointed to.
4247 * @note All coordinates are relative to the content.
4249 * @see elm_scroller_region_show()
4251 EAPI void elm_scroller_region_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *x, Evas_Coord *y, Evas_Coord *w, Evas_Coord *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4253 * @brief Get the size of the content object
4255 * @param obj The scroller object
4256 * @param w Width return
4257 * @param h Height return
4259 * This gets the size of the content object of the scroller.
4261 EAPI void elm_scroller_child_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *w, Evas_Coord *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4263 * @brief Set bouncing behavior
4265 * @param obj The scroller object
4266 * @param h_bounce Will the scroller bounce horizontally or not
4267 * @param v_bounce Will the scroller bounce vertically or not
4269 * When scrolling, the scroller may "bounce" when reaching an edge of the
4270 * content object. This is a visual way to indicate the end has been reached.
4271 * This is enabled by default for both axis. This will set if it is enabled
4272 * for that axis with the boolean parameters for each axis.
4274 EAPI void elm_scroller_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4276 * @brief Get the bounce mode
4278 * @param obj The Scroller object
4279 * @param h_bounce Allow bounce horizontally
4280 * @param v_bounce Allow bounce vertically
4282 * @see elm_scroller_bounce_set()
4284 EAPI void elm_scroller_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4286 * @brief Set scroll page size relative to viewport size.
4288 * @param obj The scroller object
4289 * @param h_pagerel The horizontal page relative size
4290 * @param v_pagerel The vertical page relative size
4292 * The scroller is capable of limiting scrolling by the user to "pages". That
4293 * is to jump by and only show a "whole page" at a time as if the continuous
4294 * area of the scroller content is split into page sized pieces. This sets
4295 * the size of a page relative to the viewport of the scroller. 1.0 is "1
4296 * viewport" is size (horizontally or vertically). 0.0 turns it off in that
4297 * axis. This is mutually exclusive with page size
4298 * (see elm_scroller_page_size_set() for more information). Likewise 0.5
4299 * is "half a viewport". Sane usable valus are normally between 0.0 and 1.0
4300 * including 1.0. If you only want 1 axis to be page "limited", use 0.0 for
4303 EAPI void elm_scroller_page_relative_set(Evas_Object *obj, double h_pagerel, double v_pagerel) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4305 * @brief Set scroll page size.
4307 * @param obj The scroller object
4308 * @param h_pagesize The horizontal page size
4309 * @param v_pagesize The vertical page size
4311 * This sets the page size to an absolute fixed value, with 0 turning it off
4314 * @see elm_scroller_page_relative_set()
4316 EAPI void elm_scroller_page_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord h_pagesize, Evas_Coord v_pagesize) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4318 * @brief Show a specific virtual region within the scroller content object.
4320 * @param obj The scroller object
4321 * @param x X coordinate of the region
4322 * @param y Y coordinate of the region
4323 * @param w Width of the region
4324 * @param h Height of the region
4326 * This will ensure all (or part if it does not fit) of the designated
4327 * region in the virtual content object (0, 0 starting at the top-left of the
4328 * virtual content object) is shown within the scroller. Unlike
4329 * elm_scroller_region_show(), this allow the scroller to "smoothly slide"
4330 * to this location (if configuration in general calls for transitions). It
4331 * may not jump immediately to the new location and make take a while and
4332 * show other content along the way.
4334 * @see elm_scroller_region_show()
4336 EAPI void elm_scroller_region_bring_in(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord x, Evas_Coord y, Evas_Coord w, Evas_Coord h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4338 * @brief Set event propagation on a scroller
4340 * @param obj The scroller object
4341 * @param propagation If propagation is enabled or not
4343 * This enables or disabled event propagation from the scroller content to
4344 * the scroller and its parent. By default event propagation is disabled.
4346 EAPI void elm_scroller_propagate_events_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool propagation);
4348 * @brief Get event propagation for a scroller
4350 * @param obj The scroller object
4351 * @return The propagation state
4353 * This gets the event propagation for a scroller.
4355 * @see elm_scroller_propagate_events_set()
4357 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scroller_propagate_events_get(const Evas_Object *obj);
4363 * @defgroup Label Label
4365 * @image html img/widget/label/preview-00.png
4366 * @image latex img/widget/label/preview-00.eps
4368 * @brief Widget to display text, with simple html-like markup.
4370 * The Label widget @b doesn't allow text to overflow its boundaries, if the
4371 * text doesn't fit the geometry of the label it will be ellipsized or be
4372 * cut. Elementary provides several themes for this widget:
4373 * @li default - No animation
4374 * @li marker - Centers the text in the label and make it bold by default
4375 * @li slide_long - The entire text appears from the right of the screen and
4376 * slides until it disappears in the left of the screen(reappering on the
4378 * @li slide_short - The text appears in the left of the label and slides to
4379 * the right to show the overflow. When all of the text has been shown the
4380 * position is reset.
4381 * @li slide_bounce - The text appears in the left of the label and slides to
4382 * the right to show the overflow. When all of the text has been shown the
4383 * animation reverses, moving the text to the left.
4385 * Custom themes can of course invent new markup tags and style them any way
4388 * See @ref tutorial_label for a demonstration of how to use a label widget.
4392 * @brief Add a new label to the parent
4394 * @param parent The parent object
4395 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
4397 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_label_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4399 * @brief Set the label on the label object
4401 * @param obj The label object
4402 * @param label The label will be used on the label object
4403 * @deprecated See elm_object_text_set()
4405 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_label_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1); /* deprecated, use elm_object_text_set instead */
4407 * @brief Get the label used on the label object
4409 * @param obj The label object
4410 * @return The string inside the label
4411 * @deprecated See elm_object_text_get()
4413 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_label_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1); /* deprecated, use elm_object_text_get instead */
4415 * @brief Set the wrapping behavior of the label
4417 * @param obj The label object
4418 * @param wrap To wrap text or not
4420 * By default no wrapping is done. Possible values for @p wrap are:
4421 * @li ELM_WRAP_NONE - No wrapping
4422 * @li ELM_WRAP_CHAR - wrap between characters
4423 * @li ELM_WRAP_WORD - wrap between words
4424 * @li ELM_WRAP_MIXED - Word wrap, and if that fails, char wrap
4426 EAPI void elm_label_line_wrap_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Wrap_Type wrap) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4428 * @brief Get the wrapping behavior of the label
4430 * @param obj The label object
4433 * @see elm_label_line_wrap_set()
4435 EAPI Elm_Wrap_Type elm_label_line_wrap_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4437 * @brief Set wrap width of the label
4439 * @param obj The label object
4440 * @param w The wrap width in pixels at a minimum where words need to wrap
4442 * This function sets the maximum width size hint of the label.
4444 * @warning This is only relevant if the label is inside a container.
4446 EAPI void elm_label_wrap_width_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord w) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4448 * @brief Get wrap width of the label
4450 * @param obj The label object
4451 * @return The wrap width in pixels at a minimum where words need to wrap
4453 * @see elm_label_wrap_width_set()
4455 EAPI Evas_Coord elm_label_wrap_width_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4457 * @brief Set wrap height of the label
4459 * @param obj The label object
4460 * @param h The wrap height in pixels at a minimum where words need to wrap
4462 * This function sets the maximum height size hint of the label.
4464 * @warning This is only relevant if the label is inside a container.
4466 EAPI void elm_label_wrap_height_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4468 * @brief get wrap width of the label
4470 * @param obj The label object
4471 * @return The wrap height in pixels at a minimum where words need to wrap
4473 EAPI Evas_Coord elm_label_wrap_height_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4475 * @brief Set the font size on the label object.
4477 * @param obj The label object
4478 * @param size font size
4480 * @warning NEVER use this. It is for hyper-special cases only. use styles
4481 * instead. e.g. "big", "medium", "small" - or better name them by use:
4482 * "title", "footnote", "quote" etc.
4484 EAPI void elm_label_fontsize_set(Evas_Object *obj, int fontsize) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4486 * @brief Set the text color on the label object
4488 * @param obj The label object
4489 * @param r Red property background color of The label object
4490 * @param g Green property background color of The label object
4491 * @param b Blue property background color of The label object
4492 * @param a Alpha property background color of The label object
4494 * @warning NEVER use this. It is for hyper-special cases only. use styles
4495 * instead. e.g. "big", "medium", "small" - or better name them by use:
4496 * "title", "footnote", "quote" etc.
4498 EAPI void elm_label_text_color_set(Evas_Object *obj, unsigned int r, unsigned int g, unsigned int b, unsigned int a) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4500 * @brief Set the text align on the label object
4502 * @param obj The label object
4503 * @param align align mode ("left", "center", "right")
4505 * @warning NEVER use this. It is for hyper-special cases only. use styles
4506 * instead. e.g. "big", "medium", "small" - or better name them by use:
4507 * "title", "footnote", "quote" etc.
4509 EAPI void elm_label_text_align_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *alignmode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4511 * @brief Set background color of the label
4513 * @param obj The label object
4514 * @param r Red property background color of The label object
4515 * @param g Green property background color of The label object
4516 * @param b Blue property background color of The label object
4517 * @param a Alpha property background alpha of The label object
4519 * @warning NEVER use this. It is for hyper-special cases only. use styles
4520 * instead. e.g. "big", "medium", "small" - or better name them by use:
4521 * "title", "footnote", "quote" etc.
4523 EAPI void elm_label_background_color_set(Evas_Object *obj, unsigned int r, unsigned int g, unsigned int b, unsigned int a) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4525 * @brief Set the ellipsis behavior of the label
4527 * @param obj The label object
4528 * @param ellipsis To ellipsis text or not
4530 * If set to true and the text doesn't fit in the label an ellipsis("...")
4531 * will be shown at the end of the widget.
4533 * @warning This doesn't work with slide(elm_label_slide_set()) or if the
4534 * choosen wrap method was ELM_WRAP_WORD.
4536 EAPI void elm_label_ellipsis_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool ellipsis) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4538 * @brief Set the text slide of the label
4540 * @param obj The label object
4541 * @param slide To start slide or stop
4543 * If set to true the text of the label will slide throught the length of
4546 * @warning This only work with the themes "slide_short", "slide_long" and
4549 EAPI void elm_label_slide_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool slide) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4551 * @brief Get the text slide mode of the label
4553 * @param obj The label object
4554 * @return slide slide mode value
4556 * @see elm_label_slide_set()
4558 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_label_slide_get(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4560 * @brief Set the slide duration(speed) of the label
4562 * @param obj The label object
4563 * @return The duration in seconds in moving text from slide begin position
4564 * to slide end position
4566 EAPI void elm_label_slide_duration_set(Evas_Object *obj, double duration) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4568 * @brief Get the slide duration(speed) of the label
4570 * @param obj The label object
4571 * @return The duration time in moving text from slide begin position to slide end position
4573 * @see elm_label_slide_duration_set()
4575 EAPI double elm_label_slide_duration_get(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4583 * @image html img/widget/toggle/preview-00.png
4584 * @image latex img/widget/toggle/preview-00.eps
4586 * @brief A toggle is a slider which can be used to toggle between
4587 * two values. It has two states: on and off.
4589 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
4590 * @li "changed" - Whenever the toggle value has been changed. Is not called
4591 * until the toggle is released by the cursor (assuming it
4592 * has been triggered by the cursor in the first place).
4594 * @ref tutorial_toggle show how to use a toggle.
4598 * @brief Add a toggle to @p parent.
4600 * @param parent The parent object
4602 * @return The toggle object
4604 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_toggle_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4606 * @brief Sets the label to be displayed with the toggle.
4608 * @param obj The toggle object
4609 * @param label The label to be displayed
4611 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
4613 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_toggle_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4615 * @brief Gets the label of the toggle
4617 * @param obj toggle object
4618 * @return The label of the toggle
4620 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_get() instead.
4622 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_toggle_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4624 * @brief Set the icon used for the toggle
4626 * @param obj The toggle object
4627 * @param icon The icon object for the button
4629 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted
4630 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
4631 * elm_toggle_icon_unset() function.
4633 EAPI void elm_toggle_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4635 * @brief Get the icon used for the toggle
4637 * @param obj The toggle object
4638 * @return The icon object that is being used
4640 * Return the icon object which is set for this widget.
4642 * @see elm_toggle_icon_set()
4644 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_toggle_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4646 * @brief Unset the icon used for the toggle
4648 * @param obj The toggle object
4649 * @return The icon object that was being used
4651 * Unparent and return the icon object which was set for this widget.
4653 * @see elm_toggle_icon_set()
4655 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_toggle_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4657 * @brief Sets the labels to be associated with the on and off states of the toggle.
4659 * @param obj The toggle object
4660 * @param onlabel The label displayed when the toggle is in the "on" state
4661 * @param offlabel The label displayed when the toggle is in the "off" state
4663 EAPI void elm_toggle_states_labels_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *onlabel, const char *offlabel) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4665 * @brief Gets the labels associated with the on and off states of the toggle.
4667 * @param obj The toggle object
4668 * @param onlabel A char** to place the onlabel of @p obj into
4669 * @param offlabel A char** to place the offlabel of @p obj into
4671 EAPI void elm_toggle_states_labels_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **onlabel, const char **offlabel) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4673 * @brief Sets the state of the toggle to @p state.
4675 * @param obj The toggle object
4676 * @param state The state of @p obj
4678 EAPI void elm_toggle_state_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool state) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4680 * @brief Gets the state of the toggle to @p state.
4682 * @param obj The toggle object
4683 * @return The state of @p obj
4685 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toggle_state_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4687 * @brief Sets the state pointer of the toggle to @p statep.
4689 * @param obj The toggle object
4690 * @param statep The state pointer of @p obj
4692 EAPI void elm_toggle_state_pointer_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *statep) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4698 * @defgroup Frame Frame
4700 * @image html img/widget/frame/preview-00.png
4701 * @image latex img/widget/frame/preview-00.eps
4703 * @brief Frame is a widget that holds some content and has a title.
4705 * The default look is a frame with a title, but Frame supports multple
4713 * @li outdent_bottom
4715 * Of all this styles only default shows the title. Frame emits no signals.
4717 * For a detailed example see the @ref tutorial_frame.
4722 * @brief Add a new frame to the parent
4724 * @param parent The parent object
4725 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
4727 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_frame_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4729 * @brief Set the frame label
4731 * @param obj The frame object
4732 * @param label The label of this frame object
4734 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
4736 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_frame_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4738 * @brief Get the frame label
4740 * @param obj The frame object
4742 * @return The label of this frame objet or NULL if unable to get frame
4744 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_get() instead.
4746 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_frame_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4748 * @brief Set the content of the frame widget
4750 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
4751 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
4752 * elm_frame_content_unset() function.
4754 * @param obj The frame object
4755 * @param content The content will be filled in this frame object
4757 EAPI void elm_frame_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4759 * @brief Get the content of the frame widget
4761 * Return the content object which is set for this widget
4763 * @param obj The frame object
4764 * @return The content that is being used
4766 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_frame_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4768 * @brief Unset the content of the frame widget
4770 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this widget
4772 * @param obj The frame object
4773 * @return The content that was being used
4775 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_frame_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4781 * @defgroup Table Table
4783 * A container widget to arrange other widgets in a table where items can
4784 * also span multiple columns or rows - even overlap (and then be raised or
4785 * lowered accordingly to adjust stacking if they do overlap).
4787 * The followin are examples of how to use a table:
4788 * @li @ref tutorial_table_01
4789 * @li @ref tutorial_table_02
4794 * @brief Add a new table to the parent
4796 * @param parent The parent object
4797 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
4799 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_table_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4801 * @brief Set the homogeneous layout in the table
4803 * @param obj The layout object
4804 * @param homogeneous A boolean to set if the layout is homogeneous in the
4805 * table (EINA_TRUE = homogeneous, EINA_FALSE = no homogeneous)
4807 EAPI void elm_table_homogeneous_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool homogeneous) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4809 * @brief Get the current table homogeneous mode.
4811 * @param obj The table object
4812 * @return A boolean to indicating if the layout is homogeneous in the table
4813 * (EINA_TRUE = homogeneous, EINA_FALSE = no homogeneous)
4815 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_table_homogeneous_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4817 * @warning <b>Use elm_table_homogeneous_set() instead</b>
4819 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_table_homogenous_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool homogenous) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4821 * @warning <b>Use elm_table_homogeneous_get() instead</b>
4823 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_table_homogenous_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4825 * @brief Set padding between cells.
4827 * @param obj The layout object.
4828 * @param horizontal set the horizontal padding.
4829 * @param vertical set the vertical padding.
4831 * Default value is 0.
4833 EAPI void elm_table_padding_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord horizontal, Evas_Coord vertical) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4835 * @brief Get padding between cells.
4837 * @param obj The layout object.
4838 * @param horizontal set the horizontal padding.
4839 * @param vertical set the vertical padding.
4841 EAPI void elm_table_padding_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *horizontal, Evas_Coord *vertical) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4843 * @brief Add a subobject on the table with the coordinates passed
4845 * @param obj The table object
4846 * @param subobj The subobject to be added to the table
4847 * @param x Row number
4848 * @param y Column number
4852 * @note All positioning inside the table is relative to rows and columns, so
4853 * a value of 0 for x and y, means the top left cell of the table, and a
4854 * value of 1 for w and h means @p subobj only takes that 1 cell.
4856 EAPI void elm_table_pack(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj, int x, int y, int w, int h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4858 * @brief Remove child from table.
4860 * @param obj The table object
4861 * @param subobj The subobject
4863 EAPI void elm_table_unpack(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4865 * @brief Faster way to remove all child objects from a table object.
4867 * @param obj The table object
4868 * @param clear If true, will delete children, else just remove from table.
4870 EAPI void elm_table_clear(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool clear) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4872 * @brief Set the packing location of an existing child of the table
4874 * @param subobj The subobject to be modified in the table
4875 * @param x Row number
4876 * @param y Column number
4880 * Modifies the position of an object already in the table.
4882 * @note All positioning inside the table is relative to rows and columns, so
4883 * a value of 0 for x and y, means the top left cell of the table, and a
4884 * value of 1 for w and h means @p subobj only takes that 1 cell.
4886 EAPI void elm_table_pack_set(Evas_Object *subobj, int x, int y, int w, int h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4888 * @brief Get the packing location of an existing child of the table
4890 * @param subobj The subobject to be modified in the table
4891 * @param x Row number
4892 * @param y Column number
4896 * @see elm_table_pack_set()
4898 EAPI void elm_table_pack_get(Evas_Object *subobj, int *x, int *y, int *w, int *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
4904 * @defgroup Gengrid Gengrid (Generic grid)
4906 * This widget aims to position objects in a grid layout while
4907 * actually creating and rendering only the visible ones, using the
4908 * same idea as the @ref Genlist "genlist": the user defines a @b
4909 * class for each item, specifying functions that will be called at
4910 * object creation, deletion, etc. When those items are selected by
4911 * the user, a callback function is issued. Users may interact with
4912 * a gengrid via the mouse (by clicking on items to select them and
4913 * clicking on the grid's viewport and swiping to pan the whole
4914 * view) or via the keyboard, navigating through item with the
4917 * @section Gengrid_Layouts Gengrid layouts
4919 * Gengrids may layout its items in one of two possible layouts:
4923 * When in "horizontal mode", items will be placed in @b columns,
4924 * from top to bottom and, when the space for a column is filled,
4925 * another one is started on the right, thus expanding the grid
4926 * horizontally, making for horizontal scrolling. When in "vertical
4927 * mode" , though, items will be placed in @b rows, from left to
4928 * right and, when the space for a row is filled, another one is
4929 * started below, thus expanding the grid vertically (and making
4930 * for vertical scrolling).
4932 * @section Gengrid_Items Gengrid items
4934 * An item in a gengrid can have 0 or more text labels (they can be
4935 * regular text or textblock Evas objects - that's up to the style
4936 * to determine), 0 or more icons (which are simply objects
4937 * swallowed into the gengrid item's theming Edje object) and 0 or
4938 * more <b>boolean states</b>, which have the behavior left to the
4939 * user to define. The Edje part names for each of these properties
4940 * will be looked up, in the theme file for the gengrid, under the
4941 * Edje (string) data items named @c "labels", @c "icons" and @c
4942 * "states", respectively. For each of those properties, if more
4943 * than one part is provided, they must have names listed separated
4944 * by spaces in the data fields. For the default gengrid item
4945 * theme, we have @b one label part (@c "elm.text"), @b two icon
4946 * parts (@c "elm.swalllow.icon" and @c "elm.swallow.end") and @b
4949 * A gengrid item may be at one of several styles. Elementary
4950 * provides one by default - "default", but this can be extended by
4951 * system or application custom themes/overlays/extensions (see
4952 * @ref Theme "themes" for more details).
4954 * @section Gengrid_Item_Class Gengrid item classes
4956 * In order to have the ability to add and delete items on the fly,
4957 * gengrid implements a class (callback) system where the
4958 * application provides a structure with information about that
4959 * type of item (gengrid may contain multiple different items with
4960 * different classes, states and styles). Gengrid will call the
4961 * functions in this struct (methods) when an item is "realized"
4962 * (i.e., created dynamically, while the user is scrolling the
4963 * grid). All objects will simply be deleted when no longer needed
4964 * with evas_object_del(). The #Elm_GenGrid_Item_Class structure
4965 * contains the following members:
4966 * - @c item_style - This is a constant string and simply defines
4967 * the name of the item style. It @b must be specified and the
4968 * default should be @c "default".
4969 * - @c func.label_get - This function is called when an item
4970 * object is actually created. The @c data parameter will point to
4971 * the same data passed to elm_gengrid_item_append() and related
4972 * item creation functions. The @c obj parameter is the gengrid
4973 * object itself, while the @c part one is the name string of one
4974 * of the existing text parts in the Edje group implementing the
4975 * item's theme. This function @b must return a strdup'()ed string,
4976 * as the caller will free() it when done. See
4977 * #GridItemLabelGetFunc.
4978 * - @c func.icon_get - This function is called when an item object
4979 * is actually created. The @c data parameter will point to the
4980 * same data passed to elm_gengrid_item_append() and related item
4981 * creation functions. The @c obj parameter is the gengrid object
4982 * itself, while the @c part one is the name string of one of the
4983 * existing (icon) swallow parts in the Edje group implementing the
4984 * item's theme. It must return @c NULL, when no icon is desired,
4985 * or a valid object handle, otherwise. The object will be deleted
4986 * by the gengrid on its deletion or when the item is "unrealized".
4987 * See #GridItemIconGetFunc.
4988 * - @c func.state_get - This function is called when an item
4989 * object is actually created. The @c data parameter will point to
4990 * the same data passed to elm_gengrid_item_append() and related
4991 * item creation functions. The @c obj parameter is the gengrid
4992 * object itself, while the @c part one is the name string of one
4993 * of the state parts in the Edje group implementing the item's
4994 * theme. Return @c EINA_FALSE for false/off or @c EINA_TRUE for
4995 * true/on. Gengrids will emit a signal to its theming Edje object
4996 * with @c "elm,state,XXX,active" and @c "elm" as "emission" and
4997 * "source" arguments, respectively, when the state is true (the
4998 * default is false), where @c XXX is the name of the (state) part.
4999 * See #GridItemStateGetFunc.
5000 * - @c func.del - This is called when elm_gengrid_item_del() is
5001 * called on an item or elm_gengrid_clear() is called on the
5002 * gengrid. This is intended for use when gengrid items are
5003 * deleted, so any data attached to the item (e.g. its data
5004 * parameter on creation) can be deleted. See #GridItemDelFunc.
5006 * @section Gengrid_Usage_Hints Usage hints
5008 * If the user wants to have multiple items selected at the same
5009 * time, elm_gengrid_multi_select_set() will permit it. If the
5010 * gengrid is single-selection only (the default), then
5011 * elm_gengrid_select_item_get() will return the selected item or
5012 * @c NULL, if none is selected. If the gengrid is under
5013 * multi-selection, then elm_gengrid_selected_items_get() will
5014 * return a list (that is only valid as long as no items are
5015 * modified (added, deleted, selected or unselected) of child items
5018 * If an item changes (internal (boolean) state, label or icon
5019 * changes), then use elm_gengrid_item_update() to have gengrid
5020 * update the item with the new state. A gengrid will re-"realize"
5021 * the item, thus calling the functions in the
5022 * #Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class set for that item.
5024 * To programmatically (un)select an item, use
5025 * elm_gengrid_item_selected_set(). To get its selected state use
5026 * elm_gengrid_item_selected_get(). To make an item disabled
5027 * (unable to be selected and appear differently) use
5028 * elm_gengrid_item_disabled_set() to set this and
5029 * elm_gengrid_item_disabled_get() to get the disabled state.
5031 * Grid cells will only have their selection smart callbacks called
5032 * when firstly getting selected. Any further clicks will do
5033 * nothing, unless you enable the "always select mode", with
5034 * elm_gengrid_always_select_mode_set(), thus making every click to
5035 * issue selection callbacks. elm_gengrid_no_select_mode_set() will
5036 * turn off the ability to select items entirely in the widget and
5037 * they will neither appear selected nor call the selection smart
5040 * Remember that you can create new styles and add your own theme
5041 * augmentation per application with elm_theme_extension_add(). If
5042 * you absolutely must have a specific style that overrides any
5043 * theme the user or system sets up you can use
5044 * elm_theme_overlay_add() to add such a file.
5046 * @section Gengrid_Smart_Events Gengrid smart events
5048 * Smart events that you can add callbacks for are:
5049 * - @c "activated" - The user has double-clicked or pressed
5050 * (enter|return|spacebar) on an item. The @c event_info parameter
5051 * is the gengrid item that was activated.
5052 * - @c "clicked,double" - The user has double-clicked an item.
5053 * The @c event_info parameter is the gengrid item that was double-clicked.
5054 * - @c "selected" - The user has made an item selected. The
5055 * @c event_info parameter is the gengrid item that was selected.
5056 * - @c "unselected" - The user has made an item unselected. The
5057 * @c event_info parameter is the gengrid item that was unselected.
5058 * - @c "realized" - This is called when the item in the gengrid
5059 * has its implementing Evas object instantiated, de facto. @c
5060 * event_info is the gengrid item that was created. The object
5061 * may be deleted at any time, so it is highly advised to the
5062 * caller @b not to use the object pointer returned from
5063 * elm_gengrid_item_object_get(), because it may point to freed
5065 * - @c "unrealized" - This is called when the implementing Evas
5066 * object for this item is deleted. @c event_info is the gengrid
5067 * item that was deleted.
5068 * - @c "changed" - Called when an item is added, removed, resized
5069 * or moved and when the gengrid is resized or gets "horizontal"
5071 * - @c "drag,start,up" - Called when the item in the gengrid has
5072 * been dragged (not scrolled) up.
5073 * - @c "drag,start,down" - Called when the item in the gengrid has
5074 * been dragged (not scrolled) down.
5075 * - @c "drag,start,left" - Called when the item in the gengrid has
5076 * been dragged (not scrolled) left.
5077 * - @c "drag,start,right" - Called when the item in the gengrid has
5078 * been dragged (not scrolled) right.
5079 * - @c "drag,stop" - Called when the item in the gengrid has
5080 * stopped being dragged.
5081 * - @c "drag" - Called when the item in the gengrid is being
5083 * - @c "scroll" - called when the content has been scrolled
5085 * - @c "scroll,drag,start" - called when dragging the content has
5087 * - @c "scroll,drag,stop" - called when dragging the content has
5090 * List of gendrid examples:
5091 * @li @ref gengrid_example
5095 * @addtogroup Gengrid
5099 typedef struct _Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class; /**< Gengrid item class definition structs */
5100 typedef struct _Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class_Func Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class_Func; /**< Class functions for gengrid item classes. */
5101 typedef struct _Elm_Gengrid_Item Elm_Gengrid_Item; /**< Gengrid item handles */
5102 typedef char *(*GridItemLabelGetFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, const char *part); /**< Label fetching class function for gengrid item classes. */
5103 typedef Evas_Object *(*GridItemIconGetFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, const char *part); /**< Icon fetching class function for gengrid item classes. */
5104 typedef Eina_Bool (*GridItemStateGetFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, const char *part); /**< State fetching class function for gengrid item classes. */
5105 typedef void (*GridItemDelFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj); /**< Deletion class function for gengrid item classes. */
5108 * @struct _Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class
5110 * Gengrid item class definition. See @ref Gengrid_Item_Class for
5113 struct _Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class
5115 const char *item_style;
5116 struct _Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class_Func
5118 GridItemLabelGetFunc label_get;
5119 GridItemIconGetFunc icon_get;
5120 GridItemStateGetFunc state_get;
5121 GridItemDelFunc del;
5123 }; /**< #Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class member definitions */
5126 * Add a new gengrid widget to the given parent Elementary
5127 * (container) object
5129 * @param parent The parent object
5130 * @return a new gengrid widget handle or @c NULL, on errors
5132 * This function inserts a new gengrid widget on the canvas.
5134 * @see elm_gengrid_item_size_set()
5135 * @see elm_gengrid_horizontal_set()
5136 * @see elm_gengrid_item_append()
5137 * @see elm_gengrid_item_del()
5138 * @see elm_gengrid_clear()
5142 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_gengrid_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5145 * Set the size for the items of a given gengrid widget
5147 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5148 * @param w The items' width.
5149 * @param h The items' height;
5151 * A gengrid, after creation, has still no information on the size
5152 * to give to each of its cells. So, you most probably will end up
5153 * with squares one @ref Fingers "finger" wide, the default
5154 * size. Use this function to force a custom size for you items,
5155 * making them as big as you wish.
5157 * @see elm_gengrid_item_size_get()
5161 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord w, Evas_Coord h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5164 * Get the size set for the items of a given gengrid widget
5166 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5167 * @param w Pointer to a variable where to store the items' width.
5168 * @param h Pointer to a variable where to store the items' height.
5170 * @note Use @c NULL pointers on the size values you're not
5171 * interested in: they'll be ignored by the function.
5173 * @see elm_gengrid_item_size_get() for more details
5177 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *w, Evas_Coord *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5180 * Set the items grid's alignment within a given gengrid widget
5182 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5183 * @param align_x Alignment in the horizontal axis (0 <= align_x <= 1).
5184 * @param align_y Alignment in the vertical axis (0 <= align_y <= 1).
5186 * This sets the alignment of the whole grid of items of a gengrid
5187 * within its given viewport. By default, those values are both
5188 * 0.5, meaning that the gengrid will have its items grid placed
5189 * exactly in the middle of its viewport.
5191 * @note If given alignment values are out of the cited ranges,
5192 * they'll be changed to the nearest boundary values on the valid
5195 * @see elm_gengrid_align_get()
5199 EAPI void elm_gengrid_align_set(Evas_Object *obj, double align_x, double align_y) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5202 * Get the items grid's alignment values within a given gengrid
5205 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5206 * @param align_x Pointer to a variable where to store the
5207 * horizontal alignment.
5208 * @param align_y Pointer to a variable where to store the vertical
5211 * @note Use @c NULL pointers on the alignment values you're not
5212 * interested in: they'll be ignored by the function.
5214 * @see elm_gengrid_align_set() for more details
5218 EAPI void elm_gengrid_align_get(const Evas_Object *obj, double *align_x, double *align_y) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5221 * Set whether a given gengrid widget is or not able have items
5224 * @param obj The gengrid object
5225 * @param reorder_mode Use @c EINA_TRUE to turn reoderding on,
5226 * @c EINA_FALSE to turn it off
5228 * If a gengrid is set to allow reordering, a click held for more
5229 * than 0.5 over a given item will highlight it specially,
5230 * signalling the gengrid has entered the reordering state. From
5231 * that time on, the user will be able to, while still holding the
5232 * mouse button down, move the item freely in the gengrid's
5233 * viewport, replacing to said item to the locations it goes to.
5234 * The replacements will be animated and, whenever the user
5235 * releases the mouse button, the item being replaced gets a new
5236 * definitive place in the grid.
5238 * @see elm_gengrid_reorder_mode_get()
5242 EAPI void elm_gengrid_reorder_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool reorder_mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5245 * Get whether a given gengrid widget is or not able have items
5248 * @param obj The gengrid object
5249 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if reoderding is on, @c EINA_FALSE if it's
5252 * @see elm_gengrid_reorder_mode_set() for more details
5256 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_reorder_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5259 * Append a new item in a given gengrid widget.
5261 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5262 * @param gic The item class for the item.
5263 * @param data The item data.
5264 * @param func Convenience function called when the item is
5266 * @param func_data Data to be passed to @p func.
5267 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL, on errors.
5269 * This adds an item to the beginning of the gengrid.
5271 * @see elm_gengrid_item_prepend()
5272 * @see elm_gengrid_item_insert_before()
5273 * @see elm_gengrid_item_insert_after()
5274 * @see elm_gengrid_item_del()
5278 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_item_append(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class *gic, const void *data, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5281 * Prepend a new item in a given gengrid widget.
5283 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5284 * @param gic The item class for the item.
5285 * @param data The item data.
5286 * @param func Convenience function called when the item is
5288 * @param func_data Data to be passed to @p func.
5289 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL, on errors.
5291 * This adds an item to the end of the gengrid.
5293 * @see elm_gengrid_item_append()
5294 * @see elm_gengrid_item_insert_before()
5295 * @see elm_gengrid_item_insert_after()
5296 * @see elm_gengrid_item_del()
5300 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_item_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class *gic, const void *data, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5303 * Insert an item before another in a gengrid widget
5305 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5306 * @param gic The item class for the item.
5307 * @param data The item data.
5308 * @param relative The item to place this new one before.
5309 * @param func Convenience function called when the item is
5311 * @param func_data Data to be passed to @p func.
5312 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL, on errors.
5314 * This inserts an item before another in the gengrid.
5316 * @see elm_gengrid_item_append()
5317 * @see elm_gengrid_item_prepend()
5318 * @see elm_gengrid_item_insert_after()
5319 * @see elm_gengrid_item_del()
5323 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_item_insert_before(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class *gic, const void *data, Elm_Gengrid_Item *relative, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5326 * Insert an item after another in a gengrid widget
5328 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5329 * @param gic The item class for the item.
5330 * @param data The item data.
5331 * @param relative The item to place this new one after.
5332 * @param func Convenience function called when the item is
5334 * @param func_data Data to be passed to @p func.
5335 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL, on errors.
5337 * This inserts an item after another in the gengrid.
5339 * @see elm_gengrid_item_append()
5340 * @see elm_gengrid_item_prepend()
5341 * @see elm_gengrid_item_insert_after()
5342 * @see elm_gengrid_item_del()
5346 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_item_insert_after(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class *gic, const void *data, Elm_Gengrid_Item *relative, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5348 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_item_sorted_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class *gic, const void *data, Eina_Compare_Cb comp, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5350 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_item_direct_sorted_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class *gic, const void *data, Eina_Compare_Cb comp, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data);
5353 * Set whether items on a given gengrid widget are to get their
5354 * selection callbacks issued for @b every subsequent selection
5355 * click on them or just for the first click.
5357 * @param obj The gengrid object
5358 * @param always_select @c EINA_TRUE to make items "always
5359 * selected", @c EINA_FALSE, otherwise
5361 * By default, grid items will only call their selection callback
5362 * function when firstly getting selected, any subsequent further
5363 * clicks will do nothing. With this call, you make those
5364 * subsequent clicks also to issue the selection callbacks.
5366 * @note <b>Double clicks</b> will @b always be reported on items.
5368 * @see elm_gengrid_always_select_mode_get()
5372 EAPI void elm_gengrid_always_select_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool always_select) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5375 * Get whether items on a given gengrid widget have their selection
5376 * callbacks issued for @b every subsequent selection click on them
5377 * or just for the first click.
5379 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5380 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if the gengrid items are "always selected",
5381 * @c EINA_FALSE, otherwise
5383 * @see elm_gengrid_always_select_mode_set() for more details
5387 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_always_select_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5390 * Set whether items on a given gengrid widget can be selected or not.
5392 * @param obj The gengrid object
5393 * @param no_select @c EINA_TRUE to make items selectable,
5394 * @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
5396 * This will make items in @obj selectable or not. In the latter
5397 * case, any user interacion on the gendrid items will neither make
5398 * them appear selected nor them call their selection callback
5401 * @see elm_gengrid_no_select_mode_get()
5405 EAPI void elm_gengrid_no_select_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool no_select) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5408 * Get whether items on a given gengrid widget can be selected or
5411 * @param obj The gengrid object
5412 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if items are selectable, @c EINA_FALSE
5415 * @see elm_gengrid_no_select_mode_set() for more details
5419 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_no_select_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5422 * Enable or disable multi-selection in a given gengrid widget
5424 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5425 * @param multi @c EINA_TRUE, to enable multi-selection,
5426 * @c EINA_FALSE to disable it.
5428 * Multi-selection is the ability for one to have @b more than one
5429 * item selected, on a given gengrid, simultaneously. When it is
5430 * enabled, a sequence of clicks on different items will make them
5431 * all selected, progressively. A click on an already selected item
5432 * will unselect it. If interecting via the keyboard,
5433 * multi-selection is enabled while holding the "Shift" key.
5435 * @note By default, multi-selection is @b disabled on gengrids
5437 * @see elm_gengrid_multi_select_get()
5441 EAPI void elm_gengrid_multi_select_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool multi) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5444 * Get whether multi-selection is enabled or disabled for a given
5447 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5448 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if multi-selection is enabled, @c
5449 * EINA_FALSE otherwise
5451 * @see elm_gengrid_multi_select_set() for more details
5455 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_multi_select_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5458 * Enable or disable bouncing effect for a given gengrid widget
5460 * @param obj The gengrid object
5461 * @param h_bounce @c EINA_TRUE, to enable @b horizontal bouncing,
5462 * @c EINA_FALSE to disable it
5463 * @param v_bounce @c EINA_TRUE, to enable @b vertical bouncing,
5464 * @c EINA_FALSE to disable it
5466 * The bouncing effect occurs whenever one reaches the gengrid's
5467 * edge's while panning it -- it will scroll past its limits a
5468 * little bit and return to the edge again, in a animated for,
5471 * @note By default, gengrids have bouncing enabled on both axis
5473 * @see elm_gengrid_bounce_get()
5477 EAPI void elm_gengrid_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5480 * Get whether bouncing effects are enabled or disabled, for a
5481 * given gengrid widget, on each axis
5483 * @param obj The gengrid object
5484 * @param h_bounce Pointer to a variable where to store the
5485 * horizontal bouncing flag.
5486 * @param v_bounce Pointer to a variable where to store the
5487 * vertical bouncing flag.
5489 * @see elm_gengrid_bounce_set() for more details
5493 EAPI void elm_gengrid_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5496 * Set a given gengrid widget's scrolling page size, relative to
5497 * its viewport size.
5499 * @param obj The gengrid object
5500 * @param h_pagerel The horizontal page (relative) size
5501 * @param v_pagerel The vertical page (relative) size
5503 * The gengrid's scroller is capable of binding scrolling by the
5504 * user to "pages". It means that, while scrolling and, specially
5505 * after releasing the mouse button, the grid will @b snap to the
5506 * nearest displaying page's area. When page sizes are set, the
5507 * grid's continuous content area is split into (equal) page sized
5510 * This function sets the size of a page <b>relatively to the
5511 * viewport dimensions</b> of the gengrid, for each axis. A value
5512 * @c 1.0 means "the exact viewport's size", in that axis, while @c
5513 * 0.0 turns paging off in that axis. Likewise, @c 0.5 means "half
5514 * a viewport". Sane usable values are, than, between @c 0.0 and @c
5515 * 1.0. Values beyond those will make it behave behave
5516 * inconsistently. If you only want one axis to snap to pages, use
5517 * the value @c 0.0 for the other one.
5519 * There is a function setting page size values in @b absolute
5520 * values, too -- elm_gengrid_page_size_set(). Naturally, its use
5521 * is mutually exclusive to this one.
5523 * @see elm_gengrid_page_relative_get()
5527 EAPI void elm_gengrid_page_relative_set(Evas_Object *obj, double h_pagerel, double v_pagerel) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5530 * Get a given gengrid widget's scrolling page size, relative to
5531 * its viewport size.
5533 * @param obj The gengrid object
5534 * @param h_pagerel Pointer to a variable where to store the
5535 * horizontal page (relative) size
5536 * @param v_pagerel Pointer to a variable where to store the
5537 * vertical page (relative) size
5539 * @see elm_gengrid_page_relative_set() for more details
5543 EAPI void elm_gengrid_page_relative_get(const Evas_Object *obj, double *h_pagerel, double *v_pagerel) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5546 * Set a given gengrid widget's scrolling page size
5548 * @param obj The gengrid object
5549 * @param h_pagerel The horizontal page size, in pixels
5550 * @param v_pagerel The vertical page size, in pixels
5552 * The gengrid's scroller is capable of binding scrolling by the
5553 * user to "pages". It means that, while scrolling and, specially
5554 * after releasing the mouse button, the grid will @b snap to the
5555 * nearest displaying page's area. When page sizes are set, the
5556 * grid's continuous content area is split into (equal) page sized
5559 * This function sets the size of a page of the gengrid, in pixels,
5560 * for each axis. Sane usable values are, between @c 0 and the
5561 * dimensions of @p obj, for each axis. Values beyond those will
5562 * make it behave behave inconsistently. If you only want one axis
5563 * to snap to pages, use the value @c 0 for the other one.
5565 * There is a function setting page size values in @b relative
5566 * values, too -- elm_gengrid_page_relative_set(). Naturally, its
5567 * use is mutually exclusive to this one.
5571 EAPI void elm_gengrid_page_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord h_pagesize, Evas_Coord v_pagesize) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5574 * Set for what direction a given gengrid widget will expand while
5575 * placing its items.
5577 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5578 * @param setting @c EINA_TRUE to make the gengrid expand
5579 * horizontally, @c EINA_FALSE to expand vertically.
5581 * When in "horizontal mode" (@c EINA_TRUE), items will be placed
5582 * in @b columns, from top to bottom and, when the space for a
5583 * column is filled, another one is started on the right, thus
5584 * expanding the grid horizontally. When in "vertical mode"
5585 * (@c EINA_FALSE), though, items will be placed in @b rows, from left
5586 * to right and, when the space for a row is filled, another one is
5587 * started below, thus expanding the grid vertically.
5589 * @see elm_gengrid_horizontal_get()
5593 EAPI void elm_gengrid_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool setting) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5596 * Get for what direction a given gengrid widget will expand while
5597 * placing its items.
5599 * @param obj The gengrid object.
5600 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj is set to expand horizontally,
5601 * @c EINA_FALSE if it's set to expand vertically.
5603 * @see elm_gengrid_horizontal_set() for more detais
5607 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5610 * Get the first item in a given gengrid widget
5612 * @param obj The gengrid object
5613 * @return The first item's handle or @c NULL, if there are no
5614 * items in @p obj (and on errors)
5616 * This returns the first item in the @p obj's internal list of
5619 * @see elm_gengrid_last_item_get()
5623 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_first_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5626 * Get the last item in a given gengrid widget
5628 * @param obj The gengrid object
5629 * @return The last item's handle or @c NULL, if there are no
5630 * items in @p obj (and on errors)
5632 * This returns the last item in the @p obj's internal list of
5635 * @see elm_gengrid_first_item_get()
5639 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_last_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5642 * Get the @b next item in a gengrid widget's internal list of items,
5643 * given a handle to one of those items.
5645 * @param item The gengrid item to fetch next from
5646 * @return The item after @p item, or @c NULL if there's none (and
5649 * This returns the item placed after the @p item, on the container
5652 * @see elm_gengrid_item_prev_get()
5656 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_item_next_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5659 * Get the @b previous item in a gengrid widget's internal list of items,
5660 * given a handle to one of those items.
5662 * @param item The gengrid item to fetch previous from
5663 * @return The item before @p item, or @c NULL if there's none (and
5666 * This returns the item placed before the @p item, on the container
5669 * @see elm_gengrid_item_next_get()
5673 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_item_prev_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5676 * Get the gengrid object's handle which contains a given gengrid
5679 * @param item The item to fetch the container from
5680 * @return The gengrid (parent) object
5682 * This returns the gengrid object itself that an item belongs to.
5686 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_gengrid_item_gengrid_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5689 * Remove a gengrid item from the its parent, deleting it.
5691 * @param item The item to be removed.
5692 * @return @c EINA_TRUE on success or @c EINA_FALSE, otherwise.
5694 * @see elm_gengrid_clear(), to remove all items in a gengrid at
5699 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_del(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5702 * Update the contents of a given gengrid item
5704 * @param item The gengrid item
5706 * This updates an item by calling all the item class functions
5707 * again to get the icons, labels and states. Use this when the
5708 * original item data has changed and you want thta changes to be
5713 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_update(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5714 EAPI const Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class *elm_gengrid_item_item_class_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5715 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_item_class_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, const Elm_Gengrid_Item_Class *gic) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
5718 * Return the data associated to a given gengrid item
5720 * @param item The gengrid item.
5721 * @return the data associated to this item.
5723 * This returns the @c data value passed on the
5724 * elm_gengrid_item_append() and related item addition calls.
5726 * @see elm_gengrid_item_append()
5727 * @see elm_gengrid_item_data_set()
5731 EAPI void *elm_gengrid_item_data_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5734 * Set the data associated to a given gengrid item
5736 * @param item The gengrid item
5737 * @param data The new data pointer to set on it
5739 * This @b overrides the @c data value passed on the
5740 * elm_gengrid_item_append() and related item addition calls. This
5741 * function @b won't call elm_gengrid_item_update() automatically,
5742 * so you'd issue it afterwards if you want to hove the item
5743 * updated to reflect the that new data.
5745 * @see elm_gengrid_item_data_get()
5749 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_data_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5752 * Get a given gengrid item's position, relative to the whole
5753 * gengrid's grid area.
5755 * @param item The Gengrid item.
5756 * @param x Pointer to variable where to store the item's <b>row
5758 * @param y Pointer to variable where to store the item's <b>column
5761 * This returns the "logical" position of the item whithin the
5762 * gengrid. For example, @c (0, 1) would stand for first row,
5767 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_pos_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, unsigned int *x, unsigned int *y) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5770 * Set whether a given gengrid item is selected or not
5772 * @param item The gengrid item
5773 * @param selected Use @c EINA_TRUE, to make it selected, @c
5774 * EINA_FALSE to make it unselected
5776 * This sets the selected state of an item. If multi selection is
5777 * not enabled on the containing gengrid and @p selected is @c
5778 * EINA_TRUE, any other previously selected items will get
5779 * unselected in favor of this new one.
5781 * @see elm_gengrid_item_selected_get()
5785 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_selected_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, Eina_Bool selected) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5788 * Get whether a given gengrid item is selected or not
5790 * @param item The gengrid item
5791 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if it's selected, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
5793 * @see elm_gengrid_item_selected_set() for more details
5797 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_item_selected_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5800 * Get the real Evas object created to implement the view of a
5801 * given gengrid item
5803 * @param item The gengrid item.
5804 * @return the Evas object implementing this item's view.
5806 * This returns the actual Evas object used to implement the
5807 * specified gengrid item's view. This may be @c NULL, as it may
5808 * not have been created or may have been deleted, at any time, by
5809 * the gengrid. <b>Do not modify this object</b> (move, resize,
5810 * show, hide, etc.), as the gengrid is controlling it. This
5811 * function is for querying, emitting custom signals or hooking
5812 * lower level callbacks for events on that object. Do not delete
5813 * this object under any circumstances.
5815 * @see elm_gengrid_item_data_get()
5819 EAPI const Evas_Object *elm_gengrid_item_object_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5822 * Show the portion of a gengrid's internal grid containing a given
5823 * item, @b immediately.
5825 * @param item The item to display
5827 * This causes gengrid to @b redraw its viewport's contents to the
5828 * region contining the given @p item item, if it is not fully
5831 * @see elm_gengrid_item_bring_in()
5835 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_show(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5838 * Animatedly bring in, to the visible are of a gengrid, a given
5841 * @param item The gengrid item to display
5843 * This causes gengrig to jump to the given @p item item and show
5844 * it (by scrolling), if it is not fully visible. This will use
5845 * animation to do so and take a period of time to complete.
5847 * @see elm_gengrid_item_show()
5851 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_bring_in(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5854 * Set whether a given gengrid item is disabled or not.
5856 * @param item The gengrid item
5857 * @param disabled Use @c EINA_TRUE, true disable it, @c EINA_FALSE
5858 * to enable it back.
5860 * A disabled item cannot be selected or unselected. It will also
5861 * change its appearance, to signal the user it's disabled.
5863 * @see elm_gengrid_item_disabled_get()
5867 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_disabled_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5870 * Get whether a given gengrid item is disabled or not.
5872 * @param item The gengrid item
5873 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if it's disabled, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
5876 * @see elm_gengrid_item_disabled_set() for more details
5880 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_item_disabled_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5883 * Set the text to be shown in a given gengrid item's tooltips.
5885 * @param item The gengrid item
5886 * @param text The text to set in the content
5888 * This call will setup the text to be used as tooltip to that item
5889 * (analogous to elm_object_tooltip_text_set(), but being item
5890 * tooltips with higher precedence than object tooltips). It can
5891 * have only one tooltip at a time, so any previous tooltip data
5896 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_text_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5899 * Set the content to be shown in a given gengrid item's tooltips
5901 * @param item The gengrid item.
5902 * @param func The function returning the tooltip contents.
5903 * @param data What to provide to @a func as callback data/context.
5904 * @param del_cb Called when data is not needed anymore, either when
5905 * another callback replaces @func, the tooltip is unset with
5906 * elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_unset() or the owner @p item
5907 * dies. This callback receives as its first parameter the
5908 * given @p data, being @c event_info the item handle.
5910 * This call will setup the tooltip's contents to @p item
5911 * (analogous to elm_object_tooltip_content_cb_set(), but being
5912 * item tooltips with higher precedence than object tooltips). It
5913 * can have only one tooltip at a time, so any previous tooltip
5914 * content will get removed. @p func (with @p data) will be called
5915 * every time Elementary needs to show the tooltip and it should
5916 * return a valid Evas object, which will be fully managed by the
5917 * tooltip system, getting deleted when the tooltip is gone.
5921 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_content_cb_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, Elm_Tooltip_Item_Content_Cb func, const void *data, Evas_Smart_Cb del_cb) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5924 * Unset a tooltip from a given gengrid item
5926 * @param item gengrid item to remove a previously set tooltip from.
5928 * This call removes any tooltip set on @p item. The callback
5929 * provided as @c del_cb to
5930 * elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() will be called to
5931 * notify it is not used anymore (and have resources cleaned, if
5934 * @see elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_content_cb_set()
5938 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_unset(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5941 * Set a different @b style for a given gengrid item's tooltip.
5943 * @param item gengrid item with tooltip set
5944 * @param style the <b>theme style</b> to use on tooltips (e.g. @c
5945 * "default", @c "transparent", etc)
5947 * Tooltips can have <b>alternate styles</b> to be displayed on,
5948 * which are defined by the theme set on Elementary. This function
5949 * works analogously as elm_object_tooltip_style_set(), but here
5950 * applied only to gengrid item objects. The default style for
5951 * tooltips is @c "default".
5953 * @note before you set a style you should define a tooltip with
5954 * elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() or
5955 * elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_text_set()
5957 * @see elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_style_get()
5961 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_style_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5964 * Get the style set a given gengrid item's tooltip.
5966 * @param item gengrid item with tooltip already set on.
5967 * @return style the theme style in use, which defaults to
5968 * "default". If the object does not have a tooltip set,
5969 * then @c NULL is returned.
5971 * @see elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_style_set() for more details
5975 EAPI const char *elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_style_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
5977 * @brief Disable size restrictions on an object's tooltip
5978 * @param item The tooltip's anchor object
5979 * @param disable If EINA_TRUE, size restrictions are disabled
5980 * @return EINA_FALSE on failure, EINA_TRUE on success
5982 * This function allows a tooltip to expand beyond its parant window's canvas.
5983 * It will instead be limited only by the size of the display.
5985 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_size_restrict_disable(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, Eina_Bool disable);
5987 * @brief Retrieve size restriction state of an object's tooltip
5988 * @param item The tooltip's anchor object
5989 * @return If EINA_TRUE, size restrictions are disabled
5991 * This function returns whether a tooltip is allowed to expand beyond
5992 * its parant window's canvas.
5993 * It will instead be limited only by the size of the display.
5995 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_item_tooltip_size_restrict_disabled_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item);
5997 * Set the type of mouse pointer/cursor decoration to be shown,
5998 * when the mouse pointer is over the given gengrid widget item
6000 * @param item gengrid item to customize cursor on
6001 * @param cursor the cursor type's name
6003 * This function works analogously as elm_object_cursor_set(), but
6004 * here the cursor's changing area is restricted to the item's
6005 * area, and not the whole widget's. Note that that item cursors
6006 * have precedence over widget cursors, so that a mouse over @p
6007 * item will always show cursor @p type.
6009 * If this function is called twice for an object, a previously set
6010 * cursor will be unset on the second call.
6012 * @see elm_object_cursor_set()
6013 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_get()
6014 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_unset()
6018 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_cursor_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, const char *cursor) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6021 * Get the type of mouse pointer/cursor decoration set to be shown,
6022 * when the mouse pointer is over the given gengrid widget item
6024 * @param item gengrid item with custom cursor set
6025 * @return the cursor type's name or @c NULL, if no custom cursors
6026 * were set to @p item (and on errors)
6028 * @see elm_object_cursor_get()
6029 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_set() for more details
6030 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_unset()
6034 EAPI const char *elm_gengrid_item_cursor_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6037 * Unset any custom mouse pointer/cursor decoration set to be
6038 * shown, when the mouse pointer is over the given gengrid widget
6039 * item, thus making it show the @b default cursor again.
6041 * @param item a gengrid item
6043 * Use this call to undo any custom settings on this item's cursor
6044 * decoration, bringing it back to defaults (no custom style set).
6046 * @see elm_object_cursor_unset()
6047 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_set() for more details
6051 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_cursor_unset(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6054 * Set a different @b style for a given custom cursor set for a
6057 * @param item gengrid item with custom cursor set
6058 * @param style the <b>theme style</b> to use (e.g. @c "default",
6059 * @c "transparent", etc)
6061 * This function only makes sense when one is using custom mouse
6062 * cursor decorations <b>defined in a theme file</b> , which can
6063 * have, given a cursor name/type, <b>alternate styles</b> on
6064 * it. It works analogously as elm_object_cursor_style_set(), but
6065 * here applied only to gengrid item objects.
6067 * @warning Before you set a cursor style you should have defined a
6068 * custom cursor previously on the item, with
6069 * elm_gengrid_item_cursor_set()
6071 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_engine_only_set()
6072 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_style_get()
6076 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_cursor_style_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6079 * Get the current @b style set for a given gengrid item's custom
6082 * @param item gengrid item with custom cursor set.
6083 * @return style the cursor style in use. If the object does not
6084 * have a cursor set, then @c NULL is returned.
6086 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_style_set() for more details
6090 EAPI const char *elm_gengrid_item_cursor_style_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6093 * Set if the (custom) cursor for a given gengrid item should be
6094 * searched in its theme, also, or should only rely on the
6097 * @param item item with custom (custom) cursor already set on
6098 * @param engine_only Use @c EINA_TRUE to have cursors looked for
6099 * only on those provided by the rendering engine, @c EINA_FALSE to
6100 * have them searched on the widget's theme, as well.
6102 * @note This call is of use only if you've set a custom cursor
6103 * for gengrid items, with elm_gengrid_item_cursor_set().
6105 * @note By default, cursors will only be looked for between those
6106 * provided by the rendering engine.
6110 EAPI void elm_gengrid_item_cursor_engine_only_set(Elm_Gengrid_Item *item, Eina_Bool engine_only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6113 * Get if the (custom) cursor for a given gengrid item is being
6114 * searched in its theme, also, or is only relying on the rendering
6117 * @param item a gengrid item
6118 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if cursors are being looked for only on
6119 * those provided by the rendering engine, @c EINA_FALSE if they
6120 * are being searched on the widget's theme, as well.
6122 * @see elm_gengrid_item_cursor_engine_only_set(), for more details
6126 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gengrid_item_cursor_engine_only_get(const Elm_Gengrid_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6129 * Remove all items from a given gengrid widget
6131 * @param obj The gengrid object.
6133 * This removes (and deletes) all items in @p obj, leaving it
6136 * @see elm_gengrid_item_del(), to remove just one item.
6140 EAPI void elm_gengrid_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6143 * Get the selected item in a given gengrid widget
6145 * @param obj The gengrid object.
6146 * @return The selected item's handleor @c NULL, if none is
6147 * selected at the moment (and on errors)
6149 * This returns the selected item in @p obj. If multi selection is
6150 * enabled on @p obj (@see elm_gengrid_multi_select_set()), only
6151 * the first item in the list is selected, which might not be very
6152 * useful. For that case, see elm_gengrid_selected_items_get().
6156 EAPI Elm_Gengrid_Item *elm_gengrid_selected_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6159 * Get <b>a list</b> of selected items in a given gengrid
6161 * @param obj The gengrid object.
6162 * @return The list of selected items or @c NULL, if none is
6163 * selected at the moment (and on errors)
6165 * This returns a list of the selected items, in the order that
6166 * they appear in the grid. This list is only valid as long as no
6167 * more items are selected or unselected (or unselected implictly
6168 * by deletion). The list contains #Elm_Gengrid_Item pointers as
6171 * @see elm_gengrid_selected_item_get()
6175 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_gengrid_selected_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6182 * @defgroup Clock Clock
6184 * @image html img/widget/clock/preview-00.png
6185 * @image latex img/widget/clock/preview-00.eps
6187 * This is a @b digital clock widget. In its default theme, it has a
6188 * vintage "flipping numbers clock" appearance, which will animate
6189 * sheets of individual algarisms individually as time goes by.
6191 * A newly created clock will fetch system's time (already
6192 * considering local time adjustments) to start with, and will tick
6193 * accondingly. It may or may not show seconds.
6195 * Clocks have an @b edition mode. When in it, the sheets will
6196 * display extra arrow indications on the top and bottom and the
6197 * user may click on them to raise or lower the time values. After
6198 * it's told to exit edition mode, it will keep ticking with that
6199 * new time set (it keeps the difference from local time).
6201 * Also, when under edition mode, user clicks on the cited arrows
6202 * which are @b held for some time will make the clock to flip the
6203 * sheet, thus editing the time, continuosly and automatically for
6204 * the user. The interval between sheet flips will keep growing in
6205 * time, so that it helps the user to reach a time which is distant
6208 * The time display is, by default, in military mode (24h), but an
6209 * am/pm indicator may be optionally shown, too, when it will
6212 * Smart callbacks one can register to:
6213 * - "changed" - the clock's user changed the time
6215 * Here is an example on its usage:
6216 * @li @ref clock_example
6225 * Identifiers for which clock digits should be editable, when a
6226 * clock widget is in edition mode. Values may be ORed together to
6227 * make a mask, naturally.
6229 * @see elm_clock_edit_set()
6230 * @see elm_clock_digit_edit_set()
6232 typedef enum _Elm_Clock_Digedit
6234 ELM_CLOCK_NONE = 0, /**< Default value. Means that all digits are editable, when in edition mode. */
6235 ELM_CLOCK_HOUR_DECIMAL = 1 << 0, /**< Decimal algarism of hours value should be editable */
6236 ELM_CLOCK_HOUR_UNIT = 1 << 1, /**< Unit algarism of hours value should be editable */
6237 ELM_CLOCK_MIN_DECIMAL = 1 << 2, /**< Decimal algarism of minutes value should be editable */
6238 ELM_CLOCK_MIN_UNIT = 1 << 3, /**< Unit algarism of minutes value should be editable */
6239 ELM_CLOCK_SEC_DECIMAL = 1 << 4, /**< Decimal algarism of seconds value should be editable */
6240 ELM_CLOCK_SEC_UNIT = 1 << 5, /**< Unit algarism of seconds value should be editable */
6241 ELM_CLOCK_ALL = (1 << 6) - 1 /**< All digits should be editable */
6242 } Elm_Clock_Digedit;
6245 * Add a new clock widget to the given parent Elementary
6246 * (container) object
6248 * @param parent The parent object
6249 * @return a new clock widget handle or @c NULL, on errors
6251 * This function inserts a new clock widget on the canvas.
6255 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_clock_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6258 * Set a clock widget's time, programmatically
6260 * @param obj The clock widget object
6261 * @param hrs The hours to set
6262 * @param min The minutes to set
6263 * @param sec The secondes to set
6265 * This function updates the time that is showed by the clock
6268 * Values @b must be set within the following ranges:
6269 * - 0 - 23, for hours
6270 * - 0 - 59, for minutes
6271 * - 0 - 59, for seconds,
6273 * even if the clock is not in "military" mode.
6275 * @warning The behavior for values set out of those ranges is @b
6280 EAPI void elm_clock_time_set(Evas_Object *obj, int hrs, int min, int sec) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6283 * Get a clock widget's time values
6285 * @param obj The clock object
6286 * @param[out] hrs Pointer to the variable to get the hours value
6287 * @param[out] min Pointer to the variable to get the minutes value
6288 * @param[out] sec Pointer to the variable to get the seconds value
6290 * This function gets the time set for @p obj, returning
6291 * it on the variables passed as the arguments to function
6293 * @note Use @c NULL pointers on the time values you're not
6294 * interested in: they'll be ignored by the function.
6298 EAPI void elm_clock_time_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *hrs, int *min, int *sec) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6301 * Set whether a given clock widget is under <b>edition mode</b> or
6302 * under (default) displaying-only mode.
6304 * @param obj The clock object
6305 * @param edit @c EINA_TRUE to put it in edition, @c EINA_FALSE to
6306 * put it back to "displaying only" mode
6308 * This function makes a clock's time to be editable or not <b>by
6309 * user interaction</b>. When in edition mode, clocks @b stop
6310 * ticking, until one brings them back to canonical mode. The
6311 * elm_clock_digit_edit_set() function will influence which digits
6312 * of the clock will be editable. By default, all of them will be
6313 * (#ELM_CLOCK_NONE).
6315 * @note am/pm sheets, if being shown, will @b always be editable
6316 * under edition mode.
6318 * @see elm_clock_edit_get()
6322 EAPI void elm_clock_edit_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool edit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6325 * Retrieve whether a given clock widget is under <b>edition
6326 * mode</b> or under (default) displaying-only mode.
6328 * @param obj The clock object
6329 * @param edit @c EINA_TRUE, if it's in edition mode, @c EINA_FALSE
6332 * This function retrieves whether the clock's time can be edited
6333 * or not by user interaction.
6335 * @see elm_clock_edit_set() for more details
6339 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_clock_edit_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6342 * Set what digits of the given clock widget should be editable
6343 * when in edition mode.
6345 * @param obj The clock object
6346 * @param digedit Bit mask indicating the digits to be editable
6347 * (values in #Elm_Clock_Digedit).
6349 * If the @p digedit param is #ELM_CLOCK_NONE, editing will be
6350 * disabled on @p obj (same effect as elm_clock_edit_set(), with @c
6353 * @see elm_clock_digit_edit_get()
6357 EAPI void elm_clock_digit_edit_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Clock_Digedit digedit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6360 * Retrieve what digits of the given clock widget should be
6361 * editable when in edition mode.
6363 * @param obj The clock object
6364 * @return Bit mask indicating the digits to be editable
6365 * (values in #Elm_Clock_Digedit).
6367 * @see elm_clock_digit_edit_set() for more details
6371 EAPI Elm_Clock_Digedit elm_clock_digit_edit_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6374 * Set if the given clock widget must show hours in military or
6377 * @param obj The clock object
6378 * @param am_pm @c EINA_TRUE to put it in am/pm mode, @c EINA_FALSE
6381 * This function sets if the clock must show hours in military or
6382 * am/pm mode. In some countries like Brazil the military mode
6383 * (00-24h-format) is used, in opposition to the USA, where the
6384 * am/pm mode is more commonly used.
6386 * @see elm_clock_show_am_pm_get()
6390 EAPI void elm_clock_show_am_pm_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool am_pm) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6393 * Get if the given clock widget shows hours in military or am/pm
6396 * @param obj The clock object
6397 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if in am/pm mode, @c EINA_FALSE if in
6400 * This function gets if the clock shows hours in military or am/pm
6403 * @see elm_clock_show_am_pm_set() for more details
6407 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_clock_show_am_pm_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6410 * Set if the given clock widget must show time with seconds or not
6412 * @param obj The clock object
6413 * @param seconds @c EINA_TRUE to show seconds, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
6415 * This function sets if the given clock must show or not elapsed
6416 * seconds. By default, they are @b not shown.
6418 * @see elm_clock_show_seconds_get()
6422 EAPI void elm_clock_show_seconds_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool seconds) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6425 * Get whether the given clock widget is showing time with seconds
6428 * @param obj The clock object
6429 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if it's showing seconds, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
6431 * This function gets whether @p obj is showing or not the elapsed
6434 * @see elm_clock_show_seconds_set()
6438 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_clock_show_seconds_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6441 * Set the interval on time updates for an user mouse button hold
6442 * on clock widgets' time edition.
6444 * @param obj The clock object
6445 * @param interval The (first) interval value in seconds
6447 * This interval value is @b decreased while the user holds the
6448 * mouse pointer either incrementing or decrementing a given the
6449 * clock digit's value.
6451 * This helps the user to get to a given time distant from the
6452 * current one easier/faster, as it will start to flip quicker and
6453 * quicker on mouse button holds.
6455 * The calculation for the next flip interval value, starting from
6456 * the one set with this call, is the previous interval divided by
6457 * 1.05, so it decreases a little bit.
6459 * The default starting interval value for automatic flips is
6462 * @see elm_clock_interval_get()
6466 EAPI void elm_clock_interval_set(Evas_Object *obj, double interval) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6469 * Get the interval on time updates for an user mouse button hold
6470 * on clock widgets' time edition.
6472 * @param obj The clock object
6473 * @return The (first) interval value, in seconds, set on it
6475 * @see elm_clock_interval_set() for more details
6479 EAPI double elm_clock_interval_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6486 * @defgroup Layout Layout
6488 * @image html img/widget/layout/preview-00.png
6489 * @image latex img/widget/layout/preview-00.eps width=\textwidth
6491 * @image html img/layout-predefined.png
6492 * @image latex img/layout-predefined.eps width=\textwidth
6494 * This is a container widget that takes a standard Edje design file and
6495 * wraps it very thinly in a widget.
6497 * An Edje design (theme) file has a very wide range of possibilities to
6498 * describe the behavior of elements added to the Layout. Check out the Edje
6499 * documentation and the EDC reference to get more information about what can
6500 * be done with Edje.
6502 * Just like @ref List, @ref Box, and other container widgets, any
6503 * object added to the Layout will become its child, meaning that it will be
6504 * deleted if the Layout is deleted, move if the Layout is moved, and so on.
6506 * The Layout widget can contain as many Contents, Boxes or Tables as
6507 * described in its theme file. For instance, objects can be added to
6508 * different Tables by specifying the respective Table part names. The same
6509 * is valid for Content and Box.
6511 * The objects added as child of the Layout will behave as described in the
6512 * part description where they were added. There are 3 possible types of
6513 * parts where a child can be added:
6515 * @section secContent Content (SWALLOW part)
6517 * Only one object can be added to the @c SWALLOW part (but you still can
6518 * have many @c SWALLOW parts and one object on each of them). Use the @c
6519 * elm_layout_content_* set of functions to set, retrieve and unset objects
6520 * as content of the @c SWALLOW. After being set to this part, the object
6521 * size, position, visibility, clipping and other description properties
6522 * will be totally controled by the description of the given part (inside
6523 * the Edje theme file).
6525 * One can use @c evas_object_size_hint_* functions on the child to have some
6526 * kind of control over its behavior, but the resulting behavior will still
6527 * depend heavily on the @c SWALLOW part description.
6529 * The Edje theme also can change the part description, based on signals or
6530 * scripts running inside the theme. This change can also be animated. All of
6531 * this will affect the child object set as content accordingly. The object
6532 * size will be changed if the part size is changed, it will animate move if
6533 * the part is moving, and so on.
6535 * The following picture demonstrates a Layout widget with a child object
6536 * added to its @c SWALLOW:
6538 * @image html layout_swallow.png
6539 * @image latex layout_swallow.png width=\textwidth
6541 * @section secBox Box (BOX part)
6543 * An Edje @c BOX part is very similar to the Elementary @ref Box widget. It
6544 * allows one to add objects to the box and have them distributed along its
6545 * area, accordingly to the specified @a layout property (now by @a layout we
6546 * mean the chosen layouting design of the Box, not the Layout widget
6549 * A similar effect for having a box with its position, size and other things
6550 * controled by the Layout theme would be to create an Elementary @ref Box
6551 * widget and add it as a Content in the @c SWALLOW part.
6553 * The main difference of using the Layout Box is that its behavior, the box
6554 * properties like layouting format, padding, align, etc. will be all
6555 * controled by the theme. This means, for example, that a signal could be
6556 * sent to the Layout theme (with elm_object_signal_emit()) and the theme
6557 * handled the signal by changing the box padding, or align, or both. Using
6558 * the Elementary @ref Box widget is not necessarily harder or easier, it
6559 * just depends on the circunstances and requirements.
6561 * The Layout Box can be used through the @c elm_layout_box_* set of
6564 * The following picture demonstrates a Layout widget with many child objects
6565 * added to its @c BOX part:
6567 * @image html layout_box.png
6568 * @image latex layout_box.png width=\textwidth
6570 * @section secTable Table (TABLE part)
6572 * Just like the @ref secBox, the Layout Table is very similar to the
6573 * Elementary @ref Table widget. It allows one to add objects to the Table
6574 * specifying the row and column where the object should be added, and any
6575 * column or row span if necessary.
6577 * Again, we could have this design by adding a @ref Table widget to the @c
6578 * SWALLOW part using elm_layout_content_set(). The same difference happens
6579 * here when choosing to use the Layout Table (a @c TABLE part) instead of
6580 * the @ref Table plus @c SWALLOW part. It's just a matter of convenience.
6582 * The Layout Table can be used through the @c elm_layout_table_* set of
6585 * The following picture demonstrates a Layout widget with many child objects
6586 * added to its @c TABLE part:
6588 * @image html layout_table.png
6589 * @image latex layout_table.png width=\textwidth
6591 * @section secPredef Predefined Layouts
6593 * Another interesting thing about the Layout widget is that it offers some
6594 * predefined themes that come with the default Elementary theme. These
6595 * themes can be set by the call elm_layout_theme_set(), and provide some
6596 * basic functionality depending on the theme used.
6598 * Most of them already send some signals, some already provide a toolbar or
6599 * back and next buttons.
6601 * These are available predefined theme layouts. All of them have class = @c
6602 * layout, group = @c application, and style = one of the following options:
6604 * @li @c toolbar-content - application with toolbar and main content area
6605 * @li @c toolbar-content-back - application with toolbar and main content
6606 * area with a back button and title area
6607 * @li @c toolbar-content-back-next - application with toolbar and main
6608 * content area with a back and next buttons and title area
6609 * @li @c content-back - application with a main content area with a back
6610 * button and title area
6611 * @li @c content-back-next - application with a main content area with a
6612 * back and next buttons and title area
6613 * @li @c toolbar-vbox - application with toolbar and main content area as a
6615 * @li @c toolbar-table - application with toolbar and main content area as a
6618 * @section secExamples Examples
6620 * Some examples of the Layout widget can be found here:
6621 * @li @ref layout_example_01
6622 * @li @ref layout_example_02
6623 * @li @ref layout_example_03
6624 * @li @ref layout_example_edc
6629 * Add a new layout to the parent
6631 * @param parent The parent object
6632 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
6634 * @see elm_layout_file_set()
6635 * @see elm_layout_theme_set()
6639 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_layout_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6641 * Set the file that will be used as layout
6643 * @param obj The layout object
6644 * @param file The path to file (edj) that will be used as layout
6645 * @param group The group that the layout belongs in edje file
6647 * @return (1 = success, 0 = error)
6651 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_layout_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file, const char *group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6653 * Set the edje group from the elementary theme that will be used as layout
6655 * @param obj The layout object
6656 * @param clas the clas of the group
6657 * @param group the group
6658 * @param style the style to used
6660 * @return (1 = success, 0 = error)
6664 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_layout_theme_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *clas, const char *group, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6666 * Set the layout content.
6668 * @param obj The layout object
6669 * @param swallow The swallow part name in the edje file
6670 * @param content The child that will be added in this layout object
6672 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
6673 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
6674 * elm_layout_content_unset() function.
6676 * @note In an Edje theme, the part used as a content container is called @c
6677 * SWALLOW. This is why the parameter name is called @p swallow, but it is
6678 * expected to be a part name just like the second parameter of
6679 * elm_layout_box_append().
6681 * @see elm_layout_box_append()
6682 * @see elm_layout_content_get()
6683 * @see elm_layout_content_unset()
6688 EAPI void elm_layout_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *swallow, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6690 * Get the child object in the given content part.
6692 * @param obj The layout object
6693 * @param swallow The SWALLOW part to get its content
6695 * @return The swallowed object or NULL if none or an error occurred
6697 * @see elm_layout_content_set()
6701 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_layout_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *swallow) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6703 * Unset the layout content.
6705 * @param obj The layout object
6706 * @param swallow The swallow part name in the edje file
6707 * @return The content that was being used
6709 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this part.
6711 * @see elm_layout_content_set()
6715 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_layout_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj, const char *swallow) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6717 * Set the text of the given part
6719 * @param obj The layout object
6720 * @param part The TEXT part where to set the text
6721 * @param text The text to set
6724 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_* instead.
6726 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_layout_text_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6728 * Get the text set in the given part
6730 * @param obj The layout object
6731 * @param part The TEXT part to retrieve the text off
6733 * @return The text set in @p part
6736 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_* instead.
6738 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_layout_text_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *part) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6740 * Append child to layout box part.
6742 * @param obj the layout object
6743 * @param part the box part to which the object will be appended.
6744 * @param child the child object to append to box.
6746 * Once the object is appended, it will become child of the layout. Its
6747 * lifetime will be bound to the layout, whenever the layout dies the child
6748 * will be deleted automatically. One should use elm_layout_box_remove() to
6749 * make this layout forget about the object.
6751 * @see elm_layout_box_prepend()
6752 * @see elm_layout_box_insert_before()
6753 * @see elm_layout_box_insert_at()
6754 * @see elm_layout_box_remove()
6758 EAPI void elm_layout_box_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Evas_Object *child) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6760 * Prepend child to layout box part.
6762 * @param obj the layout object
6763 * @param part the box part to prepend.
6764 * @param child the child object to prepend to box.
6766 * Once the object is prepended, it will become child of the layout. Its
6767 * lifetime will be bound to the layout, whenever the layout dies the child
6768 * will be deleted automatically. One should use elm_layout_box_remove() to
6769 * make this layout forget about the object.
6771 * @see elm_layout_box_append()
6772 * @see elm_layout_box_insert_before()
6773 * @see elm_layout_box_insert_at()
6774 * @see elm_layout_box_remove()
6778 EAPI void elm_layout_box_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Evas_Object *child) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6780 * Insert child to layout box part before a reference object.
6782 * @param obj the layout object
6783 * @param part the box part to insert.
6784 * @param child the child object to insert into box.
6785 * @param reference another reference object to insert before in box.
6787 * Once the object is inserted, it will become child of the layout. Its
6788 * lifetime will be bound to the layout, whenever the layout dies the child
6789 * will be deleted automatically. One should use elm_layout_box_remove() to
6790 * make this layout forget about the object.
6792 * @see elm_layout_box_append()
6793 * @see elm_layout_box_prepend()
6794 * @see elm_layout_box_insert_before()
6795 * @see elm_layout_box_remove()
6799 EAPI void elm_layout_box_insert_before(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Evas_Object *child, const Evas_Object *reference) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6801 * Insert child to layout box part at a given position.
6803 * @param obj the layout object
6804 * @param part the box part to insert.
6805 * @param child the child object to insert into box.
6806 * @param pos the numeric position >=0 to insert the child.
6808 * Once the object is inserted, it will become child of the layout. Its
6809 * lifetime will be bound to the layout, whenever the layout dies the child
6810 * will be deleted automatically. One should use elm_layout_box_remove() to
6811 * make this layout forget about the object.
6813 * @see elm_layout_box_append()
6814 * @see elm_layout_box_prepend()
6815 * @see elm_layout_box_insert_before()
6816 * @see elm_layout_box_remove()
6820 EAPI void elm_layout_box_insert_at(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Evas_Object *child, unsigned int pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6822 * Remove a child of the given part box.
6824 * @param obj The layout object
6825 * @param part The box part name to remove child.
6826 * @param child The object to remove from box.
6827 * @return The object that was being used, or NULL if not found.
6829 * The object will be removed from the box part and its lifetime will
6830 * not be handled by the layout anymore. This is equivalent to
6831 * elm_layout_content_unset() for box.
6833 * @see elm_layout_box_append()
6834 * @see elm_layout_box_remove_all()
6838 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_layout_box_remove(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Evas_Object *child) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2, 3);
6840 * Remove all child of the given part box.
6842 * @param obj The layout object
6843 * @param part The box part name to remove child.
6844 * @param clear If EINA_TRUE, then all objects will be deleted as
6845 * well, otherwise they will just be removed and will be
6846 * dangling on the canvas.
6848 * The objects will be removed from the box part and their lifetime will
6849 * not be handled by the layout anymore. This is equivalent to
6850 * elm_layout_box_remove() for all box children.
6852 * @see elm_layout_box_append()
6853 * @see elm_layout_box_remove()
6857 EAPI void elm_layout_box_remove_all(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Eina_Bool clear) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
6859 * Insert child to layout table part.
6861 * @param obj the layout object
6862 * @param part the box part to pack child.
6863 * @param child_obj the child object to pack into table.
6864 * @param col the column to which the child should be added. (>= 0)
6865 * @param row the row to which the child should be added. (>= 0)
6866 * @param colspan how many columns should be used to store this object. (>=
6868 * @param rowspan how many rows should be used to store this object. (>= 1)
6870 * Once the object is inserted, it will become child of the table. Its
6871 * lifetime will be bound to the layout, and whenever the layout dies the
6872 * child will be deleted automatically. One should use
6873 * elm_layout_table_remove() to make this layout forget about the object.
6875 * If @p colspan or @p rowspan are bigger than 1, that object will occupy
6876 * more space than a single cell. For instance, the following code:
6878 * elm_layout_table_pack(layout, "table_part", child, 0, 1, 3, 1);
6881 * Would result in an object being added like the following picture:
6883 * @image html layout_colspan.png
6884 * @image latex layout_colspan.eps width=\textwidth
6886 * @see elm_layout_table_unpack()
6887 * @see elm_layout_table_clear()
6891 EAPI void elm_layout_table_pack(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Evas_Object *child_obj, unsigned short col, unsigned short row, unsigned short colspan, unsigned short rowspan) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6893 * Unpack (remove) a child of the given part table.
6895 * @param obj The layout object
6896 * @param part The table part name to remove child.
6897 * @param child_obj The object to remove from table.
6898 * @return The object that was being used, or NULL if not found.
6900 * The object will be unpacked from the table part and its lifetime
6901 * will not be handled by the layout anymore. This is equivalent to
6902 * elm_layout_content_unset() for table.
6904 * @see elm_layout_table_pack()
6905 * @see elm_layout_table_clear()
6909 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_layout_table_unpack(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Evas_Object *child_obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2, 3);
6911 * Remove all child of the given part table.
6913 * @param obj The layout object
6914 * @param part The table part name to remove child.
6915 * @param clear If EINA_TRUE, then all objects will be deleted as
6916 * well, otherwise they will just be removed and will be
6917 * dangling on the canvas.
6919 * The objects will be removed from the table part and their lifetime will
6920 * not be handled by the layout anymore. This is equivalent to
6921 * elm_layout_table_unpack() for all table children.
6923 * @see elm_layout_table_pack()
6924 * @see elm_layout_table_unpack()
6928 EAPI void elm_layout_table_clear(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part, Eina_Bool clear) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
6930 * Get the edje layout
6932 * @param obj The layout object
6934 * @return A Evas_Object with the edje layout settings loaded
6935 * with function elm_layout_file_set
6937 * This returns the edje object. It is not expected to be used to then
6938 * swallow objects via edje_object_part_swallow() for example. Use
6939 * elm_layout_content_set() instead so child object handling and sizing is
6942 * @note This function should only be used if you really need to call some
6943 * low level Edje function on this edje object. All the common stuff (setting
6944 * text, emitting signals, hooking callbacks to signals, etc.) can be done
6945 * with proper elementary functions.
6947 * @see elm_object_signal_callback_add()
6948 * @see elm_object_signal_emit()
6949 * @see elm_object_text_part_set()
6950 * @see elm_layout_content_set()
6951 * @see elm_layout_box_append()
6952 * @see elm_layout_table_pack()
6953 * @see elm_layout_data_get()
6957 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_layout_edje_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
6959 * Get the edje data from the given layout
6961 * @param obj The layout object
6962 * @param key The data key
6964 * @return The edje data string
6966 * This function fetches data specified inside the edje theme of this layout.
6967 * This function return NULL if data is not found.
6969 * In EDC this comes from a data block within the group block that @p
6970 * obj was loaded from. E.g.
6977 * item: "key1" "value1";
6978 * item: "key2" "value2";
6986 EAPI const char *elm_layout_data_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *key) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
6990 * @param obj The layout object
6992 * Manually forces a sizing re-evaluation. This is useful when the minimum
6993 * size required by the edje theme of this layout has changed. The change on
6994 * the minimum size required by the edje theme is not immediately reported to
6995 * the elementary layout, so one needs to call this function in order to tell
6996 * the widget (layout) that it needs to reevaluate its own size.
6998 * The minimum size of the theme is calculated based on minimum size of
6999 * parts, the size of elements inside containers like box and table, etc. All
7000 * of this can change due to state changes, and that's when this function
7003 * Also note that a standard signal of "size,eval" "elm" emitted from the
7004 * edje object will cause this to happen too.
7008 EAPI void elm_layout_sizing_eval(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7009 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_layout_part_cursor_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part_name, const char *cursor) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
7010 EAPI const char *elm_layout_part_cursor_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *part_name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
7011 EAPI void elm_layout_part_cursor_unset(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part_name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
7012 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_layout_part_cursor_style_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part_name, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
7013 EAPI const char *elm_layout_part_cursor_style_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *part_name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
7014 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_layout_part_cursor_engine_only_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *part_name, Eina_Bool engine_only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
7015 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_layout_part_cursor_engine_only_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *part_name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
7017 * @def elm_layout_icon_set
7018 * Convienience macro to set the icon object in a layout that follows the
7019 * Elementary naming convention for its parts.
7023 #define elm_layout_icon_set(_ly, _obj) \
7026 elm_layout_content_set((_ly), "elm.swallow.icon", (_obj)); \
7027 if ((_obj)) sig = "elm,state,icon,visible"; \
7028 else sig = "elm,state,icon,hidden"; \
7029 elm_object_signal_emit((_ly), sig, "elm"); \
7033 * @def elm_layout_icon_get
7034 * Convienience macro to get the icon object from a layout that follows the
7035 * Elementary naming convention for its parts.
7039 #define elm_layout_icon_get(_ly) \
7040 elm_layout_content_get((_ly), "elm.swallow.icon")
7043 * @def elm_layout_end_set
7044 * Convienience macro to set the end object in a layout that follows the
7045 * Elementary naming convention for its parts.
7049 #define elm_layout_end_set(_ly, _obj) \
7052 elm_layout_content_set((_ly), "elm.swallow.end", (_obj)); \
7053 if ((_obj)) sig = "elm,state,end,visible"; \
7054 else sig = "elm,state,end,hidden"; \
7055 elm_object_signal_emit((_ly), sig, "elm"); \
7059 * @def elm_layout_end_get
7060 * Convienience macro to get the end object in a layout that follows the
7061 * Elementary naming convention for its parts.
7065 #define elm_layout_end_get(_ly) \
7066 elm_layout_content_get((_ly), "elm.swallow.end")
7069 * @def elm_layout_label_set
7070 * Convienience macro to set the label in a layout that follows the
7071 * Elementary naming convention for its parts.
7074 * @deprecate use elm_object_text_* instead.
7076 #define elm_layout_label_set(_ly, _txt) \
7077 elm_layout_text_set((_ly), "elm.text", (_txt))
7080 * @def elm_layout_label_get
7081 * Convienience macro to get the label in a layout that follows the
7082 * Elementary naming convention for its parts.
7085 * @deprecate use elm_object_text_* instead.
7087 #define elm_layout_label_get(_ly) \
7088 elm_layout_text_get((_ly), "elm.text")
7090 /* smart callbacks called:
7091 * "theme,changed" - when elm theme is changed.
7095 * @defgroup Notify Notify
7097 * @image html img/widget/notify/preview-00.png
7098 * @image latex img/widget/notify/preview-00.eps
7100 * Display a container in a particular region of the parent(top, bottom,
7101 * etc. A timeout can be set to automatically hide the notify. This is so
7102 * that, after an evas_object_show() on a notify object, if a timeout was set
7103 * on it, it will @b automatically get hidden after that time.
7105 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
7106 * @li "timeout" - when timeout happens on notify and it's hidden
7107 * @li "block,clicked" - when a click outside of the notify happens
7109 * @ref tutorial_notify show usage of the API.
7114 * @brief Possible orient values for notify.
7116 * This values should be used in conjunction to elm_notify_orient_set() to
7117 * set the position in which the notify should appear(relative to its parent)
7118 * and in conjunction with elm_notify_orient_get() to know where the notify
7121 typedef enum _Elm_Notify_Orient
7123 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_TOP, /**< Notify should appear in the top of parent, default */
7124 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_CENTER, /**< Notify should appear in the center of parent */
7125 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_BOTTOM, /**< Notify should appear in the bottom of parent */
7126 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_LEFT, /**< Notify should appear in the left of parent */
7127 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_RIGHT, /**< Notify should appear in the right of parent */
7128 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_TOP_LEFT, /**< Notify should appear in the top left of parent */
7129 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_TOP_RIGHT, /**< Notify should appear in the top right of parent */
7130 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_BOTTOM_LEFT, /**< Notify should appear in the bottom left of parent */
7131 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_BOTTOM_RIGHT, /**< Notify should appear in the bottom right of parent */
7132 ELM_NOTIFY_ORIENT_LAST /**< Sentinel value, @b don't use */
7133 } Elm_Notify_Orient;
7135 * @brief Add a new notify to the parent
7137 * @param parent The parent object
7138 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
7140 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_notify_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7142 * @brief Set the content of the notify widget
7144 * @param obj The notify object
7145 * @param content The content will be filled in this notify object
7147 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted. If
7148 * you want to keep that old content object, use the
7149 * elm_notify_content_unset() function.
7151 EAPI void elm_notify_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7153 * @brief Unset the content of the notify widget
7155 * @param obj The notify object
7156 * @return The content that was being used
7158 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this widget
7160 * @see elm_notify_content_set()
7162 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_notify_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7164 * @brief Return the content of the notify widget
7166 * @param obj The notify object
7167 * @return The content that is being used
7169 * @see elm_notify_content_set()
7171 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_notify_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7173 * @brief Set the notify parent
7175 * @param obj The notify object
7176 * @param content The new parent
7178 * Once the parent object is set, a previously set one will be disconnected
7181 EAPI void elm_notify_parent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7183 * @brief Get the notify parent
7185 * @param obj The notify object
7186 * @return The parent
7188 * @see elm_notify_parent_set()
7190 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_notify_parent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7192 * @brief Set the orientation
7194 * @param obj The notify object
7195 * @param orient The new orientation
7197 * Sets the position in which the notify will appear in its parent.
7199 * @see @ref Elm_Notify_Orient for possible values.
7201 EAPI void elm_notify_orient_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Notify_Orient orient) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7203 * @brief Return the orientation
7204 * @param obj The notify object
7205 * @return The orientation of the notification
7207 * @see elm_notify_orient_set()
7208 * @see Elm_Notify_Orient
7210 EAPI Elm_Notify_Orient elm_notify_orient_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7212 * @brief Set the time interval after which the notify window is going to be
7215 * @param obj The notify object
7216 * @param time The timeout in seconds
7218 * This function sets a timeout and starts the timer controlling when the
7219 * notify is hidden. Since calling evas_object_show() on a notify restarts
7220 * the timer controlling when the notify is hidden, setting this before the
7221 * notify is shown will in effect mean starting the timer when the notify is
7224 * @note Set a value <= 0.0 to disable a running timer.
7226 * @note If the value > 0.0 and the notify is previously visible, the
7227 * timer will be started with this value, canceling any running timer.
7229 EAPI void elm_notify_timeout_set(Evas_Object *obj, double timeout) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7231 * @brief Return the timeout value (in seconds)
7232 * @param obj the notify object
7234 * @see elm_notify_timeout_set()
7236 EAPI double elm_notify_timeout_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7238 * @brief Sets whether events should be passed to by a click outside
7241 * @param obj The notify object
7242 * @param repeats EINA_TRUE Events are repeats, else no
7244 * When true if the user clicks outside the window the events will be caught
7245 * by the others widgets, else the events are blocked.
7247 * @note The default value is EINA_TRUE.
7249 EAPI void elm_notify_repeat_events_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool repeat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7251 * @brief Return true if events are repeat below the notify object
7252 * @param obj the notify object
7254 * @see elm_notify_repeat_events_set()
7256 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_notify_repeat_events_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7262 * @defgroup Hover Hover
7264 * @image html img/widget/hover/preview-00.png
7265 * @image latex img/widget/hover/preview-00.eps
7267 * A Hover object will hover over its @p parent object at the @p target
7268 * location. Anything in the background will be given a darker coloring to
7269 * indicate that the hover object is on top (at the default theme). When the
7270 * hover is clicked it is dismissed(hidden), if the contents of the hover are
7271 * clicked that @b doesn't cause the hover to be dismissed.
7273 * @note The hover object will take up the entire space of @p target
7276 * Elementary has the following styles for the hover widget:
7280 * @li hoversel_vertical
7282 * The following are the available position for content:
7294 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
7295 * @li "clicked" - the user clicked the empty space in the hover to dismiss
7296 * @li "smart,changed" - a content object placed under the "smart"
7297 * policy was replaced to a new slot direction.
7299 * See @ref tutorial_hover for more information.
7303 typedef enum _Elm_Hover_Axis
7305 ELM_HOVER_AXIS_NONE, /**< ELM_HOVER_AXIS_NONE -- no prefered orientation */
7306 ELM_HOVER_AXIS_HORIZONTAL, /**< ELM_HOVER_AXIS_HORIZONTAL -- horizontal */
7307 ELM_HOVER_AXIS_VERTICAL, /**< ELM_HOVER_AXIS_VERTICAL -- vertical */
7308 ELM_HOVER_AXIS_BOTH /**< ELM_HOVER_AXIS_BOTH -- both */
7311 * @brief Adds a hover object to @p parent
7313 * @param parent The parent object
7314 * @return The hover object or NULL if one could not be created
7316 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hover_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7318 * @brief Sets the target object for the hover.
7320 * @param obj The hover object
7321 * @param target The object to center the hover onto. The hover
7323 * This function will cause the hover to be centered on the target object.
7325 EAPI void elm_hover_target_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *target) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7327 * @brief Gets the target object for the hover.
7329 * @param obj The hover object
7330 * @param parent The object to locate the hover over.
7332 * @see elm_hover_target_set()
7334 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hover_target_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7336 * @brief Sets the parent object for the hover.
7338 * @param obj The hover object
7339 * @param parent The object to locate the hover over.
7341 * This function will cause the hover to take up the entire space that the
7342 * parent object fills.
7344 EAPI void elm_hover_parent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7346 * @brief Gets the parent object for the hover.
7348 * @param obj The hover object
7349 * @return The parent object to locate the hover over.
7351 * @see elm_hover_parent_set()
7353 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hover_parent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7355 * @brief Sets the content of the hover object and the direction in which it
7358 * @param obj The hover object
7359 * @param swallow The direction that the object will be displayed
7360 * at. Accepted values are "left", "top-left", "top", "top-right",
7361 * "right", "bottom-right", "bottom", "bottom-left", "middle" and
7363 * @param content The content to place at @p swallow
7365 * Once the content object is set for a given direction, a previously
7366 * set one (on the same direction) will be deleted. If you want to
7367 * keep that old content object, use the elm_hover_content_unset()
7370 * All directions may have contents at the same time, except for
7371 * "smart". This is a special placement hint and its use case
7372 * independs of the calculations coming from
7373 * elm_hover_best_content_location_get(). Its use is for cases when
7374 * one desires only one hover content, but with a dinamic special
7375 * placement within the hover area. The content's geometry, whenever
7376 * it changes, will be used to decide on a best location not
7377 * extrapolating the hover's parent object view to show it in (still
7378 * being the hover's target determinant of its medium part -- move and
7379 * resize it to simulate finger sizes, for example). If one of the
7380 * directions other than "smart" are used, a previously content set
7381 * using it will be deleted, and vice-versa.
7383 EAPI void elm_hover_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *swallow, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7385 * @brief Get the content of the hover object, in a given direction.
7387 * Return the content object which was set for this widget in the
7388 * @p swallow direction.
7390 * @param obj The hover object
7391 * @param swallow The direction that the object was display at.
7392 * @return The content that was being used
7394 * @see elm_hover_content_set()
7396 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hover_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *swallow) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7398 * @brief Unset the content of the hover object, in a given direction.
7400 * Unparent and return the content object set at @p swallow direction.
7402 * @param obj The hover object
7403 * @param swallow The direction that the object was display at.
7404 * @return The content that was being used.
7406 * @see elm_hover_content_set()
7408 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hover_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj, const char *swallow) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7410 * @brief Returns the best swallow location for content in the hover.
7412 * @param obj The hover object
7413 * @param pref_axis The preferred orientation axis for the hover object to use
7414 * @return The edje location to place content into the hover or @c
7417 * Best is defined here as the location at which there is the most available
7420 * @p pref_axis may be one of
7421 * - @c ELM_HOVER_AXIS_NONE -- no prefered orientation
7422 * - @c ELM_HOVER_AXIS_HORIZONTAL -- horizontal
7423 * - @c ELM_HOVER_AXIS_VERTICAL -- vertical
7424 * - @c ELM_HOVER_AXIS_BOTH -- both
7426 * If ELM_HOVER_AXIS_HORIZONTAL is choosen the returned position will
7427 * nescessarily be along the horizontal axis("left" or "right"). If
7428 * ELM_HOVER_AXIS_VERTICAL is choosen the returned position will nescessarily
7429 * be along the vertical axis("top" or "bottom"). Chossing
7430 * ELM_HOVER_AXIS_BOTH or ELM_HOVER_AXIS_NONE has the same effect and the
7431 * returned position may be in either axis.
7433 * @see elm_hover_content_set()
7435 EAPI const char *elm_hover_best_content_location_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Hover_Axis pref_axis) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7442 * @defgroup Entry Entry
7444 * @image html img/widget/entry/preview-00.png
7445 * @image latex img/widget/entry/preview-00.eps width=\textwidth
7446 * @image html img/widget/entry/preview-01.png
7447 * @image latex img/widget/entry/preview-01.eps width=\textwidth
7448 * @image html img/widget/entry/preview-02.png
7449 * @image latex img/widget/entry/preview-02.eps width=\textwidth
7450 * @image html img/widget/entry/preview-03.png
7451 * @image latex img/widget/entry/preview-03.eps width=\textwidth
7453 * An entry is a convenience widget which shows a box that the user can
7454 * enter text into. Entries by default don't scroll, so they grow to
7455 * accomodate the entire text, resizing the parent window as needed. This
7456 * can be changed with the elm_entry_scrollable_set() function.
7458 * They can also be single line or multi line (the default) and when set
7459 * to multi line mode they support text wrapping in any of the modes
7460 * indicated by #Elm_Wrap_Type.
7462 * Other features include password mode, filtering of inserted text with
7463 * elm_entry_text_filter_append() and related functions, inline "items" and
7464 * formatted markup text.
7466 * @section entry-markup Formatted text
7468 * The markup tags supported by the Entry are defined by the theme, but
7469 * even when writing new themes or extensions it's a good idea to stick to
7470 * a sane default, to maintain coherency and avoid application breakages.
7471 * Currently defined by the default theme are the following tags:
7472 * @li \<br\>: Inserts a line break.
7473 * @li \<ps\>: Inserts a paragraph separator. This is preferred over line
7475 * @li \<tab\>: Inserts a tab.
7476 * @li \<em\>...\</em\>: Emphasis. Sets the @em oblique style for the
7478 * @li \<b\>...\</b\>: Sets the @b bold style for the enclosed text.
7479 * @li \<link\>...\</link\>: Underlines the enclosed text.
7480 * @li \<hilight\>...\</hilight\>: Hilights the enclosed text.
7482 * @section entry-special Special markups
7484 * Besides those used to format text, entries support two special markup
7485 * tags used to insert clickable portions of text or items inlined within
7488 * @subsection entry-anchors Anchors
7490 * Anchors are similar to HTML anchors. Text can be surrounded by \<a\> and
7491 * \</a\> tags and an event will be generated when this text is clicked,
7495 * This text is outside <a href=anc-01>but this one is an anchor</a>
7498 * The @c href attribute in the opening tag gives the name that will be
7499 * used to identify the anchor and it can be any valid utf8 string.
7501 * When an anchor is clicked, an @c "anchor,clicked" signal is emitted with
7502 * an #Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info in the @c event_info parameter for the
7503 * callback function. The same applies for "anchor,in" (mouse in), "anchor,out"
7504 * (mouse out), "anchor,down" (mouse down), and "anchor,up" (mouse up) events on
7507 * @subsection entry-items Items
7509 * Inlined in the text, any other @c Evas_Object can be inserted by using
7510 * \<item\> tags this way:
7513 * <item size=16x16 vsize=full href=emoticon/haha></item>
7516 * Just like with anchors, the @c href identifies each item, but these need,
7517 * in addition, to indicate their size, which is done using any one of
7518 * @c size, @c absize or @c relsize attributes. These attributes take their
7519 * value in the WxH format, where W is the width and H the height of the
7522 * @li absize: Absolute pixel size for the item. Whatever value is set will
7523 * be the item's size regardless of any scale value the object may have
7524 * been set to. The final line height will be adjusted to fit larger items.
7525 * @li size: Similar to @c absize, but it's adjusted to the scale value set
7527 * @li relsize: Size is adjusted for the item to fit within the current
7530 * Besides their size, items are specificed a @c vsize value that affects
7531 * how their final size and position are calculated. The possible values
7533 * @li ascent: Item will be placed within the line's baseline and its
7534 * ascent. That is, the height between the line where all characters are
7535 * positioned and the highest point in the line. For @c size and @c absize
7536 * items, the descent value will be added to the total line height to make
7537 * them fit. @c relsize items will be adjusted to fit within this space.
7538 * @li full: Items will be placed between the descent and ascent, or the
7539 * lowest point in the line and its highest.
7541 * The next image shows different configurations of items and how they
7542 * are the previously mentioned options affect their sizes. In all cases,
7543 * the green line indicates the ascent, blue for the baseline and red for
7546 * @image html entry_item.png
7547 * @image latex entry_item.eps width=\textwidth
7549 * And another one to show how size differs from absize. In the first one,
7550 * the scale value is set to 1.0, while the second one is using one of 2.0.
7552 * @image html entry_item_scale.png
7553 * @image latex entry_item_scale.eps width=\textwidth
7555 * After the size for an item is calculated, the entry will request an
7556 * object to place in its space. For this, the functions set with
7557 * elm_entry_item_provider_append() and related functions will be called
7558 * in order until one of them returns a @c non-NULL value. If no providers
7559 * are available, or all of them return @c NULL, then the entry falls back
7560 * to one of the internal defaults, provided the name matches with one of
7563 * All of the following are currently supported:
7566 * - emoticon/angry-shout
7567 * - emoticon/crazy-laugh
7568 * - emoticon/evil-laugh
7570 * - emoticon/goggle-smile
7572 * - emoticon/grumpy-smile
7574 * - emoticon/guilty-smile
7576 * - emoticon/half-smile
7577 * - emoticon/happy-panting
7579 * - emoticon/indifferent
7581 * - emoticon/knowing-grin
7583 * - emoticon/little-bit-sorry
7584 * - emoticon/love-lots
7586 * - emoticon/minimal-smile
7587 * - emoticon/not-happy
7588 * - emoticon/not-impressed
7590 * - emoticon/opensmile
7593 * - emoticon/squint-laugh
7594 * - emoticon/surprised
7595 * - emoticon/suspicious
7596 * - emoticon/tongue-dangling
7597 * - emoticon/tongue-poke
7599 * - emoticon/unhappy
7600 * - emoticon/very-sorry
7603 * - emoticon/worried
7606 * Alternatively, an item may reference an image by its path, using
7607 * the URI form @c file:///path/to/an/image.png and the entry will then
7608 * use that image for the item.
7610 * @section entry-files Loading and saving files
7612 * Entries have convinience functions to load text from a file and save
7613 * changes back to it after a short delay. The automatic saving is enabled
7614 * by default, but can be disabled with elm_entry_autosave_set() and files
7615 * can be loaded directly as plain text or have any markup in them
7616 * recognized. See elm_entry_file_set() for more details.
7618 * @section entry-signals Emitted signals
7620 * This widget emits the following signals:
7622 * @li "changed": The text within the entry was changed.
7623 * @li "activated": The enter key was pressed on a single line entry.
7624 * @li "press": A mouse button has been pressed on the entry.
7625 * @li "longpressed": A mouse button has been pressed and held for a couple
7627 * @li "clicked": The entry has been clicked (mouse press and release).
7628 * @li "clicked,double": The entry has been double clicked.
7629 * @li "clicked,triple": The entry has been triple clicked.
7630 * @li "focused": The entry has received focus.
7631 * @li "unfocused": The entry has lost focus.
7632 * @li "selection,paste": A paste of the clipboard contents was requested.
7633 * @li "selection,copy": A copy of the selected text into the clipboard was
7635 * @li "selection,cut": A cut of the selected text into the clipboard was
7637 * @li "selection,start": A selection has begun and no previous selection
7639 * @li "selection,changed": The current selection has changed.
7640 * @li "selection,cleared": The current selection has been cleared.
7641 * @li "cursor,changed": The cursor has changed position.
7642 * @li "anchor,clicked": An anchor has been clicked. The event_info
7643 * parameter for the callback will be an #Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info.
7644 * @li "anchor,in": Mouse cursor has moved into an anchor. The event_info
7645 * parameter for the callback will be an #Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info.
7646 * @li "anchor,out": Mouse cursor has moved out of an anchor. The event_info
7647 * parameter for the callback will be an #Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info.
7648 * @li "anchor,up": Mouse button has been unpressed on an anchor. The event_info
7649 * parameter for the callback will be an #Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info.
7650 * @li "anchor,down": Mouse button has been pressed on an anchor. The event_info
7651 * parameter for the callback will be an #Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info.
7652 * @li "preedit,changed": The preedit string has changed.
7654 * @section entry-examples
7656 * An overview of the Entry API can be seen in @ref entry_example_01
7661 * @typedef Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info
7663 * The info sent in the callback for the "anchor,clicked" signals emitted
7666 typedef struct _Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info;
7668 * @struct _Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info
7670 * The info sent in the callback for the "anchor,clicked" signals emitted
7673 struct _Elm_Entry_Anchor_Info
7675 const char *name; /**< The name of the anchor, as stated in its href */
7676 int button; /**< The mouse button used to click on it */
7677 Evas_Coord x, /**< Anchor geometry, relative to canvas */
7678 y, /**< Anchor geometry, relative to canvas */
7679 w, /**< Anchor geometry, relative to canvas */
7680 h; /**< Anchor geometry, relative to canvas */
7683 * @typedef Elm_Entry_Filter_Cb
7684 * This callback type is used by entry filters to modify text.
7685 * @param data The data specified as the last param when adding the filter
7686 * @param entry The entry object
7687 * @param text A pointer to the location of the text being filtered. This data can be modified,
7688 * but any additional allocations must be managed by the user.
7689 * @see elm_entry_text_filter_append
7690 * @see elm_entry_text_filter_prepend
7692 typedef void (*Elm_Entry_Filter_Cb)(void *data, Evas_Object *entry, char **text);
7695 * This adds an entry to @p parent object.
7697 * By default, entries are:
7701 * @li autosave is enabled
7703 * @param parent The parent object
7704 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
7706 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_entry_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7708 * Sets the entry to single line mode.
7710 * In single line mode, entries don't ever wrap when the text reaches the
7711 * edge, and instead they keep growing horizontally. Pressing the @c Enter
7712 * key will generate an @c "activate" event instead of adding a new line.
7714 * When @p single_line is @c EINA_FALSE, line wrapping takes effect again
7715 * and pressing enter will break the text into a different line
7716 * without generating any events.
7718 * @param obj The entry object
7719 * @param single_line If true, the text in the entry
7720 * will be on a single line.
7722 EAPI void elm_entry_single_line_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool single_line) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7724 * Gets whether the entry is set to be single line.
7726 * @param obj The entry object
7727 * @return single_line If true, the text in the entry is set to display
7730 * @see elm_entry_single_line_set()
7732 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_single_line_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7734 * Sets the entry to password mode.
7736 * In password mode, entries are implicitly single line and the display of
7737 * any text in them is replaced with asterisks (*).
7739 * @param obj The entry object
7740 * @param password If true, password mode is enabled.
7742 EAPI void elm_entry_password_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool password) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7744 * Gets whether the entry is set to password mode.
7746 * @param obj The entry object
7747 * @return If true, the entry is set to display all characters
7750 * @see elm_entry_password_set()
7752 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_password_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7754 * This sets the text displayed within the entry to @p entry.
7756 * @param obj The entry object
7757 * @param entry The text to be displayed
7759 * @deprecated Use elm_object_text_set() instead.
7761 EAPI void elm_entry_entry_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *entry) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7763 * This returns the text currently shown in object @p entry.
7764 * See also elm_entry_entry_set().
7766 * @param obj The entry object
7767 * @return The currently displayed text or NULL on failure
7769 * @deprecated Use elm_object_text_get() instead.
7771 EAPI const char *elm_entry_entry_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7773 * Appends @p entry to the text of the entry.
7775 * Adds the text in @p entry to the end of any text already present in the
7778 * The appended text is subject to any filters set for the widget.
7780 * @param obj The entry object
7781 * @param entry The text to be displayed
7783 * @see elm_entry_text_filter_append()
7785 EAPI void elm_entry_entry_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *entry) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7787 * Gets whether the entry is empty.
7789 * Empty means no text at all. If there are any markup tags, like an item
7790 * tag for which no provider finds anything, and no text is displayed, this
7791 * function still returns EINA_FALSE.
7793 * @param obj The entry object
7794 * @return EINA_TRUE if the entry is empty, EINA_FALSE otherwise.
7796 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_is_empty(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7798 * Gets any selected text within the entry.
7800 * If there's any selected text in the entry, this function returns it as
7801 * a string in markup format. NULL is returned if no selection exists or
7802 * if an error occurred.
7804 * The returned value points to an internal string and should not be freed
7805 * or modified in any way. If the @p entry object is deleted or its
7806 * contents are changed, the returned pointer should be considered invalid.
7808 * @param obj The entry object
7809 * @return The selected text within the entry or NULL on failure
7811 EAPI const char *elm_entry_selection_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7813 * Inserts the given text into the entry at the current cursor position.
7815 * This inserts text at the cursor position as if it was typed
7816 * by the user (note that this also allows markup which a user
7817 * can't just "type" as it would be converted to escaped text, so this
7818 * call can be used to insert things like emoticon items or bold push/pop
7819 * tags, other font and color change tags etc.)
7821 * If any selection exists, it will be replaced by the inserted text.
7823 * The inserted text is subject to any filters set for the widget.
7825 * @param obj The entry object
7826 * @param entry The text to insert
7828 * @see elm_entry_text_filter_append()
7830 EAPI void elm_entry_entry_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const char *entry) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7832 * Set the line wrap type to use on multi-line entries.
7834 * Sets the wrap type used by the entry to any of the specified in
7835 * #Elm_Wrap_Type. This tells how the text will be implicitly cut into a new
7836 * line (without inserting a line break or paragraph separator) when it
7837 * reaches the far edge of the widget.
7839 * Note that this only makes sense for multi-line entries. A widget set
7840 * to be single line will never wrap.
7842 * @param obj The entry object
7843 * @param wrap The wrap mode to use. See #Elm_Wrap_Type for details on them
7845 EAPI void elm_entry_line_wrap_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Wrap_Type wrap) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7847 * Gets the wrap mode the entry was set to use.
7849 * @param obj The entry object
7852 * @see also elm_entry_line_wrap_set()
7854 EAPI Elm_Wrap_Type elm_entry_line_wrap_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7856 * Sets if the entry is to be editable or not.
7858 * By default, entries are editable and when focused, any text input by the
7859 * user will be inserted at the current cursor position. But calling this
7860 * function with @p editable as EINA_FALSE will prevent the user from
7861 * inputting text into the entry.
7863 * The only way to change the text of a non-editable entry is to use
7864 * elm_object_text_set(), elm_entry_entry_insert() and other related
7867 * @param obj The entry object
7868 * @param editable If EINA_TRUE, user input will be inserted in the entry,
7869 * if not, the entry is read-only and no user input is allowed.
7871 EAPI void elm_entry_editable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool editable) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7873 * Gets whether the entry is editable or not.
7875 * @param obj The entry object
7876 * @return If true, the entry is editable by the user.
7877 * If false, it is not editable by the user
7879 * @see elm_entry_editable_set()
7881 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_editable_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7883 * This drops any existing text selection within the entry.
7885 * @param obj The entry object
7887 EAPI void elm_entry_select_none(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7889 * This selects all text within the entry.
7891 * @param obj The entry object
7893 EAPI void elm_entry_select_all(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7895 * This moves the cursor one place to the right within the entry.
7897 * @param obj The entry object
7898 * @return EINA_TRUE upon success, EINA_FALSE upon failure
7900 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_cursor_next(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7902 * This moves the cursor one place to the left within the entry.
7904 * @param obj The entry object
7905 * @return EINA_TRUE upon success, EINA_FALSE upon failure
7907 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_cursor_prev(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7909 * This moves the cursor one line up within the entry.
7911 * @param obj The entry object
7912 * @return EINA_TRUE upon success, EINA_FALSE upon failure
7914 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_cursor_up(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7916 * This moves the cursor one line down within the entry.
7918 * @param obj The entry object
7919 * @return EINA_TRUE upon success, EINA_FALSE upon failure
7921 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_cursor_down(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7923 * This moves the cursor to the beginning of the entry.
7925 * @param obj The entry object
7927 EAPI void elm_entry_cursor_begin_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7929 * This moves the cursor to the end of the entry.
7931 * @param obj The entry object
7933 EAPI void elm_entry_cursor_end_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7935 * This moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
7937 * @param obj The entry object
7939 EAPI void elm_entry_cursor_line_begin_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7941 * This moves the cursor to the end of the current line.
7943 * @param obj The entry object
7945 EAPI void elm_entry_cursor_line_end_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7947 * This begins a selection within the entry as though
7948 * the user were holding down the mouse button to make a selection.
7950 * @param obj The entry object
7952 EAPI void elm_entry_cursor_selection_begin(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7954 * This ends a selection within the entry as though
7955 * the user had just released the mouse button while making a selection.
7957 * @param obj The entry object
7959 EAPI void elm_entry_cursor_selection_end(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7961 * Gets whether a format node exists at the current cursor position.
7963 * A format node is anything that defines how the text is rendered. It can
7964 * be a visible format node, such as a line break or a paragraph separator,
7965 * or an invisible one, such as bold begin or end tag.
7966 * This function returns whether any format node exists at the current
7969 * @param obj The entry object
7970 * @return EINA_TRUE if the current cursor position contains a format node,
7971 * EINA_FALSE otherwise.
7973 * @see elm_entry_cursor_is_visible_format_get()
7975 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_cursor_is_format_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7977 * Gets if the current cursor position holds a visible format node.
7979 * @param obj The entry object
7980 * @return EINA_TRUE if the current cursor is a visible format, EINA_FALSE
7981 * if it's an invisible one or no format exists.
7983 * @see elm_entry_cursor_is_format_get()
7985 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_cursor_is_visible_format_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7987 * Gets the character pointed by the cursor at its current position.
7989 * This function returns a string with the utf8 character stored at the
7990 * current cursor position.
7991 * Only the text is returned, any format that may exist will not be part
7992 * of the return value.
7994 * @param obj The entry object
7995 * @return The text pointed by the cursors.
7997 EAPI const char *elm_entry_cursor_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
7999 * This function returns the geometry of the cursor.
8001 * It's useful if you want to draw something on the cursor (or where it is),
8002 * or for example in the case of scrolled entry where you want to show the
8005 * @param obj The entry object
8006 * @param x returned geometry
8007 * @param y returned geometry
8008 * @param w returned geometry
8009 * @param h returned geometry
8010 * @return EINA_TRUE upon success, EINA_FALSE upon failure
8012 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_cursor_geometry_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord *x, Evas_Coord *y, Evas_Coord *w, Evas_Coord *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8014 * Sets the cursor position in the entry to the given value
8016 * The value in @p pos is the index of the character position within the
8017 * contents of the string as returned by elm_entry_cursor_pos_get().
8019 * @param obj The entry object
8020 * @param pos The position of the cursor
8022 EAPI void elm_entry_cursor_pos_set(Evas_Object *obj, int pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8024 * Retrieves the current position of the cursor in the entry
8026 * @param obj The entry object
8027 * @return The cursor position
8029 EAPI int elm_entry_cursor_pos_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8031 * This executes a "cut" action on the selected text in the entry.
8033 * @param obj The entry object
8035 EAPI void elm_entry_selection_cut(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8037 * This executes a "copy" action on the selected text in the entry.
8039 * @param obj The entry object
8041 EAPI void elm_entry_selection_copy(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8043 * This executes a "paste" action in the entry.
8045 * @param obj The entry object
8047 EAPI void elm_entry_selection_paste(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8049 * This clears and frees the items in a entry's contextual (longpress)
8052 * @param obj The entry object
8054 * @see elm_entry_context_menu_item_add()
8056 EAPI void elm_entry_context_menu_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8058 * This adds an item to the entry's contextual menu.
8060 * A longpress on an entry will make the contextual menu show up, if this
8061 * hasn't been disabled with elm_entry_context_menu_disabled_set().
8062 * By default, this menu provides a few options like enabling selection mode,
8063 * which is useful on embedded devices that need to be explicit about it,
8064 * and when a selection exists it also shows the copy and cut actions.
8066 * With this function, developers can add other options to this menu to
8067 * perform any action they deem necessary.
8069 * @param obj The entry object
8070 * @param label The item's text label
8071 * @param icon_file The item's icon file
8072 * @param icon_type The item's icon type
8073 * @param func The callback to execute when the item is clicked
8074 * @param data The data to associate with the item for related functions
8076 EAPI void elm_entry_context_menu_item_add(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, const char *icon_file, Elm_Icon_Type icon_type, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8078 * This disables the entry's contextual (longpress) menu.
8080 * @param obj The entry object
8081 * @param disabled If true, the menu is disabled
8083 EAPI void elm_entry_context_menu_disabled_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8085 * This returns whether the entry's contextual (longpress) menu is
8088 * @param obj The entry object
8089 * @return If true, the menu is disabled
8091 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_context_menu_disabled_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8093 * This appends a custom item provider to the list for that entry
8095 * This appends the given callback. The list is walked from beginning to end
8096 * with each function called given the item href string in the text. If the
8097 * function returns an object handle other than NULL (it should create an
8098 * object to do this), then this object is used to replace that item. If
8099 * not the next provider is called until one provides an item object, or the
8100 * default provider in entry does.
8102 * @param obj The entry object
8103 * @param func The function called to provide the item object
8104 * @param data The data passed to @p func
8106 * @see @ref entry-items
8108 EAPI void elm_entry_item_provider_append(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8110 * This prepends a custom item provider to the list for that entry
8112 * This prepends the given callback. See elm_entry_item_provider_append() for
8115 * @param obj The entry object
8116 * @param func The function called to provide the item object
8117 * @param data The data passed to @p func
8119 EAPI void elm_entry_item_provider_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8121 * This removes a custom item provider to the list for that entry
8123 * This removes the given callback. See elm_entry_item_provider_append() for
8126 * @param obj The entry object
8127 * @param func The function called to provide the item object
8128 * @param data The data passed to @p func
8130 EAPI void elm_entry_item_provider_remove(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8132 * Append a filter function for text inserted in the entry
8134 * Append the given callback to the list. This functions will be called
8135 * whenever any text is inserted into the entry, with the text to be inserted
8136 * as a parameter. The callback function is free to alter the text in any way
8137 * it wants, but it must remember to free the given pointer and update it.
8138 * If the new text is to be discarded, the function can free it and set its
8139 * text parameter to NULL. This will also prevent any following filters from
8142 * @param obj The entry object
8143 * @param func The function to use as text filter
8144 * @param data User data to pass to @p func
8146 EAPI void elm_entry_text_filter_append(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Entry_Filter_Cb func, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8148 * Prepend a filter function for text insdrted in the entry
8150 * Prepend the given callback to the list. See elm_entry_text_filter_append()
8151 * for more information
8153 * @param obj The entry object
8154 * @param func The function to use as text filter
8155 * @param data User data to pass to @p func
8157 EAPI void elm_entry_text_filter_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Entry_Filter_Cb func, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8159 * Remove a filter from the list
8161 * Removes the given callback from the filter list. See
8162 * elm_entry_text_filter_append() for more information.
8164 * @param obj The entry object
8165 * @param func The filter function to remove
8166 * @param data The user data passed when adding the function
8168 EAPI void elm_entry_text_filter_remove(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Entry_Filter_Cb func, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8170 * This converts a markup (HTML-like) string into UTF-8.
8172 * The returned string is a malloc'ed buffer and it should be freed when
8173 * not needed anymore.
8175 * @param s The string (in markup) to be converted
8176 * @return The converted string (in UTF-8). It should be freed.
8178 EAPI char *elm_entry_markup_to_utf8(const char *s) EINA_MALLOC EINA_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
8180 * This converts a UTF-8 string into markup (HTML-like).
8182 * The returned string is a malloc'ed buffer and it should be freed when
8183 * not needed anymore.
8185 * @param s The string (in UTF-8) to be converted
8186 * @return The converted string (in markup). It should be freed.
8188 EAPI char *elm_entry_utf8_to_markup(const char *s) EINA_MALLOC EINA_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
8190 * This sets the file (and implicitly loads it) for the text to display and
8191 * then edit. All changes are written back to the file after a short delay if
8192 * the entry object is set to autosave (which is the default).
8194 * If the entry had any other file set previously, any changes made to it
8195 * will be saved if the autosave feature is enabled, otherwise, the file
8196 * will be silently discarded and any non-saved changes will be lost.
8198 * @param obj The entry object
8199 * @param file The path to the file to load and save
8200 * @param format The file format
8202 EAPI void elm_entry_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file, Elm_Text_Format format) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8204 * Gets the file being edited by the entry.
8206 * This function can be used to retrieve any file set on the entry for
8207 * edition, along with the format used to load and save it.
8209 * @param obj The entry object
8210 * @param file The path to the file to load and save
8211 * @param format The file format
8213 EAPI void elm_entry_file_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **file, Elm_Text_Format *format) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8215 * This function writes any changes made to the file set with
8216 * elm_entry_file_set()
8218 * @param obj The entry object
8220 EAPI void elm_entry_file_save(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8222 * This sets the entry object to 'autosave' the loaded text file or not.
8224 * @param obj The entry object
8225 * @param autosave Autosave the loaded file or not
8227 * @see elm_entry_file_set()
8229 EAPI void elm_entry_autosave_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool autosave) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8231 * This gets the entry object's 'autosave' status.
8233 * @param obj The entry object
8234 * @return Autosave the loaded file or not
8236 * @see elm_entry_file_set()
8238 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_autosave_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8240 * Control pasting of text and images for the widget.
8242 * Normally the entry allows both text and images to be pasted. By setting
8243 * textonly to be true, this prevents images from being pasted.
8245 * Note this only changes the behaviour of text.
8247 * @param obj The entry object
8248 * @param textonly paste mode - EINA_TRUE is text only, EINA_FALSE is
8251 EAPI void elm_entry_cnp_textonly_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool textonly) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8253 * Getting elm_entry text paste/drop mode.
8255 * In textonly mode, only text may be pasted or dropped into the widget.
8257 * @param obj The entry object
8258 * @return If the widget only accepts text from pastes.
8260 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_cnp_textonly_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8262 * Enable or disable scrolling in entry
8264 * Normally the entry is not scrollable unless you enable it with this call.
8266 * @param obj The entry object
8267 * @param scroll EINA_TRUE if it is to be scrollable, EINA_FALSE otherwise
8269 EAPI void elm_entry_scrollable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool scroll);
8271 * Get the scrollable state of the entry
8273 * Normally the entry is not scrollable. This gets the scrollable state
8274 * of the entry. See elm_entry_scrollable_set() for more information.
8276 * @param obj The entry object
8277 * @return The scrollable state
8279 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_entry_scrollable_get(const Evas_Object *obj);
8281 * This sets a widget to be displayed to the left of a scrolled entry.
8283 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8284 * @param icon The widget to display on the left side of the scrolled
8287 * @note A previously set widget will be destroyed.
8288 * @note If the object being set does not have minimum size hints set,
8289 * it won't get properly displayed.
8291 * @see elm_entry_end_set()
8293 EAPI void elm_entry_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon);
8295 * Gets the leftmost widget of the scrolled entry. This object is
8296 * owned by the scrolled entry and should not be modified.
8298 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8299 * @return the left widget inside the scroller
8301 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_entry_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj);
8303 * Unset the leftmost widget of the scrolled entry, unparenting and
8306 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8307 * @return the previously set icon sub-object of this entry, on
8310 * @see elm_entry_icon_set()
8312 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_entry_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj);
8314 * Sets the visibility of the left-side widget of the scrolled entry,
8315 * set by @elm_entry_icon_set().
8317 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8318 * @param setting EINA_TRUE if the object should be displayed,
8319 * EINA_FALSE if not.
8321 EAPI void elm_entry_icon_visible_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool setting);
8323 * This sets a widget to be displayed to the end of a scrolled entry.
8325 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8326 * @param end The widget to display on the right side of the scrolled
8329 * @note A previously set widget will be destroyed.
8330 * @note If the object being set does not have minimum size hints set,
8331 * it won't get properly displayed.
8333 * @see elm_entry_icon_set
8335 EAPI void elm_entry_end_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *end);
8337 * Gets the endmost widget of the scrolled entry. This object is owned
8338 * by the scrolled entry and should not be modified.
8340 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8341 * @return the right widget inside the scroller
8343 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_entry_end_get(const Evas_Object *obj);
8345 * Unset the endmost widget of the scrolled entry, unparenting and
8348 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8349 * @return the previously set icon sub-object of this entry, on
8352 * @see elm_entry_icon_set()
8354 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_entry_end_unset(Evas_Object *obj);
8356 * Sets the visibility of the end widget of the scrolled entry, set by
8357 * @elm_entry_end_set().
8359 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8360 * @param setting EINA_TRUE if the object should be displayed,
8361 * EINA_FALSE if not.
8363 EAPI void elm_entry_end_visible_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool setting);
8365 * This sets the scrolled entry's scrollbar policy (ie. enabling/disabling
8368 * Setting an entry to single-line mode with elm_entry_single_line_set()
8369 * will automatically disable the display of scrollbars when the entry
8370 * moves inside its scroller.
8372 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8373 * @param h The horizontal scrollbar policy to apply
8374 * @param v The vertical scrollbar policy to apply
8376 EAPI void elm_entry_scrollbar_policy_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy h, Elm_Scroller_Policy v);
8378 * This enables/disables bouncing within the entry.
8380 * This function sets whether the entry will bounce when scrolling reaches
8381 * the end of the contained entry.
8383 * @param obj The scrolled entry object
8384 * @param h The horizontal bounce state
8385 * @param v The vertical bounce state
8387 EAPI void elm_entry_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce);
8389 * Get the bounce mode
8391 * @param obj The Entry object
8392 * @param h_bounce Allow bounce horizontally
8393 * @param v_bounce Allow bounce vertically
8395 EAPI void elm_entry_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce);
8397 /* pre-made filters for entries */
8399 * @typedef Elm_Entry_Filter_Limit_Size
8401 * Data for the elm_entry_filter_limit_size() entry filter.
8403 typedef struct _Elm_Entry_Filter_Limit_Size Elm_Entry_Filter_Limit_Size;
8405 * @struct _Elm_Entry_Filter_Limit_Size
8407 * Data for the elm_entry_filter_limit_size() entry filter.
8409 struct _Elm_Entry_Filter_Limit_Size
8411 int max_char_count; /**< The maximum number of characters allowed. */
8412 int max_byte_count; /**< The maximum number of bytes allowed*/
8415 * Filter inserted text based on user defined character and byte limits
8417 * Add this filter to an entry to limit the characters that it will accept
8418 * based the the contents of the provided #Elm_Entry_Filter_Limit_Size.
8419 * The funtion works on the UTF-8 representation of the string, converting
8420 * it from the set markup, thus not accounting for any format in it.
8422 * The user must create an #Elm_Entry_Filter_Limit_Size structure and pass
8423 * it as data when setting the filter. In it, it's possible to set limits
8424 * by character count or bytes (any of them is disabled if 0), and both can
8425 * be set at the same time. In that case, it first checks for characters,
8428 * The function will cut the inserted text in order to allow only the first
8429 * number of characters that are still allowed. The cut is made in
8430 * characters, even when limiting by bytes, in order to always contain
8431 * valid ones and avoid half unicode characters making it in.
8433 * This filter, like any others, does not apply when setting the entry text
8434 * directly with elm_object_text_set() (or the deprecated
8435 * elm_entry_entry_set()).
8437 EAPI void elm_entry_filter_limit_size(void *data, Evas_Object *entry, char **text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2, 3);
8439 * @typedef Elm_Entry_Filter_Accept_Set
8441 * Data for the elm_entry_filter_accept_set() entry filter.
8443 typedef struct _Elm_Entry_Filter_Accept_Set Elm_Entry_Filter_Accept_Set;
8445 * @struct _Elm_Entry_Filter_Accept_Set
8447 * Data for the elm_entry_filter_accept_set() entry filter.
8449 struct _Elm_Entry_Filter_Accept_Set
8451 const char *accepted; /**< Set of characters accepted in the entry. */
8452 const char *rejected; /**< Set of characters rejected from the entry. */
8455 * Filter inserted text based on accepted or rejected sets of characters
8457 * Add this filter to an entry to restrict the set of accepted characters
8458 * based on the sets in the provided #Elm_Entry_Filter_Accept_Set.
8459 * This structure contains both accepted and rejected sets, but they are
8460 * mutually exclusive.
8462 * The @c accepted set takes preference, so if it is set, the filter will
8463 * only work based on the accepted characters, ignoring anything in the
8464 * @c rejected value. If @c accepted is @c NULL, then @c rejected is used.
8466 * In both cases, the function filters by matching utf8 characters to the
8467 * raw markup text, so it can be used to remove formatting tags.
8469 * This filter, like any others, does not apply when setting the entry text
8470 * directly with elm_object_text_set() (or the deprecated
8471 * elm_entry_entry_set()).
8473 EAPI void elm_entry_filter_accept_set(void *data, Evas_Object *entry, char **text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 3);
8478 /* composite widgets - these basically put together basic widgets above
8479 * in convenient packages that do more than basic stuff */
8483 * @defgroup Anchorview Anchorview
8485 * @image html img/widget/anchorview/preview-00.png
8486 * @image latex img/widget/anchorview/preview-00.eps
8488 * Anchorview is for displaying text that contains markup with anchors
8489 * like <c>\<a href=1234\>something\</\></c> in it.
8491 * Besides being styled differently, the anchorview widget provides the
8492 * necessary functionality so that clicking on these anchors brings up a
8493 * popup with user defined content such as "call", "add to contacts" or
8494 * "open web page". This popup is provided using the @ref Hover widget.
8496 * This widget is very similar to @ref Anchorblock, so refer to that
8497 * widget for an example. The only difference Anchorview has is that the
8498 * widget is already provided with scrolling functionality, so if the
8499 * text set to it is too large to fit in the given space, it will scroll,
8500 * whereas the @ref Anchorblock widget will keep growing to ensure all the
8501 * text can be displayed.
8503 * This widget emits the following signals:
8504 * @li "anchor,clicked": will be called when an anchor is clicked. The
8505 * @p event_info parameter on the callback will be a pointer of type
8506 * ::Elm_Entry_Anchorview_Info.
8508 * See @ref Anchorblock for an example on how to use both of them.
8517 * @typedef Elm_Entry_Anchorview_Info
8519 * The info sent in the callback for "anchor,clicked" signals emitted by
8520 * the Anchorview widget.
8522 typedef struct _Elm_Entry_Anchorview_Info Elm_Entry_Anchorview_Info;
8524 * @struct _Elm_Entry_Anchorview_Info
8526 * The info sent in the callback for "anchor,clicked" signals emitted by
8527 * the Anchorview widget.
8529 struct _Elm_Entry_Anchorview_Info
8531 const char *name; /**< Name of the anchor, as indicated in its href
8533 int button; /**< The mouse button used to click on it */
8534 Evas_Object *hover; /**< The hover object to use for the popup */
8536 Evas_Coord x, y, w, h;
8537 } anchor, /**< Geometry selection of text used as anchor */
8538 hover_parent; /**< Geometry of the object used as parent by the
8540 Eina_Bool hover_left : 1; /**< Hint indicating if there's space
8541 for content on the left side of
8542 the hover. Before calling the
8543 callback, the widget will make the
8544 necessary calculations to check
8545 which sides are fit to be set with
8546 content, based on the position the
8547 hover is activated and its distance
8548 to the edges of its parent object
8550 Eina_Bool hover_right : 1; /**< Hint indicating content fits on
8551 the right side of the hover.
8552 See @ref hover_left */
8553 Eina_Bool hover_top : 1; /**< Hint indicating content fits on top
8554 of the hover. See @ref hover_left */
8555 Eina_Bool hover_bottom : 1; /**< Hint indicating content fits
8556 below the hover. See @ref
8560 * Add a new Anchorview object
8562 * @param parent The parent object
8563 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
8565 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_anchorview_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8567 * Set the text to show in the anchorview
8569 * Sets the text of the anchorview to @p text. This text can include markup
8570 * format tags, including <c>\<a href=anchorname\></c> to begin a segment of
8571 * text that will be specially styled and react to click events, ended with
8572 * either of \</a\> or \</\>. When clicked, the anchor will emit an
8573 * "anchor,clicked" signal that you can attach a callback to with
8574 * evas_object_smart_callback_add(). The name of the anchor given in the
8575 * event info struct will be the one set in the href attribute, in this
8578 * Other markup can be used to style the text in different ways, but it's
8579 * up to the style defined in the theme which tags do what.
8580 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
8582 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_anchorview_text_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8584 * Get the markup text set for the anchorview
8586 * Retrieves the text set on the anchorview, with markup tags included.
8588 * @param obj The anchorview object
8589 * @return The markup text set or @c NULL if nothing was set or an error
8591 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
8593 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_anchorview_text_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8595 * Set the parent of the hover popup
8597 * Sets the parent object to use by the hover created by the anchorview
8598 * when an anchor is clicked. See @ref Hover for more details on this.
8599 * If no parent is set, the same anchorview object will be used.
8601 * @param obj The anchorview object
8602 * @param parent The object to use as parent for the hover
8604 EAPI void elm_anchorview_hover_parent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8606 * Get the parent of the hover popup
8608 * Get the object used as parent for the hover created by the anchorview
8609 * widget. See @ref Hover for more details on this.
8611 * @param obj The anchorview object
8612 * @return The object used as parent for the hover, NULL if none is set.
8614 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_anchorview_hover_parent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8616 * Set the style that the hover should use
8618 * When creating the popup hover, anchorview will request that it's
8619 * themed according to @p style.
8621 * @param obj The anchorview object
8622 * @param style The style to use for the underlying hover
8624 * @see elm_object_style_set()
8626 EAPI void elm_anchorview_hover_style_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8628 * Get the style that the hover should use
8630 * Get the style the hover created by anchorview will use.
8632 * @param obj The anchorview object
8633 * @return The style to use by the hover. NULL means the default is used.
8635 * @see elm_object_style_set()
8637 EAPI const char *elm_anchorview_hover_style_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8639 * Ends the hover popup in the anchorview
8641 * When an anchor is clicked, the anchorview widget will create a hover
8642 * object to use as a popup with user provided content. This function
8643 * terminates this popup, returning the anchorview to its normal state.
8645 * @param obj The anchorview object
8647 EAPI void elm_anchorview_hover_end(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8649 * Set bouncing behaviour when the scrolled content reaches an edge
8651 * Tell the internal scroller object whether it should bounce or not
8652 * when it reaches the respective edges for each axis.
8654 * @param obj The anchorview object
8655 * @param h_bounce Whether to bounce or not in the horizontal axis
8656 * @param v_bounce Whether to bounce or not in the vertical axis
8658 * @see elm_scroller_bounce_set()
8660 EAPI void elm_anchorview_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8662 * Get the set bouncing behaviour of the internal scroller
8664 * Get whether the internal scroller should bounce when the edge of each
8665 * axis is reached scrolling.
8667 * @param obj The anchorview object
8668 * @param h_bounce Pointer where to store the bounce state of the horizontal
8670 * @param v_bounce Pointer where to store the bounce state of the vertical
8673 * @see elm_scroller_bounce_get()
8675 EAPI void elm_anchorview_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8677 * Appends a custom item provider to the given anchorview
8679 * Appends the given function to the list of items providers. This list is
8680 * called, one function at a time, with the given @p data pointer, the
8681 * anchorview object and, in the @p item parameter, the item name as
8682 * referenced in its href string. Following functions in the list will be
8683 * called in order until one of them returns something different to NULL,
8684 * which should be an Evas_Object which will be used in place of the item
8687 * Items in the markup text take the form \<item relsize=16x16 vsize=full
8688 * href=item/name\>\</item\>
8690 * @param obj The anchorview object
8691 * @param func The function to add to the list of providers
8692 * @param data User data that will be passed to the callback function
8694 * @see elm_entry_item_provider_append()
8696 EAPI void elm_anchorview_item_provider_append(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *anchorview, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8698 * Prepend a custom item provider to the given anchorview
8700 * Like elm_anchorview_item_provider_append(), but it adds the function
8701 * @p func to the beginning of the list, instead of the end.
8703 * @param obj The anchorview object
8704 * @param func The function to add to the list of providers
8705 * @param data User data that will be passed to the callback function
8707 EAPI void elm_anchorview_item_provider_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *anchorview, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8709 * Remove a custom item provider from the list of the given anchorview
8711 * Removes the function and data pairing that matches @p func and @p data.
8712 * That is, unless the same function and same user data are given, the
8713 * function will not be removed from the list. This allows us to add the
8714 * same callback several times, with different @p data pointers and be
8715 * able to remove them later without conflicts.
8717 * @param obj The anchorview object
8718 * @param func The function to remove from the list
8719 * @param data The data matching the function to remove from the list
8721 EAPI void elm_anchorview_item_provider_remove(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *anchorview, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8728 * @defgroup Anchorblock Anchorblock
8730 * @image html img/widget/anchorblock/preview-00.png
8731 * @image latex img/widget/anchorblock/preview-00.eps
8733 * Anchorblock is for displaying text that contains markup with anchors
8734 * like <c>\<a href=1234\>something\</\></c> in it.
8736 * Besides being styled differently, the anchorblock widget provides the
8737 * necessary functionality so that clicking on these anchors brings up a
8738 * popup with user defined content such as "call", "add to contacts" or
8739 * "open web page". This popup is provided using the @ref Hover widget.
8741 * This widget emits the following signals:
8742 * @li "anchor,clicked": will be called when an anchor is clicked. The
8743 * @p event_info parameter on the callback will be a pointer of type
8744 * ::Elm_Entry_Anchorblock_Info.
8750 * Since examples are usually better than plain words, we might as well
8751 * try @ref tutorial_anchorblock_example "one".
8754 * @addtogroup Anchorblock
8758 * @typedef Elm_Entry_Anchorblock_Info
8760 * The info sent in the callback for "anchor,clicked" signals emitted by
8761 * the Anchorblock widget.
8763 typedef struct _Elm_Entry_Anchorblock_Info Elm_Entry_Anchorblock_Info;
8765 * @struct _Elm_Entry_Anchorblock_Info
8767 * The info sent in the callback for "anchor,clicked" signals emitted by
8768 * the Anchorblock widget.
8770 struct _Elm_Entry_Anchorblock_Info
8772 const char *name; /**< Name of the anchor, as indicated in its href
8774 int button; /**< The mouse button used to click on it */
8775 Evas_Object *hover; /**< The hover object to use for the popup */
8777 Evas_Coord x, y, w, h;
8778 } anchor, /**< Geometry selection of text used as anchor */
8779 hover_parent; /**< Geometry of the object used as parent by the
8781 Eina_Bool hover_left : 1; /**< Hint indicating if there's space
8782 for content on the left side of
8783 the hover. Before calling the
8784 callback, the widget will make the
8785 necessary calculations to check
8786 which sides are fit to be set with
8787 content, based on the position the
8788 hover is activated and its distance
8789 to the edges of its parent object
8791 Eina_Bool hover_right : 1; /**< Hint indicating content fits on
8792 the right side of the hover.
8793 See @ref hover_left */
8794 Eina_Bool hover_top : 1; /**< Hint indicating content fits on top
8795 of the hover. See @ref hover_left */
8796 Eina_Bool hover_bottom : 1; /**< Hint indicating content fits
8797 below the hover. See @ref
8801 * Add a new Anchorblock object
8803 * @param parent The parent object
8804 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
8806 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_anchorblock_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8808 * Set the text to show in the anchorblock
8810 * Sets the text of the anchorblock to @p text. This text can include markup
8811 * format tags, including <c>\<a href=anchorname\></a></c> to begin a segment
8812 * of text that will be specially styled and react to click events, ended
8813 * with either of \</a\> or \</\>. When clicked, the anchor will emit an
8814 * "anchor,clicked" signal that you can attach a callback to with
8815 * evas_object_smart_callback_add(). The name of the anchor given in the
8816 * event info struct will be the one set in the href attribute, in this
8819 * Other markup can be used to style the text in different ways, but it's
8820 * up to the style defined in the theme which tags do what.
8821 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
8823 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_anchorblock_text_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8825 * Get the markup text set for the anchorblock
8827 * Retrieves the text set on the anchorblock, with markup tags included.
8829 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8830 * @return The markup text set or @c NULL if nothing was set or an error
8832 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
8834 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_anchorblock_text_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8836 * Set the parent of the hover popup
8838 * Sets the parent object to use by the hover created by the anchorblock
8839 * when an anchor is clicked. See @ref Hover for more details on this.
8841 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8842 * @param parent The object to use as parent for the hover
8844 EAPI void elm_anchorblock_hover_parent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8846 * Get the parent of the hover popup
8848 * Get the object used as parent for the hover created by the anchorblock
8849 * widget. See @ref Hover for more details on this.
8850 * If no parent is set, the same anchorblock object will be used.
8852 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8853 * @return The object used as parent for the hover, NULL if none is set.
8855 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_anchorblock_hover_parent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8857 * Set the style that the hover should use
8859 * When creating the popup hover, anchorblock will request that it's
8860 * themed according to @p style.
8862 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8863 * @param style The style to use for the underlying hover
8865 * @see elm_object_style_set()
8867 EAPI void elm_anchorblock_hover_style_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8869 * Get the style that the hover should use
8871 * Get the style the hover created by anchorblock will use.
8873 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8874 * @return The style to use by the hover. NULL means the default is used.
8876 * @see elm_object_style_set()
8878 EAPI const char *elm_anchorblock_hover_style_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8880 * Ends the hover popup in the anchorblock
8882 * When an anchor is clicked, the anchorblock widget will create a hover
8883 * object to use as a popup with user provided content. This function
8884 * terminates this popup, returning the anchorblock to its normal state.
8886 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8888 EAPI void elm_anchorblock_hover_end(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8890 * Appends a custom item provider to the given anchorblock
8892 * Appends the given function to the list of items providers. This list is
8893 * called, one function at a time, with the given @p data pointer, the
8894 * anchorblock object and, in the @p item parameter, the item name as
8895 * referenced in its href string. Following functions in the list will be
8896 * called in order until one of them returns something different to NULL,
8897 * which should be an Evas_Object which will be used in place of the item
8900 * Items in the markup text take the form \<item relsize=16x16 vsize=full
8901 * href=item/name\>\</item\>
8903 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8904 * @param func The function to add to the list of providers
8905 * @param data User data that will be passed to the callback function
8907 * @see elm_entry_item_provider_append()
8909 EAPI void elm_anchorblock_item_provider_append(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *anchorblock, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8911 * Prepend a custom item provider to the given anchorblock
8913 * Like elm_anchorblock_item_provider_append(), but it adds the function
8914 * @p func to the beginning of the list, instead of the end.
8916 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8917 * @param func The function to add to the list of providers
8918 * @param data User data that will be passed to the callback function
8920 EAPI void elm_anchorblock_item_provider_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *anchorblock, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8922 * Remove a custom item provider from the list of the given anchorblock
8924 * Removes the function and data pairing that matches @p func and @p data.
8925 * That is, unless the same function and same user data are given, the
8926 * function will not be removed from the list. This allows us to add the
8927 * same callback several times, with different @p data pointers and be
8928 * able to remove them later without conflicts.
8930 * @param obj The anchorblock object
8931 * @param func The function to remove from the list
8932 * @param data The data matching the function to remove from the list
8934 EAPI void elm_anchorblock_item_provider_remove(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *anchorblock, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
8940 * @defgroup Bubble Bubble
8942 * @image html img/widget/bubble/preview-00.png
8943 * @image html img/widget/bubble/preview-01.png
8944 * @image html img/widget/bubble/preview-02.png
8946 * @brief The Bubble is a widget to show text similarly to how speech is
8947 * represented in comics.
8949 * The bubble widget contains 5 important visual elements:
8950 * @li The frame is a rectangle with rounded rectangles and an "arrow".
8951 * @li The @p icon is an image to which the frame's arrow points to.
8952 * @li The @p label is a text which appears to the right of the icon if the
8953 * corner is "top_left" or "bottom_left" and is right aligned to the frame
8955 * @li The @p info is a text which appears to the right of the label. Info's
8956 * font is of a ligther color than label.
8957 * @li The @p content is an evas object that is shown inside the frame.
8959 * The position of the arrow, icon, label and info depends on which corner is
8960 * selected. The four available corners are:
8961 * @li "top_left" - Default
8964 * @li "bottom_right"
8966 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
8967 * @li "clicked" - This is called when a user has clicked the bubble.
8969 * For an example of using a buble see @ref bubble_01_example_page "this".
8974 * Add a new bubble to the parent
8976 * @param parent The parent object
8977 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
8979 * This function adds a text bubble to the given parent evas object.
8981 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_bubble_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8983 * Set the label of the bubble
8985 * @param obj The bubble object
8986 * @param label The string to set in the label
8988 * This function sets the title of the bubble. Where this appears depends on
8989 * the selected corner.
8990 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
8992 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_bubble_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
8994 * Get the label of the bubble
8996 * @param obj The bubble object
8997 * @return The string of set in the label
8999 * This function gets the title of the bubble.
9000 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
9002 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_bubble_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9004 * Set the info of the bubble
9006 * @param obj The bubble object
9007 * @param info The given info about the bubble
9009 * This function sets the info of the bubble. Where this appears depends on
9010 * the selected corner.
9011 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
9013 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_bubble_info_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *info) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9015 * Get the info of the bubble
9017 * @param obj The bubble object
9019 * @return The "info" string of the bubble
9021 * This function gets the info text.
9022 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
9024 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_bubble_info_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9026 * Set the content to be shown in the bubble
9028 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
9029 * If you want to keep the old content object, use the
9030 * elm_bubble_content_unset() function.
9032 * @param obj The bubble object
9033 * @param content The given content of the bubble
9035 * This function sets the content shown on the middle of the bubble.
9037 EAPI void elm_bubble_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9039 * Get the content shown in the bubble
9041 * Return the content object which is set for this widget.
9043 * @param obj The bubble object
9044 * @return The content that is being used
9046 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_bubble_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9048 * Unset the content shown in the bubble
9050 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this widget.
9052 * @param obj The bubble object
9053 * @return The content that was being used
9055 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_bubble_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9057 * Set the icon of the bubble
9059 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
9060 * If you want to keep the old content object, use the
9061 * elm_icon_content_unset() function.
9063 * @param obj The bubble object
9064 * @param icon The given icon for the bubble
9066 EAPI void elm_bubble_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9068 * Get the icon of the bubble
9070 * @param obj The bubble object
9071 * @return The icon for the bubble
9073 * This function gets the icon shown on the top left of bubble.
9075 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_bubble_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9077 * Unset the icon of the bubble
9079 * Unparent and return the icon object which was set for this widget.
9081 * @param obj The bubble object
9082 * @return The icon that was being used
9084 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_bubble_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9086 * Set the corner of the bubble
9088 * @param obj The bubble object.
9089 * @param corner The given corner for the bubble.
9091 * This function sets the corner of the bubble. The corner will be used to
9092 * determine where the arrow in the frame points to and where label, icon and
9095 * Possible values for corner are:
9096 * @li "top_left" - Default
9099 * @li "bottom_right"
9101 EAPI void elm_bubble_corner_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *corner) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
9103 * Get the corner of the bubble
9105 * @param obj The bubble object.
9106 * @return The given corner for the bubble.
9108 * This function gets the selected corner of the bubble.
9110 EAPI const char *elm_bubble_corner_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9116 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_photo_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9117 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_photo_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9118 EAPI void elm_photo_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, int size) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9119 EAPI void elm_photo_fill_inside_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool fill) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9120 EAPI void elm_photo_editable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool set) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9121 /* smart callbacks called:
9122 * "clicked" - the user clicked the icon
9123 * "drag,start" - Someone started dragging the image out of the object
9124 * "drag,end" - Dragged item was dropped (somewhere)
9128 /** @defgroup Elm_Gesture_Layer Gesture Layer */
9130 * @enum _Elm_Gesture_Types
9131 * Enum of supported gesture types.
9132 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9134 typedef enum _Elm_Gesture_Types
9136 ELM_GESTURE_FIRST = 0,
9138 ELM_GESTURE_N_TAPS, /**< N fingers single taps */
9139 ELM_GESTURE_N_DOUBLE_TAPS, /**< N fingers double-single taps */
9140 ELM_GESTURE_N_TRIPLE_TAPS, /**< N fingers triple-single taps */
9142 ELM_GESTURE_MOMENTUM, /**< Reports momentum in the dircetion of move */
9144 ELM_GESTURE_N_LINES, /**< N fingers line gesture */
9145 ELM_GESTURE_N_FLICKS, /**< N fingers flick gesture */
9147 ELM_GESTURE_ZOOM, /**< Zoom */
9148 ELM_GESTURE_ROTATE, /**< Rotate */
9151 } Elm_Gesture_Types;
9154 * @enum _Elm_Gesture_State
9155 * Enum of gesture states.
9156 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9158 typedef enum _Elm_Gesture_State
9160 ELM_GESTURE_STATE_UNDEFINED = -1, /**< Gesture not STARTed */
9161 ELM_GESTURE_STATE_START, /**< Gesture STARTed */
9162 ELM_GESTURE_STATE_MOVE, /**< Gesture is ongoing */
9163 ELM_GESTURE_STATE_END, /**< Gesture completed */
9164 ELM_GESTURE_STATE_ABORT /**< Onging gesture was ABORTed */
9165 } Elm_Gesture_State;
9168 * @struct _Elm_Gesture_Taps_Info
9169 * Struct holds taps info for user
9170 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9172 struct _Elm_Gesture_Taps_Info
9174 Evas_Coord x, y; /**< Holds center point between fingers */
9175 unsigned int n; /**< Number of fingers tapped */
9176 unsigned int timestamp; /**< event timestamp */
9180 * @typedef Elm_Gesture_Taps_Info
9181 * holds taps info for user
9182 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9184 typedef struct _Elm_Gesture_Taps_Info Elm_Gesture_Taps_Info;
9187 * @struct _Elm_Gesture_Momentum_Info
9188 * Struct holds momentum info for user
9189 * x1 and y1 are not necessarily in sync
9190 * x1 holds x value of x direction starting point
9191 * and same holds for y1.
9192 * This is noticeable when doing V-shape movement
9193 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9195 struct _Elm_Gesture_Momentum_Info
9196 { /* Report line ends, timestamps, and momentum computed */
9197 Evas_Coord x1; /**< Final-swipe direction starting point on X */
9198 Evas_Coord y1; /**< Final-swipe direction starting point on Y */
9199 Evas_Coord x2; /**< Final-swipe direction ending point on X */
9200 Evas_Coord y2; /**< Final-swipe direction ending point on Y */
9202 unsigned int tx; /**< Timestamp of start of final x-swipe */
9203 unsigned int ty; /**< Timestamp of start of final y-swipe */
9205 Evas_Coord mx; /**< Momentum on X */
9206 Evas_Coord my; /**< Momentum on Y */
9210 * @typedef Elm_Gesture_Momentum_Info
9211 * holds momentum info for user
9212 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9214 typedef struct _Elm_Gesture_Momentum_Info Elm_Gesture_Momentum_Info;
9217 * @struct _Elm_Gesture_Line_Info
9218 * Struct holds line info for user
9219 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9221 struct _Elm_Gesture_Line_Info
9222 { /* Report line ends, timestamps, and momentum computed */
9223 Elm_Gesture_Momentum_Info momentum; /**< Line momentum info */
9224 unsigned int n; /**< Number of fingers (lines) */
9225 /* FIXME should be radians, bot degrees */
9226 double angle; /**< Angle (direction) of lines */
9230 * @typedef _Elm_Gesture_Line_Info
9231 * Holds line info for user
9232 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9234 typedef struct _Elm_Gesture_Line_Info Elm_Gesture_Line_Info;
9237 * @struct _Elm_Gesture_Zoom_Info
9238 * Struct holds zoom info for user
9239 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9241 struct _Elm_Gesture_Zoom_Info
9243 Evas_Coord x, y; /**< Holds zoom center point reported to user */
9244 Evas_Coord radius; /**< Holds radius between fingers reported to user */
9245 double zoom; /**< Zoom value: 1.0 means no zoom */
9246 double momentum; /**< Zoom momentum: zoom growth per second (NOT YET SUPPORTED) */
9250 * @typedef Elm_Gesture_Zoom_Info
9251 * Holds zoom info for user
9252 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9254 typedef struct _Elm_Gesture_Zoom_Info Elm_Gesture_Zoom_Info;
9257 * @struct _Elm_Gesture_Rotate_Info
9258 * Struct holds rotation info for user
9259 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9261 struct _Elm_Gesture_Rotate_Info
9263 Evas_Coord x, y; /**< Holds zoom center point reported to user */
9264 Evas_Coord radius; /**< Holds radius between fingers reported to user */
9265 double base_angle; /**< Holds start-angle */
9266 double angle; /**< Rotation value: 0.0 means no rotation */
9267 double momentum; /**< Rotation momentum: rotation done per second (NOT YET SUPPORTED) */
9271 * @typedef Elm_Gesture_Rotate_Info
9272 * Holds rotation info for user
9273 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9275 typedef struct _Elm_Gesture_Rotate_Info Elm_Gesture_Rotate_Info;
9278 * @typedef Elm_Gesture_Event_Cb
9279 * User callback used to stream gesture info from gesture layer
9280 * @param data user data
9281 * @param event_info gesture report info
9282 * Returns a flag field to be applied on the causing event.
9283 * You should probably return EVAS_EVENT_FLAG_ON_HOLD if your widget acted
9284 * upon the event, in an irreversible way.
9286 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9288 typedef Evas_Event_Flags (*Elm_Gesture_Event_Cb) (void *data, void *event_info);
9291 * Use function to set callbacks to be notified about
9292 * change of state of gesture.
9293 * When a user registers a callback with this function
9294 * this means this gesture has to be tested.
9296 * When ALL callbacks for a gesture are set to NULL
9297 * it means user isn't interested in gesture-state
9298 * and it will not be tested.
9300 * @param obj Pointer to gesture-layer.
9301 * @param idx The gesture you would like to track its state.
9302 * @param cb callback function pointer.
9303 * @param cb_type what event this callback tracks: START, MOVE, END, ABORT.
9304 * @param data user info to be sent to callback (usually, Smart Data)
9306 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9308 EAPI void elm_gesture_layer_cb_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Gesture_Types idx, Elm_Gesture_State cb_type, Elm_Gesture_Event_Cb cb, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9311 * Call this function to get repeat-events settings.
9313 * @param obj Pointer to gesture-layer.
9315 * @return repeat events settings.
9316 * @see elm_gesture_layer_hold_events_set()
9317 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9319 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gesture_layer_hold_events_get(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9322 * This function called in order to make gesture-layer repeat events.
9323 * Set this of you like to get the raw events only if gestures were not detected.
9324 * Clear this if you like gesture layer to fwd events as testing gestures.
9326 * @param obj Pointer to gesture-layer.
9327 * @param r Repeat: TRUE/FALSE
9329 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9331 EAPI void elm_gesture_layer_hold_events_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool r) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9334 * This function sets step-value for zoom action.
9335 * Set step to any positive value.
9336 * Cancel step setting by setting to 0.0
9338 * @param obj Pointer to gesture-layer.
9339 * @param s new zoom step value.
9341 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9343 EAPI void elm_gesture_layer_zoom_step_set(Evas_Object *obj, double s) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9346 * This function sets step-value for rotate action.
9347 * Set step to any positive value.
9348 * Cancel step setting by setting to 0.0
9350 * @param obj Pointer to gesture-layer.
9351 * @param s new roatate step value.
9353 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9355 EAPI void elm_gesture_layer_rotate_step_set(Evas_Object *obj, double s) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9358 * This function called to attach gesture-layer to an Evas_Object.
9359 * @param obj Pointer to gesture-layer.
9360 * @param t Pointer to underlying object (AKA Target)
9362 * @return TRUE, FALSE on success, failure.
9364 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9366 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_gesture_layer_attach(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *t) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
9369 * Call this function to construct a new gesture-layer object.
9370 * This does not activate the gesture layer. You have to
9371 * call elm_gesture_layer_attach in order to 'activate' gesture-layer.
9373 * @param parent the parent object.
9375 * @return Pointer to new gesture-layer object.
9377 * @ingroup Elm_Gesture_Layer
9379 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_gesture_layer_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9382 typedef enum _Elm_Thumb_Animation_Setting
9384 ELM_THUMB_ANIMATION_START = 0, /* Play animation once */
9385 ELM_THUMB_ANIMATION_LOOP, /* Keep playing animation until stop is requested */
9386 ELM_THUMB_ANIMATION_STOP,
9387 ELM_THUMB_ANIMATION_LAST
9388 } Elm_Thumb_Animation_Setting;
9390 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_thumb_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9391 EAPI void elm_thumb_reload(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9392 EAPI void elm_thumb_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file, const char *key) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9393 EAPI void elm_thumb_file_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **file, const char **key) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9394 EAPI void elm_thumb_path_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **file, const char **key) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9395 EAPI void elm_thumb_animate_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Thumb_Animation_Setting s) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9396 EAPI Elm_Thumb_Animation_Setting elm_thumb_animate_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9397 EAPI void *elm_thumb_ethumb_client_get(void);
9398 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_thumb_ethumb_client_connected(void);
9399 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_thumb_editable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool edit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9400 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_thumb_editable_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9401 /* available styles:
9405 /* smart callbacks called:
9406 * "clicked" - This is called when a user has clicked the thumb without dragging around.
9407 * "clicked,double" - This is called when a user has double-clicked the thumb.
9408 * "press" - This is called when a user has pressed down the thumb.
9409 * "generate,start" - The thumbnail generation started.
9410 * "generate,stop" - The generation process stopped.
9411 * "generate,error" - The generation failed.
9412 * "load,error" - The thumbnail image loading failed.
9416 * @defgroup Hoversel
9418 * @image html img/widget/hoversel/preview-00.png
9419 * @image latex img/widget/hoversel/preview-00.eps
9421 * A hoversel is a button that pops up a list of items (automatically
9422 * choosing the direction to display) that have a label and, optionally, an
9423 * icon to select from. It is a convenience widget to avoid the need to do
9424 * all the piecing together yourself. It is intended for a small number of
9425 * items in the hoversel menu (no more than 8), though is capable of many
9428 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
9429 * "clicked" - the user clicked the hoversel button and popped up the sel
9430 * "selected" - an item in the hoversel list is selected. event_info is the item
9431 * "dismissed" - the hover is dismissed
9433 * See @ref tutorial_hoversel for an example.
9436 typedef struct _Elm_Hoversel_Item Elm_Hoversel_Item; /**< Item of Elm_Hoversel. Sub-type of Elm_Widget_Item */
9438 * @brief Add a new Hoversel object
9440 * @param parent The parent object
9441 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
9443 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hoversel_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9445 * @brief This sets the hoversel to expand horizontally.
9447 * @param obj The hoversel object
9448 * @param horizontal If true, the hover will expand horizontally to the
9451 * @note The initial button will display horizontally regardless of this
9454 EAPI void elm_hoversel_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool horizontal) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9456 * @brief This returns whether the hoversel is set to expand horizontally.
9458 * @param obj The hoversel object
9459 * @return If true, the hover will expand horizontally to the right.
9461 * @see elm_hoversel_horizontal_set()
9463 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_hoversel_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9465 * @brief Set the Hover parent
9467 * @param obj The hoversel object
9468 * @param parent The parent to use
9470 * Sets the hover parent object, the area that will be darkened when the
9471 * hoversel is clicked. Should probably be the window that the hoversel is
9472 * in. See @ref Hover objects for more information.
9474 EAPI void elm_hoversel_hover_parent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9476 * @brief Get the Hover parent
9478 * @param obj The hoversel object
9479 * @return The used parent
9481 * Gets the hover parent object.
9483 * @see elm_hoversel_hover_parent_set()
9485 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hoversel_hover_parent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9487 * @brief Set the hoversel button label
9489 * @param obj The hoversel object
9490 * @param label The label text.
9492 * This sets the label of the button that is always visible (before it is
9493 * clicked and expanded).
9495 * @deprecated elm_object_text_set()
9497 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_hoversel_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9499 * @brief Get the hoversel button label
9501 * @param obj The hoversel object
9502 * @return The label text.
9504 * @deprecated elm_object_text_get()
9506 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_hoversel_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9508 * @brief Set the icon of the hoversel button
9510 * @param obj The hoversel object
9511 * @param icon The icon object
9513 * Sets the icon of the button that is always visible (before it is clicked
9514 * and expanded). Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be
9515 * deleted, if you want to keep that old content object, use the
9516 * elm_hoversel_icon_unset() function.
9518 * @see elm_button_icon_set()
9520 EAPI void elm_hoversel_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9522 * @brief Get the icon of the hoversel button
9524 * @param obj The hoversel object
9525 * @return The icon object
9527 * Get the icon of the button that is always visible (before it is clicked
9528 * and expanded). Also see elm_button_icon_get().
9530 * @see elm_hoversel_icon_set()
9532 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hoversel_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9534 * @brief Get and unparent the icon of the hoversel button
9536 * @param obj The hoversel object
9537 * @return The icon object that was being used
9539 * Unparent and return the icon of the button that is always visible
9540 * (before it is clicked and expanded).
9542 * @see elm_hoversel_icon_set()
9543 * @see elm_button_icon_unset()
9545 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_hoversel_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9547 * @brief This triggers the hoversel popup from code, the same as if the user
9548 * had clicked the button.
9550 * @param obj The hoversel object
9552 EAPI void elm_hoversel_hover_begin(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9554 * @brief This dismisses the hoversel popup as if the user had clicked
9555 * outside the hover.
9557 * @param obj The hoversel object
9559 EAPI void elm_hoversel_hover_end(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9561 * @brief Returns whether the hoversel is expanded.
9563 * @param obj The hoversel object
9564 * @return This will return EINA_TRUE if the hoversel is expanded or
9565 * EINA_FALSE if it is not expanded.
9567 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_hoversel_expanded_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9569 * @brief This will remove all the children items from the hoversel.
9571 * @param obj The hoversel object
9573 * @warning Should @b not be called while the hoversel is active; use
9574 * elm_hoversel_expanded_get() to check first.
9576 * @see elm_hoversel_item_del_cb_set()
9577 * @see elm_hoversel_item_del()
9579 EAPI void elm_hoversel_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9581 * @brief Get the list of items within the given hoversel.
9583 * @param obj The hoversel object
9584 * @return Returns a list of Elm_Hoversel_Item*
9586 * @see elm_hoversel_item_add()
9588 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_hoversel_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9590 * @brief Add an item to the hoversel button
9592 * @param obj The hoversel object
9593 * @param label The text label to use for the item (NULL if not desired)
9594 * @param icon_file An image file path on disk to use for the icon or standard
9595 * icon name (NULL if not desired)
9596 * @param icon_type The icon type if relevant
9597 * @param func Convenience function to call when this item is selected
9598 * @param data Data to pass to item-related functions
9599 * @return A handle to the item added.
9601 * This adds an item to the hoversel to show when it is clicked. Note: if you
9602 * need to use an icon from an edje file then use
9603 * elm_hoversel_item_icon_set() right after the this function, and set
9604 * icon_file to NULL here.
9606 * For more information on what @p icon_file and @p icon_type are see the
9607 * @ref Icon "icon documentation".
9609 EAPI Elm_Hoversel_Item *elm_hoversel_item_add(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, const char *icon_file, Elm_Icon_Type icon_type, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9611 * @brief Delete an item from the hoversel
9613 * @param item The item to delete
9615 * This deletes the item from the hoversel (should not be called while the
9616 * hoversel is active; use elm_hoversel_expanded_get() to check first).
9618 * @see elm_hoversel_item_add()
9619 * @see elm_hoversel_item_del_cb_set()
9621 EAPI void elm_hoversel_item_del(Elm_Hoversel_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9623 * @brief Set the function to be called when an item from the hoversel is
9626 * @param item The item to set the callback on
9627 * @param func The function called
9629 * That function will receive these parameters:
9630 * @li void *item_data
9631 * @li Evas_Object *the_item_object
9632 * @li Elm_Hoversel_Item *the_object_struct
9634 * @see elm_hoversel_item_add()
9636 EAPI void elm_hoversel_item_del_cb_set(Elm_Hoversel_Item *it, Evas_Smart_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9638 * @brief This returns the data pointer supplied with elm_hoversel_item_add()
9639 * that will be passed to associated function callbacks.
9641 * @param item The item to get the data from
9642 * @return The data pointer set with elm_hoversel_item_add()
9644 * @see elm_hoversel_item_add()
9646 EAPI void *elm_hoversel_item_data_get(const Elm_Hoversel_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9648 * @brief This returns the label text of the given hoversel item.
9650 * @param item The item to get the label
9651 * @return The label text of the hoversel item
9653 * @see elm_hoversel_item_add()
9655 EAPI const char *elm_hoversel_item_label_get(const Elm_Hoversel_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9657 * @brief This sets the icon for the given hoversel item.
9659 * @param item The item to set the icon
9660 * @param icon_file An image file path on disk to use for the icon or standard
9662 * @param icon_group The edje group to use if @p icon_file is an edje file. Set this
9663 * to NULL if the icon is not an edje file
9664 * @param icon_type The icon type
9666 * The icon can be loaded from the standard set, from an image file, or from
9669 * @see elm_hoversel_item_add()
9671 EAPI void elm_hoversel_item_icon_set(Elm_Hoversel_Item *it, const char *icon_file, const char *icon_group, Elm_Icon_Type icon_type) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9673 * @brief Get the icon object of the hoversel item
9675 * @param item The item to get the icon from
9676 * @param icon_file The image file path on disk used for the icon or standard
9678 * @param icon_group The edje group used if @p icon_file is an edje file. NULL
9679 * if the icon is not an edje file
9680 * @param icon_type The icon type
9682 * @see elm_hoversel_item_icon_set()
9683 * @see elm_hoversel_item_add()
9685 EAPI void elm_hoversel_item_icon_get(const Elm_Hoversel_Item *it, const char **icon_file, const char **icon_group, Elm_Icon_Type *icon_type) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9691 typedef enum _Elm_Toolbar_Shrink_Mode
9693 ELM_TOOLBAR_SHRINK_NONE, /**< set toolbar minimun size to fit all the items */
9694 ELM_TOOLBAR_SHRINK_HIDE, /**< hide excess items */
9695 ELM_TOOLBAR_SHRINK_SCROLL, /**< allow accessing excess items through a scroller */
9696 ELM_TOOLBAR_SHRINK_MENU /**< inserts a button to pop up a menu with excess items */
9697 } Elm_Toolbar_Shrink_Mode;
9699 typedef struct _Elm_Toolbar_Item Elm_Toolbar_Item; /**< Item of Elm_Toolbar. Sub-type of Elm_Widget_Item */
9700 typedef struct _Elm_Toolbar_Item_State Elm_Toolbar_Item_State; /** State of a Elm_Toolbar_Item */
9702 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_toolbar_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9703 EAPI void elm_toolbar_icon_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, int icon_size) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9704 EAPI int elm_toolbar_icon_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9705 EAPI void elm_toolbar_icon_order_lookup_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order order) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9706 EAPI Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order elm_toolbar_icon_order_lookup_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9707 EAPI void elm_toolbar_no_select_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool no_select) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9708 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_no_select_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9709 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_item_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *icon, const char *label, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9710 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_item_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, const char *icon, const char *label, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9711 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_item_insert_before(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Toolbar_Item *before, const char *icon, const char *label, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9712 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_item_insert_after(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Toolbar_Item *after, const char *icon, const char *label, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9713 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_first_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9714 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_last_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9715 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_item_next_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9716 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_item_prev_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9717 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_toolbar_item_toolbar_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9718 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_priority_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, int priority) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9719 EAPI int elm_toolbar_item_priority_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9720 EAPI const char *elm_toolbar_item_icon_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9721 EAPI const char *elm_toolbar_item_label_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9722 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_label_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9723 EAPI void *elm_toolbar_item_data_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9724 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_data_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9725 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_item_find_by_label(const Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9726 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_item_selected_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9727 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_selected_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, Eina_Bool selected) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9728 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item *elm_toolbar_selected_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9729 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_icon_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, const char *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9730 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_del(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9731 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_del_cb_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, Evas_Smart_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9732 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_item_disabled_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9733 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_disabled_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9734 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_separator_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, Eina_Bool separator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9735 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_item_separator_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9736 EAPI void elm_toolbar_mode_shrink_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Toolbar_Shrink_Mode shrink_mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9737 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Shrink_Mode elm_toolbar_mode_shrink_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9738 EAPI void elm_toolbar_homogeneous_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool homogeneous) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9739 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_homogeneous_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9740 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_toolbar_homogenous_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool homogenous) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9741 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_homogenous_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9742 EAPI void elm_toolbar_menu_parent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9743 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_toolbar_menu_parent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9744 EAPI void elm_toolbar_align_set(Evas_Object *obj, double align) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9745 EAPI double elm_toolbar_align_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9746 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_menu_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, Eina_Bool menu) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9747 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_toolbar_item_menu_get(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9748 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item_State *elm_toolbar_item_state_add(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, const char *icon, const char *label, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9749 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_item_state_del(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, Elm_Toolbar_Item_State *state) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9750 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_item_state_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *it, Elm_Toolbar_Item_State *state) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9751 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_state_unset(Elm_Toolbar_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9752 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item_State *elm_toolbar_item_state_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9753 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item_State *elm_toolbar_item_state_next(Elm_Toolbar_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9754 EAPI Elm_Toolbar_Item_State *elm_toolbar_item_state_prev(Elm_Toolbar_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9755 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_tooltip_text_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9756 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_tooltip_content_cb_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, Elm_Tooltip_Item_Content_Cb func, const void *data, Evas_Smart_Cb del_cb) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9757 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_tooltip_unset(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9758 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_tooltip_style_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9759 EAPI const char *elm_toolbar_item_tooltip_style_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9760 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_cursor_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, const char *cursor) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9761 EAPI const char *elm_toolbar_item_cursor_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9762 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_cursor_unset(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9763 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_cursor_style_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9764 EAPI const char *elm_toolbar_item_cursor_style_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9765 EAPI void elm_toolbar_item_cursor_engine_only_set(Elm_Toolbar_Item *item, Eina_Bool engine_only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9766 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_toolbar_item_cursor_engine_only_get(const Elm_Toolbar_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9767 /* smart callbacks called:
9768 * "clicked" - when the user clicks on a toolbar item and becomes selected
9770 /* available styles:
9772 * transparent (no background or shadow, just show the provided content)
9776 EAPI double elm_tooltip_delay_get(void);
9777 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_tooltip_delay_set(double delay);
9778 EAPI void elm_object_tooltip_show(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9779 EAPI void elm_object_tooltip_hide(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9780 EAPI void elm_object_tooltip_text_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
9781 EAPI void elm_object_tooltip_content_cb_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Tooltip_Content_Cb func, const void *data, Evas_Smart_Cb del_cb) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9782 EAPI void elm_object_tooltip_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9783 EAPI void elm_object_tooltip_style_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9784 EAPI const char *elm_object_tooltip_style_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9785 EAPI void elm_object_cursor_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *cursor) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9786 EAPI const char *elm_object_cursor_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9787 EAPI void elm_object_cursor_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9788 EAPI void elm_object_cursor_style_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9789 EAPI const char *elm_object_cursor_style_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9790 EAPI void elm_object_cursor_engine_only_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool engine_only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9791 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_object_cursor_engine_only_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9792 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_tooltip_size_restrict_disable(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool disable); EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9793 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_tooltip_size_restrict_disabled_get(const Evas_Object *obj); EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9796 EAPI int elm_cursor_engine_only_get(void);
9797 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_cursor_engine_only_set(int engine_only);
9800 typedef struct _Elm_Menu_Item Elm_Menu_Item; /**< Item of Elm_Menu. Sub-type of Elm_Widget_Item */
9801 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_menu_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9802 EAPI void elm_menu_parent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9803 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_menu_parent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9804 EAPI void elm_menu_move(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord x, Evas_Coord y) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9805 EAPI void elm_menu_close(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9806 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_menu_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9807 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_menu_item_object_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9808 EAPI Elm_Menu_Item *elm_menu_item_add(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Menu_Item *parent, const char *icon, const char *label, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9809 EAPI Elm_Menu_Item *elm_menu_item_add_object(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Menu_Item *parent, Evas_Object *subobj, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9810 EAPI void elm_menu_item_label_set(Elm_Menu_Item *item, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9811 EAPI const char *elm_menu_item_label_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9812 EAPI void elm_menu_item_icon_set(Elm_Menu_Item *item, const char *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
9813 EAPI const char *elm_menu_item_icon_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9814 EAPI const Evas_Object *elm_menu_item_object_icon_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9815 EAPI void elm_menu_item_selected_set(Elm_Menu_Item *item, Eina_Bool selected) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9816 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_menu_item_selected_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9817 EAPI void elm_menu_item_disabled_set(Elm_Menu_Item *item, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9818 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_menu_item_disabled_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9819 EAPI Elm_Menu_Item *elm_menu_item_separator_add(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Menu_Item *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9820 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_menu_item_is_separator(Elm_Menu_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9821 EAPI void elm_menu_item_del(Elm_Menu_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9822 EAPI void elm_menu_item_del_cb_set(Elm_Menu_Item *it, Evas_Smart_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9823 EAPI void *elm_menu_item_data_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9824 EAPI void elm_menu_item_data_set(Elm_Menu_Item *item, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9825 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_menu_item_subitems_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9826 EAPI const Elm_Menu_Item *elm_menu_selected_item_get(const Evas_Object * obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9827 EAPI const Elm_Menu_Item *elm_menu_last_item_get(const Evas_Object * obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9828 EAPI const Elm_Menu_Item *elm_menu_first_item_get(const Evas_Object * obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9829 EAPI const Elm_Menu_Item *elm_menu_item_next_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9830 EAPI const Elm_Menu_Item *elm_menu_item_prev_get(const Elm_Menu_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9832 /* smart callbacks called:
9833 * "clicked" - the user clicked the empty space in the menu to dismiss. event_info is NULL.
9837 * @defgroup List List
9838 * @ingroup Elementary
9840 * @image html img/widget/list/preview-00.png
9841 * @image latex img/widget/list/preview-00.eps width=\textwidth
9843 * @image html img/list.png
9844 * @image latex img/list.eps width=\textwidth
9846 * A list widget is a container whose children are displayed vertically or
9847 * horizontally, in order, and can be selected.
9848 * The list can accept only one or multiple items selection. Also has many
9849 * modes of items displaying.
9851 * A list is a very simple type of list widget. For more robust
9852 * lists, @ref Genlist should probably be used.
9854 * Smart callbacks one can listen to:
9855 * - @c "activated" - The user has double-clicked or pressed
9856 * (enter|return|spacebar) on an item. The @c event_info parameter
9857 * is the item that was activated.
9858 * - @c "clicked,double" - The user has double-clicked an item.
9859 * The @c event_info parameter is the item that was double-clicked.
9860 * - "selected" - when the user selected an item
9861 * - "unselected" - when the user unselected an item
9862 * - "longpressed" - an item in the list is long-pressed
9863 * - "scroll,edge,top" - the list is scrolled until the top edge
9864 * - "scroll,edge,bottom" - the list is scrolled until the bottom edge
9865 * - "scroll,edge,left" - the list is scrolled until the left edge
9866 * - "scroll,edge,right" - the list is scrolled until the right edge
9868 * Available styles for it:
9872 * @li @ref list_example_01
9873 * @li @ref list_example_02
9874 * @li @ref list_example_03
9883 * @enum _Elm_List_Mode
9884 * @typedef Elm_List_Mode
9886 * Set list's resize behavior, transverse axis scroll and
9887 * items cropping. See each mode's description for more details.
9889 * @note Default value is #ELM_LIST_SCROLL.
9891 * Values <b> don't </b> work as bitmaks, only one can be choosen.
9893 * @see elm_list_mode_set()
9894 * @see elm_list_mode_get()
9898 typedef enum _Elm_List_Mode
9900 ELM_LIST_COMPRESS = 0, /**< Won't set any of its size hints to inform how a possible container should resize it. Then, if it's not created as a "resize object", it might end with zero dimensions. The list will respect the container's geometry and, if any of its items won't fit into its transverse axis, one won't be able to scroll it in that direction. */
9901 ELM_LIST_SCROLL, /**< Default value. Won't set any of its size hints to inform how a possible container should resize it. Then, if it's not created as a "resize object", it might end with zero dimensions. The list will respect the container's geometry and, if any of its items won't fit into its transverse axis, one will be able to scroll it in that direction (large items will get cropped). */
9902 ELM_LIST_LIMIT, /**< Set a minimun size hint on the list object, so that containers may respect it (and resize itself to fit the child properly). More specifically, a minimum size hint will be set for its transverse axis, so that the @b largest item in that direction fits well. Can have effects bounded by setting the list object's maximum size hints. */
9903 ELM_LIST_EXPAND, /**< Besides setting a minimum size on the transverse axis, just like the previous mode, will set a minimum size on the longitudinal axis too, trying to reserve space to all its children to be visible at a time. Can have effects bounded by setting the list object's maximum size hints. */
9904 ELM_LIST_LAST /**< Indicates error if returned by elm_list_mode_get() */
9907 typedef struct _Elm_List_Item Elm_List_Item; /**< Item of Elm_List. Sub-type of Elm_Widget_Item. Can be created with elm_list_item_append(), elm_list_item_prepend() and functions to add items in relative positions, like elm_list_item_insert_before(), and deleted with elm_list_item_del(). */
9910 * Add a new list widget to the given parent Elementary
9911 * (container) object.
9913 * @param parent The parent object.
9914 * @return a new list widget handle or @c NULL, on errors.
9916 * This function inserts a new list widget on the canvas.
9920 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_list_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9925 * @param obj The list object
9927 * @note Call before running show() on the list object.
9928 * @warning If not called, it won't display the list properly.
9931 * li = elm_list_add(win);
9932 * elm_list_item_append(li, "First", NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
9933 * elm_list_item_append(li, "Second", NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
9935 * evas_object_show(li);
9940 EAPI void elm_list_go(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9943 * Enable or disable multiple items selection on the list object.
9945 * @param obj The list object
9946 * @param multi @c EINA_TRUE to enable multi selection or @c EINA_FALSE to
9949 * Disabled by default. If disabled, the user can select a single item of
9950 * the list each time. Selected items are highlighted on list.
9951 * If enabled, many items can be selected.
9953 * If a selected item is selected again, it will be unselected.
9955 * @see elm_list_multi_select_get()
9959 EAPI void elm_list_multi_select_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool multi) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9962 * Get a value whether multiple items selection is enabled or not.
9964 * @see elm_list_multi_select_set() for details.
9966 * @param obj The list object.
9967 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means multiple items selection is enabled.
9968 * @c EINA_FALSE indicates it's disabled. If @p obj is @c NULL,
9969 * @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
9973 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_multi_select_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9976 * Set which mode to use for the list object.
9978 * @param obj The list object
9979 * @param mode One of #Elm_List_Mode: #ELM_LIST_COMPRESS, #ELM_LIST_SCROLL,
9980 * #ELM_LIST_LIMIT or #ELM_LIST_EXPAND.
9982 * Set list's resize behavior, transverse axis scroll and
9983 * items cropping. See each mode's description for more details.
9985 * @note Default value is #ELM_LIST_SCROLL.
9987 * Only one can be set, if a previous one was set, it will be changed
9988 * by the new mode set. Bitmask won't work as well.
9990 * @see elm_list_mode_get()
9994 EAPI void elm_list_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_List_Mode mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
9997 * Get the mode the list is at.
9999 * @param obj The list object
10000 * @return One of #Elm_List_Mode: #ELM_LIST_COMPRESS, #ELM_LIST_SCROLL,
10001 * #ELM_LIST_LIMIT, #ELM_LIST_EXPAND or #ELM_LIST_LAST on errors.
10003 * @note see elm_list_mode_set() for more information.
10007 EAPI Elm_List_Mode elm_list_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10010 * Enable or disable horizontal mode on the list object.
10012 * @param obj The list object.
10013 * @param horizontal @c EINA_TRUE to enable horizontal or @c EINA_FALSE to
10014 * disable it, i.e., to enable vertical mode.
10016 * @note Vertical mode is set by default.
10018 * On horizontal mode items are displayed on list from left to right,
10019 * instead of from top to bottom. Also, the list will scroll horizontally.
10020 * Each item will presents left icon on top and right icon, or end, at
10023 * @see elm_list_horizontal_get()
10027 EAPI void elm_list_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool horizontal) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10030 * Get a value whether horizontal mode is enabled or not.
10032 * @param obj The list object.
10033 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means horizontal mode selection is enabled.
10034 * @c EINA_FALSE indicates it's disabled. If @p obj is @c NULL,
10035 * @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
10037 * @see elm_list_horizontal_set() for details.
10041 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10044 * Enable or disable always select mode on the list object.
10046 * @param obj The list object
10047 * @param always_select @c EINA_TRUE to enable always select mode or
10048 * @c EINA_FALSE to disable it.
10050 * @note Always select mode is disabled by default.
10052 * Default behavior of list items is to only call its callback function
10053 * the first time it's pressed, i.e., when it is selected. If a selected
10054 * item is pressed again, and multi-select is disabled, it won't call
10055 * this function (if multi-select is enabled it will unselect the item).
10057 * If always select is enabled, it will call the callback function
10058 * everytime a item is pressed, so it will call when the item is selected,
10059 * and again when a selected item is pressed.
10061 * @see elm_list_always_select_mode_get()
10062 * @see elm_list_multi_select_set()
10066 EAPI void elm_list_always_select_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool always_select) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10069 * Get a value whether always select mode is enabled or not, meaning that
10070 * an item will always call its callback function, even if already selected.
10072 * @param obj The list object
10073 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means horizontal mode selection is enabled.
10074 * @c EINA_FALSE indicates it's disabled. If @p obj is @c NULL,
10075 * @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
10077 * @see elm_list_always_select_mode_set() for details.
10081 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_always_select_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10084 * Set bouncing behaviour when the scrolled content reaches an edge.
10086 * Tell the internal scroller object whether it should bounce or not
10087 * when it reaches the respective edges for each axis.
10089 * @param obj The list object
10090 * @param h_bounce Whether to bounce or not in the horizontal axis.
10091 * @param v_bounce Whether to bounce or not in the vertical axis.
10093 * @see elm_scroller_bounce_set()
10097 EAPI void elm_list_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10100 * Get the bouncing behaviour of the internal scroller.
10102 * Get whether the internal scroller should bounce when the edge of each
10103 * axis is reached scrolling.
10105 * @param obj The list object.
10106 * @param h_bounce Pointer where to store the bounce state of the horizontal
10108 * @param v_bounce Pointer where to store the bounce state of the vertical
10111 * @see elm_scroller_bounce_get()
10112 * @see elm_list_bounce_set()
10116 EAPI void elm_list_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10119 * Set the scrollbar policy.
10121 * @param obj The list object
10122 * @param policy_h Horizontal scrollbar policy.
10123 * @param policy_v Vertical scrollbar policy.
10125 * This sets the scrollbar visibility policy for the given scroller.
10126 * #ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_AUTO means the scrollber is made visible if it
10127 * is needed, and otherwise kept hidden. #ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_ON turns
10128 * it on all the time, and #ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_OFF always keeps it off.
10129 * This applies respectively for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
10131 * The both are disabled by default, i.e., are set to
10132 * #ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_OFF.
10136 EAPI void elm_list_scroller_policy_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy policy_h, Elm_Scroller_Policy policy_v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10139 * Get the scrollbar policy.
10141 * @see elm_list_scroller_policy_get() for details.
10143 * @param obj The list object.
10144 * @param policy_h Pointer where to store horizontal scrollbar policy.
10145 * @param policy_v Pointer where to store vertical scrollbar policy.
10149 EAPI void elm_list_scroller_policy_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy *policy_h, Elm_Scroller_Policy *policy_v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10152 * Append a new item to the list object.
10154 * @param obj The list object.
10155 * @param label The label of the list item.
10156 * @param icon The icon object to use for the left side of the item. An
10157 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
10158 * with elm_icon_add().
10159 * @param end The icon object to use for the right side of the item. An
10160 * icon can be any Evas object.
10161 * @param func The function to call when the item is clicked.
10162 * @param data The data to associate with the item for related callbacks.
10164 * @return The created item or @c NULL upon failure.
10166 * A new item will be created and appended to the list, i.e., will
10167 * be set as @b last item.
10169 * Items created with this method can be deleted with
10170 * elm_list_item_del().
10172 * Associated @p data can be properly freed when item is deleted if a
10173 * callback function is set with elm_list_item_del_cb_set().
10175 * If a function is passed as argument, it will be called everytime this item
10176 * is selected, i.e., the user clicks over an unselected item.
10177 * If always select is enabled it will call this function every time
10178 * user clicks over an item (already selected or not).
10179 * If such function isn't needed, just passing
10180 * @c NULL as @p func is enough. The same should be done for @p data.
10182 * Simple example (with no function callback or data associated):
10184 * li = elm_list_add(win);
10185 * ic = elm_icon_add(win);
10186 * elm_icon_file_set(ic, "path/to/image", NULL);
10187 * elm_icon_scale_set(ic, EINA_TRUE, EINA_TRUE);
10188 * elm_list_item_append(li, "label", ic, NULL, NULL, NULL);
10190 * evas_object_show(li);
10193 * @see elm_list_always_select_mode_set()
10194 * @see elm_list_item_del()
10195 * @see elm_list_item_del_cb_set()
10196 * @see elm_list_clear()
10197 * @see elm_icon_add()
10201 EAPI Elm_List_Item *elm_list_item_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, Evas_Object *icon, Evas_Object *end, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10204 * Prepend a new item to the list object.
10206 * @param obj The list object.
10207 * @param label The label of the list item.
10208 * @param icon The icon object to use for the left side of the item. An
10209 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
10210 * with elm_icon_add().
10211 * @param end The icon object to use for the right side of the item. An
10212 * icon can be any Evas object.
10213 * @param func The function to call when the item is clicked.
10214 * @param data The data to associate with the item for related callbacks.
10216 * @return The created item or @c NULL upon failure.
10218 * A new item will be created and prepended to the list, i.e., will
10219 * be set as @b first item.
10221 * Items created with this method can be deleted with
10222 * elm_list_item_del().
10224 * Associated @p data can be properly freed when item is deleted if a
10225 * callback function is set with elm_list_item_del_cb_set().
10227 * If a function is passed as argument, it will be called everytime this item
10228 * is selected, i.e., the user clicks over an unselected item.
10229 * If always select is enabled it will call this function every time
10230 * user clicks over an item (already selected or not).
10231 * If such function isn't needed, just passing
10232 * @c NULL as @p func is enough. The same should be done for @p data.
10234 * @see elm_list_item_append() for a simple code example.
10235 * @see elm_list_always_select_mode_set()
10236 * @see elm_list_item_del()
10237 * @see elm_list_item_del_cb_set()
10238 * @see elm_list_clear()
10239 * @see elm_icon_add()
10243 EAPI Elm_List_Item *elm_list_item_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, Evas_Object *icon, Evas_Object *end, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10246 * Insert a new item into the list object before item @p before.
10248 * @param obj The list object.
10249 * @param before The list item to insert before.
10250 * @param label The label of the list item.
10251 * @param icon The icon object to use for the left side of the item. An
10252 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
10253 * with elm_icon_add().
10254 * @param end The icon object to use for the right side of the item. An
10255 * icon can be any Evas object.
10256 * @param func The function to call when the item is clicked.
10257 * @param data The data to associate with the item for related callbacks.
10259 * @return The created item or @c NULL upon failure.
10261 * A new item will be created and added to the list. Its position in
10262 * this list will be just before item @p before.
10264 * Items created with this method can be deleted with
10265 * elm_list_item_del().
10267 * Associated @p data can be properly freed when item is deleted if a
10268 * callback function is set with elm_list_item_del_cb_set().
10270 * If a function is passed as argument, it will be called everytime this item
10271 * is selected, i.e., the user clicks over an unselected item.
10272 * If always select is enabled it will call this function every time
10273 * user clicks over an item (already selected or not).
10274 * If such function isn't needed, just passing
10275 * @c NULL as @p func is enough. The same should be done for @p data.
10277 * @see elm_list_item_append() for a simple code example.
10278 * @see elm_list_always_select_mode_set()
10279 * @see elm_list_item_del()
10280 * @see elm_list_item_del_cb_set()
10281 * @see elm_list_clear()
10282 * @see elm_icon_add()
10286 EAPI Elm_List_Item *elm_list_item_insert_before(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_List_Item *before, const char *label, Evas_Object *icon, Evas_Object *end, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
10289 * Insert a new item into the list object after item @p after.
10291 * @param obj The list object.
10292 * @param after The list item to insert after.
10293 * @param label The label of the list item.
10294 * @param icon The icon object to use for the left side of the item. An
10295 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
10296 * with elm_icon_add().
10297 * @param end The icon object to use for the right side of the item. An
10298 * icon can be any Evas object.
10299 * @param func The function to call when the item is clicked.
10300 * @param data The data to associate with the item for related callbacks.
10302 * @return The created item or @c NULL upon failure.
10304 * A new item will be created and added to the list. Its position in
10305 * this list will be just after item @p after.
10307 * Items created with this method can be deleted with
10308 * elm_list_item_del().
10310 * Associated @p data can be properly freed when item is deleted if a
10311 * callback function is set with elm_list_item_del_cb_set().
10313 * If a function is passed as argument, it will be called everytime this item
10314 * is selected, i.e., the user clicks over an unselected item.
10315 * If always select is enabled it will call this function every time
10316 * user clicks over an item (already selected or not).
10317 * If such function isn't needed, just passing
10318 * @c NULL as @p func is enough. The same should be done for @p data.
10320 * @see elm_list_item_append() for a simple code example.
10321 * @see elm_list_always_select_mode_set()
10322 * @see elm_list_item_del()
10323 * @see elm_list_item_del_cb_set()
10324 * @see elm_list_clear()
10325 * @see elm_icon_add()
10329 EAPI Elm_List_Item *elm_list_item_insert_after(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_List_Item *after, const char *label, Evas_Object *icon, Evas_Object *end, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
10332 * Insert a new item into the sorted list object.
10334 * @param obj The list object.
10335 * @param label The label of the list item.
10336 * @param icon The icon object to use for the left side of the item. An
10337 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
10338 * with elm_icon_add().
10339 * @param end The icon object to use for the right side of the item. An
10340 * icon can be any Evas object.
10341 * @param func The function to call when the item is clicked.
10342 * @param data The data to associate with the item for related callbacks.
10343 * @param cmp_func The comparing function to be used to sort list
10344 * items <b>by #Elm_List_Item item handles</b>. This function will
10345 * receive two items and compare them, returning a non-negative integer
10346 * if the second item should be place after the first, or negative value
10347 * if should be placed before.
10349 * @return The created item or @c NULL upon failure.
10351 * @note This function inserts values into a list object assuming it was
10352 * sorted and the result will be sorted.
10354 * A new item will be created and added to the list. Its position in
10355 * this list will be found comparing the new item with previously inserted
10356 * items using function @p cmp_func.
10358 * Items created with this method can be deleted with
10359 * elm_list_item_del().
10361 * Associated @p data can be properly freed when item is deleted if a
10362 * callback function is set with elm_list_item_del_cb_set().
10364 * If a function is passed as argument, it will be called everytime this item
10365 * is selected, i.e., the user clicks over an unselected item.
10366 * If always select is enabled it will call this function every time
10367 * user clicks over an item (already selected or not).
10368 * If such function isn't needed, just passing
10369 * @c NULL as @p func is enough. The same should be done for @p data.
10371 * @see elm_list_item_append() for a simple code example.
10372 * @see elm_list_always_select_mode_set()
10373 * @see elm_list_item_del()
10374 * @see elm_list_item_del_cb_set()
10375 * @see elm_list_clear()
10376 * @see elm_icon_add()
10380 EAPI Elm_List_Item *elm_list_item_sorted_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, Evas_Object *icon, Evas_Object *end, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data, Eina_Compare_Cb cmp_func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10383 * Remove all list's items.
10385 * @param obj The list object
10387 * @see elm_list_item_del()
10388 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10392 EAPI void elm_list_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10395 * Get a list of all the list items.
10397 * @param obj The list object
10398 * @return An @c Eina_List of list items, #Elm_List_Item,
10399 * or @c NULL on failure.
10401 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10402 * @see elm_list_item_del()
10403 * @see elm_list_clear()
10407 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_list_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10410 * Get the selected item.
10412 * @param obj The list object.
10413 * @return The selected list item.
10415 * The selected item can be unselected with function
10416 * elm_list_item_selected_set().
10418 * The selected item always will be highlighted on list.
10420 * @see elm_list_selected_items_get()
10424 EAPI Elm_List_Item *elm_list_selected_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10427 * Return a list of the currently selected list items.
10429 * @param obj The list object.
10430 * @return An @c Eina_List of list items, #Elm_List_Item,
10431 * or @c NULL on failure.
10433 * Multiple items can be selected if multi select is enabled. It can be
10434 * done with elm_list_multi_select_set().
10436 * @see elm_list_selected_item_get()
10437 * @see elm_list_multi_select_set()
10441 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_list_selected_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10444 * Set the selected state of an item.
10446 * @param item The list item
10447 * @param selected The selected state
10449 * This sets the selected state of the given item @p it.
10450 * @c EINA_TRUE for selected, @c EINA_FALSE for not selected.
10452 * If a new item is selected the previosly selected will be unselected,
10453 * unless multiple selection is enabled with elm_list_multi_select_set().
10454 * Previoulsy selected item can be get with function
10455 * elm_list_selected_item_get().
10457 * Selected items will be highlighted.
10459 * @see elm_list_item_selected_get()
10460 * @see elm_list_selected_item_get()
10461 * @see elm_list_multi_select_set()
10465 EAPI void elm_list_item_selected_set(Elm_List_Item *item, Eina_Bool selected) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10468 * Get whether the @p item is selected or not.
10470 * @param item The list item.
10471 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means item is selected. @c EINA_FALSE indicates
10472 * it's not. If @p obj is @c NULL, @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
10474 * @see elm_list_selected_item_set() for details.
10475 * @see elm_list_item_selected_get()
10479 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_item_selected_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10482 * Set or unset item as a separator.
10484 * @param it The list item.
10485 * @param setting @c EINA_TRUE to set item @p it as separator or
10486 * @c EINA_FALSE to unset, i.e., item will be used as a regular item.
10488 * Items aren't set as separator by default.
10490 * If set as separator it will display separator theme, so won't display
10493 * @see elm_list_item_separator_get()
10497 EAPI void elm_list_item_separator_set(Elm_List_Item *it, Eina_Bool setting) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10500 * Get a value whether item is a separator or not.
10502 * @see elm_list_item_separator_set() for details.
10504 * @param it The list item.
10505 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means item @p it is a separator. @c EINA_FALSE
10506 * indicates it's not. If @p it is @c NULL, @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
10510 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_item_separator_get(const Elm_List_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10513 * Show @p item in the list view.
10515 * @param item The list item to be shown.
10517 * It won't animate list until item is visible. If such behavior is wanted,
10518 * use elm_list_bring_in() intead.
10522 EAPI void elm_list_item_show(Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10525 * Bring in the given item to list view.
10527 * @param item The item.
10529 * This causes list to jump to the given item @p item and show it
10530 * (by scrolling), if it is not fully visible.
10532 * This may use animation to do so and take a period of time.
10534 * If animation isn't wanted, elm_list_item_show() can be used.
10538 EAPI void elm_list_item_bring_in(Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10541 * Delete them item from the list.
10543 * @param item The item of list to be deleted.
10545 * If deleting all list items is required, elm_list_clear()
10546 * should be used instead of getting items list and deleting each one.
10548 * @see elm_list_clear()
10549 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10550 * @see elm_list_item_del_cb_set()
10554 EAPI void elm_list_item_del(Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10557 * Set the function called when a list item is freed.
10559 * @param item The item to set the callback on
10560 * @param func The function called
10562 * If there is a @p func, then it will be called prior item's memory release.
10563 * That will be called with the following arguments:
10565 * @li item's Evas object;
10568 * This way, a data associated to a list item could be properly freed.
10572 EAPI void elm_list_item_del_cb_set(Elm_List_Item *item, Evas_Smart_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10575 * Get the data associated to the item.
10577 * @param item The list item
10578 * @return The data associated to @p item
10580 * The return value is a pointer to data associated to @p item when it was
10581 * created, with function elm_list_item_append() or similar. If no data
10582 * was passed as argument, it will return @c NULL.
10584 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10588 EAPI void *elm_list_item_data_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10591 * Get the left side icon associated to the item.
10593 * @param item The list item
10594 * @return The left side icon associated to @p item
10596 * The return value is a pointer to the icon associated to @p item when
10598 * created, with function elm_list_item_append() or similar, or later
10599 * with function elm_list_item_icon_set(). If no icon
10600 * was passed as argument, it will return @c NULL.
10602 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10603 * @see elm_list_item_icon_set()
10607 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_list_item_icon_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10610 * Set the left side icon associated to the item.
10612 * @param item The list item
10613 * @param icon The left side icon object to associate with @p item
10615 * The icon object to use at left side of the item. An
10616 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
10617 * with elm_icon_add().
10619 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
10620 * @warning Setting the same icon for two items will cause the icon to
10621 * dissapear from the first item.
10623 * If an icon was passed as argument on item creation, with function
10624 * elm_list_item_append() or similar, it will be already
10625 * associated to the item.
10627 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10628 * @see elm_list_item_icon_get()
10632 EAPI void elm_list_item_icon_set(Elm_List_Item *item, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10635 * Get the right side icon associated to the item.
10637 * @param item The list item
10638 * @return The right side icon associated to @p item
10640 * The return value is a pointer to the icon associated to @p item when
10642 * created, with function elm_list_item_append() or similar, or later
10643 * with function elm_list_item_icon_set(). If no icon
10644 * was passed as argument, it will return @c NULL.
10646 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10647 * @see elm_list_item_icon_set()
10651 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_list_item_end_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10654 * Set the right side icon associated to the item.
10656 * @param item The list item
10657 * @param end The right side icon object to associate with @p item
10659 * The icon object to use at right side of the item. An
10660 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
10661 * with elm_icon_add().
10663 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
10664 * @warning Setting the same icon for two items will cause the icon to
10665 * dissapear from the first item.
10667 * If an icon was passed as argument on item creation, with function
10668 * elm_list_item_append() or similar, it will be already
10669 * associated to the item.
10671 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10672 * @see elm_list_item_end_get()
10676 EAPI void elm_list_item_end_set(Elm_List_Item *item, Evas_Object *end) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10679 * Gets the base object of the item.
10681 * @param item The list item
10682 * @return The base object associated with @p item
10684 * Base object is the @c Evas_Object that represents that item.
10688 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_list_item_base_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10691 * Get the label of item.
10693 * @param item The item of list.
10694 * @return The label of item.
10696 * The return value is a pointer to the label associated to @p item when
10697 * it was created, with function elm_list_item_append(), or later
10698 * with function elm_list_item_label_set. If no label
10699 * was passed as argument, it will return @c NULL.
10701 * @see elm_list_item_label_set() for more details.
10702 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10706 EAPI const char *elm_list_item_label_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10709 * Set the label of item.
10711 * @param item The item of list.
10712 * @param text The label of item.
10714 * The label to be displayed by the item.
10715 * Label will be placed between left and right side icons (if set).
10717 * If a label was passed as argument on item creation, with function
10718 * elm_list_item_append() or similar, it will be already
10719 * displayed by the item.
10721 * @see elm_list_item_label_get()
10722 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10726 EAPI void elm_list_item_label_set(Elm_List_Item *item, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10730 * Get the item before @p it in list.
10732 * @param it The list item.
10733 * @return The item before @p it, or @c NULL if none or on failure.
10735 * @note If it is the first item, @c NULL will be returned.
10737 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10738 * @see elm_list_items_get()
10742 EAPI Elm_List_Item *elm_list_item_prev(const Elm_List_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10745 * Get the item after @p it in list.
10747 * @param it The list item.
10748 * @return The item after @p it, or @c NULL if none or on failure.
10750 * @note If it is the last item, @c NULL will be returned.
10752 * @see elm_list_item_append()
10753 * @see elm_list_items_get()
10757 EAPI Elm_List_Item *elm_list_item_next(const Elm_List_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10760 * Sets the disabled/enabled state of a list item.
10762 * @param it The item.
10763 * @param disabled The disabled state.
10765 * A disabled item cannot be selected or unselected. It will also
10766 * change its appearance (generally greyed out). This sets the
10767 * disabled state (@c EINA_TRUE for disabled, @c EINA_FALSE for
10772 EAPI void elm_list_item_disabled_set(Elm_List_Item *it, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10775 * Get a value whether list item is disabled or not.
10777 * @param it The item.
10778 * @return The disabled state.
10780 * @see elm_list_item_disabled_set() for more details.
10784 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_item_disabled_get(const Elm_List_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10787 * Set the text to be shown in a given list item's tooltips.
10789 * @param item Target item.
10790 * @param text The text to set in the content.
10792 * Setup the text as tooltip to object. The item can have only one tooltip,
10793 * so any previous tooltip data - set with this function or
10794 * elm_list_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() - is removed.
10796 * @see elm_object_tooltip_text_set() for more details.
10800 EAPI void elm_list_item_tooltip_text_set(Elm_List_Item *item, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10804 * @brief Disable size restrictions on an object's tooltip
10805 * @param item The tooltip's anchor object
10806 * @param disable If EINA_TRUE, size restrictions are disabled
10807 * @return EINA_FALSE on failure, EINA_TRUE on success
10809 * This function allows a tooltip to expand beyond its parant window's canvas.
10810 * It will instead be limited only by the size of the display.
10812 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_item_tooltip_size_restrict_disable(Elm_List_Item *item, Eina_Bool disable) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10814 * @brief Retrieve size restriction state of an object's tooltip
10815 * @param obj The tooltip's anchor object
10816 * @return If EINA_TRUE, size restrictions are disabled
10818 * This function returns whether a tooltip is allowed to expand beyond
10819 * its parant window's canvas.
10820 * It will instead be limited only by the size of the display.
10822 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_item_tooltip_size_restrict_disabled_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10825 * Set the content to be shown in the tooltip item.
10827 * Setup the tooltip to item. The item can have only one tooltip,
10828 * so any previous tooltip data is removed. @p func(with @p data) will
10829 * be called every time that need show the tooltip and it should
10830 * return a valid Evas_Object. This object is then managed fully by
10831 * tooltip system and is deleted when the tooltip is gone.
10833 * @param item the list item being attached a tooltip.
10834 * @param func the function used to create the tooltip contents.
10835 * @param data what to provide to @a func as callback data/context.
10836 * @param del_cb called when data is not needed anymore, either when
10837 * another callback replaces @a func, the tooltip is unset with
10838 * elm_list_item_tooltip_unset() or the owner @a item
10839 * dies. This callback receives as the first parameter the
10840 * given @a data, and @c event_info is the item.
10842 * @see elm_object_tooltip_content_cb_set() for more details.
10846 EAPI void elm_list_item_tooltip_content_cb_set(Elm_List_Item *item, Elm_Tooltip_Item_Content_Cb func, const void *data, Evas_Smart_Cb del_cb) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10849 * Unset tooltip from item.
10851 * @param item list item to remove previously set tooltip.
10853 * Remove tooltip from item. The callback provided as del_cb to
10854 * elm_list_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() will be called to notify
10855 * it is not used anymore.
10857 * @see elm_object_tooltip_unset() for more details.
10858 * @see elm_list_item_tooltip_content_cb_set()
10862 EAPI void elm_list_item_tooltip_unset(Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10865 * Sets a different style for this item tooltip.
10867 * @note before you set a style you should define a tooltip with
10868 * elm_list_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() or
10869 * elm_list_item_tooltip_text_set()
10871 * @param item list item with tooltip already set.
10872 * @param style the theme style to use (default, transparent, ...)
10874 * @see elm_object_tooltip_style_set() for more details.
10878 EAPI void elm_list_item_tooltip_style_set(Elm_List_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10881 * Get the style for this item tooltip.
10883 * @param item list item with tooltip already set.
10884 * @return style the theme style in use, defaults to "default". If the
10885 * object does not have a tooltip set, then NULL is returned.
10887 * @see elm_object_tooltip_style_get() for more details.
10888 * @see elm_list_item_tooltip_style_set()
10892 EAPI const char *elm_list_item_tooltip_style_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10895 * Set the type of mouse pointer/cursor decoration to be shown,
10896 * when the mouse pointer is over the given list widget item
10898 * @param item list item to customize cursor on
10899 * @param cursor the cursor type's name
10901 * This function works analogously as elm_object_cursor_set(), but
10902 * here the cursor's changing area is restricted to the item's
10903 * area, and not the whole widget's. Note that that item cursors
10904 * have precedence over widget cursors, so that a mouse over an
10905 * item with custom cursor set will always show @b that cursor.
10907 * If this function is called twice for an object, a previously set
10908 * cursor will be unset on the second call.
10910 * @see elm_object_cursor_set()
10911 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_get()
10912 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_unset()
10916 EAPI void elm_list_item_cursor_set(Elm_List_Item *item, const char *cursor) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10919 * Get the type of mouse pointer/cursor decoration set to be shown,
10920 * when the mouse pointer is over the given list widget item
10922 * @param item list item with custom cursor set
10923 * @return the cursor type's name or @c NULL, if no custom cursors
10924 * were set to @p item (and on errors)
10926 * @see elm_object_cursor_get()
10927 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_set()
10928 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_unset()
10932 EAPI const char *elm_list_item_cursor_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10935 * Unset any custom mouse pointer/cursor decoration set to be
10936 * shown, when the mouse pointer is over the given list widget
10937 * item, thus making it show the @b default cursor again.
10939 * @param item a list item
10941 * Use this call to undo any custom settings on this item's cursor
10942 * decoration, bringing it back to defaults (no custom style set).
10944 * @see elm_object_cursor_unset()
10945 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_set()
10949 EAPI void elm_list_item_cursor_unset(Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10952 * Set a different @b style for a given custom cursor set for a
10955 * @param item list item with custom cursor set
10956 * @param style the <b>theme style</b> to use (e.g. @c "default",
10957 * @c "transparent", etc)
10959 * This function only makes sense when one is using custom mouse
10960 * cursor decorations <b>defined in a theme file</b>, which can have,
10961 * given a cursor name/type, <b>alternate styles</b> on it. It
10962 * works analogously as elm_object_cursor_style_set(), but here
10963 * applyed only to list item objects.
10965 * @warning Before you set a cursor style you should have definen a
10966 * custom cursor previously on the item, with
10967 * elm_list_item_cursor_set()
10969 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_engine_only_set()
10970 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_style_get()
10974 EAPI void elm_list_item_cursor_style_set(Elm_List_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10977 * Get the current @b style set for a given list item's custom
10980 * @param item list item with custom cursor set.
10981 * @return style the cursor style in use. If the object does not
10982 * have a cursor set, then @c NULL is returned.
10984 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_style_set() for more details
10988 EAPI const char *elm_list_item_cursor_style_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
10991 * Set if the (custom)cursor for a given list item should be
10992 * searched in its theme, also, or should only rely on the
10993 * rendering engine.
10995 * @param item item with custom (custom) cursor already set on
10996 * @param engine_only Use @c EINA_TRUE to have cursors looked for
10997 * only on those provided by the rendering engine, @c EINA_FALSE to
10998 * have them searched on the widget's theme, as well.
11000 * @note This call is of use only if you've set a custom cursor
11001 * for list items, with elm_list_item_cursor_set().
11003 * @note By default, cursors will only be looked for between those
11004 * provided by the rendering engine.
11008 EAPI void elm_list_item_cursor_engine_only_set(Elm_List_Item *item, Eina_Bool engine_only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11011 * Get if the (custom) cursor for a given list item is being
11012 * searched in its theme, also, or is only relying on the rendering
11015 * @param item a list item
11016 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if cursors are being looked for only on
11017 * those provided by the rendering engine, @c EINA_FALSE if they
11018 * are being searched on the widget's theme, as well.
11020 * @see elm_list_item_cursor_engine_only_set(), for more details
11024 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_list_item_cursor_engine_only_get(const Elm_List_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11031 * @defgroup Slider Slider
11032 * @ingroup Elementary
11034 * @image html img/widget/slider/preview-00.png
11035 * @image latex img/widget/slider/preview-00.eps width=\textwidth
11037 * The slider adds a dragable “slider” widget for selecting the value of
11038 * something within a range.
11040 * A slider can be horizontal or vertical. It can contain an Icon and has a
11041 * primary label as well as a units label (that is formatted with floating
11042 * point values and thus accepts a printf-style format string, like
11043 * “%1.2f units”. There is also an indicator string that may be somewhere
11044 * else (like on the slider itself) that also accepts a format string like
11045 * units. Label, Icon Unit and Indicator strings/objects are optional.
11047 * A slider may be inverted which means values invert, with high vales being
11048 * on the left or top and low values on the right or bottom (as opposed to
11049 * normally being low on the left or top and high on the bottom and right).
11051 * The slider should have its minimum and maximum values set by the
11052 * application with elm_slider_min_max_set() and value should also be set by
11053 * the application before use with elm_slider_value_set(). The span of the
11054 * slider is its length (horizontally or vertically). This will be scaled by
11055 * the object or applications scaling factor. At any point code can query the
11056 * slider for its value with elm_slider_value_get().
11058 * Smart callbacks one can listen to:
11059 * - "changed" - Whenever the slider value is changed by the user.
11060 * - "slider,drag,start" - dragging the slider indicator around has started.
11061 * - "slider,drag,stop" - dragging the slider indicator around has stopped.
11062 * - "delay,changed" - A short time after the value is changed by the user.
11063 * This will be called only when the user stops dragging for
11064 * a very short period or when they release their
11065 * finger/mouse, so it avoids possibly expensive reactions to
11066 * the value change.
11068 * Available styles for it:
11071 * Here is an example on its usage:
11072 * @li @ref slider_example
11076 * @addtogroup Slider
11081 * Add a new slider widget to the given parent Elementary
11082 * (container) object.
11084 * @param parent The parent object.
11085 * @return a new slider widget handle or @c NULL, on errors.
11087 * This function inserts a new slider widget on the canvas.
11091 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_slider_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11094 * Set the label of a given slider widget
11096 * @param obj The progress bar object
11097 * @param label The text label string, in UTF-8
11100 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
11102 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_slider_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11105 * Get the label of a given slider widget
11107 * @param obj The progressbar object
11108 * @return The text label string, in UTF-8
11111 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_get() instead.
11113 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_slider_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11116 * Set the icon object of the slider object.
11118 * @param obj The slider object.
11119 * @param icon The icon object.
11121 * On horizontal mode, icon is placed at left, and on vertical mode,
11124 * @note Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
11125 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
11126 * elm_slider_icon_unset() function.
11128 * @warning If the object being set does not have minimum size hints set,
11129 * it won't get properly displayed.
11133 EAPI void elm_slider_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11136 * Unset an icon set on a given slider widget.
11138 * @param obj The slider object.
11139 * @return The icon object that was being used, if any was set, or
11140 * @c NULL, otherwise (and on errors).
11142 * On horizontal mode, icon is placed at left, and on vertical mode,
11145 * This call will unparent and return the icon object which was set
11146 * for this widget, previously, on success.
11148 * @see elm_slider_icon_set() for more details
11149 * @see elm_slider_icon_get()
11153 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_slider_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11156 * Retrieve the icon object set for a given slider widget.
11158 * @param obj The slider object.
11159 * @return The icon object's handle, if @p obj had one set, or @c NULL,
11160 * otherwise (and on errors).
11162 * On horizontal mode, icon is placed at left, and on vertical mode,
11165 * @see elm_slider_icon_set() for more details
11166 * @see elm_slider_icon_unset()
11170 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_slider_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11173 * Set the end object of the slider object.
11175 * @param obj The slider object.
11176 * @param end The end object.
11178 * On horizontal mode, end is placed at left, and on vertical mode,
11179 * placed at bottom.
11181 * @note Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
11182 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
11183 * elm_slider_end_unset() function.
11185 * @warning If the object being set does not have minimum size hints set,
11186 * it won't get properly displayed.
11190 EAPI void elm_slider_end_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *end) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11193 * Unset an end object set on a given slider widget.
11195 * @param obj The slider object.
11196 * @return The end object that was being used, if any was set, or
11197 * @c NULL, otherwise (and on errors).
11199 * On horizontal mode, end is placed at left, and on vertical mode,
11200 * placed at bottom.
11202 * This call will unparent and return the icon object which was set
11203 * for this widget, previously, on success.
11205 * @see elm_slider_end_set() for more details.
11206 * @see elm_slider_end_get()
11210 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_slider_end_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11213 * Retrieve the end object set for a given slider widget.
11215 * @param obj The slider object.
11216 * @return The end object's handle, if @p obj had one set, or @c NULL,
11217 * otherwise (and on errors).
11219 * On horizontal mode, icon is placed at right, and on vertical mode,
11220 * placed at bottom.
11222 * @see elm_slider_end_set() for more details.
11223 * @see elm_slider_end_unset()
11227 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_slider_end_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11230 * Set the (exact) length of the bar region of a given slider widget.
11232 * @param obj The slider object.
11233 * @param size The length of the slider's bar region.
11235 * This sets the minimum width (when in horizontal mode) or height
11236 * (when in vertical mode) of the actual bar area of the slider
11237 * @p obj. This in turn affects the object's minimum size. Use
11238 * this when you're not setting other size hints expanding on the
11239 * given direction (like weight and alignment hints) and you would
11240 * like it to have a specific size.
11242 * @note Icon, end, label, indicator and unit text around @p obj
11243 * will require their
11244 * own space, which will make @p obj to require more the @p size,
11247 * @see elm_slider_span_size_get()
11251 EAPI void elm_slider_span_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord size) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11254 * Get the length set for the bar region of a given slider widget
11256 * @param obj The slider object.
11257 * @return The length of the slider's bar region.
11259 * If that size was not set previously, with
11260 * elm_slider_span_size_set(), this call will return @c 0.
11264 EAPI Evas_Coord elm_slider_span_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11267 * Set the format string for the unit label.
11269 * @param obj The slider object.
11270 * @param format The format string for the unit display.
11272 * Unit label is displayed all the time, if set, after slider's bar.
11273 * In horizontal mode, at right and in vertical mode, at bottom.
11275 * If @c NULL, unit label won't be visible. If not it sets the format
11276 * string for the label text. To the label text is provided a floating point
11277 * value, so the label text can display up to 1 floating point value.
11278 * Note that this is optional.
11280 * Use a format string such as "%1.2f meters" for example, and it will
11281 * display values like: "3.14 meters" for a value equal to 3.14159.
11283 * Default is unit label disabled.
11285 * @see elm_slider_indicator_format_get()
11289 EAPI void elm_slider_unit_format_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *format) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11292 * Get the unit label format of the slider.
11294 * @param obj The slider object.
11295 * @return The unit label format string in UTF-8.
11297 * Unit label is displayed all the time, if set, after slider's bar.
11298 * In horizontal mode, at right and in vertical mode, at bottom.
11300 * @see elm_slider_unit_format_set() for more
11301 * information on how this works.
11305 EAPI const char *elm_slider_unit_format_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11308 * Set the format string for the indicator label.
11310 * @param obj The slider object.
11311 * @param indicator The format string for the indicator display.
11313 * The slider may display its value somewhere else then unit label,
11314 * for example, above the slider knob that is dragged around. This function
11315 * sets the format string used for this.
11317 * If @c NULL, indicator label won't be visible. If not it sets the format
11318 * string for the label text. To the label text is provided a floating point
11319 * value, so the label text can display up to 1 floating point value.
11320 * Note that this is optional.
11322 * Use a format string such as "%1.2f meters" for example, and it will
11323 * display values like: "3.14 meters" for a value equal to 3.14159.
11325 * Default is indicator label disabled.
11327 * @see elm_slider_indicator_format_get()
11331 EAPI void elm_slider_indicator_format_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *indicator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11334 * Get the indicator label format of the slider.
11336 * @param obj The slider object.
11337 * @return The indicator label format string in UTF-8.
11339 * The slider may display its value somewhere else then unit label,
11340 * for example, above the slider knob that is dragged around. This function
11341 * gets the format string used for this.
11343 * @see elm_slider_indicator_format_set() for more
11344 * information on how this works.
11348 EAPI const char *elm_slider_indicator_format_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11351 * Set the format function pointer for the indicator label
11353 * @param obj The slider object.
11354 * @param func The indicator format function.
11355 * @param free_func The freeing function for the format string.
11357 * Set the callback function to format the indicator string.
11359 * @see elm_slider_indicator_format_set() for more info on how this works.
11363 EAPI void elm_slider_indicator_format_function_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *(*func)(double val), void (*free_func)(const char *str)) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11366 * Set the format function pointer for the units label
11368 * @param obj The slider object.
11369 * @param func The units format function.
11370 * @param free_func The freeing function for the format string.
11372 * Set the callback function to format the indicator string.
11374 * @see elm_slider_units_format_set() for more info on how this works.
11378 EAPI void elm_slider_units_format_function_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *(*func)(double val), void (*free_func)(const char *str)) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11381 * Set the orientation of a given slider widget.
11383 * @param obj The slider object.
11384 * @param horizontal Use @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj to be
11385 * @b horizontal, @c EINA_FALSE to make it @b vertical.
11387 * Use this function to change how your slider is to be
11388 * disposed: vertically or horizontally.
11390 * By default it's displayed horizontally.
11392 * @see elm_slider_horizontal_get()
11396 EAPI void elm_slider_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool horizontal) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11399 * Retrieve the orientation of a given slider widget
11401 * @param obj The slider object.
11402 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj is set to be @b horizontal,
11403 * @c EINA_FALSE if it's @b vertical (and on errors).
11405 * @see elm_slider_horizontal_set() for more details.
11409 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_slider_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11412 * Set the minimum and maximum values for the slider.
11414 * @param obj The slider object.
11415 * @param min The minimum value.
11416 * @param max The maximum value.
11418 * Define the allowed range of values to be selected by the user.
11420 * If actual value is less than @p min, it will be updated to @p min. If it
11421 * is bigger then @p max, will be updated to @p max. Actual value can be
11422 * get with elm_slider_value_get().
11424 * By default, min is equal to 0.0, and max is equal to 1.0.
11426 * @warning Maximum must be greater than minimum, otherwise behavior
11429 * @see elm_slider_min_max_get()
11433 EAPI void elm_slider_min_max_set(Evas_Object *obj, double min, double max) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11436 * Get the minimum and maximum values of the slider.
11438 * @param obj The slider object.
11439 * @param min Pointer where to store the minimum value.
11440 * @param max Pointer where to store the maximum value.
11442 * @note If only one value is needed, the other pointer can be passed
11445 * @see elm_slider_min_max_set() for details.
11449 EAPI void elm_slider_min_max_get(const Evas_Object *obj, double *min, double *max) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11452 * Set the value the slider displays.
11454 * @param obj The slider object.
11455 * @param val The value to be displayed.
11457 * Value will be presented on the unit label following format specified with
11458 * elm_slider_unit_format_set() and on indicator with
11459 * elm_slider_indicator_format_set().
11461 * @warning The value must to be between min and max values. This values
11462 * are set by elm_slider_min_max_set().
11464 * @see elm_slider_value_get()
11465 * @see elm_slider_unit_format_set()
11466 * @see elm_slider_indicator_format_set()
11467 * @see elm_slider_min_max_set()
11471 EAPI void elm_slider_value_set(Evas_Object *obj, double val) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11474 * Get the value displayed by the spinner.
11476 * @param obj The spinner object.
11477 * @return The value displayed.
11479 * @see elm_spinner_value_set() for details.
11483 EAPI double elm_slider_value_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11486 * Invert a given slider widget's displaying values order
11488 * @param obj The slider object.
11489 * @param inverted Use @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj inverted,
11490 * @c EINA_FALSE to bring it back to default, non-inverted values.
11492 * A slider may be @b inverted, in which state it gets its
11493 * values inverted, with high vales being on the left or top and
11494 * low values on the right or bottom, as opposed to normally have
11495 * the low values on the former and high values on the latter,
11496 * respectively, for horizontal and vertical modes.
11498 * @see elm_slider_inverted_get()
11502 EAPI void elm_slider_inverted_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool inverted) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11505 * Get whether a given slider widget's displaying values are
11508 * @param obj The slider object.
11509 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj has inverted values,
11510 * @c EINA_FALSE otherwise (and on errors).
11512 * @see elm_slider_inverted_set() for more details.
11516 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_slider_inverted_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11519 * Set whether to enlarge slider indicator (augmented knob) or not.
11521 * @param obj The slider object.
11522 * @param show @c EINA_TRUE will make it enlarge, @c EINA_FALSE will
11523 * let the knob always at default size.
11525 * By default, indicator will be bigger while dragged by the user.
11527 * @warning It won't display values set with
11528 * elm_slider_indicator_format_set() if you disable indicator.
11532 EAPI void elm_slider_indicator_show_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool show) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11535 * Get whether a given slider widget's enlarging indicator or not.
11537 * @param obj The slider object.
11538 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj is enlarging indicator, or
11539 * @c EINA_FALSE otherwise (and on errors).
11541 * @see elm_slider_indicator_show_set() for details.
11545 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_slider_indicator_show_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11552 * @addtogroup Actionslider Actionslider
11554 * @image html img/icon/actionslider/preview-00.png
11555 * @image latex img/icon/actionslider/preview-00.png
11557 * A actionslider is a switcher for 2 or 3 labels with customizable magnet
11558 * properties. The indicator is the element the user drags to choose a label.
11559 * When the position is set with magnet, when released the indicator will be
11560 * moved to it if it's nearest the magnetized position.
11562 * @note By default all positions are set as enabled.
11564 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
11566 * "selected" - when user selects an enabled position (the label is passed
11569 * "pos_changed" - when the indicator reaches any of the positions("left",
11570 * "right" or "center").
11572 * See an example of actionslider usage @ref actionslider_example_page "here"
11575 typedef enum _Elm_Actionslider_Pos
11577 ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_NONE = 0,
11578 ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_LEFT = 1 << 0,
11579 ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_CENTER = 1 << 1,
11580 ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_RIGHT = 1 << 2,
11581 ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_ALL = (1 << 3) -1
11582 } Elm_Actionslider_Pos;
11585 * Add a new actionslider to the parent.
11587 * @param parent The parent object
11588 * @return The new actionslider object or NULL if it cannot be created
11590 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_actionslider_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11592 * Set actionslider labels.
11594 * @param obj The actionslider object
11595 * @param left_label The label to be set on the left.
11596 * @param center_label The label to be set on the center.
11597 * @param right_label The label to be set on the right.
11598 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
11600 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_actionslider_labels_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *left_label, const char *center_label, const char *right_label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11602 * Get actionslider labels.
11604 * @param obj The actionslider object
11605 * @param left_label A char** to place the left_label of @p obj into.
11606 * @param center_label A char** to place the center_label of @p obj into.
11607 * @param right_label A char** to place the right_label of @p obj into.
11608 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
11610 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_actionslider_labels_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **left_label, const char **center_label, const char **right_label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11612 * Get actionslider selected label.
11614 * @param obj The actionslider object
11615 * @return The selected label
11617 EAPI const char *elm_actionslider_selected_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11619 * Set actionslider indicator position.
11621 * @param obj The actionslider object.
11622 * @param pos The position of the indicator.
11624 EAPI void elm_actionslider_indicator_pos_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Actionslider_Pos pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11626 * Get actionslider indicator position.
11628 * @param obj The actionslider object.
11629 * @return The position of the indicator.
11631 EAPI Elm_Actionslider_Pos elm_actionslider_indicator_pos_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11633 * Set actionslider magnet position. To make multiple positions magnets @c or
11634 * them together(e.g.: ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_LEFT | ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_RIGHT)
11636 * @param obj The actionslider object.
11637 * @param pos Bit mask indicating the magnet positions.
11639 EAPI void elm_actionslider_magnet_pos_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Actionslider_Pos pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11641 * Get actionslider magnet position.
11643 * @param obj The actionslider object.
11644 * @return The positions with magnet property.
11646 EAPI Elm_Actionslider_Pos elm_actionslider_magnet_pos_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11648 * Set actionslider enabled position. To set multiple positions as enabled @c or
11649 * them together(e.g.: ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_LEFT | ELM_ACTIONSLIDER_RIGHT).
11651 * @note All the positions are enabled by default.
11653 * @param obj The actionslider object.
11654 * @param pos Bit mask indicating the enabled positions.
11656 EAPI void elm_actionslider_enabled_pos_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Actionslider_Pos pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11658 * Get actionslider enabled position.
11660 * @param obj The actionslider object.
11661 * @return The enabled positions.
11663 EAPI Elm_Actionslider_Pos elm_actionslider_enabled_pos_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11665 * Set the label used on the indicator.
11667 * @param obj The actionslider object
11668 * @param label The label to be set on the indicator.
11669 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
11671 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_actionslider_indicator_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11673 * Get the label used on the indicator object.
11675 * @param obj The actionslider object
11676 * @return The indicator label
11677 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_get() instead.
11679 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_actionslider_indicator_label_get(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
11685 * @defgroup Genlist Genlist
11687 * This widget aims to have more expansive list than the simple list in
11688 * Elementary that could have more flexible items and allow many more entries
11689 * while still being fast and low on memory usage. At the same time it was
11690 * also made to be able to do tree structures. But the price to pay is more
11691 * complexity when it comes to usage. If all you want is a simple list with
11692 * icons and a single label, use the normal @ref List object.
11694 * Genlist has a fairly large API, mostly because it's relatively complex,
11695 * trying to be both expansive, powerful and efficient. First we will begin
11696 * an overview on the theory behind genlist.
11698 * @section Genlist_Item_Class Genlist item classes - creating items
11700 * In order to have the ability to add and delete items on the fly, genlist
11701 * implements a class (callback) system where the application provides a
11702 * structure with information about that type of item (genlist may contain
11703 * multiple different items with different classes, states and styles).
11704 * Genlist will call the functions in this struct (methods) when an item is
11705 * "realized" (i.e., created dynamically, while the user is scrolling the
11706 * grid). All objects will simply be deleted when no longer needed with
11707 * evas_object_del(). The #Elm_Genlist_Item_Class structure contains the
11708 * following members:
11709 * - @c item_style - This is a constant string and simply defines the name
11710 * of the item style. It @b must be specified and the default should be @c
11713 * - @c func - A struct with pointers to functions that will be called when
11714 * an item is going to be actually created. All of them receive a @c data
11715 * parameter that will point to the same data passed to
11716 * elm_genlist_item_append() and related item creation functions, and a @c
11717 * obj parameter that points to the genlist object itself.
11719 * The function pointers inside @c func are @c label_get, @c icon_get, @c
11720 * state_get and @c del. The 3 first functions also receive a @c part
11721 * parameter described below. A brief description of these functions follows:
11723 * - @c label_get - The @c part parameter is the name string of one of the
11724 * existing text parts in the Edje group implementing the item's theme.
11725 * This function @b must return a strdup'()ed string, as the caller will
11726 * free() it when done. See #GenlistItemLabelGetFunc.
11727 * - @c icon_get - The @c part parameter is the name string of one of the
11728 * existing (icon) swallow parts in the Edje group implementing the item's
11729 * theme. It must return @c NULL, when no icon is desired, or a valid
11730 * object handle, otherwise. The object will be deleted by the genlist on
11731 * its deletion or when the item is "unrealized". See
11732 * #GenlistItemIconGetFunc.
11733 * - @c func.state_get - The @c part parameter is the name string of one of
11734 * the state parts in the Edje group implementing the item's theme. Return
11735 * @c EINA_FALSE for false/off or @c EINA_TRUE for true/on. Genlists will
11736 * emit a signal to its theming Edje object with @c "elm,state,XXX,active"
11737 * and @c "elm" as "emission" and "source" arguments, respectively, when
11738 * the state is true (the default is false), where @c XXX is the name of
11739 * the (state) part. See #GenlistItemStateGetFunc.
11740 * - @c func.del - This is intended for use when genlist items are deleted,
11741 * so any data attached to the item (e.g. its data parameter on creation)
11742 * can be deleted. See #GenlistItemDelFunc.
11744 * available item styles:
11746 * - default_style - The text part is a textblock
11748 * - icon_top_text_bottom
11750 * @section Genlist_Items Structure of items
11752 * An item in a genlist can have 0 or more text labels (they can be regular
11753 * text or textblock Evas objects - that's up to the style to determine), 0
11754 * or more icons (which are simply objects swallowed into the genlist item's
11755 * theming Edje object) and 0 or more <b>boolean states</b>, which have the
11756 * behavior left to the user to define. The Edje part names for each of
11757 * these properties will be looked up, in the theme file for the genlist,
11758 * under the Edje (string) data items named @c "labels", @c "icons" and @c
11759 * "states", respectively. For each of those properties, if more than one
11760 * part is provided, they must have names listed separated by spaces in the
11761 * data fields. For the default genlist item theme, we have @b one label
11762 * part (@c "elm.text"), @b two icon parts (@c "elm.swalllow.icon" and @c
11763 * "elm.swallow.end") and @b no state parts.
11765 * A genlist item may be at one of several styles. Elementary provides one
11766 * by default - "default", but this can be extended by system or application
11767 * custom themes/overlays/extensions (see @ref Theme "themes" for more
11770 * @section Genlist_Manipulation Editing and Navigating
11772 * Items can be added by several calls. All of them return a @ref
11773 * Elm_Genlist_Item handle that is an internal member inside the genlist.
11774 * They all take a data parameter that is meant to be used for a handle to
11775 * the applications internal data (eg the struct with the original item
11776 * data). The parent parameter is the parent genlist item this belongs to if
11777 * it is a tree or an indexed group, and NULL if there is no parent. The
11778 * flags can be a bitmask of #ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_NONE,
11779 * #ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_SUBITEMS and #ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_GROUP. If
11780 * #ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_SUBITEMS is set then this item is displayed as an item
11781 * that is able to expand and have child items. If ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_GROUP
11782 * is set then this item is group index item that is displayed at the top
11783 * until the next group comes. The func parameter is a convenience callback
11784 * that is called when the item is selected and the data parameter will be
11785 * the func_data parameter, obj be the genlist object and event_info will be
11786 * the genlist item.
11788 * elm_genlist_item_append() adds an item to the end of the list, or if
11789 * there is a parent, to the end of all the child items of the parent.
11790 * elm_genlist_item_prepend() is the same but adds to the beginning of
11791 * the list or children list. elm_genlist_item_insert_before() inserts at
11792 * item before another item and elm_genlist_item_insert_after() inserts after
11793 * the indicated item.
11795 * The application can clear the list with elm_genlist_clear() which deletes
11796 * all the items in the list and elm_genlist_item_del() will delete a specific
11797 * item. elm_genlist_item_subitems_clear() will clear all items that are
11798 * children of the indicated parent item.
11800 * To help inspect list items you can jump to the item at the top of the list
11801 * with elm_genlist_first_item_get() which will return the item pointer, and
11802 * similarly elm_genlist_last_item_get() gets the item at the end of the list.
11803 * elm_genlist_item_next_get() and elm_genlist_item_prev_get() get the next
11804 * and previous items respectively relative to the indicated item. Using
11805 * these calls you can walk the entire item list/tree. Note that as a tree
11806 * the items are flattened in the list, so elm_genlist_item_parent_get() will
11807 * let you know which item is the parent (and thus know how to skip them if
11810 * @section Genlist_Muti_Selection Multi-selection
11812 * If the application wants multiple items to be able to be selected,
11813 * elm_genlist_multi_select_set() can enable this. If the list is
11814 * single-selection only (the default), then elm_genlist_selected_item_get()
11815 * will return the selected item, if any, or NULL I none is selected. If the
11816 * list is multi-select then elm_genlist_selected_items_get() will return a
11817 * list (that is only valid as long as no items are modified (added, deleted,
11818 * selected or unselected)).
11820 * @section Genlist_Usage_Hints Usage hints
11822 * There are also convenience functions. elm_genlist_item_genlist_get() will
11823 * return the genlist object the item belongs to. elm_genlist_item_show()
11824 * will make the scroller scroll to show that specific item so its visible.
11825 * elm_genlist_item_data_get() returns the data pointer set by the item
11826 * creation functions.
11828 * If an item changes (state of boolean changes, label or icons change),
11829 * then use elm_genlist_item_update() to have genlist update the item with
11830 * the new state. Genlist will re-realize the item thus call the functions
11831 * in the _Elm_Genlist_Item_Class for that item.
11833 * To programmatically (un)select an item use elm_genlist_item_selected_set().
11834 * To get its selected state use elm_genlist_item_selected_get(). Similarly
11835 * to expand/contract an item and get its expanded state, use
11836 * elm_genlist_item_expanded_set() and elm_genlist_item_expanded_get(). And
11837 * again to make an item disabled (unable to be selected and appear
11838 * differently) use elm_genlist_item_disabled_set() to set this and
11839 * elm_genlist_item_disabled_get() to get the disabled state.
11841 * In general to indicate how the genlist should expand items horizontally to
11842 * fill the list area, use elm_genlist_horizontal_mode_set(). Valid modes are
11843 * ELM_LIST_LIMIT and ELM_LIST_SCROLL . The default is ELM_LIST_SCROLL. This
11844 * mode means that if items are too wide to fit, the scroller will scroll
11845 * horizontally. Otherwise items are expanded to fill the width of the
11846 * viewport of the scroller. If it is ELM_LIST_LIMIT, items will be expanded
11847 * to the viewport width and limited to that size. This can be combined with
11848 * a different style that uses edjes' ellipsis feature (cutting text off like
11851 * Items will only call their selection func and callback when first becoming
11852 * selected. Any further clicks will do nothing, unless you enable always
11853 * select with elm_genlist_always_select_mode_set(). This means even if
11854 * selected, every click will make the selected callbacks be called.
11855 * elm_genlist_no_select_mode_set() will turn off the ability to select
11856 * items entirely and they will neither appear selected nor call selected
11857 * callback functions.
11859 * Remember that you can create new styles and add your own theme augmentation
11860 * per application with elm_theme_extension_add(). If you absolutely must
11861 * have a specific style that overrides any theme the user or system sets up
11862 * you can use elm_theme_overlay_add() to add such a file.
11864 * @section Genlist_Implementation Implementation
11866 * Evas tracks every object you create. Every time it processes an event
11867 * (mouse move, down, up etc.) it needs to walk through objects and find out
11868 * what event that affects. Even worse every time it renders display updates,
11869 * in order to just calculate what to re-draw, it needs to walk through many
11870 * many many objects. Thus, the more objects you keep active, the more
11871 * overhead Evas has in just doing its work. It is advisable to keep your
11872 * active objects to the minimum working set you need. Also remember that
11873 * object creation and deletion carries an overhead, so there is a
11874 * middle-ground, which is not easily determined. But don't keep massive lists
11875 * of objects you can't see or use. Genlist does this with list objects. It
11876 * creates and destroys them dynamically as you scroll around. It groups them
11877 * into blocks so it can determine the visibility etc. of a whole block at
11878 * once as opposed to having to walk the whole list. This 2-level list allows
11879 * for very large numbers of items to be in the list (tests have used up to
11880 * 2,000,000 items). Also genlist employs a queue for adding items. As items
11881 * may be different sizes, every item added needs to be calculated as to its
11882 * size and thus this presents a lot of overhead on populating the list, this
11883 * genlist employs a queue. Any item added is queued and spooled off over
11884 * time, actually appearing some time later, so if your list has many members
11885 * you may find it takes a while for them to all appear, with your process
11886 * consuming a lot of CPU while it is busy spooling.
11888 * Genlist also implements a tree structure, but it does so with callbacks to
11889 * the application, with the application filling in tree structures when
11890 * requested (allowing for efficient building of a very deep tree that could
11891 * even be used for file-management). See the above smart signal callbacks for
11894 * @section Genlist_Smart_Events Genlist smart events
11896 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
11897 * - @c "activated" - The user has double-clicked or pressed
11898 * (enter|return|spacebar) on an item. The @c event_info parameter is the
11899 * item that was activated.
11900 * - @c "clicked,double" - The user has double-clicked an item. The @c
11901 * event_info parameter is the item that was double-clicked.
11902 * - @c "selected" - This is called when a user has made an item selected.
11903 * The event_info parameter is the genlist item that was selected.
11904 * - @c "unselected" - This is called when a user has made an item
11905 * unselected. The event_info parameter is the genlist item that was
11907 * - @c "expanded" - This is called when elm_genlist_item_expanded_set() is
11908 * called and the item is now meant to be expanded. The event_info
11909 * parameter is the genlist item that was indicated to expand. It is the
11910 * job of this callback to then fill in the child items.
11911 * - @c "contracted" - This is called when elm_genlist_item_expanded_set() is
11912 * called and the item is now meant to be contracted. The event_info
11913 * parameter is the genlist item that was indicated to contract. It is the
11914 * job of this callback to then delete the child items.
11915 * - @c "expand,request" - This is called when a user has indicated they want
11916 * to expand a tree branch item. The callback should decide if the item can
11917 * expand (has any children) and then call elm_genlist_item_expanded_set()
11918 * appropriately to set the state. The event_info parameter is the genlist
11919 * item that was indicated to expand.
11920 * - @c "contract,request" - This is called when a user has indicated they
11921 * want to contract a tree branch item. The callback should decide if the
11922 * item can contract (has any children) and then call
11923 * elm_genlist_item_expanded_set() appropriately to set the state. The
11924 * event_info parameter is the genlist item that was indicated to contract.
11925 * - @c "realized" - This is called when the item in the list is created as a
11926 * real evas object. event_info parameter is the genlist item that was
11927 * created. The object may be deleted at any time, so it is up to the
11928 * caller to not use the object pointer from elm_genlist_item_object_get()
11929 * in a way where it may point to freed objects.
11930 * - @c "unrealized" - This is called just before an item is unrealized.
11931 * After this call icon objects provided will be deleted and the item
11932 * object itself delete or be put into a floating cache.
11933 * - @c "drag,start,up" - This is called when the item in the list has been
11934 * dragged (not scrolled) up.
11935 * - @c "drag,start,down" - This is called when the item in the list has been
11936 * dragged (not scrolled) down.
11937 * - @c "drag,start,left" - This is called when the item in the list has been
11938 * dragged (not scrolled) left.
11939 * - @c "drag,start,right" - This is called when the item in the list has
11940 * been dragged (not scrolled) right.
11941 * - @c "drag,stop" - This is called when the item in the list has stopped
11943 * - @c "drag" - This is called when the item in the list is being dragged.
11944 * - @c "longpressed" - This is called when the item is pressed for a certain
11945 * amount of time. By default it's 1 second.
11946 * - @c "scroll,edge,top" - This is called when the genlist is scrolled until
11948 * - @c "scroll,edge,bottom" - This is called when the genlist is scrolled
11949 * until the bottom edge.
11950 * - @c "scroll,edge,left" - This is called when the genlist is scrolled
11951 * until the left edge.
11952 * - @c "scroll,edge,right" - This is called when the genlist is scrolled
11953 * until the right edge.
11954 * - @c "multi,swipe,left" - This is called when the genlist is multi-touch
11956 * - @c "multi,swipe,right" - This is called when the genlist is multi-touch
11958 * - @c "multi,swipe,up" - This is called when the genlist is multi-touch
11960 * - @c "multi,swipe,down" - This is called when the genlist is multi-touch
11962 * - @c "multi,pinch,out" - This is called when the genlist is multi-touch
11963 * pinched out. "- @c multi,pinch,in" - This is called when the genlist is
11964 * multi-touch pinched in.
11965 * - @c "swipe" - This is called when the genlist is swiped.
11967 * @section Genlist_Examples Examples
11969 * Here is a list of examples that use the genlist, trying to show some of
11970 * its capabilities:
11971 * - @ref genlist_example_01
11972 * - @ref genlist_example_02
11976 * @addtogroup Genlist
11981 * @enum _Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags
11982 * @typedef Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags
11984 * Defines if the item is of any special type (has subitems or it's the
11985 * index of a group), or is just a simple item.
11989 typedef enum _Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags
11991 ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_NONE = 0, /**< simple item */
11992 ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_SUBITEMS = (1 << 0), /**< may expand and have child items */
11993 ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_GROUP = (1 << 1) /**< index of a group of items */
11994 } Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags;
11995 typedef struct _Elm_Genlist_Item_Class Elm_Genlist_Item_Class; /**< Genlist item class definition structs */
11996 typedef struct _Elm_Genlist_Item Elm_Genlist_Item; /**< Item of Elm_Genlist. Sub-type of Elm_Widget_Item */
11997 typedef struct _Elm_Genlist_Item_Class_Func Elm_Genlist_Item_Class_Func; /**< Class functions for genlist item class */
11998 typedef char *(*GenlistItemLabelGetFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, const char *part); /**< Label fetching class function for genlist item classes. */
11999 typedef Evas_Object *(*GenlistItemIconGetFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, const char *part); /**< Icon fetching class function for genlist item classes. */
12000 typedef Eina_Bool (*GenlistItemStateGetFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj, const char *part); /**< State fetching class function for genlist item classes. */
12001 typedef void (*GenlistItemDelFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj); /**< Deletion class function for genlist item classes. */
12002 typedef void (*GenlistItemMovedFunc) (Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Genlist_Item *item, Elm_Genlist_Item *rel_item, Eina_Bool move_after);
12005 * @struct _Elm_Genlist_Item_Class
12007 * Genlist item class definition structs.
12009 * This struct contains the style and fetching functions that will define the
12010 * contents of each item.
12012 * @see @ref Genlist_Item_Class
12014 struct _Elm_Genlist_Item_Class
12016 const char *item_style; /**< style of this class. */
12019 GenlistItemLabelGetFunc label_get; /**< Label fetching class function for genlist item classes.*/
12020 GenlistItemIconGetFunc icon_get; /**< Icon fetching class function for genlist item classes. */
12021 GenlistItemStateGetFunc state_get; /**< State fetching class function for genlist item classes. */
12022 GenlistItemDelFunc del; /**< Deletion class function for genlist item classes. */
12023 GenlistItemMovedFunc moved; // TODO: do not use this. change this to smart callback.
12025 const char *mode_item_style;
12029 * Add a new genlist widget to the given parent Elementary
12030 * (container) object
12032 * @param parent The parent object
12033 * @return a new genlist widget handle or @c NULL, on errors
12035 * This function inserts a new genlist widget on the canvas.
12037 * @see elm_genlist_item_append()
12038 * @see elm_genlist_item_del()
12039 * @see elm_genlist_clear()
12043 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_genlist_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12045 * Remove all items from a given genlist widget.
12047 * @param obj The genlist object
12049 * This removes (and deletes) all items in @p obj, leaving it empty.
12051 * @see elm_genlist_item_del(), to remove just one item.
12055 EAPI void elm_genlist_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12057 * Enable or disable multi-selection in the genlist
12059 * @param obj The genlist object
12060 * @param multi Multi-select enable/disable. Default is disabled.
12062 * This enables (@c EINA_TRUE) or disables (@c EINA_FALSE) multi-selection in
12063 * the list. This allows more than 1 item to be selected. To retrieve the list
12064 * of selected items, use elm_genlist_selected_items_get().
12066 * @see elm_genlist_selected_items_get()
12067 * @see elm_genlist_multi_select_get()
12071 EAPI void elm_genlist_multi_select_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool multi) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12073 * Gets if multi-selection in genlist is enabled or disabled.
12075 * @param obj The genlist object
12076 * @return Multi-select enabled/disabled
12077 * (@c EINA_TRUE = enabled/@c EINA_FALSE = disabled). Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
12079 * @see elm_genlist_multi_select_set()
12083 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_multi_select_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12085 * This sets the horizontal stretching mode.
12087 * @param obj The genlist object
12088 * @param mode The mode to use (one of #ELM_LIST_SCROLL or #ELM_LIST_LIMIT).
12090 * This sets the mode used for sizing items horizontally. Valid modes
12091 * are #ELM_LIST_LIMIT and #ELM_LIST_SCROLL. The default is
12092 * ELM_LIST_SCROLL. This mode means that if items are too wide to fit,
12093 * the scroller will scroll horizontally. Otherwise items are expanded
12094 * to fill the width of the viewport of the scroller. If it is
12095 * ELM_LIST_LIMIT, items will be expanded to the viewport width and
12096 * limited to that size.
12098 * @see elm_genlist_horizontal_mode_get()
12102 EAPI void elm_genlist_horizontal_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_List_Mode mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12104 * Gets the horizontal stretching mode.
12106 * @param obj The genlist object
12107 * @return The mode to use
12108 * (#ELM_LIST_LIMIT, #ELM_LIST_SCROLL)
12110 * @see elm_genlist_horizontal_mode_set()
12114 EAPI Elm_List_Mode elm_genlist_horizontal_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12116 * Set the always select mode.
12118 * @param obj The genlist object
12119 * @param always_select The always select mode (@c EINA_TRUE = on, @c
12120 * EINA_FALSE = off). Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
12122 * Items will only call their selection func and callback when first
12123 * becoming selected. Any further clicks will do nothing, unless you
12124 * enable always select with elm_genlist_always_select_mode_set().
12125 * This means that, even if selected, every click will make the selected
12126 * callbacks be called.
12128 * @see elm_genlist_always_select_mode_get()
12132 EAPI void elm_genlist_always_select_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool always_select) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12134 * Get the always select mode.
12136 * @param obj The genlist object
12137 * @return The always select mode
12138 * (@c EINA_TRUE = on, @c EINA_FALSE = off)
12140 * @see elm_genlist_always_select_mode_set()
12144 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_always_select_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12146 * Enable/disable the no select mode.
12148 * @param obj The genlist object
12149 * @param no_select The no select mode
12150 * (EINA_TRUE = on, EINA_FALSE = off)
12152 * This will turn off the ability to select items entirely and they
12153 * will neither appear selected nor call selected callback functions.
12155 * @see elm_genlist_no_select_mode_get()
12159 EAPI void elm_genlist_no_select_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool no_select) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12161 * Gets whether the no select mode is enabled.
12163 * @param obj The genlist object
12164 * @return The no select mode
12165 * (@c EINA_TRUE = on, @c EINA_FALSE = off)
12167 * @see elm_genlist_no_select_mode_set()
12171 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_no_select_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12173 * Enable/disable compress mode.
12175 * @param obj The genlist object
12176 * @param compress The compress mode
12177 * (@c EINA_TRUE = on, @c EINA_FALSE = off). Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
12179 * This will enable the compress mode where items are "compressed"
12180 * horizontally to fit the genlist scrollable viewport width. This is
12181 * special for genlist. Do not rely on
12182 * elm_genlist_horizontal_mode_set() being set to @c ELM_LIST_COMPRESS to
12183 * work as genlist needs to handle it specially.
12185 * @see elm_genlist_compress_mode_get()
12189 EAPI void elm_genlist_compress_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool compress) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12191 * Get whether the compress mode is enabled.
12193 * @param obj The genlist object
12194 * @return The compress mode
12195 * (@c EINA_TRUE = on, @c EINA_FALSE = off)
12197 * @see elm_genlist_compress_mode_set()
12201 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_compress_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12203 * Enable/disable height-for-width mode.
12205 * @param obj The genlist object
12206 * @param setting The height-for-width mode (@c EINA_TRUE = on,
12207 * @c EINA_FALSE = off). Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
12209 * With height-for-width mode the item width will be fixed (restricted
12210 * to a minimum of) to the list width when calculating its size in
12211 * order to allow the height to be calculated based on it. This allows,
12212 * for instance, text block to wrap lines if the Edje part is
12213 * configured with "text.min: 0 1".
12215 * @note This mode will make list resize slower as it will have to
12216 * recalculate every item height again whenever the list width
12219 * @note When height-for-width mode is enabled, it also enables
12220 * compress mode (see elm_genlist_compress_mode_set()) and
12221 * disables homogeneous (see elm_genlist_homogeneous_set()).
12225 EAPI void elm_genlist_height_for_width_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool height_for_width) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12227 * Get whether the height-for-width mode is enabled.
12229 * @param obj The genlist object
12230 * @return The height-for-width mode (@c EINA_TRUE = on, @c EINA_FALSE =
12235 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_height_for_width_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12237 * Enable/disable horizontal and vertical bouncing effect.
12239 * @param obj The genlist object
12240 * @param h_bounce Allow bounce horizontally (@c EINA_TRUE = on, @c
12241 * EINA_FALSE = off). Default is @c EINA_FALSE.
12242 * @param v_bounce Allow bounce vertically (@c EINA_TRUE = on, @c
12243 * EINA_FALSE = off). Default is @c EINA_TRUE.
12245 * This will enable or disable the scroller bouncing effect for the
12246 * genlist. See elm_scroller_bounce_set() for details.
12248 * @see elm_scroller_bounce_set()
12249 * @see elm_genlist_bounce_get()
12253 EAPI void elm_genlist_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12255 * Get whether the horizontal and vertical bouncing effect is enabled.
12257 * @param obj The genlist object
12258 * @param h_bounce Pointer to a bool to receive if the bounce horizontally
12260 * @param v_bounce Pointer to a bool to receive if the bounce vertically
12263 * @see elm_genlist_bounce_set()
12267 EAPI void elm_genlist_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12269 * Enable/disable homogenous mode.
12271 * @param obj The genlist object
12272 * @param homogeneous Assume the items within the genlist are of the
12273 * same height and width (EINA_TRUE = on, EINA_FALSE = off). Default is @c
12276 * This will enable the homogeneous mode where items are of the same
12277 * height and width so that genlist may do the lazy-loading at its
12278 * maximum (which increases the performance for scrolling the list). This
12279 * implies 'compressed' mode.
12281 * @see elm_genlist_compress_mode_set()
12282 * @see elm_genlist_homogeneous_get()
12286 EAPI void elm_genlist_homogeneous_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool homogeneous) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12288 * Get whether the homogenous mode is enabled.
12290 * @param obj The genlist object
12291 * @return Assume the items within the genlist are of the same height
12292 * and width (EINA_TRUE = on, EINA_FALSE = off)
12294 * @see elm_genlist_homogeneous_set()
12298 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_homogeneous_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12300 * Set the maximum number of items within an item block
12302 * @param obj The genlist object
12303 * @param n Maximum number of items within an item block. Default is 32.
12305 * This will configure the block count to tune to the target with
12306 * particular performance matrix.
12308 * A block of objects will be used to reduce the number of operations due to
12309 * many objects in the screen. It can determine the visibility, or if the
12310 * object has changed, it theme needs to be updated, etc. doing this kind of
12311 * calculation to the entire block, instead of per object.
12313 * The default value for the block count is enough for most lists, so unless
12314 * you know you will have a lot of objects visible in the screen at the same
12315 * time, don't try to change this.
12317 * @see elm_genlist_block_count_get()
12318 * @see @ref Genlist_Implementation
12322 EAPI void elm_genlist_block_count_set(Evas_Object *obj, int n) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12324 * Get the maximum number of items within an item block
12326 * @param obj The genlist object
12327 * @return Maximum number of items within an item block
12329 * @see elm_genlist_block_count_set()
12333 EAPI int elm_genlist_block_count_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12335 * Set the timeout in seconds for the longpress event.
12337 * @param obj The genlist object
12338 * @param timeout timeout in seconds. Default is 1.
12340 * This option will change how long it takes to send an event "longpressed"
12341 * after the mouse down signal is sent to the list. If this event occurs, no
12342 * "clicked" event will be sent.
12344 * @see elm_genlist_longpress_timeout_set()
12348 EAPI void elm_genlist_longpress_timeout_set(Evas_Object *obj, double timeout) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12350 * Get the timeout in seconds for the longpress event.
12352 * @param obj The genlist object
12353 * @return timeout in seconds
12355 * @see elm_genlist_longpress_timeout_get()
12359 EAPI double elm_genlist_longpress_timeout_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12361 * Append a new item in a given genlist widget.
12363 * @param obj The genlist object
12364 * @param itc The item class for the item
12365 * @param data The item data
12366 * @param parent The parent item, or NULL if none
12367 * @param flags Item flags
12368 * @param func Convenience function called when the item is selected
12369 * @param func_data Data passed to @p func above.
12370 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL if not possible
12372 * This adds the given item to the end of the list or the end of
12373 * the children list if the @p parent is given.
12375 * @see elm_genlist_item_prepend()
12376 * @see elm_genlist_item_insert_before()
12377 * @see elm_genlist_item_insert_after()
12378 * @see elm_genlist_item_del()
12382 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_append(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *itc, const void *data, Elm_Genlist_Item *parent, Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags flags, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12384 * Prepend a new item in a given genlist widget.
12386 * @param obj The genlist object
12387 * @param itc The item class for the item
12388 * @param data The item data
12389 * @param parent The parent item, or NULL if none
12390 * @param flags Item flags
12391 * @param func Convenience function called when the item is selected
12392 * @param func_data Data passed to @p func above.
12393 * @return A handle to the item added or NULL if not possible
12395 * This adds an item to the beginning of the list or beginning of the
12396 * children of the parent if given.
12398 * @see elm_genlist_item_append()
12399 * @see elm_genlist_item_insert_before()
12400 * @see elm_genlist_item_insert_after()
12401 * @see elm_genlist_item_del()
12405 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *itc, const void *data, Elm_Genlist_Item *parent, Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags flags, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12407 * Insert an item before another in a genlist widget
12409 * @param obj The genlist object
12410 * @param itc The item class for the item
12411 * @param data The item data
12412 * @param before The item to place this new one before.
12413 * @param flags Item flags
12414 * @param func Convenience function called when the item is selected
12415 * @param func_data Data passed to @p func above.
12416 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL if not possible
12418 * This inserts an item before another in the list. It will be in the
12419 * same tree level or group as the item it is inserted before.
12421 * @see elm_genlist_item_append()
12422 * @see elm_genlist_item_prepend()
12423 * @see elm_genlist_item_insert_after()
12424 * @see elm_genlist_item_del()
12428 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_insert_before(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *itc, const void *data, Elm_Genlist_Item *parent, Elm_Genlist_Item *before, Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags flags, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 5);
12430 * Insert an item after another in a genlist widget
12432 * @param obj The genlist object
12433 * @param itc The item class for the item
12434 * @param data The item data
12435 * @param after The item to place this new one after.
12436 * @param flags Item flags
12437 * @param func Convenience function called when the item is selected
12438 * @param func_data Data passed to @p func above.
12439 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL if not possible
12441 * This inserts an item after another in the list. It will be in the
12442 * same tree level or group as the item it is inserted after.
12444 * @see elm_genlist_item_append()
12445 * @see elm_genlist_item_prepend()
12446 * @see elm_genlist_item_insert_before()
12447 * @see elm_genlist_item_del()
12451 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_insert_after(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *itc, const void *data, Elm_Genlist_Item *parent, Elm_Genlist_Item *after, Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags flags, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 5);
12453 * Insert a new item into the sorted genlist object
12455 * @param obj The genlist object
12456 * @param itc The item class for the item
12457 * @param data The item data
12458 * @param parent The parent item, or NULL if none
12459 * @param flags Item flags
12460 * @param comp The function called for the sort
12461 * @param func Convenience function called when item selected
12462 * @param func_data Data passed to @p func above.
12463 * @return A handle to the item added or NULL if not possible
12467 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_sorted_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *itc, const void *data, Elm_Genlist_Item *parent, Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags flags, Eina_Compare_Cb comp, Evas_Smart_Cb func,const void *func_data);
12468 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_direct_sorted_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *itc, const void *data, Elm_Genlist_Item *parent, Elm_Genlist_Item_Flags flags, Eina_Compare_Cb comp, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *func_data);
12469 /* operations to retrieve existing items */
12471 * Get the selectd item in the genlist.
12473 * @param obj The genlist object
12474 * @return The selected item, or NULL if none is selected.
12476 * This gets the selected item in the list (if multi-selection is enabled, only
12477 * the item that was first selected in the list is returned - which is not very
12478 * useful, so see elm_genlist_selected_items_get() for when multi-selection is
12481 * If no item is selected, NULL is returned.
12483 * @see elm_genlist_selected_items_get()
12487 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_selected_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12489 * Get a list of selected items in the genlist.
12491 * @param obj The genlist object
12492 * @return The list of selected items, or NULL if none are selected.
12494 * It returns a list of the selected items. This list pointer is only valid so
12495 * long as the selection doesn't change (no items are selected or unselected, or
12496 * unselected implicitly by deletion). The list contains Elm_Genlist_Item
12497 * pointers. The order of the items in this list is the order which they were
12498 * selected, i.e. the first item in this list is the first item that was
12499 * selected, and so on.
12501 * @note If not in multi-select mode, consider using function
12502 * elm_genlist_selected_item_get() instead.
12504 * @see elm_genlist_multi_select_set()
12505 * @see elm_genlist_selected_item_get()
12509 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_genlist_selected_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12511 * Get a list of realized items in genlist
12513 * @param obj The genlist object
12514 * @return The list of realized items, nor NULL if none are realized.
12516 * This returns a list of the realized items in the genlist. The list
12517 * contains Elm_Genlist_Item pointers. The list must be freed by the
12518 * caller when done with eina_list_free(). The item pointers in the
12519 * list are only valid so long as those items are not deleted or the
12520 * genlist is not deleted.
12522 * @see elm_genlist_realized_items_update()
12526 EAPI Eina_List *elm_genlist_realized_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12528 * Get the item that is at the x, y canvas coords.
12530 * @param obj The gelinst object.
12531 * @param x The input x coordinate
12532 * @param y The input y coordinate
12533 * @param posret The position relative to the item returned here
12534 * @return The item at the coordinates or NULL if none
12536 * This returns the item at the given coordinates (which are canvas
12537 * relative, not object-relative). If an item is at that coordinate,
12538 * that item handle is returned, and if @p posret is not NULL, the
12539 * integer pointed to is set to a value of -1, 0 or 1, depending if
12540 * the coordinate is on the upper portion of that item (-1), on the
12541 * middle section (0) or on the lower part (1). If NULL is returned as
12542 * an item (no item found there), then posret may indicate -1 or 1
12543 * based if the coordinate is above or below all items respectively in
12548 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_at_xy_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord x, Evas_Coord y, int *posret) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12550 * Get the first item in the genlist
12552 * This returns the first item in the list.
12554 * @param obj The genlist object
12555 * @return The first item, or NULL if none
12559 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_first_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12561 * Get the last item in the genlist
12563 * This returns the last item in the list.
12565 * @return The last item, or NULL if none
12569 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_last_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12571 * Set the scrollbar policy
12573 * @param obj The genlist object
12574 * @param policy_h Horizontal scrollbar policy.
12575 * @param policy_v Vertical scrollbar policy.
12577 * This sets the scrollbar visibility policy for the given genlist
12578 * scroller. #ELM_SMART_SCROLLER_POLICY_AUTO means the scrollbar is
12579 * made visible if it is needed, and otherwise kept hidden.
12580 * #ELM_SMART_SCROLLER_POLICY_ON turns it on all the time, and
12581 * #ELM_SMART_SCROLLER_POLICY_OFF always keeps it off. This applies
12582 * respectively for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars. Default is
12583 * #ELM_SMART_SCROLLER_POLICY_AUTO
12585 * @see elm_genlist_scroller_policy_get()
12589 EAPI void elm_genlist_scroller_policy_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy policy_h, Elm_Scroller_Policy policy_v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12591 * Get the scrollbar policy
12593 * @param obj The genlist object
12594 * @param policy_h Pointer to store the horizontal scrollbar policy.
12595 * @param policy_v Pointer to store the vertical scrollbar policy.
12597 * @see elm_genlist_scroller_policy_set()
12601 EAPI void elm_genlist_scroller_policy_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy *policy_h, Elm_Scroller_Policy *policy_v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12603 * Get the @b next item in a genlist widget's internal list of items,
12604 * given a handle to one of those items.
12606 * @param item The genlist item to fetch next from
12607 * @return The item after @p item, or @c NULL if there's none (and
12610 * This returns the item placed after the @p item, on the container
12613 * @see elm_genlist_item_prev_get()
12617 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_next_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12619 * Get the @b previous item in a genlist widget's internal list of items,
12620 * given a handle to one of those items.
12622 * @param item The genlist item to fetch previous from
12623 * @return The item before @p item, or @c NULL if there's none (and
12626 * This returns the item placed before the @p item, on the container
12629 * @see elm_genlist_item_next_get()
12633 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_prev_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12635 * Get the genlist object's handle which contains a given genlist
12638 * @param item The item to fetch the container from
12639 * @return The genlist (parent) object
12641 * This returns the genlist object itself that an item belongs to.
12645 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_genlist_item_genlist_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12647 * Get the parent item of the given item
12649 * @param it The item
12650 * @return The parent of the item or @c NULL if it has no parent.
12652 * This returns the item that was specified as parent of the item @p it on
12653 * elm_genlist_item_append() and insertion related functions.
12657 EAPI Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_item_parent_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12659 * Remove all sub-items (children) of the given item
12661 * @param it The item
12663 * This removes all items that are children (and their descendants) of the
12664 * given item @p it.
12666 * @see elm_genlist_clear()
12667 * @see elm_genlist_item_del()
12671 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_subitems_clear(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12673 * Set whether a given genlist item is selected or not
12675 * @param it The item
12676 * @param selected Use @c EINA_TRUE, to make it selected, @c
12677 * EINA_FALSE to make it unselected
12679 * This sets the selected state of an item. If multi selection is
12680 * not enabled on the containing genlist and @p selected is @c
12681 * EINA_TRUE, any other previously selected items will get
12682 * unselected in favor of this new one.
12684 * @see elm_genlist_item_selected_get()
12688 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_selected_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, Eina_Bool selected) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12690 * Get whether a given genlist item is selected or not
12692 * @param it The item
12693 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if it's selected, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
12695 * @see elm_genlist_item_selected_set() for more details
12699 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_item_selected_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12701 * Sets the expanded state of an item.
12703 * @param it The item
12704 * @param expanded The expanded state (@c EINA_TRUE expanded, @c EINA_FALSE not expanded).
12706 * This function flags the item of type #ELM_GENLIST_ITEM_SUBITEMS as
12709 * The theme will respond to this change visually, and a signal "expanded" or
12710 * "contracted" will be sent from the genlist with a pointer to the item that
12711 * has been expanded/contracted.
12713 * Calling this function won't show or hide any child of this item (if it is
12714 * a parent). You must manually delete and create them on the callbacks fo
12715 * the "expanded" or "contracted" signals.
12717 * @see elm_genlist_item_expanded_get()
12721 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_expanded_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, Eina_Bool expanded) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12723 * Get the expanded state of an item
12725 * @param it The item
12726 * @return The expanded state
12728 * This gets the expanded state of an item.
12730 * @see elm_genlist_item_expanded_set()
12734 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_item_expanded_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12736 * Get the depth of expanded item
12738 * @param it The genlist item object
12739 * @return The depth of expanded item
12743 EAPI int elm_genlist_item_expanded_depth_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12745 * Set whether a given genlist item is disabled or not.
12747 * @param it The item
12748 * @param disabled Use @c EINA_TRUE, true disable it, @c EINA_FALSE
12749 * to enable it back.
12751 * A disabled item cannot be selected or unselected. It will also
12752 * change its appearance, to signal the user it's disabled.
12754 * @see elm_genlist_item_disabled_get()
12758 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_disabled_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12760 * Get whether a given genlist item is disabled or not.
12762 * @param it The item
12763 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if it's disabled, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
12766 * @see elm_genlist_item_disabled_set() for more details
12770 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_item_disabled_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12772 * Sets the display only state of an item.
12774 * @param it The item
12775 * @param display_only @c EINA_TRUE if the item is display only, @c
12776 * EINA_FALSE otherwise.
12778 * A display only item cannot be selected or unselected. It is for
12779 * display only and not selecting or otherwise clicking, dragging
12780 * etc. by the user, thus finger size rules will not be applied to
12783 * It's good to set group index items to display only state.
12785 * @see elm_genlist_item_display_only_get()
12789 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_display_only_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *it, Eina_Bool display_only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12791 * Get the display only state of an item
12793 * @param it The item
12794 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if the item is display only, @c
12795 * EINA_FALSE otherwise.
12797 * @see elm_genlist_item_display_only_set()
12801 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_item_display_only_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12803 * Show the portion of a genlist's internal list containing a given
12804 * item, immediately.
12806 * @param it The item to display
12808 * This causes genlist to jump to the given item @p it and show it (by
12809 * immediately scrolling to that position), if it is not fully visible.
12811 * @see elm_genlist_item_bring_in()
12812 * @see elm_genlist_item_top_show()
12813 * @see elm_genlist_item_middle_show()
12817 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_show(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12819 * Animatedly bring in, to the visible are of a genlist, a given
12822 * @param it The item to display
12824 * This causes genlist to jump to the given item @p it and show it (by
12825 * animatedly scrolling), if it is not fully visible. This may use animation
12826 * to do so and take a period of time
12828 * @see elm_genlist_item_show()
12829 * @see elm_genlist_item_top_bring_in()
12830 * @see elm_genlist_item_middle_bring_in()
12834 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_bring_in(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12836 * Show the portion of a genlist's internal list containing a given
12837 * item, immediately.
12839 * @param it The item to display
12841 * This causes genlist to jump to the given item @p it and show it (by
12842 * immediately scrolling to that position), if it is not fully visible.
12844 * The item will be positioned at the top of the genlist viewport.
12846 * @see elm_genlist_item_show()
12847 * @see elm_genlist_item_top_bring_in()
12851 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_top_show(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12853 * Animatedly bring in, to the visible are of a genlist, a given
12856 * @param it The item
12858 * This causes genlist to jump to the given item @p it and show it (by
12859 * animatedly scrolling), if it is not fully visible. This may use animation
12860 * to do so and take a period of time
12862 * The item will be positioned at the top of the genlist viewport.
12864 * @see elm_genlist_item_bring_in()
12865 * @see elm_genlist_item_top_show()
12869 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_top_bring_in(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12871 * Show the portion of a genlist's internal list containing a given
12872 * item, immediately.
12874 * @param it The item to display
12876 * This causes genlist to jump to the given item @p it and show it (by
12877 * immediately scrolling to that position), if it is not fully visible.
12879 * The item will be positioned at the middle of the genlist viewport.
12881 * @see elm_genlist_item_show()
12882 * @see elm_genlist_item_middle_bring_in()
12886 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_middle_show(Elm_Genlist_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12888 * Animatedly bring in, to the visible are of a genlist, a given
12891 * @param it The item
12893 * This causes genlist to jump to the given item @p it and show it (by
12894 * animatedly scrolling), if it is not fully visible. This may use animation
12895 * to do so and take a period of time
12897 * The item will be positioned at the middle of the genlist viewport.
12899 * @see elm_genlist_item_bring_in()
12900 * @see elm_genlist_item_middle_show()
12904 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_middle_bring_in(Elm_Genlist_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12906 * Remove a genlist item from the its parent, deleting it.
12908 * @param item The item to be removed.
12909 * @return @c EINA_TRUE on success or @c EINA_FALSE, otherwise.
12911 * @see elm_genlist_clear(), to remove all items in a genlist at
12916 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_del(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12918 * Return the data associated to a given genlist item
12920 * @param item The genlist item.
12921 * @return the data associated to this item.
12923 * This returns the @c data value passed on the
12924 * elm_genlist_item_append() and related item addition calls.
12926 * @see elm_genlist_item_append()
12927 * @see elm_genlist_item_data_set()
12931 EAPI void *elm_genlist_item_data_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12933 * Set the data associated to a given genlist item
12935 * @param item The genlist item
12936 * @param data The new data pointer to set on it
12938 * This @b overrides the @c data value passed on the
12939 * elm_genlist_item_append() and related item addition calls. This
12940 * function @b won't call elm_genlist_item_update() automatically,
12941 * so you'd issue it afterwards if you want to hove the item
12942 * updated to reflect the that new data.
12944 * @see elm_genlist_item_data_get()
12948 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_data_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *it, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12950 * Tells genlist to "orphan" icons fetchs by the item class
12952 * @param it The item
12954 * This instructs genlist to release references to icons in the item,
12955 * meaning that they will no longer be managed by genlist and are
12956 * floating "orphans" that can be re-used elsewhere if the user wants
12961 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_icons_orphan(Elm_Genlist_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12963 * Get the real Evas object created to implement the view of a
12964 * given genlist item
12966 * @param item The genlist item.
12967 * @return the Evas object implementing this item's view.
12969 * This returns the actual Evas object used to implement the
12970 * specified genlist item's view. This may be @c NULL, as it may
12971 * not have been created or may have been deleted, at any time, by
12972 * the genlist. <b>Do not modify this object</b> (move, resize,
12973 * show, hide, etc.), as the genlist is controlling it. This
12974 * function is for querying, emitting custom signals or hooking
12975 * lower level callbacks for events on that object. Do not delete
12976 * this object under any circumstances.
12978 * @see elm_genlist_item_data_get()
12982 EAPI const Evas_Object *elm_genlist_item_object_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
12984 * Update the contents of an item
12986 * @param it The item
12988 * This updates an item by calling all the item class functions again
12989 * to get the icons, labels and states. Use this when the original
12990 * item data has changed and the changes are desired to be reflected.
12992 * Use elm_genlist_realized_items_update() to update all already realized
12995 * @see elm_genlist_realized_items_update()
12999 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_update(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13001 * Update the item class of an item
13003 * @param it The item
13004 * @parem itc The item class for the item
13006 * This sets another class fo the item, changing the way that it is
13007 * displayed. After changing the item class, elm_genlist_item_update() is
13008 * called on the item @p it.
13012 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_item_class_update(Elm_Genlist_Item *it, const Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *itc) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
13013 EAPI const Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *elm_genlist_item_item_class_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13015 * Set the text to be shown in a given genlist item's tooltips.
13017 * @param item The genlist item
13018 * @param text The text to set in the content
13020 * This call will setup the text to be used as tooltip to that item
13021 * (analogous to elm_object_tooltip_text_set(), but being item
13022 * tooltips with higher precedence than object tooltips). It can
13023 * have only one tooltip at a time, so any previous tooltip data
13024 * will get removed.
13026 * In order to set an icon or something else as a tooltip, look at
13027 * elm_genlist_item_tooltip_content_cb_set().
13031 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_tooltip_text_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13033 * Set the content to be shown in a given genlist item's tooltips
13035 * @param item The genlist item.
13036 * @param func The function returning the tooltip contents.
13037 * @param data What to provide to @a func as callback data/context.
13038 * @param del_cb Called when data is not needed anymore, either when
13039 * another callback replaces @func, the tooltip is unset with
13040 * elm_genlist_item_tooltip_unset() or the owner @p item
13041 * dies. This callback receives as its first parameter the
13042 * given @p data, being @c event_info the item handle.
13044 * This call will setup the tooltip's contents to @p item
13045 * (analogous to elm_object_tooltip_content_cb_set(), but being
13046 * item tooltips with higher precedence than object tooltips). It
13047 * can have only one tooltip at a time, so any previous tooltip
13048 * content will get removed. @p func (with @p data) will be called
13049 * every time Elementary needs to show the tooltip and it should
13050 * return a valid Evas object, which will be fully managed by the
13051 * tooltip system, getting deleted when the tooltip is gone.
13053 * In order to set just a text as a tooltip, look at
13054 * elm_genlist_item_tooltip_text_set().
13058 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_tooltip_content_cb_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, Elm_Tooltip_Item_Content_Cb func, const void *data, Evas_Smart_Cb del_cb) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13060 * Unset a tooltip from a given genlist item
13062 * @param item genlist item to remove a previously set tooltip from.
13064 * This call removes any tooltip set on @p item. The callback
13065 * provided as @c del_cb to
13066 * elm_genlist_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() will be called to
13067 * notify it is not used anymore (and have resources cleaned, if
13070 * @see elm_genlist_item_tooltip_content_cb_set()
13074 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_tooltip_unset(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13076 * Set a different @b style for a given genlist item's tooltip.
13078 * @param item genlist item with tooltip set
13079 * @param style the <b>theme style</b> to use on tooltips (e.g. @c
13080 * "default", @c "transparent", etc)
13082 * Tooltips can have <b>alternate styles</b> to be displayed on,
13083 * which are defined by the theme set on Elementary. This function
13084 * works analogously as elm_object_tooltip_style_set(), but here
13085 * applied only to genlist item objects. The default style for
13086 * tooltips is @c "default".
13088 * @note before you set a style you should define a tooltip with
13089 * elm_genlist_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() or
13090 * elm_genlist_item_tooltip_text_set()
13092 * @see elm_genlist_item_tooltip_style_get()
13096 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_tooltip_style_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13098 * Get the style set a given genlist item's tooltip.
13100 * @param item genlist item with tooltip already set on.
13101 * @return style the theme style in use, which defaults to
13102 * "default". If the object does not have a tooltip set,
13103 * then @c NULL is returned.
13105 * @see elm_genlist_item_tooltip_style_set() for more details
13109 EAPI const char *elm_genlist_item_tooltip_style_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13111 * @brief Disable size restrictions on an object's tooltip
13112 * @param item The tooltip's anchor object
13113 * @param disable If EINA_TRUE, size restrictions are disabled
13114 * @return EINA_FALSE on failure, EINA_TRUE on success
13116 * This function allows a tooltip to expand beyond its parant window's canvas.
13117 * It will instead be limited only by the size of the display.
13119 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_item_tooltip_size_restrict_disable(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, Eina_Bool disable);
13121 * @brief Retrieve size restriction state of an object's tooltip
13122 * @param item The tooltip's anchor object
13123 * @return If EINA_TRUE, size restrictions are disabled
13125 * This function returns whether a tooltip is allowed to expand beyond
13126 * its parant window's canvas.
13127 * It will instead be limited only by the size of the display.
13129 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_item_tooltip_size_restrict_disabled_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item);
13131 * Set the type of mouse pointer/cursor decoration to be shown,
13132 * when the mouse pointer is over the given genlist widget item
13134 * @param item genlist item to customize cursor on
13135 * @param cursor the cursor type's name
13137 * This function works analogously as elm_object_cursor_set(), but
13138 * here the cursor's changing area is restricted to the item's
13139 * area, and not the whole widget's. Note that that item cursors
13140 * have precedence over widget cursors, so that a mouse over @p
13141 * item will always show cursor @p type.
13143 * If this function is called twice for an object, a previously set
13144 * cursor will be unset on the second call.
13146 * @see elm_object_cursor_set()
13147 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_get()
13148 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_unset()
13152 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_cursor_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, const char *cursor) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13154 * Get the type of mouse pointer/cursor decoration set to be shown,
13155 * when the mouse pointer is over the given genlist widget item
13157 * @param item genlist item with custom cursor set
13158 * @return the cursor type's name or @c NULL, if no custom cursors
13159 * were set to @p item (and on errors)
13161 * @see elm_object_cursor_get()
13162 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_set() for more details
13163 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_unset()
13167 EAPI const char *elm_genlist_item_cursor_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13169 * Unset any custom mouse pointer/cursor decoration set to be
13170 * shown, when the mouse pointer is over the given genlist widget
13171 * item, thus making it show the @b default cursor again.
13173 * @param item a genlist item
13175 * Use this call to undo any custom settings on this item's cursor
13176 * decoration, bringing it back to defaults (no custom style set).
13178 * @see elm_object_cursor_unset()
13179 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_set() for more details
13183 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_cursor_unset(Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13185 * Set a different @b style for a given custom cursor set for a
13188 * @param item genlist item with custom cursor set
13189 * @param style the <b>theme style</b> to use (e.g. @c "default",
13190 * @c "transparent", etc)
13192 * This function only makes sense when one is using custom mouse
13193 * cursor decorations <b>defined in a theme file</b> , which can
13194 * have, given a cursor name/type, <b>alternate styles</b> on
13195 * it. It works analogously as elm_object_cursor_style_set(), but
13196 * here applied only to genlist item objects.
13198 * @warning Before you set a cursor style you should have defined a
13199 * custom cursor previously on the item, with
13200 * elm_genlist_item_cursor_set()
13202 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_engine_only_set()
13203 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_style_get()
13207 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_cursor_style_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13209 * Get the current @b style set for a given genlist item's custom
13212 * @param item genlist item with custom cursor set.
13213 * @return style the cursor style in use. If the object does not
13214 * have a cursor set, then @c NULL is returned.
13216 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_style_set() for more details
13220 EAPI const char *elm_genlist_item_cursor_style_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13222 * Set if the (custom) cursor for a given genlist item should be
13223 * searched in its theme, also, or should only rely on the
13224 * rendering engine.
13226 * @param item item with custom (custom) cursor already set on
13227 * @param engine_only Use @c EINA_TRUE to have cursors looked for
13228 * only on those provided by the rendering engine, @c EINA_FALSE to
13229 * have them searched on the widget's theme, as well.
13231 * @note This call is of use only if you've set a custom cursor
13232 * for genlist items, with elm_genlist_item_cursor_set().
13234 * @note By default, cursors will only be looked for between those
13235 * provided by the rendering engine.
13239 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_cursor_engine_only_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *item, Eina_Bool engine_only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13241 * Get if the (custom) cursor for a given genlist item is being
13242 * searched in its theme, also, or is only relying on the rendering
13245 * @param item a genlist item
13246 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if cursors are being looked for only on
13247 * those provided by the rendering engine, @c EINA_FALSE if they
13248 * are being searched on the widget's theme, as well.
13250 * @see elm_genlist_item_cursor_engine_only_set(), for more details
13254 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_item_cursor_engine_only_get(const Elm_Genlist_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13256 * Update the contents of all realized items.
13258 * @param obj The genlist object.
13260 * This updates all realized items by calling all the item class functions again
13261 * to get the icons, labels and states. Use this when the original
13262 * item data has changed and the changes are desired to be reflected.
13264 * To update just one item, use elm_genlist_item_update().
13266 * @see elm_genlist_realized_items_get()
13267 * @see elm_genlist_item_update()
13271 EAPI void elm_genlist_realized_items_update(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13272 EAPI void elm_genlist_item_mode_set(Elm_Genlist_Item *it, const char *mode_type, Eina_Bool mode_set) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
13273 EAPI const char *elm_genlist_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13274 EAPI const Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_genlist_mode_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13275 EAPI void elm_genlist_reorder_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool reorder_mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13276 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_genlist_reorder_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13283 * @defgroup Check Check
13285 * @image html img/widget/button/preview-00.png
13286 * @image html img/widget/button/preview-01.png
13287 * @image html img/widget/button/preview-02.png
13289 * @brief The check widget allows for toggling a value between true and
13292 * Check objects are a lot like radio objects in layout and functionality
13293 * except they do not work as a group, but independently and only toggle the
13294 * value of a boolean from false to true (0 or 1). elm_check_state_set() sets
13295 * the boolean state (1 for true, 0 for false), and elm_check_state_get()
13296 * returns the current state. For convenience, like the radio objects, you
13297 * can set a pointer to a boolean directly with elm_check_state_pointer_set()
13298 * for it to modify.
13300 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
13301 * "changed" - This is called whenever the user changes the state of one of
13302 * the check object(event_info is NULL).
13304 * @ref tutorial_check should give you a firm grasp of how to use this widget.
13308 * @brief Add a new Check object
13310 * @param parent The parent object
13311 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
13313 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_check_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13315 * @brief Set the text label of the check object
13317 * @param obj The check object
13318 * @param label The text label string in UTF-8
13320 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
13322 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_check_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13324 * @brief Get the text label of the check object
13326 * @param obj The check object
13327 * @return The text label string in UTF-8
13329 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_get() instead.
13331 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_check_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13333 * @brief Set the icon object of the check object
13335 * @param obj The check object
13336 * @param icon The icon object
13338 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
13339 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
13340 * elm_check_icon_unset() function.
13342 EAPI void elm_check_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13344 * @brief Get the icon object of the check object
13346 * @param obj The check object
13347 * @return The icon object
13349 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_check_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13351 * @brief Unset the icon used for the check object
13353 * @param obj The check object
13354 * @return The icon object that was being used
13356 * Unparent and return the icon object which was set for this widget.
13358 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_check_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13360 * @brief Set the on/off state of the check object
13362 * @param obj The check object
13363 * @param state The state to use (1 == on, 0 == off)
13365 * This sets the state of the check. If set
13366 * with elm_check_state_pointer_set() the state of that variable is also
13367 * changed. Calling this @b doesn't cause the "changed" signal to be emited.
13369 EAPI void elm_check_state_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool state) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13371 * @brief Get the state of the check object
13373 * @param obj The check object
13374 * @return The boolean state
13376 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_check_state_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13378 * @brief Set a convenience pointer to a boolean to change
13380 * @param obj The check object
13381 * @param statep Pointer to the boolean to modify
13383 * This sets a pointer to a boolean, that, in addition to the check objects
13384 * state will also be modified directly. To stop setting the object pointed
13385 * to simply use NULL as the @p statep parameter. If @p statep is not NULL,
13386 * then when this is called, the check objects state will also be modified to
13387 * reflect the value of the boolean @p statep points to, just like calling
13388 * elm_check_state_set().
13390 EAPI void elm_check_state_pointer_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *statep) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13396 * @defgroup Radio Radio
13398 * @image html img/widget/radio/preview-00.png
13399 * @image latex img/widget/radio/preview-00.eps
13401 * @brief Radio is a widget that allows for 1 or more options to be displayed
13402 * and have the user choose only 1 of them.
13404 * A radio object contains an indicator, an optional Label and an optional
13405 * icon object. While it's possible to have a group of only one radio they,
13406 * are normally used in groups of 2 or more. To add a radio to a group use
13407 * elm_radio_group_add(). The radio object(s) will select from one of a set
13408 * of integer values, so any value they are configuring needs to be mapped to
13409 * a set of integers. To configure what value that radio object represents,
13410 * use elm_radio_state_value_set() to set the integer it represents. To set
13411 * the value the whole group(which one is currently selected) is to indicate
13412 * use elm_radio_value_set() on any group member, and to get the groups value
13413 * use elm_radio_value_get(). For convenience the radio objects are also able
13414 * to directly set an integer(int) to the value that is selected. To specify
13415 * the pointer to this integer to modify, use elm_radio_value_pointer_set().
13416 * The radio objects will modify this directly. That implies the pointer must
13417 * point to valid memory for as long as the radio objects exist.
13419 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
13420 * @li changed - This is called whenever the user changes the state of one of
13421 * the radio objects within the group of radio objects that work together.
13423 * @ref tutorial_radio show most of this API in action.
13427 * @brief Add a new radio to the parent
13429 * @param parent The parent object
13430 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
13432 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_radio_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13434 * @brief Set the text label of the radio object
13436 * @param obj The radio object
13437 * @param label The text label string in UTF-8
13439 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
13441 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_radio_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13443 * @brief Get the text label of the radio object
13445 * @param obj The radio object
13446 * @return The text label string in UTF-8
13448 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
13450 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_radio_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13452 * @brief Set the icon object of the radio object
13454 * @param obj The radio object
13455 * @param icon The icon object
13457 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted. If you
13458 * want to keep that old content object, use the elm_radio_icon_unset()
13461 EAPI void elm_radio_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13463 * @brief Get the icon object of the radio object
13465 * @param obj The radio object
13466 * @return The icon object
13468 * @see elm_radio_icon_set()
13470 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_radio_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13472 * @brief Unset the icon used for the radio object
13474 * @param obj The radio object
13475 * @return The icon object that was being used
13477 * Unparent and return the icon object which was set for this widget.
13479 * @see elm_radio_icon_set()
13481 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_radio_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13483 * @brief Add this radio to a group of other radio objects
13485 * @param obj The radio object
13486 * @param group Any object whose group the @p obj is to join.
13488 * Radio objects work in groups. Each member should have a different integer
13489 * value assigned. In order to have them work as a group, they need to know
13490 * about each other. This adds the given radio object to the group of which
13491 * the group object indicated is a member.
13493 EAPI void elm_radio_group_add(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *group) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13495 * @brief Set the integer value that this radio object represents
13497 * @param obj The radio object
13498 * @param value The value to use if this radio object is selected
13500 * This sets the value of the radio.
13502 EAPI void elm_radio_state_value_set(Evas_Object *obj, int value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13504 * @brief Get the integer value that this radio object represents
13506 * @param obj The radio object
13507 * @return The value used if this radio object is selected
13509 * This gets the value of the radio.
13511 * @see elm_radio_value_set()
13513 EAPI int elm_radio_state_value_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13515 * @brief Set the value of the radio.
13517 * @param obj The radio object
13518 * @param value The value to use for the group
13520 * This sets the value of the radio group and will also set the value if
13521 * pointed to, to the value supplied, but will not call any callbacks.
13523 EAPI void elm_radio_value_set(Evas_Object *obj, int value) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13525 * @brief Get the state of the radio object
13527 * @param obj The radio object
13528 * @return The integer state
13530 EAPI int elm_radio_value_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13532 * @brief Set a convenience pointer to a integer to change
13534 * @param obj The radio object
13535 * @param valuep Pointer to the integer to modify
13537 * This sets a pointer to a integer, that, in addition to the radio objects
13538 * state will also be modified directly. To stop setting the object pointed
13539 * to simply use NULL as the @p valuep argument. If valuep is not NULL, then
13540 * when this is called, the radio objects state will also be modified to
13541 * reflect the value of the integer valuep points to, just like calling
13542 * elm_radio_value_set().
13544 EAPI void elm_radio_value_pointer_set(Evas_Object *obj, int *valuep) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13550 * @defgroup Pager Pager
13552 * @image html img/widget/pager/preview-00.png
13553 * @image latex img/widget/pager/preview-00.eps
13555 * @brief Widget that allows flipping between 1 or more “pages” of objects.
13557 * The flipping between “pages” of objects is animated. All content in pager
13558 * is kept in a stack, the last content to be added will be on the top of the
13559 * stack(be visible).
13561 * Objects can be pushed or popped from the stack or deleted as normal.
13562 * Pushes and pops will animate (and a pop will delete the object once the
13563 * animation is finished). Any object already in the pager can be promoted to
13564 * the top(from its current stacking position) through the use of
13565 * elm_pager_content_promote(). Objects are pushed to the top with
13566 * elm_pager_content_push() and when the top item is no longer wanted, simply
13567 * pop it with elm_pager_content_pop() and it will also be deleted. If an
13568 * object is no longer needed and is not the top item, just delete it as
13569 * normal. You can query which objects are the top and bottom with
13570 * elm_pager_content_bottom_get() and elm_pager_content_top_get().
13572 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
13573 * "hide,finished" - when the previous page is hided
13575 * This widget has the following styles available:
13578 * @li fade_translucide
13579 * @li fade_invisible
13580 * @note This styles affect only the flipping animations, the appearance when
13581 * not animating is unaffected by styles.
13583 * @ref tutorial_pager gives a good overview of the usage of the API.
13587 * Add a new pager to the parent
13589 * @param parent The parent object
13590 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
13594 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_pager_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13596 * @brief Push an object to the top of the pager stack (and show it).
13598 * @param obj The pager object
13599 * @param content The object to push
13601 * The object pushed becomes a child of the pager, it will be controlled and
13602 * deleted when the pager is deleted.
13604 * @note If the content is already in the stack use
13605 * elm_pager_content_promote().
13606 * @warning Using this function on @p content already in the stack results in
13607 * undefined behavior.
13609 EAPI void elm_pager_content_push(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13611 * @brief Pop the object that is on top of the stack
13613 * @param obj The pager object
13615 * This pops the object that is on the top(visible) of the pager, makes it
13616 * disappear, then deletes the object. The object that was underneath it on
13617 * the stack will become visible.
13619 EAPI void elm_pager_content_pop(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13621 * @brief Moves an object already in the pager stack to the top of the stack.
13623 * @param obj The pager object
13624 * @param content The object to promote
13626 * This will take the @p content and move it to the top of the stack as
13627 * if it had been pushed there.
13629 * @note If the content isn't already in the stack use
13630 * elm_pager_content_push().
13631 * @warning Using this function on @p content not already in the stack
13632 * results in undefined behavior.
13634 EAPI void elm_pager_content_promote(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13636 * @brief Return the object at the bottom of the pager stack
13638 * @param obj The pager object
13639 * @return The bottom object or NULL if none
13641 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_pager_content_bottom_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13643 * @brief Return the object at the top of the pager stack
13645 * @param obj The pager object
13646 * @return The top object or NULL if none
13648 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_pager_content_top_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13654 * @defgroup Slideshow Slideshow
13656 * @image html img/widget/slideshow/preview-00.png
13657 * @image latex img/widget/slideshow/preview-00.eps
13659 * This widget, as the name indicates, is a pre-made image
13660 * slideshow panel, with API functions acting on (child) image
13661 * items presentation. Between those actions, are:
13662 * - advance to next/previous image
13663 * - select the style of image transition animation
13664 * - set the exhibition time for each image
13665 * - start/stop the slideshow
13667 * The transition animations are defined in the widget's theme,
13668 * consequently new animations can be added without having to
13669 * update the widget's code.
13671 * @section Slideshow_Items Slideshow items
13673 * For slideshow items, just like for @ref Genlist "genlist" ones,
13674 * the user defines a @b classes, specifying functions that will be
13675 * called on the item's creation and deletion times.
13677 * The #Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class structure contains the following
13680 * - @c func.get - When an item is displayed, this function is
13681 * called, and it's where one should create the item object, de
13682 * facto. For example, the object can be a pure Evas image object
13683 * or an Elementary @ref Photocam "photocam" widget. See
13684 * #SlideshowItemGetFunc.
13685 * - @c func.del - When an item is no more displayed, this function
13686 * is called, where the user must delete any data associated to
13687 * the item. See #SlideshowItemDelFunc.
13689 * @section Slideshow_Caching Slideshow caching
13691 * The slideshow provides facilities to have items adjacent to the
13692 * one being displayed <b>already "realized"</b> (i.e. loaded) for
13693 * you, so that the system does not have to decode image data
13694 * anymore at the time it has to actually switch images on its
13695 * viewport. The user is able to set the numbers of items to be
13696 * cached @b before and @b after the current item, in the widget's
13699 * Smart events one can add callbacks for are:
13701 * - @c "changed" - when the slideshow switches its view to a new
13704 * List of examples for the slideshow widget:
13705 * @li @ref slideshow_example
13709 * @addtogroup Slideshow
13713 typedef struct _Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class; /**< Slideshow item class definition struct */
13714 typedef struct _Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class_Func Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class_Func; /**< Class functions for slideshow item classes. */
13715 typedef struct _Elm_Slideshow_Item Elm_Slideshow_Item; /**< Slideshow item handle */
13716 typedef Evas_Object *(*SlideshowItemGetFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj); /**< Image fetching class function for slideshow item classes. */
13717 typedef void (*SlideshowItemDelFunc) (void *data, Evas_Object *obj); /**< Deletion class function for slideshow item classes. */
13720 * @struct _Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class
13722 * Slideshow item class definition. See @ref Slideshow_Items for
13725 struct _Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class
13727 struct _Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class_Func
13729 SlideshowItemGetFunc get;
13730 SlideshowItemDelFunc del;
13732 }; /**< #Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class member definitions */
13735 * Add a new slideshow widget to the given parent Elementary
13736 * (container) object
13738 * @param parent The parent object
13739 * @return A new slideshow widget handle or @c NULL, on errors
13741 * This function inserts a new slideshow widget on the canvas.
13743 * @ingroup Slideshow
13745 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_slideshow_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13748 * Add (append) a new item in a given slideshow widget.
13750 * @param obj The slideshow object
13751 * @aram itc The item class for the item
13752 * @param data The item's data
13753 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL, on errors
13755 * Add a new item to @p obj's internal list of items, appending it.
13756 * The item's class must contain the function really fetching the
13757 * image object to show for this item, which could be an Evas image
13758 * object or an Elementary photo, for example. The @p data
13759 * parameter is going to be passed to both class functions of the
13762 * @see #Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class
13763 * @see elm_slideshow_item_sorted_insert()
13765 * @ingroup Slideshow
13767 EAPI Elm_Slideshow_Item *elm_slideshow_item_add(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class *itc, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13770 * Insert a new item into the given slideshow widget, using the @p func
13771 * function to sort items (by item handles).
13773 * @param obj The slideshow object
13774 * @aram itc The item class for the item
13775 * @param data The item's data
13776 * @param func The comparing function to be used to sort slideshow
13777 * items <b>by #Elm_Slideshow_Item item handles</b>
13778 * @return Returns The slideshow item handle, on success, or
13779 * @c NULL, on errors
13781 * Add a new item to @p obj's internal list of items, in a position
13782 * determined by the @p func comparing function. The item's class
13783 * must contain the function really fetching the image object to
13784 * show for this item, which could be an Evas image object or an
13785 * Elementary photo, for example. The @p data parameter is going to
13786 * be passed to both class functions of the item.
13788 * @see #Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class
13789 * @see elm_slideshow_item_add()
13791 * @ingroup Slideshow
13793 EAPI Elm_Slideshow_Item *elm_slideshow_item_sorted_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const Elm_Slideshow_Item_Class *itc, const void *data, Eina_Compare_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13796 * Display a given slideshow widget's item, programmatically.
13798 * @param obj The slideshow object
13799 * @param item The item to display on @p obj's viewport
13801 * The change between the current item and @p item will use the
13802 * transition @p obj is set to use (@see
13803 * elm_slideshow_transition_set()).
13805 * @ingroup Slideshow
13807 EAPI void elm_slideshow_show(Elm_Slideshow_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13810 * Slide to the @b next item, in a given slideshow widget
13812 * @param obj The slideshow object
13814 * The sliding animation @p obj is set to use will be the
13815 * transition effect used, after this call is issued.
13817 * @note If the end of the slideshow's internal list of items is
13818 * reached, it'll wrap around to the list's beginning, again.
13820 * @ingroup Slideshow
13822 EAPI void elm_slideshow_next(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13825 * Slide to the @b previous item, in a given slideshow widget
13827 * @param obj The slideshow object
13829 * The sliding animation @p obj is set to use will be the
13830 * transition effect used, after this call is issued.
13832 * @note If the beginning of the slideshow's internal list of items
13833 * is reached, it'll wrap around to the list's end, again.
13835 * @ingroup Slideshow
13837 EAPI void elm_slideshow_previous(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13840 * Returns the list of sliding transition/effect names available, for a
13841 * given slideshow widget.
13843 * @param obj The slideshow object
13844 * @return The list of transitions (list of @b stringshared strings
13847 * The transitions, which come from @p obj's theme, must be an EDC
13848 * data item named @c "transitions" on the theme file, with (prefix)
13849 * names of EDC programs actually implementing them.
13851 * The available transitions for slideshows on the default theme are:
13852 * - @c "fade" - the current item fades out, while the new one
13853 * fades in to the slideshow's viewport.
13854 * - @c "black_fade" - the current item fades to black, and just
13855 * then, the new item will fade in.
13856 * - @c "horizontal" - the current item slides horizontally, until
13857 * it gets out of the slideshow's viewport, while the new item
13858 * comes from the left to take its place.
13859 * - @c "vertical" - the current item slides vertically, until it
13860 * gets out of the slideshow's viewport, while the new item comes
13861 * from the bottom to take its place.
13862 * - @c "square" - the new item starts to appear from the middle of
13863 * the current one, but with a tiny size, growing until its
13864 * target (full) size and covering the old one.
13866 * @warning The stringshared strings get no new references
13867 * exclusive to the user grabbing the list, here, so if you'd like
13868 * to use them out of this call's context, you'd better @c
13869 * eina_stringshare_ref() them.
13871 * @see elm_slideshow_transition_set()
13873 * @ingroup Slideshow
13875 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_slideshow_transitions_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13878 * Set the current slide transition/effect in use for a given
13881 * @param obj The slideshow object
13882 * @param transition The new transition's name string
13884 * If @p transition is implemented in @p obj's theme (i.e., is
13885 * contained in the list returned by
13886 * elm_slideshow_transitions_get()), this new sliding effect will
13887 * be used on the widget.
13889 * @see elm_slideshow_transitions_get() for more details
13891 * @ingroup Slideshow
13893 EAPI void elm_slideshow_transition_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *transition) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13896 * Get the current slide transition/effect in use for a given
13899 * @param obj The slideshow object
13900 * @return The current transition's name
13902 * @see elm_slideshow_transition_set() for more details
13904 * @ingroup Slideshow
13906 EAPI const char *elm_slideshow_transition_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13909 * Set the interval between each image transition on a given
13910 * slideshow widget, <b>and start the slideshow, itself</b>
13912 * @param obj The slideshow object
13913 * @param timeout The new displaying timeout for images
13915 * After this call, the slideshow widget will start cycling its
13916 * view, sequentially and automatically, with the images of the
13917 * items it has. The time between each new image displayed is going
13918 * to be @p timeout, in @b seconds. If a different timeout was set
13919 * previously and an slideshow was in progress, it will continue
13920 * with the new time between transitions, after this call.
13922 * @note A value less than or equal to 0 on @p timeout will disable
13923 * the widget's internal timer, thus halting any slideshow which
13924 * could be happening on @p obj.
13926 * @see elm_slideshow_timeout_get()
13928 * @ingroup Slideshow
13930 EAPI void elm_slideshow_timeout_set(Evas_Object *obj, double timeout) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13933 * Get the interval set for image transitions on a given slideshow
13936 * @param obj The slideshow object
13937 * @return Returns the timeout set on it
13939 * @see elm_slideshow_timeout_set() for more details
13941 * @ingroup Slideshow
13943 EAPI double elm_slideshow_timeout_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13946 * Set if, after a slideshow is started, for a given slideshow
13947 * widget, its items should be displayed cyclically or not.
13949 * @param obj The slideshow object
13950 * @param loop Use @c EINA_TRUE to make it cycle through items or
13951 * @c EINA_FALSE for it to stop at the end of @p obj's internal
13954 * @note elm_slideshow_next() and elm_slideshow_previous() will @b
13955 * ignore what is set by this functions, i.e., they'll @b always
13956 * cycle through items. This affects only the "automatic"
13957 * slideshow, as set by elm_slideshow_timeout_set().
13959 * @see elm_slideshow_loop_get()
13961 * @ingroup Slideshow
13963 EAPI void elm_slideshow_loop_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool loop) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13966 * Get if, after a slideshow is started, for a given slideshow
13967 * widget, its items are to be displayed cyclically or not.
13969 * @param obj The slideshow object
13970 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if the items in @p obj will be cycled
13971 * through or @c EINA_FALSE, otherwise
13973 * @see elm_slideshow_loop_set() for more details
13975 * @ingroup Slideshow
13977 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_slideshow_loop_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13980 * Remove all items from a given slideshow widget
13982 * @param obj The slideshow object
13984 * This removes (and deletes) all items in @p obj, leaving it
13987 * @see elm_slideshow_item_del(), to remove just one item.
13989 * @ingroup Slideshow
13991 EAPI void elm_slideshow_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
13994 * Get the internal list of items in a given slideshow widget.
13996 * @param obj The slideshow object
13997 * @return The list of items (#Elm_Slideshow_Item as data) or
13998 * @c NULL on errors.
14000 * This list is @b not to be modified in any way and must not be
14001 * freed. Use the list members with functions like
14002 * elm_slideshow_item_del(), elm_slideshow_item_data_get().
14004 * @warning This list is only valid until @p obj object's internal
14005 * items list is changed. It should be fetched again with another
14006 * call to this function when changes happen.
14008 * @ingroup Slideshow
14010 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_slideshow_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14013 * Delete a given item from a slideshow widget.
14015 * @param item The slideshow item
14017 * @ingroup Slideshow
14019 EAPI void elm_slideshow_item_del(Elm_Slideshow_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14022 * Return the data associated with a given slideshow item
14024 * @param item The slideshow item
14025 * @return Returns the data associated to this item
14027 * @ingroup Slideshow
14029 EAPI void *elm_slideshow_item_data_get(const Elm_Slideshow_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14032 * Returns the currently displayed item, in a given slideshow widget
14034 * @param obj The slideshow object
14035 * @return A handle to the item being displayed in @p obj or
14036 * @c NULL, if none is (and on errors)
14038 * @ingroup Slideshow
14040 EAPI Elm_Slideshow_Item *elm_slideshow_item_current_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14043 * Get the real Evas object created to implement the view of a
14044 * given slideshow item
14046 * @param item The slideshow item.
14047 * @return the Evas object implementing this item's view.
14049 * This returns the actual Evas object used to implement the
14050 * specified slideshow item's view. This may be @c NULL, as it may
14051 * not have been created or may have been deleted, at any time, by
14052 * the slideshow. <b>Do not modify this object</b> (move, resize,
14053 * show, hide, etc.), as the slideshow is controlling it. This
14054 * function is for querying, emitting custom signals or hooking
14055 * lower level callbacks for events on that object. Do not delete
14056 * this object under any circumstances.
14058 * @see elm_slideshow_item_data_get()
14060 * @ingroup Slideshow
14062 EAPI Evas_Object* elm_slideshow_item_object_get(const Elm_Slideshow_Item* item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14065 * Get the the item, in a given slideshow widget, placed at
14066 * position @p nth, in its internal items list
14068 * @param obj The slideshow object
14069 * @param nth The number of the item to grab a handle to (0 being
14071 * @return The item stored in @p obj at position @p nth or @c NULL,
14072 * if there's no item with that index (and on errors)
14074 * @ingroup Slideshow
14076 EAPI Elm_Slideshow_Item *elm_slideshow_item_nth_get(const Evas_Object *obj, unsigned int nth) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14079 * Set the current slide layout in use for a given slideshow widget
14081 * @param obj The slideshow object
14082 * @param layout The new layout's name string
14084 * If @p layout is implemented in @p obj's theme (i.e., is contained
14085 * in the list returned by elm_slideshow_layouts_get()), this new
14086 * images layout will be used on the widget.
14088 * @see elm_slideshow_layouts_get() for more details
14090 * @ingroup Slideshow
14092 EAPI void elm_slideshow_layout_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *layout) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14095 * Get the current slide layout in use for a given slideshow widget
14097 * @param obj The slideshow object
14098 * @return The current layout's name
14100 * @see elm_slideshow_layout_set() for more details
14102 * @ingroup Slideshow
14104 EAPI const char *elm_slideshow_layout_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14107 * Returns the list of @b layout names available, for a given
14108 * slideshow widget.
14110 * @param obj The slideshow object
14111 * @return The list of layouts (list of @b stringshared strings
14114 * Slideshow layouts will change how the widget is to dispose each
14115 * image item in its viewport, with regard to cropping, scaling,
14118 * The layouts, which come from @p obj's theme, must be an EDC
14119 * data item name @c "layouts" on the theme file, with (prefix)
14120 * names of EDC programs actually implementing them.
14122 * The available layouts for slideshows on the default theme are:
14123 * - @c "fullscreen" - item images with original aspect, scaled to
14124 * touch top and down slideshow borders or, if the image's heigh
14125 * is not enough, left and right slideshow borders.
14126 * - @c "not_fullscreen" - the same behavior as the @c "fullscreen"
14127 * one, but always leaving 10% of the slideshow's dimensions of
14128 * distance between the item image's borders and the slideshow
14129 * borders, for each axis.
14131 * @warning The stringshared strings get no new references
14132 * exclusive to the user grabbing the list, here, so if you'd like
14133 * to use them out of this call's context, you'd better @c
14134 * eina_stringshare_ref() them.
14136 * @see elm_slideshow_layout_set()
14138 * @ingroup Slideshow
14140 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_slideshow_layouts_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14143 * Set the number of items to cache, on a given slideshow widget,
14144 * <b>before the current item</b>
14146 * @param obj The slideshow object
14147 * @param count Number of items to cache before the current one
14149 * The default value for this property is @c 2. See
14150 * @ref Slideshow_Caching "slideshow caching" for more details.
14152 * @see elm_slideshow_cache_before_get()
14154 * @ingroup Slideshow
14156 EAPI void elm_slideshow_cache_before_set(Evas_Object *obj, int count) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14159 * Retrieve the number of items to cache, on a given slideshow widget,
14160 * <b>before the current item</b>
14162 * @param obj The slideshow object
14163 * @return The number of items set to be cached before the current one
14165 * @see elm_slideshow_cache_before_set() for more details
14167 * @ingroup Slideshow
14169 EAPI int elm_slideshow_cache_before_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14172 * Set the number of items to cache, on a given slideshow widget,
14173 * <b>after the current item</b>
14175 * @param obj The slideshow object
14176 * @param count Number of items to cache after the current one
14178 * The default value for this property is @c 2. See
14179 * @ref Slideshow_Caching "slideshow caching" for more details.
14181 * @see elm_slideshow_cache_after_get()
14183 * @ingroup Slideshow
14185 EAPI void elm_slideshow_cache_after_set(Evas_Object *obj, int count) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14188 * Retrieve the number of items to cache, on a given slideshow widget,
14189 * <b>after the current item</b>
14191 * @param obj The slideshow object
14192 * @return The number of items set to be cached after the current one
14194 * @see elm_slideshow_cache_after_set() for more details
14196 * @ingroup Slideshow
14198 EAPI int elm_slideshow_cache_after_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14201 * Get the number of items stored in a given slideshow widget
14203 * @param obj The slideshow object
14204 * @return The number of items on @p obj, at the moment of this call
14206 * @ingroup Slideshow
14208 EAPI unsigned int elm_slideshow_count_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14215 * @defgroup Fileselector File Selector
14217 * @image html img/icon/fileselector/preview-00.png
14218 * @image latex img/icon/fileselector/preview-00.png
14220 * A file selector is a widget that allows a user to navigate
14221 * through a file system, reporting file selections back via its
14224 * It contains shortcut buttons for home directory (@c ~) and to
14225 * jump one directory upwards (..), as well as cancel/ok buttons to
14226 * confirm/cancel a given selection. After either one of those two
14227 * former actions, the file selector will issue its @c "done" smart
14230 * There's a text entry on it, too, showing the name of the current
14231 * selection. There's the possibility of making it editable, so it
14232 * is useful on file saving dialogs on applications, where one
14233 * gives a file name to save contents to, in a given directory in
14234 * the system. This custom file name will be reported on the @c
14235 * "done" smart callback (explained in sequence).
14237 * Finally, it has a view to display file system items into in two
14242 * If Elementary is built with support of the Ethumb thumbnailing
14243 * library, the second form of view will display preview thumbnails
14244 * of files which it supports.
14246 * Smart callbacks one can register to:
14248 * - @c "selected" - the user has clicked on a file (when not in
14249 * folders-only mode) or directory (when in folders-only mode)
14250 * - @c "directory,open" - the list has been populated with new
14251 * content (@c event_info is a pointer to the directory's
14252 * path, a @b stringshared string)
14253 * - @c "done" - the user has clicked on the "ok" or "cancel"
14254 * buttons (@c event_info is a pointer to the selection's
14255 * path, a @b stringshared string)
14257 * Here is an example on its usage:
14258 * @li @ref fileselector_example
14262 * @addtogroup Fileselector
14267 * Defines how a file selector widget is to layout its contents
14268 * (file system entries).
14270 typedef enum _Elm_Fileselector_Mode
14272 ELM_FILESELECTOR_LIST = 0, /**< layout as a list */
14273 ELM_FILESELECTOR_GRID, /**< layout as a grid */
14274 ELM_FILESELECTOR_LAST /**< sentinel (helper) value, not used */
14275 } Elm_Fileselector_Mode;
14278 * Add a new file selector widget to the given parent Elementary
14279 * (container) object
14281 * @param parent The parent object
14282 * @return a new file selector widget handle or @c NULL, on errors
14284 * This function inserts a new file selector widget on the canvas.
14286 * @ingroup Fileselector
14288 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_fileselector_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14291 * Enable/disable the file name entry box where the user can type
14292 * in a name for a file, in a given file selector widget
14294 * @param obj The file selector object
14295 * @param is_save @c EINA_TRUE to make the file selector a "saving
14296 * dialog", @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
14298 * Having the entry editable is useful on file saving dialogs on
14299 * applications, where one gives a file name to save contents to,
14300 * in a given directory in the system. This custom file name will
14301 * be reported on the @c "done" smart callback.
14303 * @see elm_fileselector_is_save_get()
14305 * @ingroup Fileselector
14307 EAPI void elm_fileselector_is_save_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool is_save) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14310 * Get whether the given file selector is in "saving dialog" mode
14312 * @param obj The file selector object
14313 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if the file selector is in "saving dialog"
14314 * mode, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise (and on errors)
14316 * @see elm_fileselector_is_save_set() for more details
14318 * @ingroup Fileselector
14320 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_is_save_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14323 * Enable/disable folder-only view for a given file selector widget
14325 * @param obj The file selector object
14326 * @param only @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj only display
14327 * directories, @c EINA_FALSE to make files to be displayed in it
14330 * If enabled, the widget's view will only display folder items,
14333 * @see elm_fileselector_folder_only_get()
14335 * @ingroup Fileselector
14337 EAPI void elm_fileselector_folder_only_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14340 * Get whether folder-only view is set for a given file selector
14343 * @param obj The file selector object
14344 * @return only @c EINA_TRUE if @p obj is only displaying
14345 * directories, @c EINA_FALSE if files are being displayed in it
14346 * too (and on errors)
14348 * @see elm_fileselector_folder_only_get()
14350 * @ingroup Fileselector
14352 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_folder_only_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14355 * Enable/disable the "ok" and "cancel" buttons on a given file
14358 * @param obj The file selector object
14359 * @param only @c EINA_TRUE to show them, @c EINA_FALSE to hide.
14361 * @note A file selector without those buttons will never emit the
14362 * @c "done" smart event, and is only usable if one is just hooking
14363 * to the other two events.
14365 * @see elm_fileselector_buttons_ok_cancel_get()
14367 * @ingroup Fileselector
14369 EAPI void elm_fileselector_buttons_ok_cancel_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool buttons) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14372 * Get whether the "ok" and "cancel" buttons on a given file
14373 * selector widget are being shown.
14375 * @param obj The file selector object
14376 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if they are being shown, @c EINA_FALSE
14377 * otherwise (and on errors)
14379 * @see elm_fileselector_buttons_ok_cancel_set() for more details
14381 * @ingroup Fileselector
14383 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_buttons_ok_cancel_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14386 * Enable/disable a tree view in the given file selector widget,
14387 * <b>if it's in @c #ELM_FILESELECTOR_LIST mode</b>
14389 * @param obj The file selector object
14390 * @param expand @c EINA_TRUE to enable tree view, @c EINA_FALSE to
14393 * In a tree view, arrows are created on the sides of directories,
14394 * allowing them to expand in place.
14396 * @note If it's in other mode, the changes made by this function
14397 * will only be visible when one switches back to "list" mode.
14399 * @see elm_fileselector_expandable_get()
14401 * @ingroup Fileselector
14403 EAPI void elm_fileselector_expandable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool expand) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14406 * Get whether tree view is enabled for the given file selector
14409 * @param obj The file selector object
14410 * @return @c EINA_TRUE if @p obj is in tree view, @c EINA_FALSE
14411 * otherwise (and or errors)
14413 * @see elm_fileselector_expandable_set() for more details
14415 * @ingroup Fileselector
14417 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_expandable_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14420 * Set, programmatically, the @b directory that a given file
14421 * selector widget will display contents from
14423 * @param obj The file selector object
14424 * @param path The path to display in @p obj
14426 * This will change the @b directory that @p obj is displaying. It
14427 * will also clear the text entry area on the @p obj object, which
14428 * displays select files' names.
14430 * @see elm_fileselector_path_get()
14432 * @ingroup Fileselector
14434 EAPI void elm_fileselector_path_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *path) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14437 * Get the parent directory's path that a given file selector
14438 * widget is displaying
14440 * @param obj The file selector object
14441 * @return The (full) path of the directory the file selector is
14442 * displaying, a @b stringshared string
14444 * @see elm_fileselector_path_set()
14446 * @ingroup Fileselector
14448 EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_path_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14451 * Set, programmatically, the currently selected file/directory in
14452 * the given file selector widget
14454 * @param obj The file selector object
14455 * @param path The (full) path to a file or directory
14456 * @return @c EINA_TRUE on success, @c EINA_FALSE on failure. The
14457 * latter case occurs if the directory or file pointed to do not
14460 * @see elm_fileselector_selected_get()
14462 * @ingroup Fileselector
14464 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_fileselector_selected_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *path) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14467 * Get the currently selected item's (full) path, in the given file
14470 * @param obj The file selector object
14471 * @return The absolute path of the selected item, a @b
14472 * stringshared string
14474 * @note Custom editions on @p obj object's text entry, if made,
14475 * will appear on the return string of this function, naturally.
14477 * @see elm_fileselector_selected_set() for more details
14479 * @ingroup Fileselector
14481 EAPI const char *elm_fileselector_selected_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14484 * Set the mode in which a given file selector widget will display
14485 * (layout) file system entries in its view
14487 * @param obj The file selector object
14488 * @param mode The mode of the fileselector, being it one of
14489 * #ELM_FILESELECTOR_LIST (default) or #ELM_FILESELECTOR_GRID. The
14490 * first one, naturally, will display the files in a list. The
14491 * latter will make the widget to display its entries in a grid
14494 * @note By using elm_fileselector_expandable_set(), the user may
14495 * trigger a tree view for that list.
14497 * @note If Elementary is built with support of the Ethumb
14498 * thumbnailing library, the second form of view will display
14499 * preview thumbnails of files which it supports. You must have
14500 * elm_need_ethumb() called in your Elementary for thumbnailing to
14503 * @see elm_fileselector_expandable_set().
14504 * @see elm_fileselector_mode_get().
14506 * @ingroup Fileselector
14508 EAPI void elm_fileselector_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Fileselector_Mode mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14511 * Get the mode in which a given file selector widget is displaying
14512 * (layouting) file system entries in its view
14514 * @param obj The fileselector object
14515 * @return The mode in which the fileselector is at
14517 * @see elm_fileselector_mode_set() for more details
14519 * @ingroup Fileselector
14521 EAPI Elm_Fileselector_Mode elm_fileselector_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14528 * @defgroup Progressbar Progress bar
14530 * The progress bar is a widget for visually representing the
14531 * progress status of a given job/task.
14533 * A progress bar may be horizontal or vertical. It may display an
14534 * icon besides it, as well as primary and @b units labels. The
14535 * former is meant to label the widget as a whole, while the
14536 * latter, which is formatted with floating point values (and thus
14537 * accepts a <c>printf</c>-style format string, like <c>"%1.2f
14538 * units"</c>), is meant to label the widget's <b>progress
14539 * value</b>. Label, icon and unit strings/objects are @b optional
14540 * for progress bars.
14542 * A progress bar may be @b inverted, in which state it gets its
14543 * values inverted, with high values being on the left or top and
14544 * low values on the right or bottom, as opposed to normally have
14545 * the low values on the former and high values on the latter,
14546 * respectively, for horizontal and vertical modes.
14548 * The @b span of the progress, as set by
14549 * elm_progressbar_span_size_set(), is its length (horizontally or
14550 * vertically), unless one puts size hints on the widget to expand
14551 * on desired directions, by any container. That length will be
14552 * scaled by the object or applications scaling factor. At any
14553 * point code can query the progress bar for its value with
14554 * elm_progressbar_value_get().
14556 * Available widget styles for progress bars:
14558 * - @c "wheel" (simple style, no text, no progression, only
14559 * "pulse" effect is available)
14561 * Here is an example on its usage:
14562 * @li @ref progressbar_example
14566 * Add a new progress bar widget to the given parent Elementary
14567 * (container) object
14569 * @param parent The parent object
14570 * @return a new progress bar widget handle or @c NULL, on errors
14572 * This function inserts a new progress bar widget on the canvas.
14574 * @ingroup Progressbar
14576 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_progressbar_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14579 * Set whether a given progress bar widget is at "pulsing mode" or
14582 * @param obj The progress bar object
14583 * @param pulse @c EINA_TRUE to put @obj in pulsing mode,
14584 * @c EINA_FALSE to put it back to its default one
14586 * By default, progress bars will display values from the low to
14587 * high value boundaries. There are, though, contexts in which the
14588 * state of progression of a given task is @b unknown. For those,
14589 * one can set a progress bar widget to a "pulsing state", to give
14590 * the user an idea that some computation is being held, but
14591 * without exact progress values. In the default theme it will
14592 * animate its bar with the contents filling in constantly and back
14593 * to non-filled, in a loop. To start and stop this pulsing
14594 * animation, one has to explicitly call elm_progressbar_pulse().
14596 * @see elm_progressbar_pulse_get()
14597 * @see elm_progressbar_pulse()
14599 * @ingroup Progressbar
14601 EAPI void elm_progressbar_pulse_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool pulse) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14604 * Get whether a given progress bar widget is at "pulsing mode" or
14607 * @param obj The progress bar object
14608 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @obj is in pulsing mode, @c EINA_FALSE
14609 * if it's in the default one (and on errors)
14611 * @ingroup Progressbar
14613 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_progressbar_pulse_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14616 * Start/stop a given progress bar "pulsing" animation, if its
14619 * @param obj The progress bar object
14620 * @param state @c EINA_TRUE, to @b start the pulsing animation,
14621 * @c EINA_FALSE to @b stop it
14623 * @note This call won't do anything if @p obj is not under "pulsing mode".
14625 * @see elm_progressbar_pulse_set() for more details.
14627 * @ingroup Progressbar
14629 EAPI void elm_progressbar_pulse(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool state) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14632 * Set the progress value (in percentage) on a given progress bar
14635 * @param obj The progress bar object
14636 * @param val The progress value (@b must be between @c 0.0 and @c
14639 * Use this call to set progress bar levels.
14641 * @note If you passes a value out of the specified range for @p
14642 * val, it will be interpreted as the @b closest of the @b boundary
14643 * values in the range.
14645 * @ingroup Progressbar
14647 EAPI void elm_progressbar_value_set(Evas_Object *obj, double val) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14650 * Get the progress value (in percentage) on a given progress bar
14653 * @param obj The progress bar object
14654 * @return The value of the progressbar
14656 * @see elm_progressbar_value_set() for more details
14658 * @ingroup Progressbar
14660 EAPI double elm_progressbar_value_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14663 * Set the label of a given progress bar widget
14665 * @param obj The progress bar object
14666 * @param label The text label string, in UTF-8
14668 * @ingroup Progressbar
14669 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
14671 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_progressbar_label_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14674 * Get the label of a given progress bar widget
14676 * @param obj The progressbar object
14677 * @return The text label string, in UTF-8
14679 * @ingroup Progressbar
14680 * @deprecated use elm_object_text_set() instead.
14682 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_progressbar_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14685 * Set the icon object of a given progress bar widget
14687 * @param obj The progress bar object
14688 * @param icon The icon object
14690 * Use this call to decorate @p obj with an icon next to it.
14692 * @note Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be
14693 * deleted. If you want to keep that old content object, use the
14694 * elm_progressbar_icon_unset() function.
14696 * @see elm_progressbar_icon_get()
14698 * @ingroup Progressbar
14700 EAPI void elm_progressbar_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14703 * Retrieve the icon object set for a given progress bar widget
14705 * @param obj The progress bar object
14706 * @return The icon object's handle, if @p obj had one set, or @c NULL,
14707 * otherwise (and on errors)
14709 * @see elm_progressbar_icon_set() for more details
14711 * @ingroup Progressbar
14713 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_progressbar_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14716 * Unset an icon set on a given progress bar widget
14718 * @param obj The progress bar object
14719 * @return The icon object that was being used, if any was set, or
14720 * @c NULL, otherwise (and on errors)
14722 * This call will unparent and return the icon object which was set
14723 * for this widget, previously, on success.
14725 * @see elm_progressbar_icon_set() for more details
14727 * @ingroup Progressbar
14729 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_progressbar_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14732 * Set the (exact) length of the bar region of a given progress bar
14735 * @param obj The progress bar object
14736 * @param size The length of the progress bar's bar region
14738 * This sets the minimum width (when in horizontal mode) or height
14739 * (when in vertical mode) of the actual bar area of the progress
14740 * bar @p obj. This in turn affects the object's minimum size. Use
14741 * this when you're not setting other size hints expanding on the
14742 * given direction (like weight and alignment hints) and you would
14743 * like it to have a specific size.
14745 * @note Icon, label and unit text around @p obj will require their
14746 * own space, which will make @p obj to require more the @p size,
14749 * @see elm_progressbar_span_size_get()
14751 * @ingroup Progressbar
14753 EAPI void elm_progressbar_span_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord size) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14756 * Get the length set for the bar region of a given progress bar
14759 * @param obj The progress bar object
14760 * @return The length of the progress bar's bar region
14762 * If that size was not set previously, with
14763 * elm_progressbar_span_size_set(), this call will return @c 0.
14765 * @ingroup Progressbar
14767 EAPI Evas_Coord elm_progressbar_span_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14770 * Set the format string for a given progress bar widget's units
14773 * @param obj The progress bar object
14774 * @param format The format string for @p obj's units label
14776 * If @c NULL is passed on @p format, it will make @p obj's units
14777 * area to be hidden completely. If not, it'll set the <b>format
14778 * string</b> for the units label's @b text. The units label is
14779 * provided a floating point value, so the units text is up display
14780 * at most one floating point falue. Note that the units label is
14781 * optional. Use a format string such as "%1.2f meters" for
14784 * @note The default format string for a progress bar is an integer
14785 * percentage, as in @c "%.0f %%".
14787 * @see elm_progressbar_unit_format_get()
14789 * @ingroup Progressbar
14791 EAPI void elm_progressbar_unit_format_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *format) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14794 * Retrieve the format string set for a given progress bar widget's
14797 * @param obj The progress bar object
14798 * @return The format set string for @p obj's units label or
14799 * @c NULL, if none was set (and on errors)
14801 * @see elm_progressbar_unit_format_set() for more details
14803 * @ingroup Progressbar
14805 EAPI const char *elm_progressbar_unit_format_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14808 * Set the orientation of a given progress bar widget
14810 * @param obj The progress bar object
14811 * @param horizontal Use @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj to be
14812 * @b horizontal, @c EINA_FALSE to make it @b vertical
14814 * Use this function to change how your progress bar is to be
14815 * disposed: vertically or horizontally.
14817 * @see elm_progressbar_horizontal_get()
14819 * @ingroup Progressbar
14821 EAPI void elm_progressbar_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool horizontal) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14824 * Retrieve the orientation of a given progress bar widget
14826 * @param obj The progress bar object
14827 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj is set to be @b horizontal,
14828 * @c EINA_FALSE if it's @b vertical (and on errors)
14830 * @see elm_progressbar_horizontal_set() for more details
14832 * @ingroup Progressbar
14834 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_progressbar_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14837 * Invert a given progress bar widget's displaying values order
14839 * @param obj The progress bar object
14840 * @param inverted Use @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj inverted,
14841 * @c EINA_FALSE to bring it back to default, non-inverted values.
14843 * A progress bar may be @b inverted, in which state it gets its
14844 * values inverted, with high values being on the left or top and
14845 * low values on the right or bottom, as opposed to normally have
14846 * the low values on the former and high values on the latter,
14847 * respectively, for horizontal and vertical modes.
14849 * @see elm_progressbar_inverted_get()
14851 * @ingroup Progressbar
14853 EAPI void elm_progressbar_inverted_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool inverted) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14856 * Get whether a given progress bar widget's displaying values are
14859 * @param obj The progress bar object
14860 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj has inverted values,
14861 * @c EINA_FALSE otherwise (and on errors)
14863 * @see elm_progressbar_inverted_set() for more details
14865 * @ingroup Progressbar
14867 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_progressbar_inverted_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14870 * @defgroup Separator Separator
14872 * @brief Separator is a very thin object used to separate other objects.
14874 * A separator can be vertical or horizontal.
14876 * @ref tutorial_separator is a good example of how to use a separator.
14880 * @brief Add a separator object to @p parent
14882 * @param parent The parent object
14884 * @return The separator object, or NULL upon failure
14886 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_separator_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14888 * @brief Set the horizontal mode of a separator object
14890 * @param obj The separator object
14891 * @param horizontal If true, the separator is horizontal
14893 EAPI void elm_separator_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool horizontal) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14895 * @brief Get the horizontal mode of a separator object
14897 * @param obj The separator object
14898 * @return If true, the separator is horizontal
14900 * @see elm_separator_horizontal_set()
14902 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_separator_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14908 * @defgroup Spinner Spinner
14909 * @ingroup Elementary
14911 * @image html img/widget/spinner/preview-00.png
14912 * @image latex img/widget/spinner/preview-00.eps
14914 * A spinner is a widget which allows the user to increase or decrease
14915 * numeric values using arrow buttons, or edit values directly, clicking
14916 * over it and typing the new value.
14918 * By default the spinner will not wrap and has a label
14919 * of "%.0f" (just showing the integer value of the double).
14921 * A spinner has a label that is formatted with floating
14922 * point values and thus accepts a printf-style format string, like
14925 * It also allows specific values to be replaced by pre-defined labels.
14927 * Smart callbacks one can register to:
14929 * - "changed" - Whenever the spinner value is changed.
14930 * - "delay,changed" - A short time after the value is changed by the user.
14931 * This will be called only when the user stops dragging for a very short
14932 * period or when they release their finger/mouse, so it avoids possibly
14933 * expensive reactions to the value change.
14935 * Available styles for it:
14937 * - @c "vertical": up/down buttons at the right side and text left aligned.
14939 * Here is an example on its usage:
14940 * @ref spinner_example
14944 * @addtogroup Spinner
14949 * Add a new spinner widget to the given parent Elementary
14950 * (container) object.
14952 * @param parent The parent object.
14953 * @return a new spinner widget handle or @c NULL, on errors.
14955 * This function inserts a new spinner widget on the canvas.
14960 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_spinner_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14963 * Set the format string of the displayed label.
14965 * @param obj The spinner object.
14966 * @param fmt The format string for the label display.
14968 * If @c NULL, this sets the format to "%.0f". If not it sets the format
14969 * string for the label text. The label text is provided a floating point
14970 * value, so the label text can display up to 1 floating point value.
14971 * Note that this is optional.
14973 * Use a format string such as "%1.2f meters" for example, and it will
14974 * display values like: "3.14 meters" for a value equal to 3.14159.
14976 * Default is "%0.f".
14978 * @see elm_spinner_label_format_get()
14982 EAPI void elm_spinner_label_format_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *fmt) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14985 * Get the label format of the spinner.
14987 * @param obj The spinner object.
14988 * @return The text label format string in UTF-8.
14990 * @see elm_spinner_label_format_set() for details.
14994 EAPI const char *elm_spinner_label_format_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
14997 * Set the minimum and maximum values for the spinner.
14999 * @param obj The spinner object.
15000 * @param min The minimum value.
15001 * @param max The maximum value.
15003 * Define the allowed range of values to be selected by the user.
15005 * If actual value is less than @p min, it will be updated to @p min. If it
15006 * is bigger then @p max, will be updated to @p max. Actual value can be
15007 * get with elm_spinner_value_get().
15009 * By default, min is equal to 0, and max is equal to 100.
15011 * @warning Maximum must be greater than minimum.
15013 * @see elm_spinner_min_max_get()
15017 EAPI void elm_spinner_min_max_set(Evas_Object *obj, double min, double max) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15020 * Get the minimum and maximum values of the spinner.
15022 * @param obj The spinner object.
15023 * @param min Pointer where to store the minimum value.
15024 * @param max Pointer where to store the maximum value.
15026 * @note If only one value is needed, the other pointer can be passed
15029 * @see elm_spinner_min_max_set() for details.
15033 EAPI void elm_spinner_min_max_get(const Evas_Object *obj, double *min, double *max) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15036 * Set the step used to increment or decrement the spinner value.
15038 * @param obj The spinner object.
15039 * @param step The step value.
15041 * This value will be incremented or decremented to the displayed value.
15042 * It will be incremented while the user keep right or top arrow pressed,
15043 * and will be decremented while the user keep left or bottom arrow pressed.
15045 * The interval to increment / decrement can be set with
15046 * elm_spinner_interval_set().
15048 * By default step value is equal to 1.
15050 * @see elm_spinner_step_get()
15054 EAPI void elm_spinner_step_set(Evas_Object *obj, double step) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15057 * Get the step used to increment or decrement the spinner value.
15059 * @param obj The spinner object.
15060 * @return The step value.
15062 * @see elm_spinner_step_get() for more details.
15066 EAPI double elm_spinner_step_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15069 * Set the value the spinner displays.
15071 * @param obj The spinner object.
15072 * @param val The value to be displayed.
15074 * Value will be presented on the label following format specified with
15075 * elm_spinner_format_set().
15077 * @warning The value must to be between min and max values. This values
15078 * are set by elm_spinner_min_max_set().
15080 * @see elm_spinner_value_get().
15081 * @see elm_spinner_format_set().
15082 * @see elm_spinner_min_max_set().
15086 EAPI void elm_spinner_value_set(Evas_Object *obj, double val) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15089 * Get the value displayed by the spinner.
15091 * @param obj The spinner object.
15092 * @return The value displayed.
15094 * @see elm_spinner_value_set() for details.
15098 EAPI double elm_spinner_value_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15101 * Set whether the spinner should wrap when it reaches its
15102 * minimum or maximum value.
15104 * @param obj The spinner object.
15105 * @param wrap @c EINA_TRUE to enable wrap or @c EINA_FALSE to
15108 * Disabled by default. If disabled, when the user tries to increment the
15110 * but displayed value plus step value is bigger than maximum value,
15112 * won't allow it. The same happens when the user tries to decrement it,
15113 * but the value less step is less than minimum value.
15115 * When wrap is enabled, in such situations it will allow these changes,
15116 * but will get the value that would be less than minimum and subtracts
15117 * from maximum. Or add the value that would be more than maximum to
15121 * @li min value = 10
15122 * @li max value = 50
15123 * @li step value = 20
15124 * @li displayed value = 20
15126 * When the user decrement value (using left or bottom arrow), it will
15127 * displays @c 40, because max - (min - (displayed - step)) is
15128 * @c 50 - (@c 10 - (@c 20 - @c 20)) = @c 40.
15130 * @see elm_spinner_wrap_get().
15134 EAPI void elm_spinner_wrap_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool wrap) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15137 * Get whether the spinner should wrap when it reaches its
15138 * minimum or maximum value.
15140 * @param obj The spinner object
15141 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means wrap is enabled. @c EINA_FALSE indicates
15142 * it's disabled. If @p obj is @c NULL, @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
15144 * @see elm_spinner_wrap_set() for details.
15148 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_spinner_wrap_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15151 * Set whether the spinner can be directly edited by the user or not.
15153 * @param obj The spinner object.
15154 * @param editable @c EINA_TRUE to allow users to edit it or @c EINA_FALSE to
15155 * don't allow users to edit it directly.
15157 * Spinner objects can have edition @b disabled, in which state they will
15158 * be changed only by arrows.
15159 * Useful for contexts
15160 * where you don't want your users to interact with it writting the value.
15162 * when using special values, the user can see real value instead
15163 * of special label on edition.
15165 * It's enabled by default.
15167 * @see elm_spinner_editable_get()
15171 EAPI void elm_spinner_editable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool editable) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15174 * Get whether the spinner can be directly edited by the user or not.
15176 * @param obj The spinner object.
15177 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means edition is enabled. @c EINA_FALSE indicates
15178 * it's disabled. If @p obj is @c NULL, @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
15180 * @see elm_spinner_editable_set() for details.
15184 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_spinner_editable_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15187 * Set a special string to display in the place of the numerical value.
15189 * @param obj The spinner object.
15190 * @param value The value to be replaced.
15191 * @param label The label to be used.
15193 * It's useful for cases when a user should select an item that is
15194 * better indicated by a label than a value. For example, weekdays or months.
15198 * sp = elm_spinner_add(win);
15199 * elm_spinner_min_max_set(sp, 1, 3);
15200 * elm_spinner_special_value_add(sp, 1, "January");
15201 * elm_spinner_special_value_add(sp, 2, "February");
15202 * elm_spinner_special_value_add(sp, 3, "March");
15203 * evas_object_show(sp);
15208 EAPI void elm_spinner_special_value_add(Evas_Object *obj, double value, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15211 * Set the interval on time updates for an user mouse button hold
15212 * on spinner widgets' arrows.
15214 * @param obj The spinner object.
15215 * @param interval The (first) interval value in seconds.
15217 * This interval value is @b decreased while the user holds the
15218 * mouse pointer either incrementing or decrementing spinner's value.
15220 * This helps the user to get to a given value distant from the
15221 * current one easier/faster, as it will start to change quicker and
15222 * quicker on mouse button holds.
15224 * The calculation for the next change interval value, starting from
15225 * the one set with this call, is the previous interval divided by
15226 * @c 1.05, so it decreases a little bit.
15228 * The default starting interval value for automatic changes is
15231 * @see elm_spinner_interval_get()
15235 EAPI void elm_spinner_interval_set(Evas_Object *obj, double interval) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15238 * Get the interval on time updates for an user mouse button hold
15239 * on spinner widgets' arrows.
15241 * @param obj The spinner object.
15242 * @return The (first) interval value, in seconds, set on it.
15244 * @see elm_spinner_interval_set() for more details.
15248 EAPI double elm_spinner_interval_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15255 * @defgroup Index Index
15257 * @image html img/widget/index/preview-00.png
15259 * An index widget gives you an index for fast access to whichever
15260 * group of other UI items one might have. It's a list of text
15261 * items (usually letters, for alphabetically ordered access).
15263 * Index widgets are by default hidden and just appear when the
15264 * user clicks over it's reserved area in the canvas. In its
15265 * default theme, it's an area one @ref Fingers "finger" wide on
15266 * the right side of the index widget's container.
15268 * When items on the index are selected, smart callbacks get
15269 * called, so that its user can make other container objects to
15270 * show a given area or child object depending on the index item
15271 * selected. You'd probably be using an index together with @ref
15272 * List "lists", @ref Genlist "generic lists" or @ref Gengrid
15275 * Smart events one can add callbacks for are:
15276 * - @c "changed" - When the selected index item changes. @c
15277 * event_info is the selected item's data pointer.
15278 * - @c "delay,changed" - When the selected index item changes, but
15279 * after a small idling period. @c event_info is the selected
15280 * item's data pointer.
15281 * - @c "selected" - When the user releases a mouse button and
15282 * selects an item. @c event_info is the selected item's data
15284 * - @c "level,up" - when the user moves a finger from the first
15285 * level to the second level
15286 * - @c "level,down" - when the user moves a finger from the second
15287 * level to the first level
15289 * The @c "delay,changed" event is so that it'll wait a small time
15290 * before actually reporting those events and, moreover, just the
15291 * last event happening on those time frames will actually be
15294 * Here are some examples on its usage:
15295 * @li @ref index_example_01
15296 * @li @ref index_example_02
15300 * @addtogroup Index
15304 typedef struct _Elm_Index_Item Elm_Index_Item; /**< Opaque handle for items of Elementary index widgets */
15307 * Add a new index widget to the given parent Elementary
15308 * (container) object
15310 * @param parent The parent object
15311 * @return a new index widget handle or @c NULL, on errors
15313 * This function inserts a new index widget on the canvas.
15317 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_index_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15320 * Set whether a given index widget is or not visible,
15323 * @param obj The index object
15324 * @param active @c EINA_TRUE to show it, @c EINA_FALSE to hide it
15326 * Not to be confused with visible as in @c evas_object_show() --
15327 * visible with regard to the widget's auto hiding feature.
15329 * @see elm_index_active_get()
15333 EAPI void elm_index_active_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool active) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15336 * Get whether a given index widget is currently visible or not.
15338 * @param obj The index object
15339 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if it's shown, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
15341 * @see elm_index_active_set() for more details
15345 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_index_active_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15348 * Set the items level for a given index widget.
15350 * @param obj The index object.
15351 * @param level @c 0 or @c 1, the currently implemented levels.
15353 * @see elm_index_item_level_get()
15357 EAPI void elm_index_item_level_set(Evas_Object *obj, int level) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15360 * Get the items level set for a given index widget.
15362 * @param obj The index object.
15363 * @return @c 0 or @c 1, which are the levels @p obj might be at.
15365 * @see elm_index_item_level_set() for more information
15369 EAPI int elm_index_item_level_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15372 * Returns the last selected item's data, for a given index widget.
15374 * @param obj The index object.
15375 * @return The item @b data associated to the last selected item on
15376 * @p obj (or @c NULL, on errors).
15378 * @warning The returned value is @b not an #Elm_Index_Item item
15379 * handle, but the data associated to it (see the @c item parameter
15380 * in elm_index_item_append(), as an example).
15384 EAPI void *elm_index_item_selected_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int level) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15387 * Append a new item on a given index widget.
15389 * @param obj The index object.
15390 * @param letter Letter under which the item should be indexed
15391 * @param item The item data to set for the index's item
15393 * Despite the most common usage of the @p letter argument is for
15394 * single char strings, one could use arbitrary strings as index
15397 * @c item will be the pointer returned back on @c "changed", @c
15398 * "delay,changed" and @c "selected" smart events.
15402 EAPI void elm_index_item_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *letter, const void *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15405 * Prepend a new item on a given index widget.
15407 * @param obj The index object.
15408 * @param letter Letter under which the item should be indexed
15409 * @param item The item data to set for the index's item
15411 * Despite the most common usage of the @p letter argument is for
15412 * single char strings, one could use arbitrary strings as index
15415 * @c item will be the pointer returned back on @c "changed", @c
15416 * "delay,changed" and @c "selected" smart events.
15420 EAPI void elm_index_item_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, const char *letter, const void *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15423 * Append a new item, on a given index widget, <b>after the item
15424 * having @p relative as data</b>.
15426 * @param obj The index object.
15427 * @param letter Letter under which the item should be indexed
15428 * @param item The item data to set for the index's item
15429 * @param relative The item data of the index item to be the
15430 * predecessor of this new one
15432 * Despite the most common usage of the @p letter argument is for
15433 * single char strings, one could use arbitrary strings as index
15436 * @c item will be the pointer returned back on @c "changed", @c
15437 * "delay,changed" and @c "selected" smart events.
15439 * @note If @p relative is @c NULL or if it's not found to be data
15440 * set on any previous item on @p obj, this function will behave as
15441 * elm_index_item_append().
15445 EAPI void elm_index_item_append_relative(Evas_Object *obj, const char *letter, const void *item, const void *relative) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15448 * Prepend a new item, on a given index widget, <b>after the item
15449 * having @p relative as data</b>.
15451 * @param obj The index object.
15452 * @param letter Letter under which the item should be indexed
15453 * @param item The item data to set for the index's item
15454 * @param relative The item data of the index item to be the
15455 * successor of this new one
15457 * Despite the most common usage of the @p letter argument is for
15458 * single char strings, one could use arbitrary strings as index
15461 * @c item will be the pointer returned back on @c "changed", @c
15462 * "delay,changed" and @c "selected" smart events.
15464 * @note If @p relative is @c NULL or if it's not found to be data
15465 * set on any previous item on @p obj, this function will behave as
15466 * elm_index_item_prepend().
15470 EAPI void elm_index_item_prepend_relative(Evas_Object *obj, const char *letter, const void *item, const void *relative) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15473 * Insert a new item into the given index widget, using @p cmp_func
15474 * function to sort items (by item handles).
15476 * @param obj The index object.
15477 * @param letter Letter under which the item should be indexed
15478 * @param item The item data to set for the index's item
15479 * @param cmp_func The comparing function to be used to sort index
15480 * items <b>by #Elm_Index_Item item handles</b>
15481 * @param cmp_data_func A @b fallback function to be called for the
15482 * sorting of index items <b>by item data</b>). It will be used
15483 * when @p cmp_func returns @c 0 (equality), which means an index
15484 * item with provided item data already exists. To decide which
15485 * data item should be pointed to by the index item in question, @p
15486 * cmp_data_func will be used. If @p cmp_data_func returns a
15487 * non-negative value, the previous index item data will be
15488 * replaced by the given @p item pointer. If the previous data need
15489 * to be freed, it should be done by the @p cmp_data_func function,
15490 * because all references to it will be lost. If this function is
15491 * not provided (@c NULL is given), index items will be @b
15492 * duplicated, if @p cmp_func returns @c 0.
15494 * Despite the most common usage of the @p letter argument is for
15495 * single char strings, one could use arbitrary strings as index
15498 * @c item will be the pointer returned back on @c "changed", @c
15499 * "delay,changed" and @c "selected" smart events.
15503 EAPI void elm_index_item_sorted_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const char *letter, const void *item, Eina_Compare_Cb cmp_func, Eina_Compare_Cb cmp_data_func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15506 * Remove an item from a given index widget, <b>to be referenced by
15507 * it's data value</b>.
15509 * @param obj The index object
15510 * @param item The item's data pointer for the item to be removed
15513 * If a deletion callback is set, via elm_index_item_del_cb_set(),
15514 * that callback function will be called by this one.
15516 * @warning The item to be removed from @p obj will be found via
15517 * its item data pointer, and not by an #Elm_Index_Item handle.
15521 EAPI void elm_index_item_del(Evas_Object *obj, const void *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15524 * Find a given index widget's item, <b>using item data</b>.
15526 * @param obj The index object
15527 * @param item The item data pointed to by the desired index item
15528 * @return The index item handle, if found, or @c NULL otherwise
15532 EAPI Elm_Index_Item *elm_index_item_find(Evas_Object *obj, const void *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15535 * Removes @b all items from a given index widget.
15537 * @param obj The index object.
15539 * If deletion callbacks are set, via elm_index_item_del_cb_set(),
15540 * that callback function will be called for each item in @p obj.
15544 EAPI void elm_index_item_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15547 * Go to a given items level on a index widget
15549 * @param obj The index object
15550 * @param level The index level (one of @c 0 or @c 1)
15554 EAPI void elm_index_item_go(Evas_Object *obj, int level) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15557 * Return the data associated with a given index widget item
15559 * @param it The index widget item handle
15560 * @return The data associated with @p it
15562 * @see elm_index_item_data_set()
15566 EAPI void *elm_index_item_data_get(const Elm_Index_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15569 * Set the data associated with a given index widget item
15571 * @param it The index widget item handle
15572 * @param data The new data pointer to set to @p it
15574 * This sets new item data on @p it.
15576 * @warning The old data pointer won't be touched by this function, so
15577 * the user had better to free that old data himself/herself.
15581 EAPI void elm_index_item_data_set(Elm_Index_Item *it, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15584 * Set the function to be called when a given index widget item is freed.
15586 * @param it The item to set the callback on
15587 * @param func The function to call on the item's deletion
15589 * When called, @p func will have both @c data and @c event_info
15590 * arguments with the @p it item's data value and, naturally, the
15591 * @c obj argument with a handle to the parent index widget.
15595 EAPI void elm_index_item_del_cb_set(Elm_Index_Item *it, Evas_Smart_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15598 * Get the letter (string) set on a given index widget item.
15600 * @param it The index item handle
15601 * @return The letter string set on @p it
15605 EAPI const char *elm_index_item_letter_get(const Elm_Index_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15612 * @defgroup Photocam Photocam
15614 * @image html img/widget/photocam/preview-00.png
15615 * @image latex img/widget/photocam/preview-00.eps
15617 * This is a widget specifically for displaying high-resolution digital
15618 * camera photos giving speedy feedback (fast load), low memory footprint
15619 * and zooming and panning as well as fitting logic. It is entirely focused
15620 * on jpeg images, and takes advantage of properties of the jpeg format (via
15621 * evas loader features in the jpeg loader).
15623 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
15624 * @li "clicked" - This is called when a user has clicked the photo without
15626 * @li "press" - This is called when a user has pressed down on the photo.
15627 * @li "longpressed" - This is called when a user has pressed down on the
15628 * photo for a long time without dragging around.
15629 * @li "clicked,double" - This is called when a user has double-clicked the
15631 * @li "load" - Photo load begins.
15632 * @li "loaded" - This is called when the image file load is complete for the
15633 * first view (low resolution blurry version).
15634 * @li "load,detail" - Photo detailed data load begins.
15635 * @li "loaded,detail" - This is called when the image file load is complete
15636 * for the detailed image data (full resolution needed).
15637 * @li "zoom,start" - Zoom animation started.
15638 * @li "zoom,stop" - Zoom animation stopped.
15639 * @li "zoom,change" - Zoom changed when using an auto zoom mode.
15640 * @li "scroll" - the content has been scrolled (moved)
15641 * @li "scroll,anim,start" - scrolling animation has started
15642 * @li "scroll,anim,stop" - scrolling animation has stopped
15643 * @li "scroll,drag,start" - dragging the contents around has started
15644 * @li "scroll,drag,stop" - dragging the contents around has stopped
15646 * @ref tutorial_photocam shows the API in action.
15650 * @brief Types of zoom available.
15652 typedef enum _Elm_Photocam_Zoom_Mode
15654 ELM_PHOTOCAM_ZOOM_MODE_MANUAL = 0, /**< Zoom controled normally by elm_photocam_zoom_set */
15655 ELM_PHOTOCAM_ZOOM_MODE_AUTO_FIT, /**< Zoom until photo fits in photocam */
15656 ELM_PHOTOCAM_ZOOM_MODE_AUTO_FILL, /**< Zoom until photo fills photocam */
15657 ELM_PHOTOCAM_ZOOM_MODE_LAST
15658 } Elm_Photocam_Zoom_Mode;
15660 * @brief Add a new Photocam object
15662 * @param parent The parent object
15663 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
15665 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_photocam_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15667 * @brief Set the photo file to be shown
15669 * @param obj The photocam object
15670 * @param file The photo file
15671 * @return The return error (see EVAS_LOAD_ERROR_NONE, EVAS_LOAD_ERROR_GENERIC etc.)
15673 * This sets (and shows) the specified file (with a relative or absolute
15674 * path) and will return a load error (same error that
15675 * evas_object_image_load_error_get() will return). The image will change and
15676 * adjust its size at this point and begin a background load process for this
15677 * photo that at some time in the future will be displayed at the full
15680 EAPI Evas_Load_Error elm_photocam_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15682 * @brief Returns the path of the current image file
15684 * @param obj The photocam object
15685 * @return Returns the path
15687 * @see elm_photocam_file_set()
15689 EAPI const char *elm_photocam_file_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15691 * @brief Set the zoom level of the photo
15693 * @param obj The photocam object
15694 * @param zoom The zoom level to set
15696 * This sets the zoom level. 1 will be 1:1 pixel for pixel. 2 will be 2:1
15697 * (that is 2x2 photo pixels will display as 1 on-screen pixel). 4:1 will be
15698 * 4x4 photo pixels as 1 screen pixel, and so on. The @p zoom parameter must
15699 * be greater than 0. It is usggested to stick to powers of 2. (1, 2, 4, 8,
15702 EAPI void elm_photocam_zoom_set(Evas_Object *obj, double zoom) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15704 * @brief Get the zoom level of the photo
15706 * @param obj The photocam object
15707 * @return The current zoom level
15709 * This returns the current zoom level of the photocam object. Note that if
15710 * you set the fill mode to other than ELM_PHOTOCAM_ZOOM_MODE_MANUAL
15711 * (which is the default), the zoom level may be changed at any time by the
15712 * photocam object itself to account for photo size and photocam viewpoer
15715 * @see elm_photocam_zoom_set()
15716 * @see elm_photocam_zoom_mode_set()
15718 EAPI double elm_photocam_zoom_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15720 * @brief Set the zoom mode
15722 * @param obj The photocam object
15723 * @param mode The desired mode
15725 * This sets the zoom mode to manual or one of several automatic levels.
15726 * Manual (ELM_PHOTOCAM_ZOOM_MODE_MANUAL) means that zoom is set manually by
15727 * elm_photocam_zoom_set() and will stay at that level until changed by code
15728 * or until zoom mode is changed. This is the default mode. The Automatic
15729 * modes will allow the photocam object to automatically adjust zoom mode
15730 * based on properties. ELM_PHOTOCAM_ZOOM_MODE_AUTO_FIT) will adjust zoom so
15731 * the photo fits EXACTLY inside the scroll frame with no pixels outside this
15732 * area. ELM_PHOTOCAM_ZOOM_MODE_AUTO_FILL will be similar but ensure no
15733 * pixels within the frame are left unfilled.
15735 EAPI void elm_photocam_zoom_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Photocam_Zoom_Mode mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15737 * @brief Get the zoom mode
15739 * @param obj The photocam object
15740 * @return The current zoom mode
15742 * This gets the current zoom mode of the photocam object.
15744 * @see elm_photocam_zoom_mode_set()
15746 EAPI Elm_Photocam_Zoom_Mode elm_photocam_zoom_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15748 * @brief Get the current image pixel width and height
15750 * @param obj The photocam object
15751 * @param w A pointer to the width return
15752 * @param h A pointer to the height return
15754 * This gets the current photo pixel width and height (for the original).
15755 * The size will be returned in the integers @p w and @p h that are pointed
15758 EAPI void elm_photocam_image_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *w, int *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15760 * @brief Get the area of the image that is currently shown
15763 * @param x A pointer to the X-coordinate of region
15764 * @param y A pointer to the Y-coordinate of region
15765 * @param w A pointer to the width
15766 * @param h A pointer to the height
15768 * @see elm_photocam_image_region_show()
15769 * @see elm_photocam_image_region_bring_in()
15771 EAPI void elm_photocam_region_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *x, int *y, int *w, int *h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15773 * @brief Set the viewed portion of the image
15775 * @param obj The photocam object
15776 * @param x X-coordinate of region in image original pixels
15777 * @param y Y-coordinate of region in image original pixels
15778 * @param w Width of region in image original pixels
15779 * @param h Height of region in image original pixels
15781 * This shows the region of the image without using animation.
15783 EAPI void elm_photocam_image_region_show(Evas_Object *obj, int x, int y, int w, int h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15785 * @brief Bring in the viewed portion of the image
15787 * @param obj The photocam object
15788 * @param x X-coordinate of region in image original pixels
15789 * @param y Y-coordinate of region in image original pixels
15790 * @param w Width of region in image original pixels
15791 * @param h Height of region in image original pixels
15793 * This shows the region of the image using animation.
15795 EAPI void elm_photocam_image_region_bring_in(Evas_Object *obj, int x, int y, int w, int h) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15797 * @brief Set the paused state for photocam
15799 * @param obj The photocam object
15800 * @param paused The pause state to set
15802 * This sets the paused state to on(EINA_TRUE) or off (EINA_FALSE) for
15803 * photocam. The default is off. This will stop zooming using animation on
15804 * zoom levels changes and change instantly. This will stop any existing
15805 * animations that are running.
15807 EAPI void elm_photocam_paused_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool paused) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15809 * @brief Get the paused state for photocam
15811 * @param obj The photocam object
15812 * @return The current paused state
15814 * This gets the current paused state for the photocam object.
15816 * @see elm_photocam_paused_set()
15818 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_photocam_paused_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15820 * @brief Get the internal low-res image used for photocam
15822 * @param obj The photocam object
15823 * @return The internal image object handle, or NULL if none exists
15825 * This gets the internal image object inside photocam. Do not modify it. It
15826 * is for inspection only, and hooking callbacks to. Nothing else. It may be
15827 * deleted at any time as well.
15829 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_photocam_internal_image_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15831 * @brief Set the photocam scrolling bouncing.
15833 * @param obj The photocam object
15834 * @param h_bounce bouncing for horizontal
15835 * @param v_bounce bouncing for vertical
15837 EAPI void elm_photocam_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15839 * @brief Get the photocam scrolling bouncing.
15841 * @param obj The photocam object
15842 * @param h_bounce bouncing for horizontal
15843 * @param v_bounce bouncing for vertical
15845 * @see elm_photocam_bounce_set()
15847 EAPI void elm_photocam_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15853 typedef enum _Elm_Map_Zoom_Mode
15855 ELM_MAP_ZOOM_MODE_MANUAL,
15856 ELM_MAP_ZOOM_MODE_AUTO_FIT,
15857 ELM_MAP_ZOOM_MODE_AUTO_FILL,
15858 ELM_MAP_ZOOM_MODE_LAST
15859 } Elm_Map_Zoom_Mode;
15861 typedef enum _Elm_Map_Route_Sources
15863 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_SOURCE_YOURS,
15864 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_SOURCE_MONAV,
15865 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_SOURCE_ORS,
15866 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_SOURCE_LAST
15867 } Elm_Map_Route_Sources;
15869 typedef enum _Elm_Map_Name_Sources
15871 ELM_MAP_NAME_SOURCE_NOMINATIM,
15872 ELM_MAP_NAME_SOURCE_LAST
15873 } Elm_Map_Name_Sources;
15875 typedef enum _Elm_Map_Route_Type
15877 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_TYPE_MOTOCAR,
15878 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_TYPE_BICYCLE,
15879 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_TYPE_FOOT,
15880 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_TYPE_LAST
15881 } Elm_Map_Route_Type;
15883 typedef enum _Elm_Map_Route_Method
15885 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_METHOD_FASTEST,
15886 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_METHOD_SHORTEST,
15887 ELM_MAP_ROUTE_METHOD_LAST
15888 } Elm_Map_Route_Method;
15890 typedef enum _Elm_Map_Name_Method
15892 ELM_MAP_NAME_METHOD_SEARCH,
15893 ELM_MAP_NAME_METHOD_REVERSE,
15894 ELM_MAP_NAME_METHOD_LAST
15895 } Elm_Map_Name_Method;
15897 typedef struct _Elm_Map_Marker Elm_Map_Marker;
15898 typedef struct _Elm_Map_Marker_Class Elm_Map_Marker_Class;
15899 typedef struct _Elm_Map_Group_Class Elm_Map_Group_Class;
15900 typedef struct _Elm_Map_Route Elm_Map_Route;
15901 typedef struct _Elm_Map_Name Elm_Map_Name;
15902 typedef struct _Elm_Map_Track Elm_Map_Track;
15904 typedef Evas_Object *(*ElmMapMarkerGetFunc) (Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Map_Marker *marker, void *data);
15905 typedef void (*ElmMapMarkerDelFunc) (Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Map_Marker *marker, void *data, Evas_Object *o);
15906 typedef Evas_Object *(*ElmMapMarkerIconGetFunc) (Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Map_Marker *marker, void *data);
15907 typedef Evas_Object *(*ElmMapGroupIconGetFunc) (Evas_Object *obj, void *data);
15909 typedef char *(*ElmMapModuleSourceFunc) (void);
15910 typedef int (*ElmMapModuleZoomMinFunc) (void);
15911 typedef int (*ElmMapModuleZoomMaxFunc) (void);
15912 typedef char *(*ElmMapModuleUrlFunc) (Evas_Object *obj, int x, int y, int zoom);
15913 typedef int (*ElmMapModuleRouteSourceFunc) (void);
15914 typedef char *(*ElmMapModuleRouteUrlFunc) (Evas_Object *obj, char *type_name, int method, double flon, double flat, double tlon, double tlat);
15915 typedef char *(*ElmMapModuleNameUrlFunc) (Evas_Object *obj, int method, char *name, double lon, double lat);
15916 typedef Eina_Bool (*ElmMapModuleGeoIntoCoordFunc) (const Evas_Object *obj, int zoom, double lon, double lat, int size, int *x, int *y);
15917 typedef Eina_Bool (*ElmMapModuleCoordIntoGeoFunc) (const Evas_Object *obj, int zoom, int x, int y, int size, double *lon, double *lat);
15919 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_map_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15920 EAPI void elm_map_zoom_set(Evas_Object *obj, int zoom) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15921 EAPI int elm_map_zoom_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15922 EAPI void elm_map_zoom_mode_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Map_Zoom_Mode mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15923 EAPI Elm_Map_Zoom_Mode elm_map_zoom_mode_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15924 EAPI void elm_map_geo_region_get(const Evas_Object *obj, double *lon, double *lat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15925 EAPI void elm_map_geo_region_bring_in(Evas_Object *obj, double lon, double lat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15926 EAPI void elm_map_geo_region_show(Evas_Object *obj, double lon, double lat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15927 EAPI void elm_map_paused_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool paused) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15928 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_map_paused_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15929 EAPI void elm_map_paused_markers_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool paused) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15930 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_map_paused_markers_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15931 EAPI void elm_map_utils_downloading_status_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *try_num, int *finish_num) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2, 3);
15932 EAPI void elm_map_utils_convert_coord_into_geo(const Evas_Object *obj, int x, int y, int size, double *lon, double *lat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 5, 6);
15933 EAPI void elm_map_utils_convert_geo_into_coord(const Evas_Object *obj, double lon, double lat, int size, int *x, int *y) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 5, 6);
15934 EAPI Elm_Map_Name *elm_map_utils_convert_coord_into_name(const Evas_Object *obj, double lon, double lat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15935 EAPI Elm_Map_Name *elm_map_utils_convert_name_into_coord(const Evas_Object *obj, char *address) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
15936 EAPI void elm_map_utils_rotate_coord(const Evas_Object *obj, const Evas_Coord x, const Evas_Coord y, const Evas_Coord cx, const Evas_Coord cy, const double degree, Evas_Coord *xx, Evas_Coord *yy) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15937 EAPI Elm_Map_Marker *elm_map_marker_add(Evas_Object *obj, double lon, double lat, Elm_Map_Marker_Class *clas, Elm_Map_Group_Class *clas_group, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 4, 5);
15938 EAPI void elm_map_max_marker_per_group_set(Evas_Object *obj, int max) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15939 EAPI void elm_map_marker_remove(Elm_Map_Marker *marker) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15940 EAPI void elm_map_marker_region_get(const Elm_Map_Marker *marker, double *lon, double *lat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15941 EAPI void elm_map_marker_bring_in(Elm_Map_Marker *marker) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15942 EAPI void elm_map_marker_show(Elm_Map_Marker *marker) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15943 EAPI void elm_map_markers_list_show(Eina_List *markers) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15944 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_map_marker_object_get(const Elm_Map_Marker *marker) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15945 EAPI void elm_map_marker_update(Elm_Map_Marker *marker) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15946 EAPI void elm_map_bubbles_close(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15947 EAPI Elm_Map_Group_Class *elm_map_group_class_new(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15948 EAPI void elm_map_group_class_style_set(Elm_Map_Group_Class *clas, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15949 EAPI void elm_map_group_class_icon_cb_set(Elm_Map_Group_Class *clas, ElmMapGroupIconGetFunc icon_get) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15950 EAPI void elm_map_group_class_data_set(Elm_Map_Group_Class *clas, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15951 EAPI void elm_map_group_class_zoom_displayed_set(Elm_Map_Group_Class *clas, int zoom) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15952 EAPI void elm_map_group_class_zoom_grouped_set(Elm_Map_Group_Class *clas, int zoom) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15953 EAPI void elm_map_group_class_hide_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Map_Group_Class *clas, Eina_Bool hide) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
15954 EAPI Elm_Map_Marker_Class *elm_map_marker_class_new(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15955 EAPI void elm_map_marker_class_style_set(Elm_Map_Marker_Class *clas, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15956 EAPI void elm_map_marker_class_icon_cb_set(Elm_Map_Marker_Class *clas, ElmMapMarkerIconGetFunc icon_get) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15957 EAPI void elm_map_marker_class_get_cb_set(Elm_Map_Marker_Class *clas, ElmMapMarkerGetFunc get) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15958 EAPI void elm_map_marker_class_del_cb_set(Elm_Map_Marker_Class *clas, ElmMapMarkerDelFunc del) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15959 EAPI const char **elm_map_source_names_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15960 EAPI void elm_map_source_name_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *source_name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15961 EAPI const char *elm_map_source_name_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15962 EAPI void elm_map_route_source_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Map_Route_Sources source) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15963 EAPI Elm_Map_Route_Sources elm_map_route_source_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15964 EAPI void elm_map_source_zoom_min_set(Evas_Object *obj, int zoom) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15965 EAPI int elm_map_source_zoom_min_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15966 EAPI void elm_map_source_zoom_max_set(Evas_Object *obj, int zoom) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15967 EAPI int elm_map_source_zoom_max_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15968 EAPI void elm_map_user_agent_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *user_agent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
15969 EAPI const char *elm_map_user_agent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15970 EAPI Elm_Map_Route *elm_map_route_add(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Map_Route_Type type, Elm_Map_Route_Method method, double flon, double flat, double tlon, double tlat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15971 EAPI void elm_map_route_remove(Elm_Map_Route *route) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15972 EAPI void elm_map_route_color_set(Elm_Map_Route *route, int r, int g , int b, int a) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15973 EAPI void elm_map_route_color_get(const Elm_Map_Route *route, int *r, int *g , int *b, int *a) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15974 EAPI double elm_map_route_distance_get(const Elm_Map_Route *route) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15975 EAPI const char *elm_map_route_node_get(const Elm_Map_Route *route) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15976 EAPI const char *elm_map_route_waypoint_get(const Elm_Map_Route *route) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15977 EAPI const char *elm_map_name_address_get(const Elm_Map_Name *name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15978 EAPI void elm_map_name_region_get(const Elm_Map_Name *name, double *lon, double *lat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15979 EAPI void elm_map_name_remove(Elm_Map_Name *name) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15980 EAPI void elm_map_rotate_set(Evas_Object *obj, double degree, Evas_Coord cx, Evas_Coord cy) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15981 EAPI void elm_map_rotate_get(const Evas_Object *obj, double *degree, Evas_Coord *cx, Evas_Coord *cy) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2, 3, 4);
15982 EAPI void elm_map_wheel_disabled_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15983 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_map_wheel_disabled_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15985 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_map_track_add(Evas_Object *obj, EMap_Route *emap) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15987 EAPI void elm_map_track_remove(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *route) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
15989 /* smart callbacks called:
15990 * "clicked" - when image clicked
15991 * "press" - when mouse/finger held down initially on image
15992 * "longpressed" - when mouse/finger held for long time on image
15993 * "clicked,double" - when mouse/finger double-clicked
15994 * "load,details" - when detailed image load begins
15995 * "loaded,details" - when detailed image load done
15996 * "zoom,start" - when zooming started
15997 * "zoom,stop" - when zooming stopped
15998 * "zoom,change" - when auto zoom mode changed zoom level
15999 * "scroll - the content has been scrolled (moved)
16000 * "scroll,anim,start" - scrolling animation has started
16001 * "scroll,anim,stop" - scrolling animation has stopped
16002 * "scroll,drag,start" - dragging the contents around has started
16003 * "scroll,drag,stop" - dragging the contents around has stopped
16007 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_route_add(Evas_Object *parent);
16009 EAPI void elm_route_emap_set(Evas_Object *obj, EMap_Route *emap);
16011 EAPI double elm_route_lon_min_get(Evas_Object *obj);
16012 EAPI double elm_route_lat_min_get(Evas_Object *obj);
16013 EAPI double elm_route_lon_max_get(Evas_Object *obj);
16014 EAPI double elm_route_lat_max_get(Evas_Object *obj);
16018 * @defgroup Panel Panel
16020 * @image html img/widget/panel/preview-00.png
16021 * @image latex img/widget/panel/preview-00.eps
16023 * @brief A panel is a type of animated container that contains subobjects.
16024 * It can be expanded or contracted by clicking the button on it's edge.
16026 * Orientations are as follows:
16027 * @li ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_TOP
16028 * @li ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_LEFT
16029 * @li ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_RIGHT
16031 * @ref tutorial_panel shows one way to use this widget.
16034 typedef enum _Elm_Panel_Orient
16036 ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_TOP, /**< Panel (dis)appears from the top */
16037 ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_BOTTOM, /**< Not implemented */
16038 ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_LEFT, /**< Panel (dis)appears from the left */
16039 ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_RIGHT, /**< Panel (dis)appears from the right */
16040 } Elm_Panel_Orient;
16042 * @brief Adds a panel object
16044 * @param parent The parent object
16046 * @return The panel object, or NULL on failure
16048 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_panel_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16050 * @brief Sets the orientation of the panel
16052 * @param parent The parent object
16053 * @param orient The panel orientation. Can be one of the following:
16054 * @li ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_TOP
16055 * @li ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_LEFT
16056 * @li ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_RIGHT
16058 * Sets from where the panel will (dis)appear.
16060 EAPI void elm_panel_orient_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Panel_Orient orient) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16062 * @brief Get the orientation of the panel.
16064 * @param obj The panel object
16065 * @return The Elm_Panel_Orient, or ELM_PANEL_ORIENT_LEFT on failure.
16067 EAPI Elm_Panel_Orient elm_panel_orient_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16069 * @brief Set the content of the panel.
16071 * @param obj The panel object
16072 * @param content The panel content
16074 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
16075 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
16076 * elm_panel_content_unset() function.
16078 EAPI void elm_panel_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16080 * @brief Get the content of the panel.
16082 * @param obj The panel object
16083 * @return The content that is being used
16085 * Return the content object which is set for this widget.
16087 * @see elm_panel_content_set()
16089 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_panel_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16091 * @brief Unset the content of the panel.
16093 * @param obj The panel object
16094 * @return The content that was being used
16096 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this widget.
16098 * @see elm_panel_content_set()
16100 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_panel_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16102 * @brief Set the state of the panel.
16104 * @param obj The panel object
16105 * @param hidden If true, the panel will run the animation to contract
16107 EAPI void elm_panel_hidden_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool hidden) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16109 * @brief Get the state of the panel.
16111 * @param obj The panel object
16112 * @param hidden If true, the panel is in the "hide" state
16114 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_panel_hidden_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16116 * @brief Toggle the hidden state of the panel from code
16118 * @param obj The panel object
16120 EAPI void elm_panel_toggle(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16126 * @defgroup Panes Panes
16127 * @ingroup Elementary
16129 * @image html img/widget/panes/preview-00.png
16130 * @image latex img/widget/panes/preview-00.eps width=\textwidth
16132 * @image html img/panes.png
16133 * @image latex img/panes.eps width=\textwidth
16135 * The panes adds a dragable bar between two contents. When dragged
16136 * this bar will resize contents size.
16138 * Panes can be displayed vertically or horizontally, and contents
16139 * size proportion can be customized (homogeneous by default).
16141 * Smart callbacks one can listen to:
16142 * - "press" - The panes has been pressed (button wasn't released yet).
16143 * - "unpressed" - The panes was released after being pressed.
16144 * - "clicked" - The panes has been clicked>
16145 * - "clicked,double" - The panes has been double clicked
16147 * Available styles for it:
16150 * Here is an example on its usage:
16151 * @li @ref panes_example
16155 * @addtogroup Panes
16160 * Add a new panes widget to the given parent Elementary
16161 * (container) object.
16163 * @param parent The parent object.
16164 * @return a new panes widget handle or @c NULL, on errors.
16166 * This function inserts a new panes widget on the canvas.
16170 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_panes_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16173 * Set the left content of the panes widget.
16175 * @param obj The panes object.
16176 * @param content The new left content object.
16178 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
16179 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
16180 * elm_panes_content_left_unset() function.
16182 * If panes is displayed vertically, left content will be displayed at
16185 * @see elm_panes_content_left_get()
16186 * @see elm_panes_content_right_set() to set content on the other side.
16190 EAPI void elm_panes_content_left_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16193 * Set the right content of the panes widget.
16195 * @param obj The panes object.
16196 * @param content The new right content object.
16198 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
16199 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
16200 * elm_panes_content_right_unset() function.
16202 * If panes is displayed vertically, left content will be displayed at
16205 * @see elm_panes_content_right_get()
16206 * @see elm_panes_content_left_set() to set content on the other side.
16210 EAPI void elm_panes_content_right_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16213 * Get the left content of the panes.
16215 * @param obj The panes object.
16216 * @return The left content object that is being used.
16218 * Return the left content object which is set for this widget.
16220 * @see elm_panes_content_left_set() for details.
16224 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_panes_content_left_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16227 * Get the right content of the panes.
16229 * @param obj The panes object
16230 * @return The right content object that is being used
16232 * Return the right content object which is set for this widget.
16234 * @see elm_panes_content_right_set() for details.
16238 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_panes_content_right_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16241 * Unset the left content used for the panes.
16243 * @param obj The panes object.
16244 * @return The left content object that was being used.
16246 * Unparent and return the left content object which was set for this widget.
16248 * @see elm_panes_content_left_set() for details.
16249 * @see elm_panes_content_left_get().
16253 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_panes_content_left_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16256 * Unset the right content used for the panes..
16258 * @param obj The panes object.
16259 * @return The right content object that was being used.
16261 * Unparent and return the right content object which was set for this
16264 * @see elm_panes_content_right_set() for details.
16265 * @see elm_panes_content_right_get().
16269 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_panes_content_right_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16272 * Get the size proportion of panes widget's left side.
16274 * @param obj The panes object.
16275 * @return float value between 0.0 and 1.0 representing size proportion
16278 * @see elm_panes_content_left_size_set() for more details.
16282 EAPI double elm_panes_content_left_size_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16285 * Set the size proportion of panes widget's left side.
16287 * @param obj The panes object.
16288 * @param size Value between 0.0 and 1.0 representing size proportion
16291 * By default it's homogeneous, i.e., both sides have the same size.
16293 * If something different is required, it can be set with this function.
16294 * For example, if the left content should be displayed over
16295 * 75% of the panes size, @p size should be passed as @c 0.75.
16296 * This way, right content will be resized to 25% of panes size.
16298 * If displayed vertically, left content is displayed at top, and
16299 * right content at bottom.
16301 * @note This proportion will change when user drags the panes bar.
16303 * @see elm_panes_content_left_size_get()
16307 EAPI void elm_panes_content_left_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, double size) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16310 * Set the orientation of a given panes widget.
16312 * @param obj The panes object.
16313 * @param horizontal Use @c EINA_TRUE to make @p obj to be
16314 * @b horizontal, @c EINA_FALSE to make it @b vertical.
16316 * Use this function to change how your panes is to be
16317 * disposed: vertically or horizontally.
16319 * By default it's displayed horizontally.
16321 * @see elm_panes_horizontal_get()
16325 EAPI void elm_panes_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool horizontal) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16328 * Retrieve the orientation of a given panes widget.
16330 * @param obj The panes object.
16331 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if @p obj is set to be @b horizontal,
16332 * @c EINA_FALSE if it's @b vertical (and on errors).
16334 * @see elm_panes_horizontal_set() for more details.
16338 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_panes_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16345 * @defgroup Flip Flip
16347 * @image html img/widget/flip/preview-00.png
16348 * @image latex img/widget/flip/preview-00.eps
16350 * This widget holds 2 content objects(Evas_Object): one on the front and one
16351 * on the back. It allows you to flip from front to back and vice-versa using
16352 * various animations.
16354 * If either the front or back contents are not set the flip will treat that
16355 * as transparent. So if you wore to set the front content but not the back,
16356 * and then call elm_flip_go() you would see whatever is below the flip.
16358 * For a list of supported animations see elm_flip_go().
16360 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
16361 * "animate,begin" - when a flip animation was started
16362 * "animate,done" - when a flip animation is finished
16364 * @ref tutorial_flip show how to use most of the API.
16368 typedef enum _Elm_Flip_Mode
16370 ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_Y_CENTER_AXIS,
16371 ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_X_CENTER_AXIS,
16372 ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_XZ_CENTER_AXIS,
16373 ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_YZ_CENTER_AXIS,
16374 ELM_FLIP_CUBE_LEFT,
16375 ELM_FLIP_CUBE_RIGHT,
16377 ELM_FLIP_CUBE_DOWN,
16378 ELM_FLIP_PAGE_LEFT,
16379 ELM_FLIP_PAGE_RIGHT,
16383 typedef enum _Elm_Flip_Interaction
16385 ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_NONE,
16386 ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_ROTATE,
16387 ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_CUBE,
16388 ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_PAGE
16389 } Elm_Flip_Interaction;
16390 typedef enum _Elm_Flip_Direction
16392 ELM_FLIP_DIRECTION_UP, /**< Allows interaction with the top of the widget */
16393 ELM_FLIP_DIRECTION_DOWN, /**< Allows interaction with the bottom of the widget */
16394 ELM_FLIP_DIRECTION_LEFT, /**< Allows interaction with the left portion of the widget */
16395 ELM_FLIP_DIRECTION_RIGHT /**< Allows interaction with the right portion of the widget */
16396 } Elm_Flip_Direction;
16398 * @brief Add a new flip to the parent
16400 * @param parent The parent object
16401 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
16403 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_flip_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16405 * @brief Set the front content of the flip widget.
16407 * @param obj The flip object
16408 * @param content The new front content object
16410 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
16411 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
16412 * elm_flip_content_front_unset() function.
16414 EAPI void elm_flip_content_front_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16416 * @brief Set the back content of the flip widget.
16418 * @param obj The flip object
16419 * @param content The new back content object
16421 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
16422 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
16423 * elm_flip_content_back_unset() function.
16425 EAPI void elm_flip_content_back_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16427 * @brief Get the front content used for the flip
16429 * @param obj The flip object
16430 * @return The front content object that is being used
16432 * Return the front content object which is set for this widget.
16434 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_flip_content_front_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16436 * @brief Get the back content used for the flip
16438 * @param obj The flip object
16439 * @return The back content object that is being used
16441 * Return the back content object which is set for this widget.
16443 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_flip_content_back_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16445 * @brief Unset the front content used for the flip
16447 * @param obj The flip object
16448 * @return The front content object that was being used
16450 * Unparent and return the front content object which was set for this widget.
16452 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_flip_content_front_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16454 * @brief Unset the back content used for the flip
16456 * @param obj The flip object
16457 * @return The back content object that was being used
16459 * Unparent and return the back content object which was set for this widget.
16461 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_flip_content_back_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16463 * @brief Get flip front visibility state
16465 * @param obj The flip objct
16466 * @return EINA_TRUE if front front is showing, EINA_FALSE if the back is
16469 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_flip_front_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16471 * @brief Set flip perspective
16473 * @param obj The flip object
16474 * @param foc The coordinate to set the focus on
16475 * @param x The X coordinate
16476 * @param y The Y coordinate
16478 * @warning This function currently does nothing.
16480 EAPI void elm_flip_perspective_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord foc, Evas_Coord x, Evas_Coord y) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16482 * @brief Runs the flip animation
16484 * @param obj The flip object
16485 * @param mode The mode type
16487 * Flips the front and back contents using the @p mode animation. This
16488 * efectively hides the currently visible content and shows the hidden one.
16490 * There a number of possible animations to use for the flipping:
16491 * @li ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_X_CENTER_AXIS - Rotate the currently visible content
16492 * around a horizontal axis in the middle of its height, the other content
16493 * is shown as the other side of the flip.
16494 * @li ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_Y_CENTER_AXIS - Rotate the currently visible content
16495 * around a vertical axis in the middle of its width, the other content is
16496 * shown as the other side of the flip.
16497 * @li ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_XZ_CENTER_AXIS - Rotate the currently visible content
16498 * around a diagonal axis in the middle of its width, the other content is
16499 * shown as the other side of the flip.
16500 * @li ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_YZ_CENTER_AXIS - Rotate the currently visible content
16501 * around a diagonal axis in the middle of its height, the other content is
16502 * shown as the other side of the flip.
16503 * @li ELM_FLIP_CUBE_LEFT - Rotate the currently visible content to the left
16504 * as if the flip was a cube, the other content is show as the right face of
16506 * @li ELM_FLIP_CUBE_RIGHT - Rotate the currently visible content to the
16507 * right as if the flip was a cube, the other content is show as the left
16508 * face of the cube.
16509 * @li ELM_FLIP_CUBE_UP - Rotate the currently visible content up as if the
16510 * flip was a cube, the other content is show as the bottom face of the cube.
16511 * @li ELM_FLIP_CUBE_DOWN - Rotate the currently visible content down as if
16512 * the flip was a cube, the other content is show as the upper face of the
16514 * @li ELM_FLIP_PAGE_LEFT - Move the currently visible content to the left as
16515 * if the flip was a book, the other content is shown as the page below that.
16516 * @li ELM_FLIP_PAGE_RIGHT - Move the currently visible content to the right
16517 * as if the flip was a book, the other content is shown as the page below
16519 * @li ELM_FLIP_PAGE_UP - Move the currently visible content up as if the
16520 * flip was a book, the other content is shown as the page below that.
16521 * @li ELM_FLIP_PAGE_DOWN - Move the currently visible content down as if the
16522 * flip was a book, the other content is shown as the page below that.
16524 EAPI void elm_flip_go(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Flip_Mode mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16526 * @brief Set the interactive flip mode
16528 * @param obj The flip object
16529 * @param mode The interactive flip mode to use
16531 * This sets if the flip should be interactive (allow user to click and
16532 * drag a side of the flip to reveal the back page and cause it to flip).
16533 * By default a flip is not interactive. You may also need to set which
16534 * sides of the flip are "active" for flipping and how much space they use
16535 * (a minimum of a finger size) with elm_flip_interacton_direction_enabled_set()
16536 * and elm_flip_interacton_direction_hitsize_set()
16538 * The four avilable mode of interaction are:
16539 * @li ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_NONE - No interaction is allowed
16540 * @li ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_ROTATE - Interaction will cause rotate animation
16541 * @li ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_CUBE - Interaction will cause cube animation
16542 * @li ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_PAGE - Interaction will cause page animation
16544 * @note ELM_FLIP_INTERACTION_ROTATE won't cause
16545 * ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_XZ_CENTER_AXIS or ELM_FLIP_ROTATE_YZ_CENTER_AXIS to
16546 * happen, those can only be acheived with elm_flip_go();
16548 EAPI void elm_flip_interaction_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Flip_Interaction mode);
16550 * @brief Get the interactive flip mode
16552 * @param obj The flip object
16553 * @return The interactive flip mode
16555 * Returns the interactive flip mode set by elm_flip_interaction_set()
16557 EAPI Elm_Flip_Interaction elm_flip_interaction_get(const Evas_Object *obj);
16559 * @brief Set which directions of the flip respond to interactive flip
16561 * @param obj The flip object
16562 * @param dir The direction to change
16563 * @param enabled If that direction is enabled or not
16565 * By default all directions are disabled, so you may want to enable the
16566 * desired directions for flipping if you need interactive flipping. You must
16567 * call this function once for each direction that should be enabled.
16569 * @see elm_flip_interaction_set()
16571 EAPI void elm_flip_interacton_direction_enabled_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Flip_Direction dir, Eina_Bool enabled);
16573 * @brief Get the enabled state of that flip direction
16575 * @param obj The flip object
16576 * @param dir The direction to check
16577 * @return If that direction is enabled or not
16579 * Gets the enabled state set by elm_flip_interacton_direction_enabled_set()
16581 * @see elm_flip_interaction_set()
16583 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_flip_interacton_direction_enabled_get(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Flip_Direction dir);
16585 * @brief Set the amount of the flip that is sensitive to interactive flip
16587 * @param obj The flip object
16588 * @param dir The direction to modify
16589 * @param hitsize The amount of that dimension (0.0 to 1.0) to use
16591 * Set the amount of the flip that is sensitive to interactive flip, with 0
16592 * representing no area in the flip and 1 representing the entire flip. There
16593 * is however a consideration to be made in that the area will never be
16594 * smaller than the finger size set(as set in your Elementary configuration).
16596 * @see elm_flip_interaction_set()
16598 EAPI void elm_flip_interacton_direction_hitsize_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Flip_Direction dir, double hitsize);
16600 * @brief Get the amount of the flip that is sensitive to interactive flip
16602 * @param obj The flip object
16603 * @param dir The direction to check
16604 * @return The size set for that direction
16606 * Returns the amount os sensitive area set by
16607 * elm_flip_interacton_direction_hitsize_set().
16609 EAPI double elm_flip_interacton_direction_hitsize_get(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Flip_Direction dir);
16614 /* scrolledentry */
16615 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Evas_Object *elm_scrolled_entry_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16616 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_single_line_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool single_line) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16617 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_single_line_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16618 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_password_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool password) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16619 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_password_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16620 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_entry_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *entry) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16621 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_scrolled_entry_entry_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16622 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_entry_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *entry) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16623 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_is_empty(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16624 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_scrolled_entry_selection_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16625 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_entry_insert(Evas_Object *obj, const char *entry) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16626 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_line_wrap_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Wrap_Type wrap) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16627 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_editable_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool editable) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16628 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_editable_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16629 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_select_none(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16630 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_select_all(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16631 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_next(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16632 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_prev(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16633 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_up(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16634 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_down(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16635 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_begin_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16636 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_end_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16637 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_line_begin_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16638 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_line_end_set(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16639 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_selection_begin(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16640 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_selection_end(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16641 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_is_format_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16642 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_is_visible_format_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16643 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI const char *elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16644 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_pos_set(Evas_Object *obj, int pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16645 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI int elm_scrolled_entry_cursor_pos_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16646 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_selection_cut(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16647 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_selection_copy(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16648 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_selection_paste(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16649 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_context_menu_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16650 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_context_menu_item_add(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, const char *icon_file, Elm_Icon_Type icon_type, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16651 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_context_menu_disabled_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16652 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_context_menu_disabled_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16653 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_scrollbar_policy_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy h, Elm_Scroller_Policy v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16654 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16655 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16656 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_icon_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
16657 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Evas_Object *elm_scrolled_entry_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16658 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Evas_Object *elm_scrolled_entry_icon_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16659 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_icon_visible_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool setting) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16660 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_end_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *end) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
16661 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Evas_Object *elm_scrolled_entry_end_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16662 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Evas_Object *elm_scrolled_entry_end_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16663 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_end_visible_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool setting) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16664 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_item_provider_append(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
16665 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_item_provider_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
16666 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_item_provider_remove(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *(*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, const char *item), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
16667 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_text_filter_append(Evas_Object *obj, void (*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, char **text), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
16668 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_text_filter_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, void (*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, char **text), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
16669 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_text_filter_remove(Evas_Object *obj, void (*func) (void *data, Evas_Object *entry, char **text), void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
16670 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_file_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *file, Elm_Text_Format format) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16671 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_file_get(const Evas_Object *obj, const char **file, Elm_Text_Format *format) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16672 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_file_save(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16673 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_autosave_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool autosave) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16674 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_autosave_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16675 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_scrolled_entry_cnp_textonly_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool textonly) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16676 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_scrolled_entry_cnp_textonly_get(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16679 * @defgroup Conformant Conformant
16680 * @ingroup Elementary
16682 * @image html img/widget/conformant/preview-00.png
16683 * @image latex img/widget/conformant/preview-00.eps width=\textwidth
16685 * @image html img/conformant.png
16686 * @image latex img/conformant.eps width=\textwidth
16688 * The aim is to provide a widget that can be used in elementary apps to
16689 * account for space taken up by the indicator, virtual keypad & softkey
16690 * windows when running the illume2 module of E17.
16692 * So conformant content will be sized and positioned considering the
16693 * space required for such stuff, and when they popup, as a keyboard
16694 * shows when an entry is selected, conformant content won't change.
16696 * Available styles for it:
16699 * See how to use this widget in this example:
16700 * @ref conformant_example
16704 * @addtogroup Conformant
16709 * Add a new conformant widget to the given parent Elementary
16710 * (container) object.
16712 * @param parent The parent object.
16713 * @return A new conformant widget handle or @c NULL, on errors.
16715 * This function inserts a new conformant widget on the canvas.
16717 * @ingroup Conformant
16719 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_conformant_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16722 * Set the content of the conformant widget.
16724 * @param obj The conformant object.
16725 * @param content The content to be displayed by the conformant.
16727 * Content will be sized and positioned considering the space required
16728 * to display a virtual keyboard. So it won't fill all the conformant
16729 * size. This way is possible to be sure that content won't resize
16730 * or be re-positioned after the keyboard is displayed.
16732 * Once the content object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
16733 * If you want to keep that old content object, use the
16734 * elm_conformat_content_unset() function.
16736 * @see elm_conformant_content_unset()
16737 * @see elm_conformant_content_get()
16739 * @ingroup Conformant
16741 EAPI void elm_conformant_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16744 * Get the content of the conformant widget.
16746 * @param obj The conformant object.
16747 * @return The content that is being used.
16749 * Return the content object which is set for this widget.
16750 * It won't be unparent from conformant. For that, use
16751 * elm_conformant_content_unset().
16753 * @see elm_conformant_content_set() for more details.
16754 * @see elm_conformant_content_unset()
16756 * @ingroup Conformant
16758 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_conformant_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16761 * Unset the content of the conformant widget.
16763 * @param obj The conformant object.
16764 * @return The content that was being used.
16766 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this widget.
16768 * @see elm_conformant_content_set() for more details.
16770 * @ingroup Conformant
16772 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_conformant_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16775 * Returns the Evas_Object that represents the content area.
16777 * @param obj The conformant object.
16778 * @return The content area of the widget.
16780 * @ingroup Conformant
16782 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_conformant_content_area_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16789 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_mapbuf_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16790 EAPI void elm_mapbuf_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16791 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_mapbuf_content_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16792 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_mapbuf_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16793 EAPI void elm_mapbuf_enabled_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool enabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16794 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_mapbuf_enabled_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16795 EAPI void elm_mapbuf_smooth_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool smooth) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16796 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_mapbuf_smooth_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16797 EAPI void elm_mapbuf_alpha_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool alpha) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16798 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_mapbuf_alpha_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16801 * @defgroup Flipselector Flip Selector
16803 * @image html img/widget/flipselector/preview-00.png
16804 * @image latex img/widget/flipselector/preview-00.eps
16806 * A flip selector is a widget to show a set of @b text items, one
16807 * at a time, with the same sheet switching style as the @ref Clock
16808 * "clock" widget, when one changes the current displaying sheet
16809 * (thus, the "flip" in the name).
16811 * User clicks to flip sheets which are @b held for some time will
16812 * make the flip selector to flip continuosly and automatically for
16813 * the user. The interval between flips will keep growing in time,
16814 * so that it helps the user to reach an item which is distant from
16815 * the current selection.
16817 * Smart callbacks one can register to:
16818 * - @c "selected" - when the widget's selected text item is changed
16819 * - @c "overflowed" - when the widget's current selection is changed
16820 * from the first item in its list to the last
16821 * - @c "underflowed" - when the widget's current selection is changed
16822 * from the last item in its list to the first
16824 * Available styles for it:
16827 * Here is an example on its usage:
16828 * @li @ref flipselector_example
16832 * @addtogroup Flipselector
16836 typedef struct _Elm_Flipselector_Item Elm_Flipselector_Item; /**< Item handle for a flip selector widget. */
16839 * Add a new flip selector widget to the given parent Elementary
16840 * (container) widget
16842 * @param parent The parent object
16843 * @return a new flip selector widget handle or @c NULL, on errors
16845 * This function inserts a new flip selector widget on the canvas.
16847 * @ingroup Flipselector
16849 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_flipselector_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16852 * Programmatically select the next item of a flip selector widget
16854 * @param obj The flipselector object
16856 * @note The selection will be animated. Also, if it reaches the
16857 * end of its list of member items, it will continue with the first
16860 * @ingroup Flipselector
16862 EAPI void elm_flipselector_flip_next(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16865 * Programmatically select the previous item of a flip selector
16868 * @param obj The flipselector object
16870 * @note The selection will be animated. Also, if it reaches the
16871 * beginning of its list of member items, it will continue with the
16872 * last one backwards.
16874 * @ingroup Flipselector
16876 EAPI void elm_flipselector_flip_prev(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16879 * Append a (text) item to a flip selector widget
16881 * @param obj The flipselector object
16882 * @param label The (text) label of the new item
16883 * @param func Convenience callback function to take place when
16885 * @param data Data passed to @p func, above
16886 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL, on errors
16888 * The widget's list of labels to show will be appended with the
16889 * given value. If the user wishes so, a callback function pointer
16890 * can be passed, which will get called when this same item is
16893 * @note The current selection @b won't be modified by appending an
16894 * element to the list.
16896 * @note The maximum length of the text label is going to be
16897 * determined <b>by the widget's theme</b>. Strings larger than
16898 * that value are going to be @b truncated.
16900 * @ingroup Flipselector
16902 EAPI Elm_Flipselector_Item *elm_flipselector_item_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, Evas_Smart_Cb func, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16905 * Prepend a (text) item to a flip selector widget
16907 * @param obj The flipselector object
16908 * @param label The (text) label of the new item
16909 * @param func Convenience callback function to take place when
16911 * @param data Data passed to @p func, above
16912 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL, on errors
16914 * The widget's list of labels to show will be prepended with the
16915 * given value. If the user wishes so, a callback function pointer
16916 * can be passed, which will get called when this same item is
16919 * @note The current selection @b won't be modified by prepending
16920 * an element to the list.
16922 * @note The maximum length of the text label is going to be
16923 * determined <b>by the widget's theme</b>. Strings larger than
16924 * that value are going to be @b truncated.
16926 * @ingroup Flipselector
16928 EAPI Elm_Flipselector_Item *elm_flipselector_item_prepend(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, Evas_Smart_Cb func, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16931 * Get the internal list of items in a given flip selector widget.
16933 * @param obj The flipselector object
16934 * @return The list of items (#Elm_Flipselector_Item as data) or
16935 * @c NULL on errors.
16937 * This list is @b not to be modified in any way and must not be
16938 * freed. Use the list members with functions like
16939 * elm_flipselector_item_label_set(),
16940 * elm_flipselector_item_label_get(),
16941 * elm_flipselector_item_del(),
16942 * elm_flipselector_item_selected_get(),
16943 * elm_flipselector_item_selected_set().
16945 * @warning This list is only valid until @p obj object's internal
16946 * items list is changed. It should be fetched again with another
16947 * call to this function when changes happen.
16949 * @ingroup Flipselector
16951 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_flipselector_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16954 * Get the first item in the given flip selector widget's list of
16957 * @param obj The flipselector object
16958 * @return The first item or @c NULL, if it has no items (and on
16961 * @see elm_flipselector_item_append()
16962 * @see elm_flipselector_last_item_get()
16964 * @ingroup Flipselector
16966 EAPI Elm_Flipselector_Item *elm_flipselector_first_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16969 * Get the last item in the given flip selector widget's list of
16972 * @param obj The flipselector object
16973 * @return The last item or @c NULL, if it has no items (and on
16976 * @see elm_flipselector_item_prepend()
16977 * @see elm_flipselector_first_item_get()
16979 * @ingroup Flipselector
16981 EAPI Elm_Flipselector_Item *elm_flipselector_last_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16984 * Get the currently selected item in a flip selector widget.
16986 * @param obj The flipselector object
16987 * @return The selected item or @c NULL, if the widget has no items
16990 * @ingroup Flipselector
16992 EAPI Elm_Flipselector_Item *elm_flipselector_selected_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
16995 * Set whether a given flip selector widget's item should be the
16996 * currently selected one.
16998 * @param item The flip selector item
16999 * @param selected @c EINA_TRUE to select it, @c EINA_FALSE to unselect.
17001 * This sets whether @p item is or not the selected (thus, under
17002 * display) one. If @p item is different than one under display,
17003 * the latter will be unselected. If the @p item is set to be
17004 * unselected, on the other hand, the @b first item in the widget's
17005 * internal members list will be the new selected one.
17007 * @see elm_flipselector_item_selected_get()
17009 * @ingroup Flipselector
17011 EAPI void elm_flipselector_item_selected_set(Elm_Flipselector_Item *item, Eina_Bool selected) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17014 * Get whether a given flip selector widget's item is the currently
17017 * @param item The flip selector item
17018 * @return @c EINA_TRUE, if it's selected, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
17021 * @see elm_flipselector_item_selected_set()
17023 * @ingroup Flipselector
17025 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_flipselector_item_selected_get(const Elm_Flipselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17028 * Delete a given item from a flip selector widget.
17030 * @param item The item to delete
17032 * @ingroup Flipselector
17034 EAPI void elm_flipselector_item_del(Elm_Flipselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17037 * Get the label of a given flip selector widget's item.
17039 * @param item The item to get label from
17040 * @return The text label of @p item or @c NULL, on errors
17042 * @see elm_flipselector_item_label_set()
17044 * @ingroup Flipselector
17046 EAPI const char *elm_flipselector_item_label_get(const Elm_Flipselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17049 * Set the label of a given flip selector widget's item.
17051 * @param item The item to set label on
17052 * @param label The text label string, in UTF-8 encoding
17054 * @see elm_flipselector_item_label_get()
17056 * @ingroup Flipselector
17058 EAPI void elm_flipselector_item_label_set(Elm_Flipselector_Item *item, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17061 * Gets the item before @p item in a flip selector widget's
17062 * internal list of items.
17064 * @param item The item to fetch previous from
17065 * @return The item before the @p item, in its parent's list. If
17066 * there is no previous item for @p item or there's an
17067 * error, @c NULL is returned.
17069 * @see elm_flipselector_item_next_get()
17071 * @ingroup Flipselector
17073 EAPI Elm_Flipselector_Item *elm_flipselector_item_prev_get(Elm_Flipselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17076 * Gets the item after @p item in a flip selector widget's
17077 * internal list of items.
17079 * @param item The item to fetch next from
17080 * @return The item after the @p item, in its parent's list. If
17081 * there is no next item for @p item or there's an
17082 * error, @c NULL is returned.
17084 * @see elm_flipselector_item_next_get()
17086 * @ingroup Flipselector
17088 EAPI Elm_Flipselector_Item *elm_flipselector_item_next_get(Elm_Flipselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17091 * Set the interval on time updates for an user mouse button hold
17092 * on a flip selector widget.
17094 * @param obj The flip selector object
17095 * @param interval The (first) interval value in seconds
17097 * This interval value is @b decreased while the user holds the
17098 * mouse pointer either flipping up or flipping doww a given flip
17101 * This helps the user to get to a given item distant from the
17102 * current one easier/faster, as it will start to flip quicker and
17103 * quicker on mouse button holds.
17105 * The calculation for the next flip interval value, starting from
17106 * the one set with this call, is the previous interval divided by
17107 * 1.05, so it decreases a little bit.
17109 * The default starting interval value for automatic flips is
17112 * @see elm_flipselector_interval_get()
17114 * @ingroup Flipselector
17116 EAPI void elm_flipselector_interval_set(Evas_Object *obj, double interval) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17119 * Get the interval on time updates for an user mouse button hold
17120 * on a flip selector widget.
17122 * @param obj The flip selector object
17123 * @return The (first) interval value, in seconds, set on it
17125 * @see elm_flipselector_interval_set() for more details
17127 * @ingroup Flipselector
17129 EAPI double elm_flipselector_interval_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17136 * @addtogroup Animator Animator
17137 * @ingroup Elementary
17139 * @brief Functions to ease creation of animations.
17141 * elm_animator is designed to provide an easy way to create animations.
17142 * Creating an animation with elm_animator is as simple as setting a
17143 * duration, an operating callback and telling it to run the animation.
17144 * However that is not the full extent of elm_animator's ability, animations
17145 * can be paused and resumed, reversed and the animation need not be linear.
17147 * To run an animation you must specify at least a duration and operation
17148 * callback, not setting any other properties will create a linear animation
17149 * that runs once and is not reversed.
17151 * @ref elm_animator_example_page_01 "This" example should make all of that
17154 * @warning elm_animator is @b not a widget.
17158 * @brief Type of curve desired for animation.
17160 * The speed in which an animation happens doesn't have to be linear, some
17161 * animations will look better if they're accelerating or decelerating, so
17162 * elm_animator provides four options in this regard:
17164 * @image html elm_animator_curve_style.png
17165 * @image latex elm_animator_curve_style.eps width=\textwidth
17166 * As can be seen in the image the speed of the animation will be:
17167 * @li ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_LINEAR constant
17168 * @li ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_IN_OUT start slow, speed up and then slow down
17169 * @li ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_IN start slow and then speed up
17170 * @li ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_OUT start fast and then slow down
17174 ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_LINEAR,
17175 ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_IN_OUT,
17176 ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_IN,
17177 ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_OUT
17178 } Elm_Animator_Curve_Style;
17179 typedef struct _Elm_Animator Elm_Animator;
17181 * Called back per loop of an elementary animators cycle
17182 * @param data user-data given to elm_animator_operation_callback_set()
17183 * @param animator the animator being run
17184 * @param double the position in the animation
17186 typedef void (*Elm_Animator_Operation_Cb) (void *data, Elm_Animator *animator, double frame);
17188 * Called back when an elementary animator finishes
17189 * @param data user-data given to elm_animator_completion_callback_set()
17191 typedef void (*Elm_Animator_Completion_Cb) (void *data);
17194 * @brief Create a new animator.
17196 * @param[in] parent Parent object
17198 * The @a parent argument can be set to NULL for no parent. If a parent is set
17199 * there is no need to call elm_animator_del(), when the parent is deleted it
17200 * will delete the animator.
17201 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17203 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Elm_Animator* elm_animator_add(Evas_Object *parent);
17205 * Deletes the animator freeing any resources it used. If the animator was
17206 * created with a NULL parent this must be called, otherwise it will be
17207 * automatically called when the parent is deleted.
17209 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17210 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17212 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_del(Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17214 * Set the duration of the animation.
17216 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17217 * @param[in] duration Duration in second
17218 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17220 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_duration_set(Elm_Animator *animator, double duration) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17222 * @brief Set the callback function for animator operation.
17224 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17225 * @param[in] func @ref Elm_Animator_Operation_Cb "Callback" function pointer
17226 * @param[in] data Callback function user argument
17228 * The @p func callback will be called with a frame value in range [0, 1] which
17229 * indicates how far along the animation should be. It is the job of @p func to
17230 * actually change the state of any object(or objects) that are being animated.
17231 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17233 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_operation_callback_set(Elm_Animator *animator, Elm_Animator_Operation_Cb func, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17235 * Set the callback function for the when the animation ends.
17237 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17238 * @param[in] func Callback function pointe
17239 * @param[in] data Callback function user argument
17241 * @warning @a func will not be executed if elm_animator_stop() is called.
17242 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17244 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_completion_callback_set(Elm_Animator *animator, Elm_Animator_Completion_Cb func, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17246 * @brief Stop animator.
17248 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17250 * If called before elm_animator_animate() it does nothing. If there is an
17251 * animation in progress the animation will be stopped(the operation callback
17252 * will not be executed again) and it can't be restarted using
17253 * elm_animator_resume().
17254 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17256 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_stop(Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17258 * Set the animator repeat count.
17260 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17261 * @param[in] repeat_cnt Repeat count
17262 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17264 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_repeat_set(Elm_Animator *animator, unsigned int repeat_cnt) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17266 * @brief Start animation.
17268 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17270 * This function starts the animation if the nescessary properties(duration
17271 * and operation callback) have been set. Once started the animation will
17272 * run until complete or elm_animator_stop() is called.
17273 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17275 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_animate(Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17277 * Sets the animation @ref Elm_Animator_Curve_Style "acceleration style".
17279 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17280 * @param[in] cs Curve style. Default is ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_LINEAR
17281 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17283 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_curve_style_set(Elm_Animator *animator, Elm_Animator_Curve_Style cs) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17285 * Gets the animation @ref Elm_Animator_Curve_Style "acceleration style".
17287 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17288 * @param[in] cs Curve style. Default is ELM_ANIMATOR_CURVE_LINEAR
17289 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17291 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Elm_Animator_Curve_Style elm_animator_curve_style_get(const Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17293 * @brief Sets wether the animation should be automatically reversed.
17295 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17296 * @param[in] reverse Reverse or not
17298 * This controls wether the animation will be run on reverse imediately after
17299 * running forward. When this is set together with repetition the animation
17300 * will run in reverse once for each time it ran forward.@n
17301 * Runnin an animation in reverse is accomplished by calling the operation
17302 * callback with a frame value starting at 1 and diminshing until 0.
17303 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17305 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_auto_reverse_set(Elm_Animator *animator, Eina_Bool reverse) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17307 * Gets wether the animation will automatically reversed
17309 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17310 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17312 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_animator_auto_reverse_get(const Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17314 * Gets the status for the animator operation. The status of the animator @b
17315 * doesn't take in to account elm_animator_pause() or elm_animator_resume(), it
17316 * only informs if the animation was started and has not ended(either normally
17317 * or through elm_animator_stop()).
17319 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17320 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17322 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI Eina_Bool elm_animator_operating_get(const Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17324 * Gets how many times the animation will be repeated
17326 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17327 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17329 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI unsigned int elm_animator_repeat_get(const Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17331 * Pause the animator.
17333 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17335 * This causes the animation to be temporarily stopped(the operation callback
17336 * will not be called). If the animation is not yet running this is a no-op.
17337 * Once an animation has been paused with this function it can be resumed
17338 * using elm_animator_resume().
17339 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17341 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_pause(Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17343 * @brief Resumes the animator.
17345 * @param[in] animator Animator object
17347 * Resumes an animation that was paused using elm_animator_pause(), after
17348 * calling this function calls to the operation callback will happen
17349 * normally. If an animation is stopped by means of elm_animator_stop it
17350 * @b can't be restarted with this function.@n
17352 * @warning When an animation is resumed it doesn't start from where it was paused, it
17353 * will go to where it would have been if it had not been paused. If an
17354 * animation with a duration of 3 seconds is paused after 1 second for 1 second
17355 * it will resume as if it had ben animating for 2 seconds, the operating
17356 * callback will be called with a frame value of aproximately 2/3.
17357 * @deprecated Use @ref Transit instead.
17359 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_animator_resume(Elm_Animator *animator) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17365 * @defgroup Calendar Calendar
17366 * @ingroup Elementary
17368 * @image html img/widget/calendar/preview-00.png
17369 * @image latex img/widget/calendar/preview-00.eps
17371 * A calendar is a widget that displays a regular calendar, one
17372 * month at a time, to the user, and can allows the user to select a date.
17374 * It has support to adding check marks (holidays and checks are supported
17375 * by default theme).
17377 * Weekday names and the function used to format month and year to
17378 * be displayed can be set, giving more flexibility to this widget.
17380 * Smart callbacks one can register to:
17381 * - "changed" - emitted when the user selects a day or changes the
17382 * displayed month, what actually changes the selected day as well.
17384 * Available styles for it:
17387 * List of examples:
17388 * @li @ref calendar_example_01
17389 * @li @ref calendar_example_02
17390 * @li @ref calendar_example_03
17391 * @li @ref calendar_example_04
17392 * @li @ref calendar_example_05
17393 * @li @ref calendar_example_06
17397 * @addtogroup Calendar
17402 * @enum _Elm_Calendar_Mark_Repeat
17403 * @typedef Elm_Calendar_Mark_Repeat
17405 * Event periodicity, used to define if a mark should be repeated
17406 * @b beyond event's day. It's set when a mark is added.
17408 * So, for a mark added to 13th May with periodicity set to WEEKLY,
17409 * there will be marks every week after this date. Marks will be displayed
17410 * at 13th, 20th, 27th, 3rd June ...
17412 * Values don't work as bitmaks, only one can be choosen.
17414 * @see elm_calendar_mark_add()
17416 * @ingroup Calendar
17418 typedef enum _Elm_Calendar_Mark_Repeat
17420 ELM_CALENDAR_UNIQUE, /**< Default value. Marks will be displayed only on event day. */
17421 ELM_CALENDAR_DAILY, /**< Marks will be displayed everyday after event day (inclusive). */
17422 ELM_CALENDAR_WEEKLY, /**< Marks will be displayed every week after event day (inclusive) - i.e. each seven days. */
17423 ELM_CALENDAR_MONTHLY, /**< Marks will be displayed every month day that coincides to event day. E.g.: if an event is set to 30th Jan, no marks will be displayed on Feb, but will be displayed on 30th Mar*/
17424 ELM_CALENDAR_ANNUALLY /**< Marks will be displayed every year that coincides to event day (and month). E.g. an event added to 30th Jan 2012 will be repeated on 30th Jan 2013. */
17425 } Elm_Calendar_Mark_Repeat;
17427 typedef struct _Elm_Calendar_Mark Elm_Calendar_Mark; /**< Item handle for a calendar mark. Created with elm_calendar_mark_add() and deleted with elm_calendar_mark_del(). */
17430 * Add a new calendar widget to the given parent Elementary
17431 * (container) object.
17433 * @param parent The parent object.
17434 * @return a new calendar widget handle or @c NULL, on errors.
17436 * This function inserts a new calendar widget on the canvas.
17438 * @ref calendar_example_01
17440 * @ingroup Calendar
17442 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_calendar_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17445 * Get weekdays names displayed by the calendar.
17447 * @param obj The calendar object.
17448 * @return Array of seven strings to be used as weekday names.
17450 * By default, weekdays abbreviations get from system are displayed:
17451 * E.g. for an en_US locale: "Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat"
17452 * The first string is related to Sunday, the second to Monday...
17454 * @see elm_calendar_weekdays_name_set()
17456 * @ref calendar_example_05
17458 * @ingroup Calendar
17460 EAPI const char **elm_calendar_weekdays_names_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17463 * Set weekdays names to be displayed by the calendar.
17465 * @param obj The calendar object.
17466 * @param weedays Array of seven strings to be used as weekday names.
17467 * @warning It must have 7 elements, or it will access invalid memory.
17468 * @warning The strings must be NULL terminated ('@\0').
17470 * By default, weekdays abbreviations get from system are displayed:
17471 * E.g. for an en_US locale: "Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat"
17473 * The first string should be related to Sunday, the second to Monday...
17475 * The usage should be like this:
17477 * const char *weekdays[] =
17479 * "Sunday", "Monday", "Tuesday", "Wednesday",
17480 * "Thursday", "Friday", "Saturday"
17482 * elm_calendar_weekdays_names_set(calendar, weekdays);
17485 * @see elm_calendar_weekdays_name_get()
17487 * @ref calendar_example_02
17489 * @ingroup Calendar
17491 EAPI void elm_calendar_weekdays_names_set(Evas_Object *obj, const char *weekdays[]) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
17494 * Set the minimum and maximum values for the year
17496 * @param obj The calendar object
17497 * @param min The minimum year, greater than 1901;
17498 * @param max The maximum year;
17500 * Maximum must be greater than minimum, except if you don't wan't to set
17502 * Default values are 1902 and -1.
17504 * If the maximum year is a negative value, it will be limited depending
17505 * on the platform architecture (year 2037 for 32 bits);
17507 * @see elm_calendar_min_max_year_get()
17509 * @ref calendar_example_03
17511 * @ingroup Calendar
17513 EAPI void elm_calendar_min_max_year_set(Evas_Object *obj, int min, int max) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17516 * Get the minimum and maximum values for the year
17518 * @param obj The calendar object.
17519 * @param min The minimum year.
17520 * @param max The maximum year.
17522 * Default values are 1902 and -1.
17524 * @see elm_calendar_min_max_year_get() for more details.
17526 * @ref calendar_example_05
17528 * @ingroup Calendar
17530 EAPI void elm_calendar_min_max_year_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *min, int *max) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17533 * Enable or disable day selection
17535 * @param obj The calendar object.
17536 * @param enabled @c EINA_TRUE to enable selection or @c EINA_FALSE to
17539 * Enabled by default. If disabled, the user still can select months,
17540 * but not days. Selected days are highlighted on calendar.
17541 * It should be used if you won't need such selection for the widget usage.
17543 * When a day is selected, or month is changed, smart callbacks for
17544 * signal "changed" will be called.
17546 * @see elm_calendar_day_selection_enable_get()
17548 * @ref calendar_example_04
17550 * @ingroup Calendar
17552 EAPI void elm_calendar_day_selection_enabled_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool enabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17555 * Get a value whether day selection is enabled or not.
17557 * @see elm_calendar_day_selection_enable_set() for details.
17559 * @param obj The calendar object.
17560 * @return EINA_TRUE means day selection is enabled. EINA_FALSE indicates
17561 * it's disabled. If @p obj is NULL, EINA_FALSE is returned.
17563 * @ref calendar_example_05
17565 * @ingroup Calendar
17567 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_calendar_day_selection_enabled_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17571 * Set selected date to be highlighted on calendar.
17573 * @param obj The calendar object.
17574 * @param selected_time A @b tm struct to represent the selected date.
17576 * Set the selected date, changing the displayed month if needed.
17577 * Selected date changes when the user goes to next/previous month or
17578 * select a day pressing over it on calendar.
17580 * @see elm_calendar_selected_time_get()
17582 * @ref calendar_example_04
17584 * @ingroup Calendar
17586 EAPI void elm_calendar_selected_time_set(Evas_Object *obj, struct tm *selected_time) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17589 * Get selected date.
17591 * @param obj The calendar object
17592 * @param selected_time A @b tm struct to point to selected date
17593 * @return EINA_FALSE means an error ocurred and returned time shouldn't
17596 * Get date selected by the user or set by function
17597 * elm_calendar_selected_time_set().
17598 * Selected date changes when the user goes to next/previous month or
17599 * select a day pressing over it on calendar.
17601 * @see elm_calendar_selected_time_get()
17603 * @ref calendar_example_05
17605 * @ingroup Calendar
17607 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_calendar_selected_time_get(const Evas_Object *obj, struct tm *selected_time) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
17610 * Set a function to format the string that will be used to display
17613 * @param obj The calendar object
17614 * @param format_function Function to set the month-year string given
17615 * the selected date
17617 * By default it uses strftime with "%B %Y" format string.
17618 * It should allocate the memory that will be used by the string,
17619 * that will be freed by the widget after usage.
17620 * A pointer to the string and a pointer to the time struct will be provided.
17625 * _format_month_year(struct tm *selected_time)
17628 * if (!strftime(buf, sizeof(buf), "%B %Y", selected_time)) return NULL;
17629 * return strdup(buf);
17632 * elm_calendar_format_function_set(calendar, _format_month_year);
17635 * @ref calendar_example_02
17637 * @ingroup Calendar
17639 EAPI void elm_calendar_format_function_set(Evas_Object *obj, char * (*format_function) (struct tm *stime)) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17642 * Add a new mark to the calendar
17644 * @param obj The calendar object
17645 * @param mark_type A string used to define the type of mark. It will be
17646 * emitted to the theme, that should display a related modification on these
17647 * days representation.
17648 * @param mark_time A time struct to represent the date of inclusion of the
17649 * mark. For marks that repeats it will just be displayed after the inclusion
17650 * date in the calendar.
17651 * @param repeat Repeat the event following this periodicity. Can be a unique
17652 * mark (that don't repeat), daily, weekly, monthly or annually.
17653 * @return The created mark or @NULL upon failure.
17655 * Add a mark that will be drawn in the calendar respecting the insertion
17656 * time and periodicity. It will emit the type as signal to the widget theme.
17657 * Default theme supports "holiday" and "checked", but it can be extended.
17659 * It won't immediately update the calendar, drawing the marks.
17660 * For this, call elm_calendar_marks_draw(). However, when user selects
17661 * next or previous month calendar forces marks drawn.
17663 * Marks created with this method can be deleted with
17664 * elm_calendar_mark_del().
17668 * struct tm selected_time;
17669 * time_t current_time;
17671 * current_time = time(NULL) + 5 * 84600;
17672 * localtime_r(¤t_time, &selected_time);
17673 * elm_calendar_mark_add(cal, "holiday", selected_time,
17674 * ELM_CALENDAR_ANNUALLY);
17676 * current_time = time(NULL) + 1 * 84600;
17677 * localtime_r(¤t_time, &selected_time);
17678 * elm_calendar_mark_add(cal, "checked", selected_time, ELM_CALENDAR_UNIQUE);
17680 * elm_calendar_marks_draw(cal);
17683 * @see elm_calendar_marks_draw()
17684 * @see elm_calendar_mark_del()
17686 * @ref calendar_example_06
17688 * @ingroup Calendar
17690 EAPI Elm_Calendar_Mark *elm_calendar_mark_add(Evas_Object *obj, const char *mark_type, struct tm *mark_time, Elm_Calendar_Mark_Repeat repeat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17693 * Delete mark from the calendar.
17695 * @param mark The mark to be deleted.
17697 * If deleting all calendar marks is required, elm_calendar_marks_clear()
17698 * should be used instead of getting marks list and deleting each one.
17700 * @see elm_calendar_mark_add()
17702 * @ref calendar_example_06
17704 * @ingroup Calendar
17706 EAPI void elm_calendar_mark_del(Elm_Calendar_Mark *mark) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17709 * Remove all calendar's marks
17711 * @param obj The calendar object.
17713 * @see elm_calendar_mark_add()
17714 * @see elm_calendar_mark_del()
17716 * @ingroup Calendar
17718 EAPI void elm_calendar_marks_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17722 * Get a list of all the calendar marks.
17724 * @param obj The calendar object.
17725 * @return An @c Eina_List of calendar marks objects, or @c NULL on failure.
17727 * @see elm_calendar_mark_add()
17728 * @see elm_calendar_mark_del()
17729 * @see elm_calendar_marks_clear()
17731 * @ingroup Calendar
17733 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_calendar_marks_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17736 * Draw calendar marks.
17738 * @param obj The calendar object.
17740 * Should be used after adding, removing or clearing marks.
17741 * It will go through the entire marks list updating the calendar.
17742 * If lots of marks will be added, add all the marks and then call
17745 * When the month is changed, i.e. user selects next or previous month,
17746 * marks will be drawed.
17748 * @see elm_calendar_mark_add()
17749 * @see elm_calendar_mark_del()
17750 * @see elm_calendar_marks_clear()
17752 * @ref calendar_example_06
17754 * @ingroup Calendar
17756 EAPI void elm_calendar_marks_draw(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17759 * Set a day text color to the same that represents Saturdays.
17761 * @param obj The calendar object.
17762 * @param pos The text position. Position is the cell counter, from left
17763 * to right, up to down. It starts on 0 and ends on 41.
17765 * @deprecated use elm_calendar_mark_add() instead like:
17768 * struct tm t = { 0, 0, 12, 6, 0, 0, 6, 6, -1 };
17769 * elm_calendar_mark_add(obj, "sat", &t, ELM_CALENDAR_WEEKLY);
17772 * @see elm_calendar_mark_add()
17774 * @ingroup Calendar
17776 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_calendar_text_saturday_color_set(Evas_Object *obj, int pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17779 * Set a day text color to the same that represents Sundays.
17781 * @param obj The calendar object.
17782 * @param pos The text position. Position is the cell counter, from left
17783 * to right, up to down. It starts on 0 and ends on 41.
17785 * @deprecated use elm_calendar_mark_add() instead like:
17788 * struct tm t = { 0, 0, 12, 7, 0, 0, 0, 0, -1 };
17789 * elm_calendar_mark_add(obj, "sat", &t, ELM_CALENDAR_WEEKLY);
17792 * @see elm_calendar_mark_add()
17794 * @ingroup Calendar
17796 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_calendar_text_sunday_color_set(Evas_Object *obj, int pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17799 * Set a day text color to the same that represents Weekdays.
17801 * @param obj The calendar object
17802 * @param pos The text position. Position is the cell counter, from left
17803 * to right, up to down. It starts on 0 and ends on 41.
17805 * @deprecated use elm_calendar_mark_add() instead like:
17808 * struct tm t = { 0, 0, 12, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, -1 };
17810 * elm_calendar_mark_add(obj, "week", &t, ELM_CALENDAR_WEEKLY); // monday
17811 * t.tm_tm_mday++; t.tm_wday++; t.tm_yday++;
17812 * elm_calendar_mark_add(obj, "week", &t, ELM_CALENDAR_WEEKLY); // tuesday
17813 * t.tm_tm_mday++; t.tm_wday++; t.tm_yday++;
17814 * elm_calendar_mark_add(obj, "week", &t, ELM_CALENDAR_WEEKLY); // wednesday
17815 * t.tm_tm_mday++; t.tm_wday++; t.tm_yday++;
17816 * elm_calendar_mark_add(obj, "week", &t, ELM_CALENDAR_WEEKLY); // thursday
17817 * t.tm_tm_mday++; t.tm_wday++; t.tm_yday++;
17818 * elm_calendar_mark_add(obj, "week", &t, ELM_CALENDAR_WEEKLY); // friday
17821 * @see elm_calendar_mark_add()
17823 * @ingroup Calendar
17825 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_calendar_text_weekday_color_set(Evas_Object *obj, int pos) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17828 * Set the interval on time updates for an user mouse button hold
17829 * on calendar widgets' month selection.
17831 * @param obj The calendar object
17832 * @param interval The (first) interval value in seconds
17834 * This interval value is @b decreased while the user holds the
17835 * mouse pointer either selecting next or previous month.
17837 * This helps the user to get to a given month distant from the
17838 * current one easier/faster, as it will start to change quicker and
17839 * quicker on mouse button holds.
17841 * The calculation for the next change interval value, starting from
17842 * the one set with this call, is the previous interval divided by
17843 * 1.05, so it decreases a little bit.
17845 * The default starting interval value for automatic changes is
17848 * @see elm_calendar_interval_get()
17850 * @ingroup Calendar
17852 EAPI void elm_calendar_interval_set(Evas_Object *obj, double interval) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17855 * Get the interval on time updates for an user mouse button hold
17856 * on calendar widgets' month selection.
17858 * @param obj The calendar object
17859 * @return The (first) interval value, in seconds, set on it
17861 * @see elm_calendar_interval_set() for more details
17863 * @ingroup Calendar
17865 EAPI double elm_calendar_interval_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17872 * @defgroup Diskselector Diskselector
17873 * @ingroup Elementary
17875 * @image html img/widget/diskselector/preview-00.png
17876 * @image latex img/widget/diskselector/preview-00.eps
17878 * A diskselector is a kind of list widget. It scrolls horizontally,
17879 * and can contain label and icon objects. Three items are displayed
17880 * with the selected one in the middle.
17882 * It can act like a circular list with round mode and labels can be
17883 * reduced for a defined length for side items.
17885 * Smart callbacks one can listen to:
17886 * - "selected" - when item is selected, i.e. scroller stops.
17888 * Available styles for it:
17891 * List of examples:
17892 * @li @ref diskselector_example_01
17893 * @li @ref diskselector_example_02
17897 * @addtogroup Diskselector
17901 typedef struct _Elm_Diskselector_Item Elm_Diskselector_Item; /**< Item handle for a diskselector item. Created with elm_diskselector_item_append() and deleted with elm_diskselector_item_del(). */
17904 * Add a new diskselector widget to the given parent Elementary
17905 * (container) object.
17907 * @param parent The parent object.
17908 * @return a new diskselector widget handle or @c NULL, on errors.
17910 * This function inserts a new diskselector widget on the canvas.
17912 * @ingroup Diskselector
17914 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_diskselector_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17917 * Enable or disable round mode.
17919 * @param obj The diskselector object.
17920 * @param round @c EINA_TRUE to enable round mode or @c EINA_FALSE to
17923 * Disabled by default. If round mode is enabled the items list will
17924 * work like a circle list, so when the user reaches the last item,
17925 * the first one will popup.
17927 * @see elm_diskselector_round_get()
17929 * @ingroup Diskselector
17931 EAPI void elm_diskselector_round_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool round) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17934 * Get a value whether round mode is enabled or not.
17936 * @see elm_diskselector_round_set() for details.
17938 * @param obj The diskselector object.
17939 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means round mode is enabled. @c EINA_FALSE indicates
17940 * it's disabled. If @p obj is @c NULL, @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
17942 * @ingroup Diskselector
17944 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_diskselector_round_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17947 * Get the side labels max length.
17949 * @deprecated use elm_diskselector_side_label_length_get() instead:
17951 * @param obj The diskselector object.
17952 * @return The max length defined for side labels, or 0 if not a valid
17955 * @ingroup Diskselector
17957 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI int elm_diskselector_side_label_lenght_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17960 * Set the side labels max length.
17962 * @deprecated use elm_diskselector_side_label_length_set() instead:
17964 * @param obj The diskselector object.
17965 * @param len The max length defined for side labels.
17967 * @ingroup Diskselector
17969 EINA_DEPRECATED EAPI void elm_diskselector_side_label_lenght_set(Evas_Object *obj, int len) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17972 * Get the side labels max length.
17974 * @see elm_diskselector_side_label_length_set() for details.
17976 * @param obj The diskselector object.
17977 * @return The max length defined for side labels, or 0 if not a valid
17980 * @ingroup Diskselector
17982 EAPI int elm_diskselector_side_label_length_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
17985 * Set the side labels max length.
17987 * @param obj The diskselector object.
17988 * @param len The max length defined for side labels.
17990 * Length is the number of characters of items' label that will be
17991 * visible when it's set on side positions. It will just crop
17992 * the string after defined size. E.g.:
17994 * An item with label "January" would be displayed on side position as
17995 * "Jan" if max length is set to 3, or "Janu", if this property
17998 * When it's selected, the entire label will be displayed, except for
17999 * width restrictions. In this case label will be cropped and "..."
18000 * will be concatenated.
18002 * Default side label max length is 3.
18004 * This property will be applyed over all items, included before or
18005 * later this function call.
18007 * @ingroup Diskselector
18009 EAPI void elm_diskselector_side_label_length_set(Evas_Object *obj, int len) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18012 * Set the number of items to be displayed.
18014 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18015 * @param num The number of items the diskselector will display.
18017 * Default value is 3, and also it's the minimun. If @p num is less
18018 * than 3, it will be set to 3.
18020 * Also, it can be set on theme, using data item @c display_item_num
18021 * on group "elm/diskselector/item/X", where X is style set.
18024 * group { name: "elm/diskselector/item/X";
18026 * item: "display_item_num" "5";
18029 * @ingroup Diskselector
18031 EAPI void elm_diskselector_display_item_num_set(Evas_Object *obj, int num) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18034 * Set bouncing behaviour when the scrolled content reaches an edge.
18036 * Tell the internal scroller object whether it should bounce or not
18037 * when it reaches the respective edges for each axis.
18039 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18040 * @param h_bounce Whether to bounce or not in the horizontal axis.
18041 * @param v_bounce Whether to bounce or not in the vertical axis.
18043 * @see elm_scroller_bounce_set()
18045 * @ingroup Diskselector
18047 EAPI void elm_diskselector_bounce_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool h_bounce, Eina_Bool v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18050 * Get the bouncing behaviour of the internal scroller.
18052 * Get whether the internal scroller should bounce when the edge of each
18053 * axis is reached scrolling.
18055 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18056 * @param h_bounce Pointer where to store the bounce state of the horizontal
18058 * @param v_bounce Pointer where to store the bounce state of the vertical
18061 * @see elm_scroller_bounce_get()
18062 * @see elm_diskselector_bounce_set()
18064 * @ingroup Diskselector
18066 EAPI void elm_diskselector_bounce_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool *h_bounce, Eina_Bool *v_bounce) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18069 * Get the scrollbar policy.
18071 * @see elm_diskselector_scroller_policy_get() for details.
18073 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18074 * @param policy_h Pointer where to store horizontal scrollbar policy.
18075 * @param policy_v Pointer where to store vertical scrollbar policy.
18077 * @ingroup Diskselector
18079 EAPI void elm_diskselector_scroller_policy_get(const Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy *policy_h, Elm_Scroller_Policy *policy_v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18082 * Set the scrollbar policy.
18084 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18085 * @param policy_h Horizontal scrollbar policy.
18086 * @param policy_v Vertical scrollbar policy.
18088 * This sets the scrollbar visibility policy for the given scroller.
18089 * #ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_AUTO means the scrollber is made visible if it
18090 * is needed, and otherwise kept hidden. #ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_ON turns
18091 * it on all the time, and #ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_OFF always keeps it off.
18092 * This applies respectively for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
18094 * The both are disabled by default, i.e., are set to
18095 * #ELM_SCROLLER_POLICY_OFF.
18097 * @ingroup Diskselector
18099 EAPI void elm_diskselector_scroller_policy_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Scroller_Policy policy_h, Elm_Scroller_Policy policy_v) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18102 * Remove all diskselector's items.
18104 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18106 * @see elm_diskselector_item_del()
18107 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18109 * @ingroup Diskselector
18111 EAPI void elm_diskselector_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18114 * Get a list of all the diskselector items.
18116 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18117 * @return An @c Eina_List of diskselector items, #Elm_Diskselector_Item,
18118 * or @c NULL on failure.
18120 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18121 * @see elm_diskselector_item_del()
18122 * @see elm_diskselector_clear()
18124 * @ingroup Diskselector
18126 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_diskselector_items_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18129 * Appends a new item to the diskselector object.
18131 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18132 * @param label The label of the diskselector item.
18133 * @param icon The icon object to use at left side of the item. An
18134 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
18135 * with elm_icon_add().
18136 * @param func The function to call when the item is selected.
18137 * @param data The data to associate with the item for related callbacks.
18139 * @return The created item or @c NULL upon failure.
18141 * A new item will be created and appended to the diskselector, i.e., will
18142 * be set as last item. Also, if there is no selected item, it will
18143 * be selected. This will always happens for the first appended item.
18145 * If no icon is set, label will be centered on item position, otherwise
18146 * the icon will be placed at left of the label, that will be shifted
18149 * Items created with this method can be deleted with
18150 * elm_diskselector_item_del().
18152 * Associated @p data can be properly freed when item is deleted if a
18153 * callback function is set with elm_diskselector_item_del_cb_set().
18155 * If a function is passed as argument, it will be called everytime this item
18156 * is selected, i.e., the user stops the diskselector with this
18157 * item on center position. If such function isn't needed, just passing
18158 * @c NULL as @p func is enough. The same should be done for @p data.
18160 * Simple example (with no function callback or data associated):
18162 * disk = elm_diskselector_add(win);
18163 * ic = elm_icon_add(win);
18164 * elm_icon_file_set(ic, "path/to/image", NULL);
18165 * elm_icon_scale_set(ic, EINA_TRUE, EINA_TRUE);
18166 * elm_diskselector_item_append(disk, "label", ic, NULL, NULL);
18169 * @see elm_diskselector_item_del()
18170 * @see elm_diskselector_item_del_cb_set()
18171 * @see elm_diskselector_clear()
18172 * @see elm_icon_add()
18174 * @ingroup Diskselector
18176 EAPI Elm_Diskselector_Item *elm_diskselector_item_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, Evas_Object *icon, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18180 * Delete them item from the diskselector.
18182 * @param it The item of diskselector to be deleted.
18184 * If deleting all diskselector items is required, elm_diskselector_clear()
18185 * should be used instead of getting items list and deleting each one.
18187 * @see elm_diskselector_clear()
18188 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18189 * @see elm_diskselector_item_del_cb_set()
18191 * @ingroup Diskselector
18193 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_del(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18196 * Set the function called when a diskselector item is freed.
18198 * @param it The item to set the callback on
18199 * @param func The function called
18201 * If there is a @p func, then it will be called prior item's memory release.
18202 * That will be called with the following arguments:
18204 * @li item's Evas object;
18207 * This way, a data associated to a diskselector item could be properly
18210 * @ingroup Diskselector
18212 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_del_cb_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, Evas_Smart_Cb func) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18215 * Get the data associated to the item.
18217 * @param it The diskselector item
18218 * @return The data associated to @p it
18220 * The return value is a pointer to data associated to @item when it was
18221 * created, with function elm_diskselector_item_append(). If no data
18222 * was passed as argument, it will return @c NULL.
18224 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18226 * @ingroup Diskselector
18228 EAPI void *elm_diskselector_item_data_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18231 * Set the icon associated to the item.
18233 * @param it The diskselector item
18234 * @param icon The icon object to associate with @p it
18236 * The icon object to use at left side of the item. An
18237 * icon can be any Evas object, but usually it is an icon created
18238 * with elm_icon_add().
18240 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
18241 * @warning Setting the same icon for two items will cause the icon to
18242 * dissapear from the first item.
18244 * If an icon was passed as argument on item creation, with function
18245 * elm_diskselector_item_append(), it will be already
18246 * associated to the item.
18248 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18249 * @see elm_diskselector_item_icon_get()
18251 * @ingroup Diskselector
18253 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_icon_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18256 * Get the icon associated to the item.
18258 * @param it The diskselector item
18259 * @return The icon associated to @p it
18261 * The return value is a pointer to the icon associated to @item when it was
18262 * created, with function elm_diskselector_item_append(), or later
18263 * with function elm_diskselector_item_icon_set. If no icon
18264 * was passed as argument, it will return @c NULL.
18266 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18267 * @see elm_diskselector_item_icon_set()
18269 * @ingroup Diskselector
18271 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_diskselector_item_icon_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18274 * Set the label of item.
18276 * @param it The item of diskselector.
18277 * @param label The label of item.
18279 * The label to be displayed by the item.
18281 * If no icon is set, label will be centered on item position, otherwise
18282 * the icon will be placed at left of the label, that will be shifted
18285 * An item with label "January" would be displayed on side position as
18286 * "Jan" if max length is set to 3 with function
18287 * elm_diskselector_side_label_lenght_set(), or "Janu", if this property
18290 * When this @item is selected, the entire label will be displayed,
18291 * except for width restrictions.
18292 * In this case label will be cropped and "..." will be concatenated,
18293 * but only for display purposes. It will keep the entire string, so
18294 * if diskselector is resized the remaining characters will be displayed.
18296 * If a label was passed as argument on item creation, with function
18297 * elm_diskselector_item_append(), it will be already
18298 * displayed by the item.
18300 * @see elm_diskselector_side_label_lenght_set()
18301 * @see elm_diskselector_item_label_get()
18302 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18304 * @ingroup Diskselector
18306 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_label_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18309 * Get the label of item.
18311 * @param it The item of diskselector.
18312 * @return The label of item.
18314 * The return value is a pointer to the label associated to @item when it was
18315 * created, with function elm_diskselector_item_append(), or later
18316 * with function elm_diskselector_item_label_set. If no label
18317 * was passed as argument, it will return @c NULL.
18319 * @see elm_diskselector_item_label_set() for more details.
18320 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18322 * @ingroup Diskselector
18324 EAPI const char *elm_diskselector_item_label_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18327 * Get the selected item.
18329 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18330 * @return The selected diskselector item.
18332 * The selected item can be unselected with function
18333 * elm_diskselector_item_selected_set(), and the first item of
18334 * diskselector will be selected.
18336 * The selected item always will be centered on diskselector, with
18337 * full label displayed, i.e., max lenght set to side labels won't
18338 * apply on the selected item. More details on
18339 * elm_diskselector_side_label_length_set().
18341 * @ingroup Diskselector
18343 EAPI Elm_Diskselector_Item *elm_diskselector_selected_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18346 * Set the selected state of an item.
18348 * @param it The diskselector item
18349 * @param selected The selected state
18351 * This sets the selected state of the given item @p it.
18352 * @c EINA_TRUE for selected, @c EINA_FALSE for not selected.
18354 * If a new item is selected the previosly selected will be unselected.
18355 * Previoulsy selected item can be get with function
18356 * elm_diskselector_selected_item_get().
18358 * If the item @p it is unselected, the first item of diskselector will
18361 * Selected items will be visible on center position of diskselector.
18362 * So if it was on another position before selected, or was invisible,
18363 * diskselector will animate items until the selected item reaches center
18366 * @see elm_diskselector_item_selected_get()
18367 * @see elm_diskselector_selected_item_get()
18369 * @ingroup Diskselector
18371 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_selected_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, Eina_Bool selected) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18374 * Get whether the @p item is selected or not.
18376 * @param it The diskselector item.
18377 * @return @c EINA_TRUE means item is selected. @c EINA_FALSE indicates
18378 * it's not. If @p obj is @c NULL, @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
18380 * @see elm_diskselector_selected_item_set() for details.
18381 * @see elm_diskselector_item_selected_get()
18383 * @ingroup Diskselector
18385 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_diskselector_item_selected_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18388 * Get the first item of the diskselector.
18390 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18391 * @return The first item, or @c NULL if none.
18393 * The list of items follows append order. So it will return the first
18394 * item appended to the widget that wasn't deleted.
18396 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18397 * @see elm_diskselector_items_get()
18399 * @ingroup Diskselector
18401 EAPI Elm_Diskselector_Item *elm_diskselector_first_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18404 * Get the last item of the diskselector.
18406 * @param obj The diskselector object.
18407 * @return The last item, or @c NULL if none.
18409 * The list of items follows append order. So it will return last first
18410 * item appended to the widget that wasn't deleted.
18412 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18413 * @see elm_diskselector_items_get()
18415 * @ingroup Diskselector
18417 EAPI Elm_Diskselector_Item *elm_diskselector_last_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18420 * Get the item before @p item in diskselector.
18422 * @param it The diskselector item.
18423 * @return The item before @p item, or @c NULL if none or on failure.
18425 * The list of items follows append order. So it will return item appended
18426 * just before @item and that wasn't deleted.
18428 * If it is the first item, @c NULL will be returned.
18429 * First item can be get by elm_diskselector_first_item_get().
18431 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18432 * @see elm_diskselector_items_get()
18434 * @ingroup Diskselector
18436 EAPI Elm_Diskselector_Item *elm_diskselector_item_prev_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18439 * Get the item after @p item in diskselector.
18441 * @param it The diskselector item.
18442 * @return The item after @p item, or @c NULL if none or on failure.
18444 * The list of items follows append order. So it will return item appended
18445 * just after @item and that wasn't deleted.
18447 * If it is the last item, @c NULL will be returned.
18448 * Last item can be get by elm_diskselector_last_item_get().
18450 * @see elm_diskselector_item_append()
18451 * @see elm_diskselector_items_get()
18453 * @ingroup Diskselector
18455 EAPI Elm_Diskselector_Item *elm_diskselector_item_next_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18458 * Set the text to be shown in the diskselector item.
18460 * @param item Target item
18461 * @param text The text to set in the content
18463 * Setup the text as tooltip to object. The item can have only one tooltip,
18464 * so any previous tooltip data is removed.
18466 * @see elm_object_tooltip_text_set() for more details.
18468 * @ingroup Diskselector
18470 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_text_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, const char *text) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18473 * Set the content to be shown in the tooltip item.
18475 * Setup the tooltip to item. The item can have only one tooltip,
18476 * so any previous tooltip data is removed. @p func(with @p data) will
18477 * be called every time that need show the tooltip and it should
18478 * return a valid Evas_Object. This object is then managed fully by
18479 * tooltip system and is deleted when the tooltip is gone.
18481 * @param item the diskselector item being attached a tooltip.
18482 * @param func the function used to create the tooltip contents.
18483 * @param data what to provide to @a func as callback data/context.
18484 * @param del_cb called when data is not needed anymore, either when
18485 * another callback replaces @func, the tooltip is unset with
18486 * elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_unset() or the owner @a item
18487 * dies. This callback receives as the first parameter the
18488 * given @a data, and @c event_info is the item.
18490 * @see elm_object_tooltip_content_cb_set() for more details.
18492 * @ingroup Diskselector
18494 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_content_cb_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, Elm_Tooltip_Item_Content_Cb func, const void *data, Evas_Smart_Cb del_cb) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18497 * Unset tooltip from item.
18499 * @param item diskselector item to remove previously set tooltip.
18501 * Remove tooltip from item. The callback provided as del_cb to
18502 * elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() will be called to notify
18503 * it is not used anymore.
18505 * @see elm_object_tooltip_unset() for more details.
18506 * @see elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_content_cb_set()
18508 * @ingroup Diskselector
18510 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_unset(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18514 * Sets a different style for this item tooltip.
18516 * @note before you set a style you should define a tooltip with
18517 * elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_content_cb_set() or
18518 * elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_text_set()
18520 * @param item diskselector item with tooltip already set.
18521 * @param style the theme style to use (default, transparent, ...)
18523 * @see elm_object_tooltip_style_set() for more details.
18525 * @ingroup Diskselector
18527 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_style_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18530 * Get the style for this item tooltip.
18532 * @param item diskselector item with tooltip already set.
18533 * @return style the theme style in use, defaults to "default". If the
18534 * object does not have a tooltip set, then NULL is returned.
18536 * @see elm_object_tooltip_style_get() for more details.
18537 * @see elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_style_set()
18539 * @ingroup Diskselector
18541 EAPI const char *elm_diskselector_item_tooltip_style_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18544 * Set the cursor to be shown when mouse is over the diskselector item
18546 * @param item Target item
18547 * @param cursor the cursor name to be used.
18549 * @see elm_object_cursor_set() for more details.
18551 * @ingroup Diskselector
18553 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_cursor_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, const char *cursor) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18556 * Get the cursor to be shown when mouse is over the diskselector item
18558 * @param item diskselector item with cursor already set.
18559 * @return the cursor name.
18561 * @see elm_object_cursor_get() for more details.
18562 * @see elm_diskselector_cursor_set()
18564 * @ingroup Diskselector
18566 EAPI const char *elm_diskselector_item_cursor_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18570 * Unset the cursor to be shown when mouse is over the diskselector item
18572 * @param item Target item
18574 * @see elm_object_cursor_unset() for more details.
18575 * @see elm_diskselector_cursor_set()
18577 * @ingroup Diskselector
18579 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_cursor_unset(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18582 * Sets a different style for this item cursor.
18584 * @note before you set a style you should define a cursor with
18585 * elm_diskselector_item_cursor_set()
18587 * @param item diskselector item with cursor already set.
18588 * @param style the theme style to use (default, transparent, ...)
18590 * @see elm_object_cursor_style_set() for more details.
18592 * @ingroup Diskselector
18594 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_cursor_style_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, const char *style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18598 * Get the style for this item cursor.
18600 * @param item diskselector item with cursor already set.
18601 * @return style the theme style in use, defaults to "default". If the
18602 * object does not have a cursor set, then @c NULL is returned.
18604 * @see elm_object_cursor_style_get() for more details.
18605 * @see elm_diskselector_item_cursor_style_set()
18607 * @ingroup Diskselector
18609 EAPI const char *elm_diskselector_item_cursor_style_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18613 * Set if the cursor set should be searched on the theme or should use
18614 * the provided by the engine, only.
18616 * @note before you set if should look on theme you should define a cursor
18617 * with elm_diskselector_item_cursor_set().
18618 * By default it will only look for cursors provided by the engine.
18620 * @param item widget item with cursor already set.
18621 * @param engine_only boolean to define if cursors set with
18622 * elm_diskselector_item_cursor_set() should be searched only
18623 * between cursors provided by the engine or searched on widget's
18626 * @see elm_object_cursor_engine_only_set() for more details.
18628 * @ingroup Diskselector
18630 EAPI void elm_diskselector_item_cursor_engine_only_set(Elm_Diskselector_Item *item, Eina_Bool engine_only) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18633 * Get the cursor engine only usage for this item cursor.
18635 * @param item widget item with cursor already set.
18636 * @return engine_only boolean to define it cursors should be looked only
18637 * between the provided by the engine or searched on widget's theme as well.
18638 * If the item does not have a cursor set, then @c EINA_FALSE is returned.
18640 * @see elm_object_cursor_engine_only_get() for more details.
18641 * @see elm_diskselector_item_cursor_engine_only_set()
18643 * @ingroup Diskselector
18645 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_diskselector_item_cursor_engine_only_get(const Elm_Diskselector_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18652 * @defgroup Colorselector Colorselector
18656 * @image html img/widget/colorselector/preview-00.png
18658 * @brief Widget for user to select a color.
18660 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
18661 * "changed" - When the color value changes(event_info is NULL).
18663 * See @ref tutorial_colorselector.
18666 * @brief Add a new colorselector to the parent
18668 * @param parent The parent object
18669 * @return The new object or NULL if it cannot be created
18671 * @ingroup Colorselector
18673 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_colorselector_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18675 * Set a color for the colorselector
18677 * @param obj Colorselector object
18678 * @param r r-value of color
18679 * @param g g-value of color
18680 * @param b b-value of color
18681 * @param a a-value of color
18683 * @ingroup Colorselector
18685 EAPI void elm_colorselector_color_set(Evas_Object *obj, int r, int g , int b, int a) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18687 * Get a color from the colorselector
18689 * @param obj Colorselector object
18690 * @param r integer pointer for r-value of color
18691 * @param g integer pointer for g-value of color
18692 * @param b integer pointer for b-value of color
18693 * @param a integer pointer for a-value of color
18695 * @ingroup Colorselector
18697 EAPI void elm_colorselector_color_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int *r, int *g , int *b, int *a) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18703 * @defgroup Ctxpopup
18705 * @image html img/widget/ctxpopup/preview-00.png
18706 * @image latex img/widget/ctxpopup/preview-00.eps
18708 * @brief Context popup widet.
18710 * A ctxpopup is a widget that, when shown, pops up a list of items.
18711 * It automatically chooses an area inside its parent object's view
18712 * (set via elm_ctxpopup_add() and elm_ctxpopup_hover_parent_set()) to
18713 * optimally fit into it. In the default theme, it will also point an
18714 * arrow to it's top left position at the time one shows it. Ctxpopup
18715 * items have a label and/or an icon. It is intended for a small
18716 * number of items (hence the use of list, not genlist).
18718 * @note Ctxpopup is a especialization of @ref Hover.
18720 * Signals that you can add callbacks for are:
18721 * "dismissed" - the ctxpopup was dismissed
18723 * @ref tutorial_ctxpopup shows the usage of a good deal of the API.
18726 typedef struct _Elm_Ctxpopup_Item Elm_Ctxpopup_Item;
18728 typedef enum _Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction
18730 ELM_CTXPOPUP_DIRECTION_DOWN, /**< ctxpopup show appear below clicked
18732 ELM_CTXPOPUP_DIRECTION_RIGHT, /**< ctxpopup show appear to the right of
18733 the clicked area */
18734 ELM_CTXPOPUP_DIRECTION_LEFT, /**< ctxpopup show appear to the left of
18735 the clicked area */
18736 ELM_CTXPOPUP_DIRECTION_UP, /**< ctxpopup show appear above the clicked
18738 } Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction;
18741 * @brief Add a new Ctxpopup object to the parent.
18743 * @param parent Parent object
18744 * @return New object or @c NULL, if it cannot be created
18746 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_ctxpopup_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18748 * @brief Set the Ctxpopup's parent
18750 * @param obj The ctxpopup object
18751 * @param area The parent to use
18753 * Set the parent object.
18755 * @note elm_ctxpopup_add() will automatically call this function
18756 * with its @c parent argument.
18758 * @see elm_ctxpopup_add()
18759 * @see elm_hover_parent_set()
18761 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_hover_parent_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
18763 * @brief Get the Ctxpopup's parent
18765 * @param obj The ctxpopup object
18767 * @see elm_ctxpopup_hover_parent_set() for more information
18769 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_ctxpopup_hover_parent_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18771 * @brief Clear all items in the given ctxpopup object.
18773 * @param obj Ctxpopup object
18775 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_clear(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18777 * @brief Change the ctxpopup's orientation to horizontal or vertical.
18779 * @param obj Ctxpopup object
18780 * @param horizontal @c EINA_TRUE for horizontal mode, @c EINA_FALSE for vertical
18782 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_horizontal_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool horizontal) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18784 * @brief Get the value of current ctxpopup object's orientation.
18786 * @param obj Ctxpopup object
18787 * @return @c EINA_TRUE for horizontal mode, @c EINA_FALSE for vertical mode (or errors)
18789 * @see elm_ctxpopup_horizontal_set()
18791 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_ctxpopup_horizontal_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18793 * @brief Add a new item to a ctxpopup object.
18795 * @param obj Ctxpopup object
18796 * @param icon Icon to be set on new item
18797 * @param label The Label of the new item
18798 * @param func Convenience function called when item selected
18799 * @param data Data passed to @p func
18800 * @return A handle to the item added or @c NULL, on errors
18802 * @warning Ctxpopup can't hold both an item list and a content at the same
18803 * time. When an item is added, any previous content will be removed.
18805 * @see elm_ctxpopup_content_set()
18807 Elm_Ctxpopup_Item *elm_ctxpopup_item_append(Evas_Object *obj, const char *label, Evas_Object *icon, Evas_Smart_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18809 * @brief Delete the given item in a ctxpopup object.
18811 * @param item Ctxpopup item to be deleted
18813 * @see elm_ctxpopup_item_append()
18815 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_item_del(Elm_Ctxpopup_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18817 * @brief Set the ctxpopup item's state as disabled or enabled.
18819 * @param item Ctxpopup item to be enabled/disabled
18820 * @param disabled @c EINA_TRUE to disable it, @c EINA_FALSE to enable it
18822 * When disabled the item is greyed out to indicate it's state.
18824 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_item_disabled_set(Elm_Ctxpopup_Item *item, Eina_Bool disabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18826 * @brief Get the ctxpopup item's disabled/enabled state.
18828 * @param item Ctxpopup item to be enabled/disabled
18829 * @return disabled @c EINA_TRUE, if disabled, @c EINA_FALSE otherwise
18831 * @see elm_ctxpopup_item_disabled_set()
18833 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_ctxpopup_item_disabled_get(const Elm_Ctxpopup_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18835 * @brief Get the icon object for the given ctxpopup item.
18837 * @param item Ctxpopup item
18838 * @return icon object or @c NULL, if the item does not have icon or an error
18841 * @see elm_ctxpopup_item_append()
18842 * @see elm_ctxpopup_item_icon_set()
18844 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_ctxpopup_item_icon_get(const Elm_Ctxpopup_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18846 * @brief Sets the side icon associated with the ctxpopup item
18848 * @param item Ctxpopup item
18849 * @param icon Icon object to be set
18851 * Once the icon object is set, a previously set one will be deleted.
18852 * @warning Setting the same icon for two items will cause the icon to
18853 * dissapear from the first item.
18855 * @see elm_ctxpopup_item_append()
18857 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_item_icon_set(Elm_Ctxpopup_Item *item, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18859 * @brief Get the label for the given ctxpopup item.
18861 * @param item Ctxpopup item
18862 * @return label string or @c NULL, if the item does not have label or an
18865 * @see elm_ctxpopup_item_append()
18866 * @see elm_ctxpopup_item_label_set()
18868 EAPI const char *elm_ctxpopup_item_label_get(const Elm_Ctxpopup_Item *item) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18870 * @brief (Re)set the label on the given ctxpopup item.
18872 * @param item Ctxpopup item
18873 * @param label String to set as label
18875 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_item_label_set(Elm_Ctxpopup_Item *item, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18877 * @brief Set an elm widget as the content of the ctxpopup.
18879 * @param obj Ctxpopup object
18880 * @param content Content to be swallowed
18882 * If the content object is already set, a previous one will bedeleted. If
18883 * you want to keep that old content object, use the
18884 * elm_ctxpopup_content_unset() function.
18886 * @warning Ctxpopup can't hold both a item list and a content at the same
18887 * time. When a content is set, any previous items will be removed.
18889 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_content_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
18891 * @brief Unset the ctxpopup content
18893 * @param obj Ctxpopup object
18894 * @return The content that was being used
18896 * Unparent and return the content object which was set for this widget.
18898 * @see elm_ctxpopup_content_set()
18900 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_ctxpopup_content_unset(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18902 * @brief Set the direction priority of a ctxpopup.
18904 * @param obj Ctxpopup object
18905 * @param first 1st priority of direction
18906 * @param second 2nd priority of direction
18907 * @param third 3th priority of direction
18908 * @param fourth 4th priority of direction
18910 * This functions gives a chance to user to set the priority of ctxpopup
18911 * showing direction. This doesn't guarantee the ctxpopup will appear in the
18912 * requested direction.
18914 * @see Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction
18916 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_direction_priority_set(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction first, Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction second, Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction third, Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction fourth) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18918 * @brief Get the direction priority of a ctxpopup.
18920 * @param obj Ctxpopup object
18921 * @param first 1st priority of direction to be returned
18922 * @param second 2nd priority of direction to be returned
18923 * @param third 3th priority of direction to be returned
18924 * @param fourth 4th priority of direction to be returned
18926 * @see elm_ctxpopup_direction_priority_set() for more information.
18928 EAPI void elm_ctxpopup_direction_priority_get(Evas_Object *obj, Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction *first, Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction *second, Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction *third, Elm_Ctxpopup_Direction *fourth) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
18936 * @defgroup Transit Transit
18937 * @ingroup Elementary
18939 * Transit is designed to apply various animated transition effects to @c
18940 * Evas_Object, such like translation, rotation, etc. For using these
18941 * effects, create an @ref Elm_Transit and add the desired transition effects.
18943 * Once the effects are added into transit, they will be automatically
18944 * managed (their callback will be called until the duration is ended, and
18945 * they will be deleted on completion).
18949 * Elm_Transit *trans = elm_transit_add();
18950 * elm_transit_object_add(trans, obj);
18951 * elm_transit_effect_translation_add(trans, 0, 0, 280, 280
18952 * elm_transit_duration_set(transit, 1);
18953 * elm_transit_auto_reverse_set(transit, EINA_TRUE);
18954 * elm_transit_tween_mode_set(transit, ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_DECELERATE);
18955 * elm_transit_repeat_times_set(transit, 3);
18958 * Some transition effects are used to change the properties of objects. They
18960 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_translation_add
18961 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_color_add
18962 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_rotation_add
18963 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_wipe_add
18964 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_zoom_add
18965 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_resizing_add
18967 * Other transition effects are used to make one object disappear and another
18968 * object appear on its old place. These effects are:
18970 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_flip_add
18971 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_resizable_flip_add
18972 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_fade_add
18973 * @li @ref elm_transit_effect_blend_add
18975 * It's also possible to make a transition chain with @ref
18976 * elm_transit_chain_transit_add.
18978 * @warning We strongly recommend to use elm_transit just when edje can not do
18979 * the trick. Edje has more advantage than Elm_Transit, it has more flexibility and
18980 * animations can be manipulated inside the theme.
18982 * List of examples:
18983 * @li @ref transit_example_01_explained
18984 * @li @ref transit_example_02_explained
18985 * @li @ref transit_example_03_c
18986 * @li @ref transit_example_04_c
18992 * @enum Elm_Transit_Tween_Mode
18994 * The type of acceleration used in the transition.
18998 ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_LINEAR, /**< Constant speed */
18999 ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_SINUSOIDAL, /**< Starts slow, increase speed
19000 over time, then decrease again
19002 ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_DECELERATE, /**< Starts fast and decrease
19004 ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_ACCELERATE /**< Starts slow and increase speed
19006 } Elm_Transit_Tween_Mode;
19009 * @enum Elm_Transit_Effect_Flip_Axis
19011 * The axis where flip effect should be applied.
19015 ELM_TRANSIT_EFFECT_FLIP_AXIS_X, /**< Flip on X axis */
19016 ELM_TRANSIT_EFFECT_FLIP_AXIS_Y /**< Flip on Y axis */
19017 } Elm_Transit_Effect_Flip_Axis;
19019 * @enum Elm_Transit_Effect_Wipe_Dir
19021 * The direction where the wipe effect should occur.
19025 ELM_TRANSIT_EFFECT_WIPE_DIR_LEFT, /**< Wipe to the left */
19026 ELM_TRANSIT_EFFECT_WIPE_DIR_RIGHT, /**< Wipe to the right */
19027 ELM_TRANSIT_EFFECT_WIPE_DIR_UP, /**< Wipe up */
19028 ELM_TRANSIT_EFFECT_WIPE_DIR_DOWN /**< Wipe down */
19029 } Elm_Transit_Effect_Wipe_Dir;
19030 /** @enum Elm_Transit_Effect_Wipe_Type
19032 * Whether the wipe effect should show or hide the object.
19036 ELM_TRANSIT_EFFECT_WIPE_TYPE_HIDE, /**< Hide the object during the
19038 ELM_TRANSIT_EFFECT_WIPE_TYPE_SHOW /**< Show the object during the
19040 } Elm_Transit_Effect_Wipe_Type;
19043 * @typedef Elm_Transit
19045 * The Transit created with elm_transit_add(). This type has the information
19046 * about the objects which the transition will be applied, and the
19047 * transition effects that will be used. It also contains info about
19048 * duration, number of repetitions, auto-reverse, etc.
19050 typedef struct _Elm_Transit Elm_Transit;
19051 typedef void Elm_Transit_Effect;
19053 * @typedef Elm_Transit_Effect_Transition_Cb
19055 * Transition callback called for this effect on each transition iteration.
19057 typedef void (*Elm_Transit_Effect_Transition_Cb) (Elm_Transit_Effect *effect, Elm_Transit *transit, double progress);
19059 * Elm_Transit_Effect_End_Cb
19061 * Transition callback called for this effect when the transition is over.
19063 typedef void (*Elm_Transit_Effect_End_Cb) (Elm_Transit_Effect *effect, Elm_Transit *transit);
19066 * Elm_Transit_Del_Cb
19068 * A callback called when the transit is deleted.
19070 typedef void (*Elm_Transit_Del_Cb) (void *data, Elm_Transit *transit);
19075 * @note Is not necessary to delete the transit object, it will be deleted at
19076 * the end of its operation.
19077 * @note The transit will start playing when the program enter in the main loop, is not
19078 * necessary to give a start to the transit.
19080 * @return The transit object.
19084 EAPI Elm_Transit *elm_transit_add(void);
19087 * Stops the animation and delete the @p transit object.
19089 * Call this function if you wants to stop the animation before the duration
19090 * time. Make sure the @p transit object is still alive with
19091 * elm_transit_del_cb_set() function.
19092 * All added effects will be deleted, calling its repective data_free_cb
19093 * functions. The function setted by elm_transit_del_cb_set() will be called.
19095 * @see elm_transit_del_cb_set()
19097 * @param transit The transit object to be deleted.
19100 * @warning Just call this function if you are sure the transit is alive.
19102 EAPI void elm_transit_del(Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19105 * Add a new effect to the transit.
19107 * @note The cb function and the data are the key to the effect. If you try to
19108 * add an already added effect, nothing is done.
19109 * @note After the first addition of an effect in @p transit, if its
19110 * effect list become empty again, the @p transit will be killed by
19111 * elm_transit_del(transit) function.
19115 * Elm_Transit *transit = elm_transit_add();
19116 * elm_transit_effect_add(transit,
19117 * elm_transit_effect_blend_op,
19118 * elm_transit_effect_blend_context_new(),
19119 * elm_transit_effect_blend_context_free);
19122 * @param transit The transit object.
19123 * @param transition_cb The operation function. It is called when the
19124 * animation begins, it is the function that actually performs the animation.
19125 * It is called with the @p data, @p transit and the time progression of the
19126 * animation (a double value between 0.0 and 1.0).
19127 * @param effect The context data of the effect.
19128 * @param end_cb The function to free the context data, it will be called
19129 * at the end of the effect, it must finalize the animation and free the
19133 * @warning The transit free the context data at the and of the transition with
19134 * the data_free_cb function, do not use the context data in another transit.
19136 EAPI void elm_transit_effect_add(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit_Effect_Transition_Cb transition_cb, Elm_Transit_Effect *effect, Elm_Transit_Effect_End_Cb end_cb) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
19139 * Delete an added effect.
19141 * This function will remove the effect from the @p transit, calling the
19142 * data_free_cb to free the @p data.
19144 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19146 * @note If the effect is not found, nothing is done.
19147 * @note If the effect list become empty, this function will call
19148 * elm_transit_del(transit), that is, it will kill the @p transit.
19150 * @param transit The transit object.
19151 * @param transition_cb The operation function.
19152 * @param effect The context data of the effect.
19156 EAPI void elm_transit_effect_del(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit_Effect_Transition_Cb transition_cb, Elm_Transit_Effect *effect) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
19159 * Add new object to apply the effects.
19161 * @note After the first addition of an object in @p transit, if its
19162 * object list become empty again, the @p transit will be killed by
19163 * elm_transit_del(transit) function.
19164 * @note If the @p obj belongs to another transit, the @p obj will be
19165 * removed from it and it will only belong to the @p transit. If the old
19166 * transit stays without objects, it will die.
19167 * @note When you add an object into the @p transit, its state from
19168 * evas_object_pass_events_get(obj) is saved, and it is applied when the
19169 * transit ends, if you change this state whith evas_object_pass_events_set()
19170 * after add the object, this state will change again when @p transit stops to
19173 * @param transit The transit object.
19174 * @param obj Object to be animated.
19177 * @warning It is not allowed to add a new object after transit begins to go.
19179 EAPI void elm_transit_object_add(Elm_Transit *transit, Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
19182 * Removes an added object from the transit.
19184 * @note If the @p obj is not in the @p transit, nothing is done.
19185 * @note If the list become empty, this function will call
19186 * elm_transit_del(transit), that is, it will kill the @p transit.
19188 * @param transit The transit object.
19189 * @param obj Object to be removed from @p transit.
19192 * @warning It is not allowed to remove objects after transit begins to go.
19194 EAPI void elm_transit_object_remove(Elm_Transit *transit, Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
19197 * Get the objects of the transit.
19199 * @param transit The transit object.
19200 * @return a Eina_List with the objects from the transit.
19204 EAPI const Eina_List *elm_transit_objects_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19207 * Enable/disable keeping up the objects states.
19208 * If it is not kept, the objects states will be reset when transition ends.
19210 * @note @p transit can not be NULL.
19211 * @note One state includes geometry, color, map data.
19213 * @param transit The transit object.
19214 * @param state_keep Keeping or Non Keeping.
19218 EAPI void elm_transit_objects_final_state_keep_set(Elm_Transit *transit, Eina_Bool state_keep) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19221 * Get a value whether the objects states will be reset or not.
19223 * @note @p transit can not be NULL
19225 * @see elm_transit_objects_final_state_keep_set()
19227 * @param transit The transit object.
19228 * @return EINA_TRUE means the states of the objects will be reset.
19229 * If @p transit is NULL, EINA_FALSE is returned
19233 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_transit_objects_final_state_keep_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19236 * Set the event enabled when transit is operating.
19238 * If @p enabled is EINA_TRUE, the objects of the transit will receives
19239 * events from mouse and keyboard during the animation.
19240 * @note When you add an object with elm_transit_object_add(), its state from
19241 * evas_object_pass_events_get(obj) is saved, and it is applied when the
19242 * transit ends, if you change this state with evas_object_pass_events_set()
19243 * after adding the object, this state will change again when @p transit stops
19246 * @param transit The transit object.
19247 * @param enabled Events are received when enabled is @c EINA_TRUE, and
19248 * ignored otherwise.
19252 EAPI void elm_transit_event_enabled_set(Elm_Transit *transit, Eina_Bool enabled) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19255 * Get the value of event enabled status.
19257 * @see elm_transit_event_enabled_set()
19259 * @param transit The Transit object
19260 * @return EINA_TRUE, when event is enabled. If @p transit is NULL
19261 * EINA_FALSE is returned
19265 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_transit_event_enabled_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19268 * Set the user-callback function when the transit is deleted.
19270 * @note Using this function twice will overwrite the first function setted.
19271 * @note the @p transit object will be deleted after call @p cb function.
19273 * @param transit The transit object.
19274 * @param cb Callback function pointer. This function will be called before
19275 * the deletion of the transit.
19276 * @param data Callback funtion user data. It is the @p op parameter.
19280 EAPI void elm_transit_del_cb_set(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit_Del_Cb cb, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19283 * Set reverse effect automatically.
19285 * If auto reverse is setted, after running the effects with the progress
19286 * parameter from 0 to 1, it will call the effecs again with the progress
19287 * from 1 to 0. The transit will last for a time iqual to (2 * duration * repeat),
19288 * where the duration was setted with the function elm_transit_add and
19289 * the repeat with the function elm_transit_repeat_times_set().
19291 * @param transit The transit object.
19292 * @param reverse EINA_TRUE means the auto_reverse is on.
19296 EAPI void elm_transit_auto_reverse_set(Elm_Transit *transit, Eina_Bool reverse) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19299 * Get if the auto reverse is on.
19301 * @see elm_transit_auto_reverse_set()
19303 * @param transit The transit object.
19304 * @return EINA_TRUE means auto reverse is on. If @p transit is NULL
19305 * EINA_FALSE is returned
19309 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_transit_auto_reverse_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19312 * Set the transit repeat count. Effect will be repeated by repeat count.
19314 * This function sets the number of repetition the transit will run after
19315 * the first one, that is, if @p repeat is 1, the transit will run 2 times.
19316 * If the @p repeat is a negative number, it will repeat infinite times.
19318 * @note If this function is called during the transit execution, the transit
19319 * will run @p repeat times, ignoring the times it already performed.
19321 * @param transit The transit object
19322 * @param repeat Repeat count
19326 EAPI void elm_transit_repeat_times_set(Elm_Transit *transit, int repeat) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19329 * Get the transit repeat count.
19331 * @see elm_transit_repeat_times_set()
19333 * @param transit The Transit object.
19334 * @return The repeat count. If @p transit is NULL
19339 EAPI int elm_transit_repeat_times_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19342 * Set the transit animation acceleration type.
19344 * This function sets the tween mode of the transit that can be:
19345 * ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_LINEAR - The default mode.
19346 * ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_SINUSOIDAL - Starts in accelerate mode and ends decelerating.
19347 * ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_DECELERATE - The animation will be slowed over time.
19348 * ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_ACCELERATE - The animation will accelerate over time.
19350 * @param transit The transit object.
19351 * @param tween_mode The tween type.
19355 EAPI void elm_transit_tween_mode_set(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit_Tween_Mode tween_mode) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19358 * Get the transit animation acceleration type.
19360 * @note @p transit can not be NULL
19362 * @param transit The transit object.
19363 * @return The tween type. If @p transit is NULL
19364 * ELM_TRANSIT_TWEEN_MODE_LINEAR is returned.
19368 EAPI Elm_Transit_Tween_Mode elm_transit_tween_mode_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19371 * Set the transit animation time
19373 * @note @p transit can not be NULL
19375 * @param transit The transit object.
19376 * @param duration The animation time.
19380 EAPI void elm_transit_duration_set(Elm_Transit *transit, double duration) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19383 * Get the transit animation time
19385 * @note @p transit can not be NULL
19387 * @param transit The transit object.
19389 * @return The transit animation time.
19393 EAPI double elm_transit_duration_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19396 * Starts the transition.
19397 * Once this API is called, the transit begins to measure the time.
19399 * @note @p transit can not be NULL
19401 * @param transit The transit object.
19405 EAPI void elm_transit_go(Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19408 * Pause/Resume the transition.
19410 * If you call elm_transit_go again, the transit will be started from the
19411 * beginning, and will be unpaused.
19413 * @note @p transit can not be NULL
19415 * @param transit The transit object.
19416 * @param paused Whether the transition should be paused or not.
19420 EAPI void elm_transit_paused_set(Elm_Transit *transit, Eina_Bool paused) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19423 * Get the value of paused status.
19425 * @see elm_transit_paused_set()
19427 * @note @p transit can not be NULL
19429 * @param transit The transit object.
19430 * @return EINA_TRUE means transition is paused. If @p transit is NULL
19431 * EINA_FALSE is returned
19435 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_transit_paused_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19438 * Get the time progression of the animation (a double value between 0.0 and 1.0).
19440 * The value returned is a fraction (current time / total time). It
19441 * represents the progression position relative to the total.
19443 * @note @p transit can not be NULL
19445 * @param transit The transit object.
19447 * @return The time progression value. If @p transit is NULL
19452 EAPI double elm_transit_progress_value_get(const Elm_Transit *transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19455 * Makes the chain relationship between two transits.
19457 * @note @p transit can not be NULL. Transit would have multiple chain transits.
19458 * @note @p chain_transit can not be NULL. Chain transits could be chained to the only one transit.
19460 * @param transit The transit object.
19461 * @param chain_transit The chain transit object. This transit will be operated
19462 * after transit is done.
19464 * This function adds @p chain_transit transition to a chain after the @p
19465 * transit, and will be started as soon as @p transit ends. See @ref
19466 * transit_example_02_explained for a full example.
19470 EAPI void elm_transit_chain_transit_add(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit *chain_transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
19473 * Cut off the chain relationship between two transits.
19475 * @note @p transit can not be NULL. Transit would have the chain relationship with @p chain transit.
19476 * @note @p chain_transit can not be NULL. Chain transits should be chained to the @p transit.
19478 * @param transit The transit object.
19479 * @param chain_transit The chain transit object.
19481 * This function remove the @p chain_transit transition from the @p transit.
19485 EAPI void elm_transit_chain_transit_del(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit *chain_transit) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1,2);
19488 * Get the current chain transit list.
19490 * @note @p transit can not be NULL.
19492 * @param transit The transit object.
19493 * @return chain transit list.
19497 EAPI Eina_List *elm_transit_chain_transits_get(const Elm_Transit *transit);
19500 * Add the Resizing Effect to Elm_Transit.
19502 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates resizing effect context
19503 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19505 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19507 * @param transit Transit object.
19508 * @param from_w Object width size when effect begins.
19509 * @param from_h Object height size when effect begins.
19510 * @param to_w Object width size when effect ends.
19511 * @param to_h Object height size when effect ends.
19512 * @return Resizing effect context data.
19516 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_resizing_add(Elm_Transit* transit, Evas_Coord from_w, Evas_Coord from_h, Evas_Coord to_w, Evas_Coord to_h);
19519 * Add the Translation Effect to Elm_Transit.
19521 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates translation effect context
19522 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19524 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19526 * @param transit Transit object.
19527 * @param from_dx X Position variation when effect begins.
19528 * @param from_dy Y Position variation when effect begins.
19529 * @param to_dx X Position variation when effect ends.
19530 * @param to_dy Y Position variation when effect ends.
19531 * @return Translation effect context data.
19534 * @warning It is highly recommended just create a transit with this effect when
19535 * the window that the objects of the transit belongs has already been created.
19536 * This is because this effect needs the geometry information about the objects,
19537 * and if the window was not created yet, it can get a wrong information.
19539 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_translation_add(Elm_Transit* transit, Evas_Coord from_dx, Evas_Coord from_dy, Evas_Coord to_dx, Evas_Coord to_dy);
19542 * Add the Zoom Effect to Elm_Transit.
19544 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates zoom effect context
19545 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19547 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19549 * @param transit Transit object.
19550 * @param from_rate Scale rate when effect begins (1 is current rate).
19551 * @param to_rate Scale rate when effect ends.
19552 * @return Zoom effect context data.
19555 * @warning It is highly recommended just create a transit with this effect when
19556 * the window that the objects of the transit belongs has already been created.
19557 * This is because this effect needs the geometry information about the objects,
19558 * and if the window was not created yet, it can get a wrong information.
19560 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_zoom_add(Elm_Transit *transit, float from_rate, float to_rate);
19563 * Add the Flip Effect to Elm_Transit.
19565 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates flip effect context
19566 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19567 * @note This effect is applied to each pair of objects in the order they are listed
19568 * in the transit list of objects. The first object in the pair will be the
19569 * "front" object and the second will be the "back" object.
19571 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19573 * @param transit Transit object.
19574 * @param axis Flipping Axis(X or Y).
19575 * @param cw Flipping Direction. EINA_TRUE is clock-wise.
19576 * @return Flip effect context data.
19579 * @warning It is highly recommended just create a transit with this effect when
19580 * the window that the objects of the transit belongs has already been created.
19581 * This is because this effect needs the geometry information about the objects,
19582 * and if the window was not created yet, it can get a wrong information.
19584 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_flip_add(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit_Effect_Flip_Axis axis, Eina_Bool cw);
19587 * Add the Resizable Flip Effect to Elm_Transit.
19589 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates resizable flip effect context
19590 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19591 * @note This effect is applied to each pair of objects in the order they are listed
19592 * in the transit list of objects. The first object in the pair will be the
19593 * "front" object and the second will be the "back" object.
19595 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19597 * @param transit Transit object.
19598 * @param axis Flipping Axis(X or Y).
19599 * @param cw Flipping Direction. EINA_TRUE is clock-wise.
19600 * @return Resizable flip effect context data.
19603 * @warning It is highly recommended just create a transit with this effect when
19604 * the window that the objects of the transit belongs has already been created.
19605 * This is because this effect needs the geometry information about the objects,
19606 * and if the window was not created yet, it can get a wrong information.
19608 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_resizable_flip_add(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit_Effect_Flip_Axis axis, Eina_Bool cw);
19611 * Add the Wipe Effect to Elm_Transit.
19613 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates wipe effect context
19614 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19616 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19618 * @param transit Transit object.
19619 * @param type Wipe type. Hide or show.
19620 * @param dir Wipe Direction.
19621 * @return Wipe effect context data.
19624 * @warning It is highly recommended just create a transit with this effect when
19625 * the window that the objects of the transit belongs has already been created.
19626 * This is because this effect needs the geometry information about the objects,
19627 * and if the window was not created yet, it can get a wrong information.
19629 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_wipe_add(Elm_Transit *transit, Elm_Transit_Effect_Wipe_Type type, Elm_Transit_Effect_Wipe_Dir dir);
19632 * Add the Color Effect to Elm_Transit.
19634 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates color effect context
19635 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19637 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19639 * @param transit Transit object.
19640 * @param from_r RGB R when effect begins.
19641 * @param from_g RGB G when effect begins.
19642 * @param from_b RGB B when effect begins.
19643 * @param from_a RGB A when effect begins.
19644 * @param to_r RGB R when effect ends.
19645 * @param to_g RGB G when effect ends.
19646 * @param to_b RGB B when effect ends.
19647 * @param to_a RGB A when effect ends.
19648 * @return Color effect context data.
19652 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_color_add(Elm_Transit *transit, unsigned int from_r, unsigned int from_g, unsigned int from_b, unsigned int from_a, unsigned int to_r, unsigned int to_g, unsigned int to_b, unsigned int to_a);
19655 * Add the Fade Effect to Elm_Transit.
19657 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates fade effect context
19658 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19659 * @note This effect is applied to each pair of objects in the order they are listed
19660 * in the transit list of objects. The first object in the pair will be the
19661 * "before" object and the second will be the "after" object.
19663 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19665 * @param transit Transit object.
19666 * @return Fade effect context data.
19669 * @warning It is highly recommended just create a transit with this effect when
19670 * the window that the objects of the transit belongs has already been created.
19671 * This is because this effect needs the color information about the objects,
19672 * and if the window was not created yet, it can get a wrong information.
19674 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_fade_add(Elm_Transit *transit);
19677 * Add the Blend Effect to Elm_Transit.
19679 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates blend effect context
19680 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19681 * @note This effect is applied to each pair of objects in the order they are listed
19682 * in the transit list of objects. The first object in the pair will be the
19683 * "before" object and the second will be the "after" object.
19685 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19687 * @param transit Transit object.
19688 * @return Blend effect context data.
19691 * @warning It is highly recommended just create a transit with this effect when
19692 * the window that the objects of the transit belongs has already been created.
19693 * This is because this effect needs the color information about the objects,
19694 * and if the window was not created yet, it can get a wrong information.
19696 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_blend_add(Elm_Transit *transit);
19699 * Add the Rotation Effect to Elm_Transit.
19701 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates rotation effect context
19702 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19704 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19706 * @param transit Transit object.
19707 * @param from_degree Degree when effect begins.
19708 * @param to_degree Degree when effect is ends.
19709 * @return Rotation effect context data.
19712 * @warning It is highly recommended just create a transit with this effect when
19713 * the window that the objects of the transit belongs has already been created.
19714 * This is because this effect needs the geometry information about the objects,
19715 * and if the window was not created yet, it can get a wrong information.
19717 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_rotation_add(Elm_Transit *transit, float from_degree, float to_degree);
19720 * Add the ImageAnimation Effect to Elm_Transit.
19722 * @note This API is one of the facades. It creates image animation effect context
19723 * and add it's required APIs to elm_transit_effect_add.
19724 * The @p images parameter is a list images paths. This list and
19725 * its contents will be deleted at the end of the effect by
19726 * elm_transit_effect_image_animation_context_free() function.
19730 * char buf[PATH_MAX];
19731 * Eina_List *images = NULL;
19732 * Elm_Transit *transi = elm_transit_add();
19734 * snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%s/images/icon_11.png", PACKAGE_DATA_DIR);
19735 * images = eina_list_append(images, eina_stringshare_add(buf));
19737 * snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%s/images/logo_small.png", PACKAGE_DATA_DIR);
19738 * images = eina_list_append(images, eina_stringshare_add(buf));
19739 * elm_transit_effect_image_animation_add(transi, images);
19743 * @see elm_transit_effect_add()
19745 * @param transit Transit object.
19746 * @param images Eina_List of images file paths. This list and
19747 * its contents will be deleted at the end of the effect by
19748 * elm_transit_effect_image_animation_context_free() function.
19749 * @return Image Animation effect context data.
19753 EAPI Elm_Transit_Effect *elm_transit_effect_image_animation_add(Elm_Transit *transit, Eina_List *images);
19758 typedef struct _Elm_Store Elm_Store;
19759 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Filesystem Elm_Store_Filesystem;
19760 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item Elm_Store_Item;
19761 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item_Filesystem Elm_Store_Item_Filesystem;
19762 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item_Info Elm_Store_Item_Info;
19763 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item_Info_Filesystem Elm_Store_Item_Info_Filesystem;
19764 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping Elm_Store_Item_Mapping;
19765 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Empty Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Empty;
19766 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Icon Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Icon;
19767 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Photo Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Photo;
19768 typedef struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Custom Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Custom;
19770 typedef Eina_Bool (*Elm_Store_Item_List_Cb) (void *data, Elm_Store_Item_Info *info);
19771 typedef void (*Elm_Store_Item_Fetch_Cb) (void *data, Elm_Store_Item *sti);
19772 typedef void (*Elm_Store_Item_Unfetch_Cb) (void *data, Elm_Store_Item *sti);
19773 typedef void *(*Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Cb) (void *data, Elm_Store_Item *sti, const char *part);
19777 ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_NONE = 0,
19778 ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_LABEL, // const char * -> label
19779 ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_STATE, // Eina_Bool -> state
19780 ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_ICON, // char * -> icon path
19781 ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_PHOTO, // char * -> photo path
19782 ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_CUSTOM, // item->custom(it->data, it, part) -> void * (-> any)
19783 // can add more here as needed by common apps
19784 ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_LAST
19785 } Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Type;
19787 struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Icon
19789 // FIXME: allow edje file icons
19791 Elm_Icon_Lookup_Order lookup_order;
19792 Eina_Bool standard_name : 1;
19793 Eina_Bool no_scale : 1;
19794 Eina_Bool smooth : 1;
19795 Eina_Bool scale_up : 1;
19796 Eina_Bool scale_down : 1;
19799 struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Empty
19804 struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Photo
19809 struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Custom
19811 Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Cb func;
19814 struct _Elm_Store_Item_Mapping
19816 Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Type type;
19821 Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Empty empty;
19822 Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Icon icon;
19823 Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Photo photo;
19824 Elm_Store_Item_Mapping_Custom custom;
19825 // add more types here
19829 struct _Elm_Store_Item_Info
19831 Elm_Genlist_Item_Class *item_class;
19832 const Elm_Store_Item_Mapping *mapping;
19837 struct _Elm_Store_Item_Info_Filesystem
19839 Elm_Store_Item_Info base;
19843 #define ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_END { ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_NONE, NULL, 0, { .empty = { EINA_TRUE } } }
19844 #define ELM_STORE_ITEM_MAPPING_OFFSET(st, it) offsetof(st, it)
19846 EAPI void elm_store_free(Elm_Store *st);
19848 EAPI Elm_Store *elm_store_filesystem_new(void);
19849 EAPI void elm_store_filesystem_directory_set(Elm_Store *st, const char *dir) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19850 EAPI const char *elm_store_filesystem_directory_get(const Elm_Store *st) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19851 EAPI const char *elm_store_item_filesystem_path_get(const Elm_Store_Item *sti) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19853 EAPI void elm_store_target_genlist_set(Elm_Store *st, Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19855 EAPI void elm_store_cache_set(Elm_Store *st, int max) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19856 EAPI int elm_store_cache_get(const Elm_Store *st) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19857 EAPI void elm_store_list_func_set(Elm_Store *st, Elm_Store_Item_List_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
19858 EAPI void elm_store_fetch_func_set(Elm_Store *st, Elm_Store_Item_Fetch_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
19859 EAPI void elm_store_fetch_thread_set(Elm_Store *st, Eina_Bool use_thread) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19860 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_store_fetch_thread_get(const Elm_Store *st) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19862 EAPI void elm_store_unfetch_func_set(Elm_Store *st, Elm_Store_Item_Unfetch_Cb func, const void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 2);
19863 EAPI void elm_store_sorted_set(Elm_Store *st, Eina_Bool sorted) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19864 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_store_sorted_get(const Elm_Store *st) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19865 EAPI void elm_store_item_data_set(Elm_Store_Item *sti, void *data) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19866 EAPI void *elm_store_item_data_get(Elm_Store_Item *sti) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19867 EAPI const Elm_Store *elm_store_item_store_get(const Elm_Store_Item *sti) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19868 EAPI const Elm_Genlist_Item *elm_store_item_genlist_item_get(const Elm_Store_Item *sti) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19870 /* SegmentControl */
19871 typedef struct _Elm_Segment_Item Elm_Segment_Item;
19872 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_segment_control_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19873 EAPI Elm_Segment_Item *elm_segment_control_item_add(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19874 EAPI Elm_Segment_Item *elm_segment_control_item_insert_at(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *icon, const char *label, int index) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19875 EAPI void elm_segment_control_item_del(Elm_Segment_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19876 EAPI void elm_segment_control_item_del_at(Evas_Object *obj, int index) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19877 EAPI int elm_segment_control_item_count_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19878 EAPI Elm_Segment_Item *elm_segment_control_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int index) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19879 EAPI const char *elm_segment_control_item_label_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int index) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19880 EAPI void elm_segment_control_item_label_set(Elm_Segment_Item* it, const char* label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19881 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_segment_control_item_icon_get(const Evas_Object *obj, int index) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19882 EAPI void elm_segment_control_item_icon_set(Elm_Segment_Item *it, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19883 EAPI int elm_segment_control_item_index_get(const Elm_Segment_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19884 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_segment_control_item_object_get(const Elm_Segment_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19885 EAPI Elm_Segment_Item *elm_segment_control_item_selected_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19886 EAPI void elm_segment_control_item_selected_set(Elm_Segment_Item *it, Eina_Bool select) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19887 /* smart callbacks called:
19888 * "changed" -when the user clicks on a segment item which is not previously
19889 * selected and get selected. The event_info parameter is the
19890 * segment item index.
19893 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_grid_add(Evas_Object *parent);
19894 EAPI void elm_grid_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, int w, int h);
19895 EAPI void elm_grid_size_get(Evas_Object *obj, int *w, int *h);
19896 EAPI void elm_grid_pack(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj, int x, int y, int w, int h);
19897 EAPI void elm_grid_unpack(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Object *subobj);
19898 EAPI void elm_grid_clear(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool clear);
19899 EAPI void elm_grid_pack_set(Evas_Object *subobj, int x, int y, int w, int h);
19900 EAPI void elm_grid_pack_get(Evas_Object *subobj, int *x, int *y, int *w, int *h);
19902 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_genscroller_add(Evas_Object *parent);
19903 EAPI void elm_genscroller_world_size_set(Evas_Object *obj, Evas_Coord w, Evas_Coord h);
19905 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_video_add(Evas_Object *parent);
19906 EAPI void elm_video_file_set(Evas_Object *video, const char *filename);
19907 EAPI void elm_video_uri_set(Evas_Object *video, const char *uri);
19908 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_video_emotion_get(Evas_Object *video);
19909 EAPI void elm_video_play(Evas_Object *video);
19910 EAPI void elm_video_pause(Evas_Object *video);
19911 EAPI void elm_video_stop(Evas_Object *video);
19912 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_video_is_playing(Evas_Object *video);
19913 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_video_is_seekable(Evas_Object *video);
19914 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_video_audio_mute_get(Evas_Object *video);
19915 EAPI void elm_video_audio_mute_set(Evas_Object *video, Eina_Bool mute);
19916 EAPI double elm_video_audio_level_get(Evas_Object *video);
19917 EAPI void elm_video_audio_level_set(Evas_Object *video, double volume);
19918 EAPI double elm_video_play_position_get(Evas_Object *video);
19919 EAPI void elm_video_play_position_set(Evas_Object *video, double position);
19920 EAPI double elm_video_play_length_get(Evas_Object *video);
19921 EAPI void elm_video_remember_position_set(Evas_Object *video, Eina_Bool remember);
19922 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_video_remember_position_get(Evas_Object *video);
19923 EAPI const char *elm_video_title_get(Evas_Object *video);
19925 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_player_add(Evas_Object *parent);
19926 EAPI void elm_player_video_set(Evas_Object *player, Evas_Object *video);
19929 typedef struct _Elm_Naviframe_Item Elm_Naviframe_Item;
19933 ELM_NAVIFRAME_PREV_BUTTON,
19934 ELM_NAVIFRAME_NEXT_BUTTON
19935 } Elm_Naviframe_Button_Type;
19937 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_naviframe_add(Evas_Object *parent) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19938 EAPI Elm_Naviframe_Item *elm_naviframe_item_push(Evas_Object *obj, const char *title_label, Evas_Object *prev_btn, Evas_Object *next_btn, Evas_Object *content, const char *item_style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1, 5);
19939 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_naviframe_item_pop(Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19940 EAPI void elm_naviframe_content_preserve_on_pop_set(Evas_Object *obj, Eina_Bool preserve) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19941 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_naviframe_content_preserve_on_pop_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19942 EAPI void elm_naviframe_item_content_set(Elm_Naviframe_Item *item, Evas_Object *content) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19943 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_naviframe_item_content_get(const Elm_Naviframe_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19944 EAPI void elm_naviframe_item_title_label_set(Elm_Naviframe_Item *it, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19945 EAPI const char *elm_naviframe_item_title_label_get(const Elm_Naviframe_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19946 EAPI void elm_naviframe_item_subtitle_label_set(Elm_Naviframe_Item *it, const char *label) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19947 EAPI const char *elm_naviframe_item_subtitle_label_get(const Elm_Naviframe_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19948 EAPI Elm_Naviframe_Item *elm_naviframe_top_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19949 EAPI Elm_Naviframe_Item *elm_naviframe_bottom_item_get(const Evas_Object *obj) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19950 EAPI void elm_naviframe_item_button_set(Elm_Naviframe_Item *it, Evas_Object *btn, Elm_Naviframe_Button_Type btn_type) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19951 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_naviframe_item_button_get(const Elm_Naviframe_Item *it, Elm_Naviframe_Button_Type btn_type) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19952 EAPI void elm_naviframe_item_icon_set(Elm_Naviframe_Item *it, Evas_Object *icon) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19953 EAPI Evas_Object *elm_naviframe_item_icon_get(const Elm_Naviframe_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19954 EAPI void elm_naviframe_item_style_set(Elm_Naviframe_Item *it, const char *item_style) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19955 EAPI const char *elm_naviframe_item_style_get(const Elm_Naviframe_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19956 EAPI void elm_naviframe_item_title_visible_set(Elm_Naviframe_Item *it, Eina_Bool visible) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);
19957 EAPI Eina_Bool elm_naviframe_item_title_visible_get(const Elm_Naviframe_Item *it) EINA_ARG_NONNULL(1);